Home

WIN-PAK SE/PE User`s Guide

1. 24 Galaxy Panell 25 No ADY 26 No ADY C 27 No ADV v cme Heo Table 11 10 Describing Output Properties Output Function The function to be performed by the output device like beep an alarm WIN PAK User s Guide 11 148 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Table 11 10 Describing Output Properties Output Mode The mode in which the output operates such as Latch Reflex and Pulse 2 To edit the output ADV configuration click Edit under ADV and edit ADV and action groups Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 3 Click Next to view the RIO board configuration details Setting the RIO board The Relay Input Output RIO board is the extendable board used for extending the number of zones or outputs that can be plugged in to the Galaxy panel 1 In the Panel Configuration RIO dialog box double click an RIO board in the Name list to rename it Panel Configuration RIOs x 6 Galaxy Panell RIO 105 8 No ADY C 9 No ADY C 10 No ADY C 11 No ADY C 12 No ADY C 13 No ADY C 14 No ADY C 15 No ADY C 16 No ADY C 17 No ADY C 18 No ADY x lt Back Cancel Help 2 Click Next to define the user codes The Galaxy User Codes dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 149 WIN PAK User s Gui
2. K K K K IS IS K K I lt K K IM I K lt IK Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panel1 Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panel1 Galaxy Panell Galaxy Panel1 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16 Group 17 Group 18 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 2 Under Alarm report Timezones select a time zone during which the alarms generated from a group must be reported To edit the group ADV configuration click Edit under ADV and edit ADV and action groups Note If you want to assign zones to different groups you must do it in the Galaxy panel and then download it to WIN PAK 4 Click Next to view the zone configuration details Setting panel zones A zone is the area covered by an input device in the Galaxy panel that monitors intrusions and creates alarms 1 In the Panel Configuration Zone dialog box double click a zone in the WIN PAK User s Guide Name list to rename it 11 146 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Panel Configuration zones x ADY 28 aH AN aoe E Zone Description 0 29 No ADY C 30 No ADY Ej Zone Type 31 No ADY Find sti it s Yd 0 32 No ADV 7 Delete o 33 No ADY one State C 34 No ADY z Chime ial Show 35 No ADY k Z 36 No ADV F Omit 37 No ADY
3. C Access Area GI Cork 9 Drogheda CI Dublin it GI Galway Limerick C Portlaoise C Sligo Waterford Fe Add Branch Add Entrances Rename Remove Show Available Devices Configure Branch X Branch Name Parking Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Access Areas 3 Type the Branch Name 4 Click OK The new branch is listed below the Access Area folder Note If you are adding a branch inside another branch the new branch appears B below the selected branch Adding an Entrance You can add entrances as an access area or you can group one or more entrances and add them under a branch in the access area 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears 2 To add entrances as access areas right click the Access Area folder or to add entrances to a branch right click the branch and click Add Entrances The Add Devices dialog box appears 3 Alternatively select the Show Available Devices check box The Add Devices dialog box appears l Access Area Mie x E J Access Area Hf Cork af Drogheda H E Dublin Sm pENSUP Of H J Galway af Limerick Hf Portlanise H E Sligo H E waterford fic Add Branch Add Entrances Rename Remove Show Available Devices Add Devices
4. x AD Available Time Zone ay Always On This Timezone is always on amp Never On This Timezone i never ori 1 Edit ay 4 00pm 12 00arn M F 4 00prm 12 00am Monday Friday excl 1 lane ay 12 00am 8 00arn M F 12 00am 8 00am Monday Friday excl 1 S 6 00am 7 00pm 7 days 6 00arn 7 00pm 7 days per week finch 1 Delete P Show a 1 amp 00am 5 00pm M F 8 00am 5 00pm Monday Friday ex 1 2 Regular 6 00 AM to 6 00 Pri 2 3 Btob Sample by Sasi 2 Holiday Group None Back Cancel Help Tip If you want to remove a time zone from the Selected Time Zone list select the time zone and click J The time zones that are listed in Selected Time Zone are available for readers inputs and outputs of this panel Note The NS2 panel has 63 time zone slots in a very large system the number of time zones might be higher than the number of available slots In that case it would be necessary to select only the time zones that apply to a given panel To help you determine the number of slots available only the number of slots used is displayed for each time zone i 2 If you are using holiday overrides select the holiday group in the Holiday Group list 3 Click Next to set the panel options The Panel Configuration Options dialog box appears Setting the panel options e Global Anti passback An Anti passback violation occurs when a card holder does not access the card at a reader while entering or
5. Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Digital Video b Type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder or select them by clicking the ellipsis LJ button c Type the Card Number of the card holder or select it by clicking the ellipsis LJ button d To display the video of the card holders accessing a specific area select an area in the Tracking Area list that is configured in Tracking and Mustering Area e Select one or more Card Codes which define the card transaction f Select the Note Fields to be displayed You can also specify the range if you select the numerical note field 5 To filter further on alarm events a Click the Alarm Filter tab Event filter x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Alarm Point Clear All o y m Alarm States V Input Normal V Input Alarm V Input Trouble MV Door Normal M Door Forced Open M Door Trouble MV Door Ajar b Enter the alarm point name or use the ellipsis L button to find an alarm point c Select the Alarm States that must be included in the report 6 Click OK to save the filtering settings and return to Digital Video window Events associated with a digital camera are displayed with either a fixed camera icon or a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera icon represented with a zoom lens WIN PAK User s Guide 15 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Transl
6. Site Branch COMSERVER E COMSERVER 2 fe Guard Tour Show Available Devices WIN PAK User s Guide 11 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Adding a Site To add a new site Defining Areas Defining Control Areas 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears 2 Right click Control Area folder and then click Add Site The Configure Site dialog box appears x Site Hame Building Caneel _ 3 Enter the Site Name 4 Click OK to add the site as a control area Adding a Branch to a Site T 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears 2 Right click the site to which you want to add the branch and click Add Branch The Configure Branch dialog box appears Note You can add a branch under another branch In such case right click the branch and click Add Branch iol xi Control Area apm dd Branch amp Gala pera evices amp Gala Rename Remove JV Show Available Devices Configure Branch Fa Branch Hame Parking Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Control Areas 3 Type the Branch Name 4 Click OK The branch is listed under the site or the branch in the Control Area window Renaming a Site or a Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears
7. 2 In the Show Note Field list select the note fields that must be displayed in the Autocard Lookup window 3 Click OK to save the configuration and close the dialog box Configuring Access Levels Access levels provide restricted access to the WIN PAK users for various areas in the access control system The Access Level window contains information of the existing access levels and the corresponding access areas Note Before you configure the access levels ensure that you have defined the access areas Refer to the Defining Access Areas section in the chapter Defining Areas Te Adding a New Access Level To add a new access level 1 Choose Card gt Access Level The Access Level window appears The existing access levels are displayed on the left and the Access Areas on the right 2 Click Add The Access Level dialog box appears The access level is account specific and so the current account is listed in the Selected Accounts list WIN PAK User s Guide 8 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information x Name Description Cancel 3 Type the Name of the access level and the Description 4 If the access level is specific to visitors select the Visitor check box The visitor check box is displayed only if you have license for Visitor Management Refer to the Adding Access Level section in the chapter Visitor Management System for more details
8. The following operations can be performed while viewing the list of records e To move through the list use the scroll bars e To sort the list according to a particular column click the column The icon appears on the left of the column name and the list 1s sorted in the ascending order of the column Example If you want to sort the information based on First Name click First Name The icon appears on the left of First Name and the list is sorted in the ascending order based on the column e To view the details of a specific record in the list click the record and then select the Detail View check box A dialog box displaying the details of the record appears towards the right of the Card dialog box See Figure 3 4 e To view the details of a specific record in the list a Click the entry and then select the Detail View check box or double click the record The following screen appears towards the right of the Maintenance window WIN PAK User s Guide 3 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements E Detail iew Card D x Card Froperties Badge Card Number Statue lesue Card Holder Access Level PIM Description mooo Account Account F Seres Trigger Control Custom Access Level Hone User Level i Ee Acton Group N one Activation Date Expiration Date ss ee Figure 3 4 A detail view b Click Close X on the top r
9. ccccccsssssesseeeeeeeees 8 39 Visitor VE ANAEMIC cesussiesiicacdashcssssasadesdseeveadsssiaceeswasdeseacretonsteaiuvedaielsooee 8 41 Intestine Loy WOES ios act ass visas A E 8 4 Seine Key V Anes ei tia tse is eee Gee 8 4 Chapter 9 Time Management NT CE OD UC ton senscctensveetsnudecaveccesssecsecnuesciasteausestacsvencseset ou a 9 2 WING ZOMG ioi E E 9 3 Addinra TIME ZONE vec scas etait coh aa eee 9 3 Editino a Hme ZOMG esesman E ET 9 5 Isolating and Deleting a Time Zone eessen a 9 6 Isolating a TIME ZOMG rroo ea aves ereedenes 9 6 Deleting a TIME ZONG renea n E E 9 7 CMO UNG cade ea E e TERRE TEER 9 7 Scmeduline a Las Ese 9 7 LASK T YDG sorea e A E eee a eee reas 9 9 Edino a Scheduler es ese eas 9 19 Delenn a Schedule 22261526 ine AAA aE a TAE ET 9 19 Holiday Gr OUD veswisscssertcans ois suossa a a aaa 9 19 Adding a Holiday Grup sexcevcdes csc satsendence codsabecstetadecdetevetdetisssteadeoerdsdecstennces 9 20 Editi a Holi day Gr OU enren a a ANNE 9 21 Isolating and Deleting a Holiday Group 00000000ooooonsnnnnsssseeseeeeeeeeessse 9 21 Daylight Savine Grow prisssietiiecsscasleneuccaaiicsee teal Newaessiees heaataciceetn saws 9 22 Adding a Daylight Saving Group cccccssssssssssssssssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 23 Editing a Daylight Saving Group ccccccccccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 9 24 Deleting a Daylight Saving Group ccccccecccssseeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 24 Docum
10. Select the front and back badge designs of the cards in Badge Front and Badge Back Select the Activation Date and Expiration Date Click Start to add the cards The progress bar displays the progress of adding bulk of cards Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 33 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Caution Do NOT close any WINPAK services or turn off the computer while A N the Bulk Card Add is in progress 9 Click Stop if you want to cancel generating cards in bulk 10 Click Close to close the Bulk Card Add dialog box Deleting Cards in Bulk To delete a bulk of cards 1 Choose Card gt Bulk Card Delete The Bulk Card Delete dialog box appears Bulk Card Delete i x Start Number End Number m Progress 2 Type the Start Number and the End Number of the card series to be deleted 3 Click Start to delete the bulk of cards The progress bar displays the deletion progress 5 Note If you want to cancel bulk deletion click Stop ZA a 4 Click Close to close the Bulk Card Delete dialog box Assigning a Card to a Card Holder You can assign a card to a card holder in two different ways e While adding a card Select the card holder name while defining the card properties Refer to the Adding a Card section for more details on adding cards e While adding a card holder Create a new card or attach the existing card while adding car
11. To include the advanced option details of a panel select the Print Advanced Options This option is enabled only for the N 1000 PW 2000 panel type CCTV Switcher The Device Map Report can display the details of a CCTV Switcher of all or the selected communication server You are also provided with an option to display the details of all or a range of CCTV switchers WIN PAK User s Guide 17 38 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report x Device Filter Switcher Filter Bun from Archive Database J hae Print Preview Communication Server Print Devices to Print Export File icy al Estim Pages One To Range Clear All tHE Close To select the communication server a Enter the name of the Communication Server to include the CCTV Switcher of this loop You can use the ellipsis E button to select the communication server To select the range of switchers a Under Devices to Print select one of the following options e All to include all the CCTV switchers e One to include a single CCTV switcher that you select in the From field e Range to include a range of CCTV switchers that you select in the From and To fields e You can use ellipsis El button to select a loop Modem Pool The Device Map Report can display the details of a single loop like C 100 485 PCI of all or the selected communication server in the modem pool You are al
12. WIN PAK User s Guide 7 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction c Click Add to add a new barcode data or select an existing bar code and click Edit The Badge Element Layout Enter Data Item dialog box appears Badge Element Layout Enter Data Item x E pression Card Number Fields Issue Activation Date Expiration Date First Name W Variable Length Length Fill E Justify Blt F Cancel d In the Expression box enter the specific data to be contained in the bar code or select an entry from the Fields list and double click it to add the field to Expression e Ifthe field length of the bar code must be adjusted according to the number of characters in the data item select the Variable Length check box Note The Length Fill and Justify fields appear disabled T f Ifyou want to set a fixed length for the bar code clear the Variable Length check box and enter the following information Length The number of characters in the bar code The data item is truncated or padded so that is has precisely the number of characters Fill The character used to pad the data in order to fit a fixed length field Justify If a data item is shorter than the number of characters allotted for it you can justify it to the left center or right within those characters The remaining characters are set to the character entered in the Fill box g Cli
13. 2 The same type of loops are available in the destination communication server while creating a copy of panels attached to loops For example you can create a copy of direct panel onto another communication server but not onto a Modem Pool or a Loop on the communication server Copying a direct panel To create a copy of a panel to other communication server 1 Right click the panel icon hold and drag the panel icon to the Communication Server onto which you want it to be copied When you release the mouse button the pop up Move or Copy menu is displayed enabling you to select the desired action E Device Oy FJ Devices gp Cmmand File Server Move ag 4854CK E 4B5PClLoop en ModemPoolPS eres E PSeriesPanell Multi AU B Schedule Server ita Tracking and Muster 2 Click Copy to create a copy of it The Copying Device dialog box appears with an incremental number appended onto the device name Copying Device x Hew Device Name FPSenesFanels Cancel 3 Rename the device or accept the default name 4 Click OK A message appears indicating that the loop or port has been reset WIN PAK User s Guide 11 190 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group RS xl The communication port used i by the Loop has been reset 5 Click OK The device is copied to the other communication server 5 Note When you create a copy of a loop or modem pool only the loop or
14. 3 If you have selected Description or Name in Search Field select the criteria for search in the Criteria list e Begins With e Equals e Greater than e Less than 4 Type the text you want to search in the Search For box 5 To sort badge layouts based on badge name or description select it from the Sort By list e None no sorting required e Name sorts badge layouts by the ascending order of badge name WIN PAK User s Guide 7 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction e Description sorts badge layouts by the ascending order of badge description 6 Click Update List to update the list of badge layouts based on the search criteria sorted in the specified order Copying a Badge Layout Copying a badge layout enables you to easily create several badges with the same basic layout but with distinguishing features such as the background color 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select the badge to be copied and click Copy Badge The Badge Layout Copy Badge dialog box appears Badge Layout Copy Badge Fa New badge name Cancel 3 Type the name for the badge layout in the New badge name box 4 Click OK to create a copy of the badge layout Editing a Badge Layout 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select the badge layout you want to edit and cl
15. 3 To detach a reader from the door clear the Door check box For example a reader used in the muster area can be used without a door 4 Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties to create an ADV for the reader Caution Once a reader is added to the device map you cannot attach the reader to a door or detach it from the door Therefore confirm the reader s usage before adding it to the device map p If a reader is not attached to a door it remains as a reader without any door properties If a reader is attached to a door the graphical form depicts the way the door is configured 5 To associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to this reader click Groups Partitions and select the groups from the list Note To dissociate the galaxy group or vista partition from the reader select the galaxy group or vista partition and click Delete Grps Partitions i 6 To associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to the input point select the input point from the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list Note Only the input points that are configured in this panel and not interlocked are listed in the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list i 7 To change the input point used as a free egress input a Click Free Egress in the graphical form The Configure Free Egress dialog box appears w oOo AG n3 i f Sec C Min f Hr Shunt Time jo Debounce Time jo Sec Egress Input Set Defau
16. Table 11 37 Describing RS 232 Action Groups Action Message Description RS 232 Link OK The RS 232 port is communicating properly RS 232 Link Trouble The RS 232 port is NOT communicating properly Table 11 38 Describing RS 232 Port Single Panel Action Groups Action Message Description Loop Alarm The RS 232 Port Single Panel is NOT working properly Loop OK The RS 232 Port Single Panel is working properly Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 183 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 39 Describing Schedule Server Action Groups Action Message Description Server OK The Schedule Server is operating normally Server Trouble The Schedule Server is not operating properly Verify that the WIN PAK Schedule Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Table 11 40 Describing Tracking Server Action Groups Action Message Description Server OK The Tracking Server is working Server Trouble The Tracking and Muster Server is not operating properly Verify that the WIN PAK Muster Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Table 11 41 Describing Video Switcher CCTV Switcher Action Groups Action Message Description CCTV Switcher OK The video switcher is working properly CCTV Switcher Trouble The video switcher is NOT working properly Table 11 4
17. 5 If you want to assign the access level to the other accounts select the account in the Available Account list and click Add The account is moved to the Selected Account list Note To remove the account from the Selected Account list select the account and click Remove It is moved to the Available Account list We 6 Click OK to save the details and close the dialog box Note The newly added access level has no rights assigned to it i Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Configuring Access Area To configure an access area 1 Choose Card gt Access Level The Access Level window appears FTF Access Level ioj x ip Master Added by Quick Start Wizard ES Access Grea TZ Always On i sei E Loopl Panell R1 TZ Always On kenen al Loopi Panell R2 TZ Always On gaem E Loopl Panell R3 TZ Always On ee al Loopi Panell R4 TZ Always On Entrance Group Add Edit Copy Delete Isolate The left side of the window lists the access levels and the right side of the window displays the access area tree 2 Select the access level from the left side to view the access areas of the selected level The color of an icon defines the access permission of a group folder or an entrance e Red No access is permitted to any of the entrances in the area e Yellow Access permitted to some entrances in this area e G
18. Activate Output Activates the selected output Deactivate Output Deactivates the selected output To select a zone type or output type right click the Galaxy panel and select the appropriate action and then select the zone type or output type Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Set Group Panel sets the selected group Unset Group Panel unsets the selected group Part Set Panel sets all the zones for which the Zone State attribute is set as Part Set Timed Set Panel sets all the zones after a specific time Group Bypass Panel bypasses alarms from all the zones in the group Group Unbypass Panel stops bypassing alarms from all the zones in the group Refresh Refreshes the latest status of a group Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Bypass Zone Panel bypasses alarms from the zone Unbypass Zone Panel stops bypassing alarms from the selected zones Force bypass Zone Forcefully bypasses the zones which cannot be bypassed using the Bypass Zone option For example Fire Refresh Refreshes the latest status of a zone 11 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Table 11 1 Typical ADVs and Control Functions Galaxy Output Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Activate Activates the output Deactivate Deactivates the output Refresh Refreshes the latest status of an output Galaxy Keypad Acknowledge
19. Close Enables the operator to close an individual camera display without closing the camera display window By default it is cleared WIN PAK User s Guide 15 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Digital Video Filtering Events The filter option in the Digital Video window helps you to view the events for a specific period Therefore it enables you to retrieve the digital video that is associated to an ADV which is configured for an auto pop up display For example you may want to view the events from March 15 2005 to April 30 2005 To filter the events of the recorded video display 1 In the Digital Video window click Filter The Event Filter dialog box appears Event FR x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Date Range Clear All From Friday May 05 2006 Bl jo a Ta Friday May 05 2006 E 2 _ E Daily Time Range T Only list events between these hours each day From Ta Ma a ea eH Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi ne Cancel Apply Help 2 To select the associated camera and recorded video clip based on the specific date and time ranges a Click the Date and Time Filter tab b Under Date Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in the corresponding boxes d To display video for events that occurred during
20. Commands that are configured in a command file can be run for performing actions on ADVs To run a command file 1 Choose Operations gt Command File The Run Command File dialog box appears Run Command File Fa pa Cabt Executive cae Document 7 001009 Revision 01 13 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Command File Configuration 2 Select the command file to be run from the drop down list 3 Click Run to start running the command file The commands in the command file are run on the ADVs WIN PAK User s Guide 13 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Guard Tour In this chapter Introduction 14 2 Configuring Guard Tours 14 2 Running Guard Tours 14 9 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Introduction Introduction A Guard Tour is defined as a series of check points a guard must activate within a given time The check points are either readers at which the guard presents the card or input points such as egress buttons The check points can be sequenced to be activated in the specified order or un sequenced can be activated in any order A sequenced check point is defined with the time at which the guard must access the check point and the grace period allowed for early arrival and late arrival of the guard at the check point An unsequenced check point can be accessed by the guard at any order In addition the validity of cards that can be accessed at th
21. Device Map CCTV Switcher Deleting a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop After deleting the panels in the panel loop and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop To delete a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop 3 Click OK to delete The 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop 1s deleted from the device map CCTV Switcher In addition to the local or remote panel loops CCTV networks can be connected to the WIN PAK system using CCTV Switchers A CCTV Switcher is defined by adding it to a communication server on the Device Map You must have an available communication port for each Switcher Adding a CCTV Switcher To add a CCTV Switcher 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder right click the communication server and click CCTV Switcher The CCTV Switcher Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears CCTY Switcher Configuration Basic Information Name cctv Switcher Description cctv Camera Type Burle Patt com 1 x m Port Settings Bits per Second 96
22. In addition you can filter the areas or devices to show the events that occur only in the filtered areas or devices When the window is closed the displayed events are lost in the Event View window However the history of events is maintained in the WIN PAK system ss Note If you have procured the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel the ZN events occurring in the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel are displayed in the Event View window Wi Opening an Event View window To open the Event View window 1 Click Operations gt Events or click the View Events Al icon on the tool bar The Event View window appears showing the list of events Pe Event View iols Date Time Hame l Desc afi 4 1 2005 5 38 00 PM 485Loops N1000Panell Reader Card Not Found 65500 Ho 7742005 5 38 00 PM 485Loops N1000Panell Reader Card Not Found 65500 41 2005 5 36 00 PM 485Loops N1000Panell Readerd Card Not Found 32999 41 2005 5 36 00 PM 485Loops N1000Panell Reader2 Card Not Found 32999 On Control Alam Card Read Both Selection Hone 2 Click Close to close the Event View window Note The Digital Video Display window appears when an alarm is raised from a reader or point to which attached the camera is associated This helps you to view and monitor the area from where the alarm is raised This alarm is prefixed by the i icon i Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Moni
23. Update Custom Access Level Select Custom Access Level task type to send the card details with the custom access level to the panel at a scheduled time However this task is scheduled by default If you select this type perform the following steps 1 In the Schedule dialog box select how often the task is to be performed in the Frequency list Schedule Schedule Name Send date ard time every day Type Send Date and Time Frequency bay ssi Command File e Wal Remote Area Next Scheduled Date amp Time a 9 2006 K Minute li How Hour Remote Area T Buffer F Unbuffer F Send Card DE Changes Send Date and Time Cancel Apply Help WIN PAK User s Guide 9 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Holiday Group 2 Under Next Scheduled Date and Time select the date and enter the time in T hours and minutes for the task to be performed Notes e To select the date click the ellipsis El button select the date in the calendar e To enter the time type the Hour and Minute The hour ranges from 0 to 23 and minute ranges from 0 to 59 e To enter the current date and time click Now 3 Click OK to save the schedule Editing a Schedule To edit the schedule l Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Schedule The Schedule window appears Select the schedule to be edited and click Edit You can also edit the default sch
24. WorkGroup Environment To work in a Workgroup Environment you must set the workgroup environment and then unblock the WIN PAK services from Firewall protection To set the workgroup environment WIN PAK User s Guide 4 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt System Manager The System Manager window appears System Manager x Communication Server Muster Server Command File Server User Intertace Database Server Database Archive Server Scheduler Server Guard Tour Server RPC Security Options Chent Server Communication Settings C DOMAIN Environment Recommended WORKGROUP Environment Note All the Client and Server Machines should be configured with the Same Settings Cancel Apply Help 2 Click the RPC Security Options tab 3 Under Client Server Communication Settings click WORKGROUP Environment and click OK The Workgroup Environment is set Note WIN PAK services must be unblocked before proceeding further Z B Refer to the Unblocking WIN PAK Services on Windows XP SP2 or Disabling Firewall in Windows 2003 Server section in this chapter for unblocking firewall Comparison between Domain and Workgroup Environment The following table compares the configuration between Domain Environment and Workgroup Environment Table 4 1 Comparing the configuration between D
25. eeeeceeeeeeeees 11 18 Defining CONCrOVAT CAS iccsdcassatacsstvinsccietaswesseeatetediateseletexck oteaiecrstenteesnGseets 11 20 PRCGING a Seseo a aa 11 21 Adding a Branch tO a Sienet eo enee E EEA EEEE Ea 11 21 Renaming a Site ora Branch oseni eisai a ER 11 22 Addin a DEVICE ax heresies A ee 11 22 I Cora Ua Ser EVIC gine ene ee ee Oe ne Ane eee Eee emo een ae ney ae en 11 23 Removing a Site Branch or Device ccccceeesssseccececcceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 11 23 Viewing Control Maps dissiesiiilacioeesssiseeirinevessiseves itera enea eSa eiaa aaiae iana 11 24 Controlling Devices from a Control Map cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeens 11 24 Initializing a Panel from Control Map cccccceccccsssecccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 30 Panel Initialization Options cccccccccsssseseeeeccceeceaeeeseeeeeees 11 31 TITIAN ZINC Status 305 Ae Sevns deste o docecets a an 11 32 Chapter 12 Floor Plan PIG O CU COON wediccsvetihccveselcevecshcnsicricaticceveesachustvedescdevaceseavesevesuacetascchaaestysousssvaceys 12 2 Floor Plan Definitio sresruk e aa e ei 12 2 Adding a Floor Plan aaziaoinon a a 12 3 Creatine Floor Plan DESIMIR 12 4 Adding an ADV to the Floor Plan 00000oonnoonnnnnennnnnnnnsnsesssss 12 5 Adding Links to other Floor Plans ccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 9 Adding Alarm View and Event View links to the Floor Plan 12 10 Adding a Text Box to the Floor Plan cccecccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 12 Adju
26. section in this chapter for more details on adding a custom command See Table 13 1 for the parameters fields displayed for the ADV controls 6 Click OK to add the command to the command file and to return to the Command File Record dialog box The newly added command is appended to the command list in the Command File Record dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 13 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Command File Configuration 7 To move a command in the command list click any of the following buttons provided next to Move Command e Select a command in the list and click to move the selected command on top of the previous one e Select a command in the list and click to move the selected command to the bottom of the list 8 To delete a command from the command file click Delete 9 Click OK to save the command file and return to the Command File window Adding a Custom Command You can add customized commands for ADVs such as CCTVs Panels and RS232 Connections To add custom commands 1 Select an ADV Category for the command file The ADVs belonging to the selected category are retrieved in the ADV list 2 Select the ADV on which the custom command must be run The commands that can be run on the ADV are retrieved in the Command list 3 Select Custom Command in the Command list 4 Under Parameters define the custom command Note The fields displayed under Parameters vary based on the co
27. A card was denied entry because it was expired by date WIN PAK User s Guide 11 172 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 18 Describing Door Entrance Actions Action Message Description Forced Open The door is in the alarm mode due to invalid entry Host Grant Card Access was granted to the user if event is downloaded within two downloaded minutes downloaded of computer time The control panel was updated with valid card information Host Grant Door Access was granted to the user if the event is unlocked within two unlocked minutes unlocked of computer time The control panel was not updated with valid card information Invalid PIN A card was denied entry because it was used with an invalid PIN Invalid Site Code A card was denied entry because it did not have a proper site code Invalid Time Zone A card was denied entry because it was used outside its time period Trace Card A card being traced was used and entry was granted Valid Card A valid card has been used and entry was granted Table 11 19 Describing Door Output Actions Action Message Description De energized The output of the door is not energized Energized The output of the door is energized Trouble The output of the door is not responding Table 11 20 Describing Group Actions Action Message Description De energi
28. Account Filter Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Account Print Export File Estim Pages Clear All Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 51 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report 2 To filter the note field templates based on an account select an Account under Account Filter 3 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing 4 Click Print to send the report to your printer 5 Click Close to return to the Reports window Operator Report To generate a report on operators 1 In the Reports window select the Operator report and click Report Options The Report Operator dialog box appears Report Operator l X Operator Fiter Sort Run from Archive Database P Operator Print Preview Ta fe All Admin r Print i One Range Admin From Export File Estim Pages Account Account F Clear All ea Se eee eres een Sess 2 To filter the operators to be included in the report a Click the Operator Filter tab b Under Operator select one of the following options Table 17 14 Describing the options for filtering operators a apna Generates the report that includes all the operators Generates the report for a single operator When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the operator to generate the report You can use the ellipsis l button to find an operator Generates
29. After deleting the panels attached to the panel loop and isolating the assiocated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the RS 232 panel loop To delete an RS 232 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the RS 232 panel loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the panel loop 3 Click OK to delete The RS 232 panel loop is deleted from the device map P Series Panel Loop A P Series panel loop represents a configuration of more than one P Series Intelligent Controller panel board A loop requires only one com port on a communication server and there can be up to eight Intelligent Controllers per loop and up to 32 SIO Boards per Intelligent Controller Note Be aware when using a panel loop that the traffic on the com port increases with each Intelligent Controller and SIO Board added to the loop we Adding a P Series Panel Loop To add a P Series panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and then right click the communication server and click Panel Loop P Series The Loop P Series Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears Loop P Sernes Configuration Basic Information Mame come Description __ _ helt Cancel Help 3 Type a unique Name for the P Seri
30. Beep until Alarm The alarm beeps continuously until the alarm is Acknowledged acknowledged By default it is selected Allow Alarm to be Silenced The Silence button appears enabled for an operator for 60 seconds to stop the beep for 60 seconds even without acknowledging the alarm By default it is selected Do Not Close Window The Alarm View window cannot be closed until all Until all Alarms are the alarms are acknowledged Acknowledged Reissue Uncleared Alarms The acknowledged alarms are reissued if those alarms in the lower pane returns to the alert state Require a Response when A note must be provided when alarms are Acknowledging Alarms acknowledged Automatically Clear Acknowledged alarms are automatically cleared Acknowledged Alarms Clear Alarm on Normal The operator can clear an alarm only if the device or Only or point on which the alarm is generated retains to the normal state Maximum of events in The maximum number of events to be displayed in event view the Event View Auto clear alarms limit per The maximum number of recent alarms for a point point input or output to be displayed in the Alarm View window By default the Alarm View window displays the 100 most recent alarms per point This value can range from 10 through 500 Note The alarm count Cnt shows the entire count of the alarms irrespective of the limit setting Auto clear card reads limit The maximum number of recent events pe
31. Click OK to return to the Operator Level window 5 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Operators Deleting an operator level To delete an operator level 1 Select an operator level from the database list and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears TR 6x AN Delete operator level Operator 4 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The operator level is deleted 5 Note If you attempt to delete an operator level that is used for defining an operator ia the following warning message appears ee hl Operator level Operator is being used by at least one operator You must change the operator level used by these operators before the operator level may be deleted Defining Operators The operators can gain access to various functions of WIN PAK based on the associated operator level and the rights assigned to that level Adding an Operator To add an operator 1 Choose System gt Operator The Operator window appears 2 Click Add to display the Operator Record dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 15 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators Operator Record x Operator Password Operator Information Operator Type Operator of Operator Mame Jamin Description J dmin Cancel Apply Help 3 In the Operator tab select the Operator Type as Admin or Operator 4 Type the Operator Name and Description 5 Click
32. Configuration Window He Define gt Device gt Time Management gt pe Quick Start Wizard Card Holder gt Fa d I Configure Badge Printer de Select Language Badge Layout Utility Translate gt l Badge DLL s aj Command File amp Guard Tour ti Floor Plan Definition Badge Layout Introduction The Badge Layouts window appears with a list of existing badges l Badge Layouts Mel Fs I Detail View Search and Sort Search Field All Operations Add Edit apy Delete Isolate Copy Badge Criteria Search For Sort By Name Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 3 2 Click Add to add a new badge layout The Badge Definition window appears WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction AXi R amem Es Name Description Standard Card Photo Name Sig and Barcode 0 Honeywell 3 Type a Name and Description for the badge layout 4 Click the icon provided in the toolbar of the window The new badge layout is saved and listed in the Badge Layouts window Searching and Sorting Badge Layouts 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select a search item in the Search Field list e All Lists all the badge layouts e Description Searches for similar badge layout descriptions e Name Searches for similar badge layout names
33. Isolating and Deleting a Note Field Template To delete a Note Field it must be isolated from the card holder tab layouts and or card holders To isolate a Note Field 1 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Configure Note Field Template The Note Field Template window appears 2 Select the note field to be isolated and or deleted 3 Click Isolate The Isolate dialog box appears 4 Click the Card Holders tab It is selected by default WIN PAK User s Guide 8 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Card Holders Tabs Card Holders with data in Mote Field Color Name Cynthia Jasmine i ltem Delete will cause the data in this Hote Field to be deleted from these Card Holders Delete Delete All 5 Select the card holder in the Name list You can also select multiple card holders by holding the SHIFT key or CTRL key while selecting 6 Click Delete to remove the selected note field from the card holder details or click Delete All to remove all the note fields A message for confirming the deletion appears 7 Click Yes to delete 8 Click the Tabs tab The list of tabs associated with the note field is displayed Card Holders Tabe Card Holder Tabs containing Note Field E mployed Employment detail 2 Items Remove will cause this Mote Field to be remowed from these Tabs Remove Remove All Document 7 001009
34. N 485 Local Connection Output Points amp Groups Alarms Energize De energize Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Panel Initialize Cancel Initialization Buffer UnBuffer Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Pan Tilt Camera Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms SIO Boards Static Camera Galaxy Communication Galaxy Panel Galaxy Group Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarm Set All Groups Panel sets all the groups associated to the panel Unset All Groups Panel unsets all the groups associated to the panel Reset Panel Resets the panel Bypass Zones Panel bypasses alarms from the selected zone types Unbypass Zones Panel stops bypassing alarms from the selected zone types Activate Output Activates the selected output Deactivate Output Deactivates the selected output To select a zone type or output type right click the Galaxy panel and select the appropriate action and then select the zone type or output type Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Set Group Panel sets the selected group Unset Group Panel unsets the selected group Part Set Panel sets all the zones for which the Zone State attribute is set as Part
35. Sec Delete IF Address 10 1 19 100 Show Cancel Help 3 Type a Name and a Description for the Ethernet module lt Back 4 Type the IP address of the Galaxy Panel This field is mandatory 5 Under Panel Defaults select the frequency at which the Galaxy panel is polled to know the status of the panel The available polling options are a Default Polling Select this option to poll continuously at the interval of 2 seconds b Poll Once Select this option to poll only once after the Communication server is started c Polling Interval Select this option to set the interval for polling If you select this option specify the interval in seconds for polling 6 Click Next to configure the Galaxy port The Port Configuration dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 78 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel Port Configuration X Galasy Gold Fort Number 10001 This iz the TCF Fort used by the Galasy Gold interlace within inpak Alarm Report Primary IF Port Number 10002 The default setting for this port Control Command Port Humber BI f 0005 If this setting iz changed the Galaxy Panel configuration must be changed to match Remote PIN fo Connection Password pe Encryption lt Back Cancel Help Note When you click the text box the corresponding help is displayed on the right of the dialog box i 7 In the Galaxy
36. a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the guard tour server is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the guard tour server and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the guard tour server 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the guard tour server a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the guard tour server is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the guard tour server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels c To remove a guard tour server from the control area clear the presence of guard tour server by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Deleting a guard tour server After deleting the child nodes and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the guard tour server To delete a guard tour server l 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the guard tour server and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click OK to confirm the deletion The guard
37. e Access Area e Access Level e Account e Attendance e Card e Card Frequency e Card History e Card Holder e Card Holder Tab Layout e Command File e Control Area e Device Map e Floor Plan e Galaxy Panel Log e Guard Tour e History e Holiday Group e Note Field Template e Operator e Operator Actions e Operator Level e Schedule e Time Zone e Tracking and Mustering Area In addition WIN PAK provides an option to define the templates for the Card Holder report and the History report WIN PAK User s Guide 17 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Report Templates Report Templates In WIN PAK you can define the report templates for the frequently generated reports Card Holder report and History report Defining Card Holder Report Templates Adding a Card Holder Report Template To define the Card Holder report template 1 Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears 2 Expand the Report Templates folder to view the Card Holder and History folders 10x J Report Templates i i ee R a l Find F3 Hig History 3 Right click the Card Holder folder and click Add The Report Card Holder dialog box appears Report Card Holder i X Print Preview From Last Marne To Last Name se Print Export File Access Level Accounk Estim Pages El Account Clear All From None Close o None Ei Card Holder d ard Holder Card Holder
38. e Not Present If you want to configure the panel in WIN PAK before completing the panel installation If the panel is marked Not Present no transactions are saved 9 Enter a unique panel Address The address corresponds to the DIP Switches setting on the panel and ranges from through 31 Consult the NS2 installation manual for further information 10 Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties to create an ADV for the panel Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 Click Next to set the Card Format The Panel Configuration Card Format dialog box appears Setting the card format for the panel WIEGEND is the only card format type available for NS2 panels It supports 32 card formats to be used 1 In the Panel Configuration Card Format dialog box set the WIEGEND card format values Honeywell recommends you to retain the default card format values Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 99 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration i Panel Configuration Card Format J x ADW Add Edit Isolate Delete Inverse Card Formats fra fa spi joy fer fezfes les De fri 2 s2f fsfolofoferfezfes les _ det_ fri fa aef si joy fer fezfes les _ det_ reife PEEP ff 7 _ det Show a Pa let PELE I TT a Pale PELE I Ea lt Back Cancel Help Reader Card Format CR 1 Wiegand Car
39. 1 In the P Series Configuration Card Formats dialog box select a card format to be used for the panel in the Format list The format number ranges from 1 through 8 P Series Configuration Card Formats Format 4 Option C Notused Default Custom Format Type Wiegand C ABA of bits on card Start bit Bits to sum for even parity Bits to sum for odd parity Site code bits Cardholder ID bits TH TAT Issue code bits No of Site code Card ID offset o Default Formats 26 Bit Wiegand 35 bit Corporate Cards I Minimum of digits on card Maximum of digits on card Start digit Site code digits i Cardholder ID digits f Issue code digits fi No of ay omei Hee _ 2 Under Option select the following options a Default To view the default settings for the card format Selecting this option enables you to set the Site Code Card ID offset and the Default Formats b Custom To define the customized settings for the card format Selecting this option enables you to set Format Type of the card and other properties of the card like site code number of bits on card and so on c Not Used To prevent the usage of card formats for the P Series panel If you select this option all the fields are disabled 3 Click Next to configure time zones for the panel Document 7 001009 R
40. 2 Right click the Devices folder at the top of the tree choose Add then click Tracking and Muster Server The Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration dialog box appears Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration x ADW Eem Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration Edit Isolate Delete r Description a Machine name Protocol end point 5500 Add Show Hours of History to Prime on startup Cancel Apply Help 3 Type a unique Name of the tracking and muster server and the Description for tracking and muster server 4 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the tracking and muster server The Abstract Device Record Server dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 6 7 8 9 Device Map Server Configuration Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details Enter the Machine Name where the tracking and muster server is located Tip To find the machine name a Right click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears b
41. 2 Right click the branch or the site you want to rename 3 Click Rename The dialog box for renaming the branch or site appears x Site Name Mars Building i Cancel 4 Type the site or the branch name 5 Click OK to save the change Adding a Device 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears 2 Right click the site or branch to which you want to add the device and click Add Devices Alternatively select the Show Available Devices check box The Add Devices dialog box appears E Control Area Mi x Cork H Ballincollig CI Bantry 9 Churchfield j Cork Central CI Dennehy sCross Douglas IEE astcoast EntranceReaderg H Little Island Mahon 9 Mallow AXE Rename H E Mallow CPC Remove 1 a Muaker Baad Show Available Devices Add Branch Add Devices WIN PAK User s Guide 11 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 T Defining Areas Defining Control Areas Add Devices X Device Type Add Close Name Desoiption 3S P1 R3 P1 R4 P3 R1 P3 R2 P3 R3 P3 R4 template PABX Panel 1 Re TEMPLATE Panel 2 Read m m m m m m m m 4 Select the Device Type The devices belonging to the selected device type are listed Note The device type includes devices of intrusion panel too if the license for the Galaxy panel and or the Vista p
42. 41 4 in 5mm 142 in 10 mm Snap to Grid Show Grid Cancel 2 Select one of the five spacing options in the Spacing list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Select the Snap to Grid check box if you want items to snap to the grid when they are moved or added Select the Show Grid check box if you want the grid marks to be visible on the screen Click OK to save the settings and return to the Badge Definition window Setting Blockouts You can set blockouts for reserving the non printing area on a badge This is useful to prevent instances like printing over a magnetic stripe or hole punch area in the card Unlike other badge objects the blockout has no properties and always remains on top in the item layering Though the blockout is generally effective in preventing overprinting of the Mag Stripe area some card printers do print resin black over the blockout To avoid this ensure that no blockout is placed over the Mag Stripe area To add a new blockout to the badge layout l Right click within the badge outline and then click Blockouts The Badge Element Layout Blockout Item Definitions dialog box appears Ix Badge Element Layout Blockout Item Definitions Place Horz Mag Stripe Bot 0 0 36 5 850 10 5 il Horz Wag Stipe Top 0 0 2 5 85 0 10 5 Close Horz Punch Lett 1 5 180 40 14 0 Horz Punch Right 745 180 40 14 0 Samplez 10 0 20
43. 8 e DLL Click this option if you have the access to Video Capture Card DLLs such as FlashBus dll FlashPoint dll TWAIN dIl and so on If you have selected Microsoft DirectX select the video driver from the DirectX Compatible Video Driver list If you have selected DLL a Click the ellipsis button next to Video Capture card DLL An Open dialog box appears with WIN PAK PRO opened as the default directory b Select the appropriate dll file and click Open The dll file path is displayed in the Video Capture Card DLL box of the Badge DLL s dialog box Note If no DLL is listed in the WIN PAK PRO directory 1 Open the Windows Explorer 2 Choose Tools gt Folder Options The Folder Options dialog box appears 3 Click the View tab 4 Under Advanced settings expand Files and Folders and then Hidden files and folders 5 Click Show hidden files and folders 6 Click Apply to apply the changes you have made and click OK to exit from the dialog box Click the ellipsis button next to Signature Pad DLL An Open dialog box appears with WIN PAK PRO opened as the default directory Select the appropriate dll file and click Open The path of the dll file is displayed in the Signature Pad DLL box of the Badge DLL s dialog box Note This DLL 1s applicable for the Signature Pad for both the Capture Driver Types Click OK to save the dll details and to close the Badge DLL s dialog box Set
44. Action Message Description Poll Response The control panel is NOT responding to computer polling Alarm Poll Response The control panel is responding normally to computer polling Normal Primary Power Failure Control panel primary power has been lost Primary Power Normal Control panel primary power has been restored Table 11 30 Describing N 1000 III PW 2000 IV Panel Actions Action Message Description Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is not working properly Failure Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is working properly Normal External 5 Volt The 5 volt reader power is shorted Alarm External 5 Volt The 5 volt reader power is normal Normal Ground Fault An input point is shorted to earth ground causing a ground fault Alarm Ground Fault An input point that caused the ground fault has returned to normal Normal Low Voltage Battery voltage is low Alarm Low Voltage Battery voltage is normal Normal Panel Communication with the control panel has been lost Communication Alarm Panel Communication with the control panel has been restored Communication Normal Panel Reset The control panel has been reset Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 177 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 30 Describing N 1000 III PW 2000 IV Panel Actions Action Message Description Poll Response The
45. Guard Tour Scheduler Server Scheduler Server Archive Database t Archive Database Database Server IELODTXPSLP2615 Database Server IELODTXPSLP2615 DataBase i 5555 DataBase i 5555 DataBase Archive 5556 Database Archive i 5556 15 4 1 Choose Operations gt System Events The System Event window appears 5 x Lost Connection Connection Failed Connection Successful Connection Successful Connection Failed Connection Successful Connection Successful Login Successful Connection Successful Login Successful Connection Successful Disconnect Successful Logouk Successful Disconnect Successful Logout Successful 2 Click xj to close the window You can also keep the window open always Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Event View Note Event View is different from System Events Event View displays the access B control activity including card reads alarms and operator activity such as acknowledging and clearing of alarms Event View An event is an access control activity such as a card read change in the state of input and so on The Event View window displays the details of access control activities as and when they occur The number of events displayed in the Event View depends on the setting made for the maximum number of events in the System Defaults option When the number of events exceeds this number the oldest entries are replaced by the new entries
46. Note Honeywell recommends that the muster panel has the host grant feature set to disabled to optimize system communication in the event the panel would go through a cold restart Document 7 001009 Revision 01 18 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Appendix Cold Restart on Power surge WIN PAK User s Guide 18 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Index Numerics 485 ACK NAK 64 Adding 64 Call In Option 66 Editing 67 hub settings 66 Isolating and Deleting 68 Remote Phone Number 66 485 PCI Panel Loop 44 ACK NAK 45 Adding 44 Editing 46 Isolating and Deleting 47 N 485 PCI 2 communication adaptor 44 Panel Defaults 45 port 45 TCP IP Connection 46 TCP IP Encrypted Connection 46 A ABA 17 18 About this Guide 1 About WIN PAK Pro 13 Abstract Device 163 Action Group 164 Adding 163 Command File 165 Default Floor Plan 164 Deleting 167 Editing 166 Priority for the action 165 Abstract Devices 4 Document 7 001009 Revision B Access Area Report 14 Access Areas Define 2 Access Level Report 14 sort the report 15 Account 3 Account Report 16 filter 16 sort 17 Accounts 2 Adding 3 Deleting 5 Editing 5 Selecting 4 action 2 Action Group 167 Copying 170 Deleting 170 Editing 169 Viewing 167 Add Cards to existing Account 5 Adding a Loop to a Site 7 Adding a New Site 7 Adding a Panel 10 Adding a Vista Panel 157 Fire Burglary Panels 157 PANEL VISTA 128FBP 157 PANEL VISTA 250FBP 157 partitions 158 zones 158 Adding or Editing Langu
47. PCI Loop Configuration Basic Information f X Mame Panel Defaults dd 485 Remote lool 1 0 Poll Interval Description e Sec Edit P Panel CMD Retry Count janli ACK NAK p E Panel CMD Time Dut pete 5 M Show Buffer all panels on exit O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Mew Delhi bg Remote Phone Number Moder Madem 1 4 Back Cancel Help Type a unique Name of the remote communication loop This field is mandatory Type a Description for the C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK loop Create an ADV for the communication loop Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration Note The ACK NAK box appears disabled You cannot select this check box as you are adding the non ACK NAK loop Increase or decrease the Loop Verification Interval Sec to verify whether the loop is responding to a signal that is sent from WIN PAK to the C 100 loop or 485 PCI panel loop Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 61 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools T Note Increasing the interval improves the bandwidth The default interval is set to 60 seconds as it is an optimal value Select Buffer all panels on exit to buffer the events on all the panels when the communication server stops Select Unbuffer al
48. Part Set C 38 No ADY C 39 No ADY Group Name C 40 No ADV Galaxy Panell Group1 7 V 41 Galaxy Panell Zone 1051 W 42 Galaxy Panell Zone 1052 i 43 Galaxy Panell Zone 1053 Resp Time System V 44 Galaxy Panell Zone 1054 Custom SIA 45 Galaxy Panell Zone 1055 Default WV 46 Galaxy Panell Zone 1056 47 Galaxy Panell Zone 1057 Alarm Report Timezones 48 Galaxy Panell Zone 1058 Report Alarms in Timezone Always Report Trouble coos _ Heo Note The Zone Type Zone State Group of the zone and other details are displayed on the right These fields are non editable i Table 11 9 Describing Zone properties Zone Type The type of the device used in the zone such as Fire Intruder The property set for the zone e If Chime is selected the control over this zone from WIN PAK Ul is restricted e If Omit is selected the alarm from this zone is not reported If Part Set is selected the zone is set as Part Set Zone In the floor plan or control map you can set all the zones that are Part Set without setting other zones The name of the group to which the zone belongs Resp Time Indicates how quick the panel has to respond to the device It can be Slow Fast or System Custom SIA Custom SIA is a zone type that is used for customizing the user defined zone types 2 Under Alarm Report Timezones select a time zone during which the alarms gen
49. Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Edit hd Copy Search For Delete Sort By leale Name E Update List Print Report 2 Click Add to add holidays to the holiday group The Holiday Group Record dialog box appears Holiday Group Record Fa Holidays Holiday Group Mame Federal Holidays Date Add Edit elete Cancel Apply Help 3 Type the Holiday Group Name For example Federal Holidays WIN PAK User s Guide 9 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Holiday Group 4 Click Add The Holiday Group Holidays dialog box appears to add a list of COO N DN Q T 9 holidays in the holiday group Name oE E Cancel Date Friday April 08 2005 Holiday 1 I Apply to all years Holiday 2 Note Holiday type it applicable only to NS2 panels Type the Name of the holiday Click the ellipsis l button to select the date Select the Apply to all years check box if the holiday must recur every year Select the holiday category as Holiday 1 or Holiday 2 The holiday groups are grouped into two major categories as Holiday 1 and Holiday 2 You can use these categories to group the mandatory holidays and optional holidays Note Holiday 2 category is applicable only for NS2 panel types as other panels do not support the holiday categories Click OK to save the holiday 10 Repeat steps 4 to 9 for adding more holidays
50. Settings lt None gt lt Select Status gt v Search for Edit F Show only untranslated items Match case OK Table 16 3 Translate Other Text Options Field Column Description Total Line of Text The total number of lines of text to be translated Translated The total number of lines of a text that have been translated Out of Date The number of miscellaneous text entries that were translated in the previous version of WIN PAK applies only to a WIN PAK upgrade English United The text in the original language of WIN PAK States Language the The text in the translated language language selected for translation is displayed as the column name The instructions used for performing the translation This is included in the text file In File This is significant only for the maintenance people 2 Double click the text that must be translated from the list or right click the text and then click Edit The Translate Text dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Language Configuration Note To search for the text item in a scrolling list a Type a part or the whole text in the Search box b Select the Match Case check box to match case while searching c Select the Show only untranslated items check box to search only for text items that are not translated d Click Find The first instance of the text item is highlighted in the li
51. System Manager The System Manager window appears 2 Click the User Interface tab System Manager X Scheduler Server Guard Tour Server RFC Securty Options Communication Server Muster Server Command File Server User Interface Database Server Database Archive Server db Server Mame db Server EndPomt db Archive Name f c Add Edit Remove Cancel Apply Help 3 Click Add The System Manager Servers Setup dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Service Manager System Manager Servers Setup xX Database Server Node Name Endpoint Database Archive Server Mode Mame Endpoint Enter a descriptive Name to identify the database server from the list Enter the computer name or IP address of the server in the Node Name field in the Database Server area Ensure that the RPC Endpoint is the same as the value you set in Setting RPC Endpoints section in this chapter Under Database Archive type the computer name or IP address of the server in the Node Name field Ensure that the RPC Endpoint is the same as the value you set in Setting RPC Endpoints section in this chapter Click OK This enables you to start up the User Interface with the new database server Service Manager The WIN PAK Service Manager enables you to start and stop the WIN PAK services To start or stop the WIN PAK services
52. The Isolate dialog box appears with a list of associated cards and card holders Select the card and the alternate access level Click Reassign to reassign the selected card OR Click Reassign All to reassign all the associated cards Click OK to close the Isolate dialog box To delete the access level l 2 Choose Card gt Access Level The Access Level window appears Select the access level and click Delete The access level is deleted Configuring Card and Card Holder Information In WIN PAK you can configure card and card holder information by l Adding a card and card holder in WIN PAK manually Refer to the Adding a Card and Card Holder Information section in this chapter for adding a card and card holder information in WIN PAK manually Importing the card and card holder information from an Excel sheet to WIN PAK Refer to the Importing from Excel Sheet section in this chapter for importing a card and card holder information from an excel sheet Adding a Card and Card Holder Information Adding a Card Holder Adding a card holder involves WIN PAK User s Guide Providing card holder basic information Providing card holder additional information Adding a new card and attaching the card to the card holder 8 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Providing card holder basic information 1 Choose Card gt Card Holder or
53. This chapter describes how to configure WIN PAK users and to set the default settings for WIN PAK Accounts This section Accounts describes to add edit and delete an account The card and card holder information in WIN PAK are specific to an account Therefore you must select an account to enable card and card holder menu options WIN PAK Users This section WIN PAK Users describes in detail about configuring the users and assigning privileges to them Users of WIN PAK are of two types namely Administrators and Operators An administrator has full privileges view change and delete to work in WIN PAK whereas an operator has restricted privileges which are defined by the associated operator levels When you install WIN PAK on your computer a default user is created for logging on to WIN PAK with administrator privileges The default user name is admin with a blank password However to ensure security you can change the user name and password Default Settings This section describes how to change the default settings for WIN PAK workstation and system settings Defaults can be changed for alarm printer sound files e mails for reporting alarms auto log on and so on In the WIN PAK system these settings are configured by default and WIN PAK functions as per these settings All the client systems of WIN PAK would be affected by any changes made to the System Defaults settings Whereas only the computer where the settings
54. Timezone x QUICK START WIZARD Time Zones Select Time zones The selected access time zones will be A Time Zone is an accessible included in the selected accounts time range that can be given to M Always On 24 7 Including Holidays the user of a particular account to access the work area M 8 00am 5 00pm Mon Fri Excluding Holidays 4 00pm 12 00am Mon Fri Excluding Holidays Selectthe time zone option and select account to which you M 6 00am 7 00pm days Including Holidays zone Available Accounts Selected Accounts ACCOUNT TIMEZONES 1 Start 2 Timezones Use the arrow buttons to associate or dissociate the accounts to from the time zone lt Back Next gt Cancel 2 Select the time zones to be associated to an account Note Using QSW you cannot add a new time zone Therefore to add a new time zone choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Time Zone on the WIN PAK interface Refer to the Adding a Time Zone section in the chapter Time Management for details on adding a time zone 3 In the Available Accounts list click the account For multiple account selection use the SHIFT and CTRL keys 4 Click _ gt or _ to move the selected accounts or all accounts to the Selected Accounts list and then click Next The Continue dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 6 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard PF QUICK START WIZARD QUICK STAR
55. belonging to the selected account Tip To set the current dates for Activation Date or Expiration Date select the check box To set different dates click the drop down list and select the required date in the calendar Note Ensure that the Expiration Date is later than the Activation Date 8 Importing from Excel Sheet You can import the card and card holder information from the excel sheet in which the card and card holder information is entered Note Honeywell recommends you to take a backup of the current WIN PAK database before importing the data to WIN PAK i To import the card and card holder information from an excel sheet 1 Log on to WIN PAK Import Utility The WIN PAK ImportUtility dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 8 38 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information Fal WIN PAK ImportUtility x Account Account Me Columns Order Order Name First Hame Last Name Card Number lzsue Number PIM Status CSV File Path B Images Folder El Cancel 2 Select the Account to which the card and card holder information must be imported The corresponding fields are displayed in Columns Order 3 In CSV File Path specify the path of the excel sheet or click the ellipsis L button and select the path 4 In Images Folder select the folder in which the photo images are stored 5 Click OK A message asking for confirmation appe
56. ccccccesscecccccceecceeeseeeeeceeeeeeaas 16 11 Chapter 17 Reports Describing the filter options for Access Level report 17 15 Describing the filter options for Account report ee 17 16 Describing the card holder filter options for Attendance report 17 18 Describing the options for filtering the card numbet 17 19 Describing the card options for filtering card events 17 27 Describing the options for filtering card holders 00 17 29 Describing the options for filtering note fields ee 17 30 Describing the options for filtering card holders 00 17 34 Describing the options for filtering floor plans eee 17 42 Describing the options for filtering guard tours ccccceee 17 45 Describing the transaction types for filtering history details 17 47 Describing the Alarm amp Card options for filtering history details 17 48 Describing the options for filtering holiday groups 17 51 Describing the options for filtering operators eee 17 52 Defining toolbar buttons seesinane E AER 17 55 Describing the options for filtering operator levels 17 57 Describing the options for filtering schedules 17 58 Describing the options for filtering time zones cceeeeeee 17 59 Describing the time Zone OptiONsS seeeeeseseseeeceeeeeeeeeeees 17 60 Chapter 18 Appendix Document 7 001009 Revis
57. d Under Sort Order 2 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the second level If you select Not Sorted the report is sorted on the basis of the field selected in Sort Order 1 e Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field f Under Sort Order 3 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the third level If you select Not Sorted the report is sorted based on the field selected in Sort Order 1 and or Sort Order 2 g Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field 4 To filter the cards based on the card details click the Advanced Card Filter tab Report Card Holder Fa Card Holder Filter Sot Advanced Card Filter Boron Atchive Watatese M ey Oracle Attached Unattached Print Preview Print Signatures Export File Assigned No Assigned No Estim Pages is me Unassigned Unassigned Clear All i Both i Both Email Print all cards O Print no of photos assigned dild Print no of signatures assigned Close The Card Holder report is filtered according to the status of e Card Attached to the card holder Unattached or Both e Number of Photos or Signatures Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both 5 Select the following check boxes to set global parameters for information to be included in the report e Print a
58. dialog box The changes are updated in the language text file The values in Total Line of Text Translated Out of Date Total Done and Out of date columns in the Edit Dialog Text are updated with the number of fields that are translated 16 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Translation Language Configuration Adding or editing entries for menus 1 Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Menus The Translate Menu Text window appears Lk oxi Total Line of Text 612 Translated 487 Out of Date 0 English United States ooo F Door Control Commande porte E Ack amp k All Alarms Ackq ttes alarmes E amp Clear All Alarms amp EFf ttes alarmes E amp Unlock amp D verrouiller El amp Lock amp Verrouiller E amp Door Mode Mode amp porte amp S hunt amp S hunter amp Unshunt amp De shunter amp Pulse amp lmpulsion E amp Timed Pulse Impulsion amp temporis e Restore To Time amp Zone Restaurer vers Zone de amp temps Search for Edit I Show only untranslated items Match case OK Table 16 2 Translate Menu Text Elements and Description Total Line of Text The total text lines to be translated The total number of text lines that have been translated Out of Date The number of menus that were translated in the previous version of WIN PAK applies only to a WIN PAK upgrade English United The menu captions in the original language of WIN PAK States Lang
59. gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the Tracking and Mustering Areas folder or the mustering area branch to which you want to add an entrance and click Add Entrances The Add Devices dialog box appears with the list of all entrances 3 Alternatively select the Show Available Devices check box The Add Devices window appears with the list of all entrances 10 x E E Tracking and Mustering Areas 4dd Branch Add Entrances Configure Remove Refresh F5 Find F3 Add Devices Ei Device Type Add Close F1 R3 F1 Aa F3 Al F3 R2 F3 R3 F3 Aa template PAB Panel 1 Re TEMPLATE Panel 2 Read H E E E E E E E E 4 4 Select the entrance to be added to the branch and click Add Note To select the multiple entrances press and hold down CTRL and click each of the required entrances WE 5 Click Close or clear the Show Available Devices check box to close the window The entrances are in the Tracking Area window WIN PAK User s Guide 11 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Moving an Entrance To move an entrance from one branch to another 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Under a mustering area branch select the entrance you want to move 3 Drag and place the entrance on the mustering area branch to which you want to
60. l W ws 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Click Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt WIN PAK Service Manager The WIN PAK Services window appears Note The Service column lists the installed components and the Status column displays the server status as running or stopped BT WIN PAK Services Service Close fA WIN PAK Database Server Running fA WIN PAK Archive Database Server Stopped gil WIN PAK Communications Server Stopped i WIN PAK Command File Server Stopped Refresh ad WIN PAK Schedule Server Stopped Stop il WIN PAK Muster Server Stopped Px WIN PAK Guard Tour Server Stopped Restart 4 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started User Interface Select the Service to be started or stopped Click Start to start the server or click Stop to stop the server Click Restart to stop the service and start again ae a Click Refresh to refresh the services User Interface The WIN PAK User Interface enables you to add monitor and control devices card holders operators and so on Logging On Before logging on to WIN PAK ensure that all WIN PAK services are running Refer to the Service Manager section in this chapter to start the services To log on to WIN PAK 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt WIN PAK User Interface The Connect to Server dialog box is displayed Connect To Server x WIN PAK SE User Name o ra Password cn
61. or group 9 Select the Free Egress Input shunts Status Input Shunt Device check box to follow no action on the direct point when a Free Egress Input is activated 10 To trigger an action in another input output or group as a series action of direct point a Click Status Input Shunt Device in the graphical form The Configure Status Input Shunt Device dialog box appears Configure Status Input 7 Shunt Device Ei w On fo Status Input Shunt Device fin r f Sec C Min H Shunt Time 15 Debounce Time jo Sec Set Defaults Cancel b Select I O or G to indicate Input Point Output Point or Group The corresponding points are enabled in Status Input Shunt Device c Select the Status Input Shunt Device from the list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 97 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration d Select the unit of time as Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after it has been unlocked If the time taken to close the door exceeds the shunt time an alarm is raised e Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after the shunt time is exceeded If the time taken to close the door exceeds the debounce time an alarm is raised The debounce time is meant for the doors that swing often due to the wind See Table 11 1 for examples f Click OK to save the settings or cl
62. through the desired folder change the file name and click Save By default the file 1s saved in My Documents folder with the name Operator Action Report 9 Click Close to close Operator Actions Report dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 17 56 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Operator Level Report To generate a report on operator levels 1 In the Reports window select the Operator Levels report and click Report Options The Report Operator Level dialog box appears Report Operator Level l xj Operator Level Filter ett Aun from Archive Database P Operator Level Print Preview Print fe All One Export File CR me Estim Pages Clear All 2 To filter the operator levels to be included in the report a Click the Operator Level Filter tab b Under Operator Level select one of the following options Table 17 16 Describing the options for filtering operator levels Option All Generates the report that includes all the operator levels One Generates the report for a single operator level When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the operator level to generate the report Description You can use the ellipsis kl button to find an operator level Range Generates the report for the range of operator levels When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the first
63. trer nouveau mot de passe 4 Type the text in the highlighted area Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Language Configuration ia WIN PAK User s Guide Configuration 485 PC1 Hut x Retard de connexion bpo f ZEC Nombre de tentatiwes de rappel bpo f Temps d attente pour d connexion jo SBC Temporisation avant nouvelle tentative jo ZEC Commande initialization modem Prefixe appel j Option rappel Parameter nouveau mot de passe Retard de connexion E ZEC Nombre de tentatives de rappel jo f Tempe d attente pour d connexion fo ZEC Temponzation avant nouvelle tentative jo SBC Commande initialization modem Prefixe appel Option rappel Parameter nouveau mot de passe Note To restore the default button or field names right click the dialog box and click Restore All Defaults Configuration 485 PCI Hub F x Retard de connexion E SBC Nombre de tentatiwes de rappel jo Temps d attente pour d connexion jo 26C jo ZEC Tempornzation avant nouvelle tentative Restore All Defaults Commande initialisation modem Prefixe appel Option rappel Parameter nouveau mot de passe Repeat steps 3 to 5 of the procedure to edit the remaining field names in the dialog box Click the Close X icon in the dialog box to save the changes and to close the
64. 10 62 Isolating and Deleting a non ACK NAK Remote Communication AO OP EE E tw E E ioe eae ee 10 63 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication LOOp cccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeees 10 64 Adding a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop 10 64 Editing a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop 10 67 Isolating and Deleting a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication NE OOD se seasefastsd aceon E E E OET 10 68 CCTV S Wit Cher ei cettecsstccestctedssseiecueiis esses E e ae a aa 10 69 Addn a CCTV Swit herien A a cee area alas eae ae reece ale 10 69 Editino aC CTY SwitChetasac cetacean ieee eee 10 72 Isolating and Deleting a CCTV Switcher ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeees 10 73 Isolating ae CTV SWING omii A 10 73 Delete a CCTV Swit ner severtat cates cteicacs a 10 74 RS 232 Connections r earen i EES O EEEo 10 74 Addine ai RS 232 Conne cion eeoa a 10 74 FE ditinoeain RS 232 Comme ci On nenna E E O 10 76 Isolating and Deleting an RS 232 Connection ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 10 76 Isolating an RS 232 CONNECTION eacus a 10 76 Deleting an RS 232 Connection cc cccccsesssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 77 Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel ccscssscccccssssssssssssssscccccccsssesssssssecs 10 77 Adding a Galaxy Ethernet Module cccccscsssssccccccccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 10 78 Vista Panel Port Home Automation Mode sccccssssscccsssssscccesssceees 10 80 Addine a Vista Panel POC veers sedis sean stecuetsletvanttaseusiensaeanaeeaence aca ter
65. 2 BA Setting the printable size of the badge Providing background color graphics and image for the badge Specifying blockout areas on the badge Placing the following badge elements and setting their properties Text Bar Codes Bitmap Placeholder for card holder photo Placeholder for signatures Note You can design a badge while adding a new badge layout or while editing an eS ia existing layout WIN PAK User s Guide 7 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Know more about the Badge Definition window 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select a badge layout and click Edit The Badge Definition window appears with the details of the selected badge layout 3 Badge Definition _ Op x i 7 Graphical EX k alelami T Icons Hame Lescription Standard Card Photo Name Sig and Barcode 1 2 3 4 Rul er Badge Outline Honeywell Changing the Ruler Measurement You can set the ruler measurement of the badge outline as Inches or Millimeters 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select a badge layout and click Edit The Badge Definition window appears 3 Right click anywhere inside the badge outline and click Inches or Millimeters A check mark indicates the option in use To switch from one unit of measure to another select the desi
66. 20 Viewing Control Maps 11 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Introduction Introduction Areas in WIN PAK are classified as Access Areas Control Areas Tracking Areas and Muster Areas Access Areas are a logical grouping of doors and readers to which card holders can gain access After the access areas are defined they are mapped to access levels When card holders are assigned to an access level they can gain access to the access area for the time zone and access permissions set for the access level Example An access area A can be defined with doors D1 D2 and readers R1 and R2 and a card holder C1 can be assigned to an access level AL1 When the access area A is mapped to the access level AL1 the card holder C1 can gain access to D1 D2 R1 and R2 Control areas are logical areas containing devices such as communication servers loops panels input points output points groups and readers Operators who are assigned to a control area can view the status of the devices in the control areas and their relationship using a Control Map In addition an operator can control the devices from the control map Tracking Areas are used for tracking card holder movements and Mustering areas are used for tracking card holder movements in the event of emergency situations such as fire This chapter describes how to configure access areas configure control areas and view control maps define
67. 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions System Events System Events The System Event window displays the details of WIN PAK system activities such as successful and unsuccessful server connections log on details and server disconnections Details such as the name time and date of the activity are displayed This enables easier identification of the problem sources during server communications Viewing System Events Locate Result X CardNumber Account CardHolder_ Reader Name Site Date Time LastStatus TrackingArea 8 Click Close to close the Locate Result dialog box 9 Click Close to close the Locate Card Holder dialog box The WIN PAK system provides an option to the user to view the history of WIN PAK system activities To view the system events WIN PAK User s Guide 4 28 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 4 25 2006 12 09 57 AM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taaa PM Taia PM Taia PM Taal PM Taig PM Taag PM Taag PM Taag PM Taag PM Ei System Event Guard Tour Server Guard Tour 1B Track amp Must Track amp Must Muster Server Muster Server Command File Server CornmandFil Guard Tour 1B Schedule Ser Schedule Ser Communication Server COMSERVE Communication Server COMSERVE
68. 4 Click Print Preview to view the Access Level Report prior to printing 5 Click Print to send the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Report window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Note In the report some access levels are identified by numbers instead of the ZA name This indicates that these access levels are the custom access levels for the cards Account Report The Account report contains the available accounts that are configured in Account To generate the account report 1 In the Reports window select the Account report and click Report Options The Report Account dialog box appears Report Account ga X Account Filter Sort Bur from Archive Database Print Preview Print Export File Estim Pages Print Data Fields None C All Clear All Close tHE 2 To filter the accounts a Click the Account Filter tab b Under Accounts select one of the following options Table 17 2 Describing the filter options for Account report Generates the report for all the accounts ll One Generates the report for a single account When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the account to generate the report You can use the ellipsis E button to find the access level Range Generates the report for the range of accounts When you Select this option the Fr
69. 49 7031637786 Specifications subject to change without notice Honeywell International All rights reserved Document 7 901032 Revision 02 Honeywell
70. A cold restart of the access control panel sometimes occurs if there is a l serious power surge on the power or communication lines This causes corruption of m the panel s database and time functions The PW 2000 panels address the time problem by generating a system alarm 99 Panel Database System Alarms Panel Reset Alarm when the panel experiences a cold restart WIN PAK then sends the current Time and Date to the panel within 60 seconds of receiving this alarm The default time and date after a cold restart is January 1st Monday at 12 00 a m This time stamp appears on activities in the Event view and History report Panel Time is critical to the proper operation of the muster function as the most recent event is used to determine the tracking or muster status of a card holder If a card is presented to the Muster reader and the time and date stamp 1s earlier than the stamp from another reader location there is no change of status to the Muster safe location In the event that the card database is lost or corrupted at the muster reader WIN PAK recognizes all read types Not Found Time Zone Normal Trace PIN Violation and Expired as valid muster reads provided that the time is later than the previous card read as described above This function eliminates the need to reload cards or to have host grant enabled to a muster panel during a muster event Only Valid and Trace card reads count at a Tracking reader lt 0
71. ADY for C 100 loop Loop E C 100 Loop Panelt T Detail view Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria ia Eopy Search For Delete Sort By m Name Eike 2 Select an abstract device and click Edit The Abstract Device Record dialog box for the selected ADV appears 3 Edit the required details of an ADV Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 166 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Deleting an ADV To delete an ADV not in use 1 Choose Configuration gt Abstract Device ADV The Abstract Device window appears with the list of ADVs added through device map FE abstract Device TET Access DVPRO Camera 1 FRapide ye Access DVPRO Camera 2 FRapide ye ADY for C 100 loop Loop E C 100 Loop Panelt Panel T Detail view Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Edit zi Eopy Search For Delete Sort Bp e Name r Eit Ren 2 Select an abstract device and click Delete The Abstract Device is deleted Note If an ADV is associated to a floor plan or control area the following warning message appears Te SS Cl This ADY is used in the Floorplans You must remove this ADY From the Floorplans before the 404 can be deleted Action Group An Action Group is a set of actions assigned to a device when its ADV is defined All the actions in the action group a
72. Actions Action Message Description CCTV Camera OK The camera is working properly CCTV Camera The camera is NOT working properly Trouble Table 11 14 Describing Camera PTZ CCTV camera Actions Action Message Description CCTV Camera OK The pan tilt camera is working properly CCTV Camera The pan tilt camera is NOT working properly Trouble Table 11 15 Describing Cards Entrance Reader Actions Action Message Description Anti Passback A card was denied entry because it has already been used going Violation in out without properly going in out Card Not Found A card was denied entry because it was unknown to the reader Expired Card A card was denied entry because it has been expired by date or number of uses Host Grant Card Access was granted to the user if the event is downloaded within two downloaded minutes of computer time The control panel was updated with valid card information Host Grant Door Access was granted to the user if the event is unlocked within two unlocked minutes of computer time The control panel was not updated with valid card information Invalid PIN A card was denied entry because of an invalid PIN Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 171 WIN PAK User s Guide Table 11 15 Describing Cards Entrance Reader Actions Action Message Description Invalid Site Code A card was denied entry because
73. Add Edit Delete Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 13 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Command File Command File Configuration 3 Type the name of the command file in the Name box 4 Type a Description for the command file 5 To add commands to the command file click Add Refer to the Adding Commands to the Command File section in this chapter for more information on adding commands to the command file Adding Commands to the Command File 1 In the Command File Record dialog box click Add The Command File Command dialog box appears Command File Command X ADY Category Switcher Command Switch Camera to Monitor Parameters Camera Switcher Camera 1 x Monitor Switcher Monitor 1 0 Cancel 2 Select an ADV Category for the command file The ADVs belonging to the selected category are retrieved in the ADV list 3 Select the ADV on which the command must be run The commands that can be run on the ADV are retrieved in the Command list 4 Select the required command from the Command list See Table 13 1 for the commands available for the ADV controls 5 To define custom commands for the ADV select Custom Command from the Command list and enter the action parameters in the fields provided under Parameters Note The fields displayed under Parameters vary based on the command that is selected i Refer to the Running a Command File
74. Add at the bottom of the Triggers section of the Triggers and Procedures dialog box The Trigger Definition dialog box appears P Series Triggers Trigger Definition Res Button Trigger Output 7 Board 1 Port 3 SIO 31 16 one Inputel Change OF State 7 Deenengize Energize Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Rex Button H a PSeriesPanell Out 437 M AlwaysOn ooo A 11 139 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration WIN PAK User s Guide 2 Enter a Name for the trigger This name relates to its corresponding procedure 3 Select a Procedure in the list Only user defined procedures as opposed to system procedures are displayed in this list 4 Inthe Trigger Source Type list select the type of trigger point defined Input Output Reader or Time Zone 5 Select the All Sources check box if you want the trigger to apply to all inputs outputs and readers 6 Select a Source SIO Board Only displayed in the list the boards configured for this panel are 7 Select a Source SIO Board to select the SIO Board in which you want to select a trigger point 8 In the Trigger Source list select the exact point on the SIO Board that you want to use as the trigger point The Trigger Source field is activated only if Source SIO Board is selected 9 Select a Time Zone during which Always On the trigger is active This field defaults to 10 In the Transaction Type list
75. Adding a Card Holder Tab Layout Before adding a card holder tab layout ensure that the note field templates are added To add a card holder tab layout 1 Choose Account gt Select to select the account to which you want to add the card holder tab layout 2 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Card Holder Tab Layout The Card Holder Tab Layout window appears WIN PAK User s Guide Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information 3 Click Add to add a new card holder tab layout The Card Holder Tab Layout Record window appears Card Holder Tab Layout Record x Tab Name m Available Note Fields Account Account E Passing Year E Aggregate College Name m Note Fields Included in this Tab Ace Order Name DOB Add Remove 4 Note Field Order Cancel 4 Type the Tab Name For example Educational Info 5 In the Available Note Fields select a relevant note field to be added to the card holder tab layout For example College Name Note To select multiple note fields In sequence Hold the SHIFT key and select the note fields At random Hold the CTRL key and select the note fields 6 Click Add to add the selected note fields to the card holder tab layout T 7 To remove a note field select the note field and click Remove 8 To change the order of note fields in the list select the note field and click p o
76. All Accounts gt is selected the note fields that are common to all the accounts are listed You can create a common note field by creating a note field in each account with the same name 4 To sort the card holder details in the ascending order click Ascending OR To sort the card holder details in the descending order click Descending 5 To preview the report before printing click Print Preview 6 To print the card holder report click Print 7 To export the card holder details into a text file click Export File The Export File dialog box appears Exportrie ee Delimiter f Tab Semicolon Comma Space Other File Directory to sawe File to le Default File Name bat M Include Report Name in File Name M Include Date and Time in File Mame File Name Tracking and Muster View 4 27 2006 7 16 57 PM txt Set as Default Cancel a Under Delimiter click the required delimiter character or click Other and enter the character b Under File enter the following details c Click the ellipsis button in the Directory to Save File to box to select the folder in which the text file must be saved d Type the name of the text file in the Default File Name box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Control Areas e To append the report name to the file name select the Include Report Name in File Name check box f To append
77. C 100 panel loop After deleting the panels attached to a panel loop and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the C 100 panel loop To delete a C 100 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the C 100 panel loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the panel loop 4 Click OK to delete The C 100 panel loop is deleted from the device map 485 PClI Panel Loop Panels using the RS 485 communication protocol can be connected to the WIN PAK system by the N 485 PCI 2 communication adaptor The 485 communication protocol offers better data supervision and increased system performance compared to the 20 milliamp communication protocol A 485 PCI with or without ACK NAK connection is defined by adding it to the Device Map Adding a 485 PCI Panel Loop To add a 485 PCI panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder right click the communication server and then click Panel Loop dialog box appears 485 PCl Loop Configuration Basic Information Hame Panel Defaults dd Basea 70 Poll Interval Description Eo Sec Edit SF Oakland Panel CMD Retry Count lentes ACKANAK pe v Panel CMD Time Out Dalai M Buffer all panels on exit z W Unbuffer all panels on sta
78. Click the Computer Name tab c Look for Full computer name field This is the machine name of your computer d Note down the machine name and click OK Type a Protocol end point number that is not used by any other device on the network Note Each server must have a unique Protocol end point that can range from 1024 to 9999 The default number of Protocol end point need not be changed However you can change the number if you have multiple servers in your device map In Hours of History to Prime on startup increase or decrease the number of hours the tracking history is processed and displayed when the Muster View is opened The hours can range from 0 to 99 By default it is set to 8 hours Click Next to proceed to the final dialog box for the Tracking and Muster Server configuration 10 Click Finish to add the server to the Device Map Editing a Tracking and Muster Server To edit a tracking and muster server ip 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the tracking and muster server and click Configure The Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration X Tracking and Mustering Server Configuration D
79. Color 7 ES Basic colors Custom colors BEE EE a i ie ip i Define Custom Colors gt gt cancal_ 4 From the Basic colors palette click the color swatch you want to use for a background 5 Click Apply to apply the color to the badge background or click OK to apply the color and to exit from the Color dialog box To define a custom color 1 Right click on the badge outline and click Properties The Badge Element Layout dialog box appears 2 Click the Colors tab 3 Click the ellipsis button provided near the Background Color box The Color dialog box is displayed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction 4 Click Define Custom Colors to expand the Color dialog box color a Basic colors Custom colors Ef a ee a a BE EEE HH Sat fiat Green IEN OF Cancel Add to Custom Colors 5 Ifyou know the Red Green Blue equivalents for a specific color enter those values in the Red Green and Blue boxes OR If you know the Hue Saturation Luminosity equivalents for a specific color enter those values in the Hue Sat and Lum boxes OR Use the color selector to choose the color Table 7 4 Color Settings Hue Wave length of light reflected by an object It is the characteristic commonly called color and identified by color names such as yellow green or orange Hue values range from 0 red through 239 running through
80. Definition Table 12 1 ADV Icons and Description Used with Galaxy group ADV Used with Galaxy MAX ADV Used with Galaxy keypad ADV Used with Galaxy RIO control ADV Used with Galaxy output ADV Used with Galaxy zone ADV Used for rotating the ADV object Rotation Tool Vista Panel Used with Vista panel ADV Vista Used with Vista partition ADV Partition Used with Vista zone ADV Vista Used with Vista output ADV Output Vista Used with the Vista panel port ADV Comm 2 Right click the object and select Control Properties Zoom Undo mnan Show Wie EWIGE Copy Selected Control Ctrl C Paste Control Ctrl Remove Selected Control Del Control Properties Alt E ter The Control Properties dialog box appears for the ADV object Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Example If you have selected a door then the Door Properties dialog box appears Door Properties E x General Status Configuration ADY Mame None Find ADW Aotation Angle E J Show Mame W Show Tooltip cere 3 To set the general properties of the ADV click the General tab a Select the ADV Name or click Find ADV to locate the ADV to be associated to the object The Find ADV dialog box appears Find ADY xX Mame Find Moy o ox Cancel b Type or select the name of the ADV in the Name list and click Find
81. Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Isolate Device or ADY j x Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device CommandFile Remove Remove All 1 iltern Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of the command file server a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the command file server is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the command file server and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the command file server 5 To isolate operator levels from a device or an ADV of the command file server a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the command file server is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the command file server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the command file server c To remove the command file server from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the command file server in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Deleting a command file server After isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can
82. Editing an Operator To edit the operator details 1 Choose System gt Operator The Operator window appears 2 Select the operator to be edited and click Edit The Operator Record dialog box appears Operator Record Ei Operator Password Operator Information Operator Type Operator hg Operator Mame Jamin Description Admir Cancel Apply Help 3 Edit the required details of an operator and click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 5 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Operators Refer to the Adding an Operator section in this chapter for details on adding an operator Searching and Sorting Operators To search and sort the operator list 1 Choose System gt Operator The Operator window appears 2 Select an item in the Search Field list Search and Sort Search Field Description Criteria Begins With 7 Search For Sort By e All Lists all the operators e Description Searches for similar descriptions e Last Log In Searches based on the last log on date and time e Name Searches for similar operator names e Operator Type Searches based on the operator type 3 If you have selected Description Last Log In Name or Operator in the Search Field select the Criteria e Begins With Searches for an item that begins with the text in the Search For text box e Equals Searches for an item that exactly matches with
83. Fa Device Type Add Close F1 R3 F1 Aa F3 Al F3 AZ F3 R3 F3 Aa template PAB Panel 1 Re TEMPLATE Panel 2 Read E E E E E E E E 4 4 Select the entrance and click Add Note To select the multiple entrances press and hold down the CTRL key and click each entrance i WIN PAK User s Guide 11 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Access Areas 5 Click Close to close the Add Devices dialog box Alternatively clear the Show Available Devices check box The newly added entrance s are displayed in the Access Area window Moving an Entrance To move an entrance from the access area to a branch or from one branch to another 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears 2 Click the entrance that you want to move 3 Drag and place the entrance on the branch to which you want to move Renaming a Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears 2 Right click the branch you want to rename 3 Click Rename The Configure Branch dialog box appears Branch Mame Parking Cancel 4 Type the new Branch Name 5 Click OK to rename the branch Removing a Branch or Entrance 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears 2 Right click the branch or the entrance you want to remove 3 Click Remove A messa
84. Filter Sort Advanced Card Filter Mone one ha Save Template N dka Save As Name of the Card Holder Report template Refer to the Card Holder Report section in this chapter for more on defining the filter options for the card holder report Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Report Templates Type the name of the Card Holder Report template in the text box on the right Click Save Template to save the template To create a copy of the template click Save As The Save As Copy Report Template dialog box appears Save As Copy Report Template Report Template Name Cancel Type a new name for the template and click OK to create a copy of template and return to Report Card Holder dialog box Click Close to close the dialog box Editing a Card Holder Report Template To edit the Card Holder Report template l Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the Card Holder folder Right click the report template and click Edit The Report Card Holder dialog box appears Refer to the Adding a Card Holder Report Template section in this chapter for details on editing the template Searching a Card Holder Report Template To search a Card Holder Report template l WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template w
85. Franciso Jgolate bal Switcher Delete Add New M 1000 FP w 2000 Panel Add New WS2 Panel Multi RU EY Schedule Server 3 Right click the 485 PCI Loop or C 100 Loop and select Add New N 1000 PW 2000 Panel The Panel Configuration Basic dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 82 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Panel Configuration Basic w oo active ooo o 4 Type a unique Name for the panel This field is mandatory 5 Type a Description for the panel N 1000 F w 2000 7 N 1000 P4 2000 H 1 000 2 P 2000 H 1 000 37 Pw 2000 3 M 1000 3 P A000 H 1000 4 P 2000 4 H 1 000 4 P 2000 e 6 Select the type of panel in the Type list The number suffixed in the panel type indicates the number of readers inputs or outputs that can be connected to a panel 7 Select the firmware version number of your panel in the Firmware Version list Note This refers to the version of firmware of the PROM chip in your PW 2000 panel The default is 8 2 Different panel options are available depending on the selected firmware version T 8 Select the Status of the panel e Active The panel is configured and currently connected to the WIN PAK system Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 83 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration e Inactive The panel is configured but temporarily disconnected for maintenance pur
86. Gold Port Number box type the TCP IP port number used by the Galaxy Gold User Interface in WIN PAK By default it is set to 10001 If you change the port number the configuration of the Galaxy Gold UI must be changed accordingly 8 In the Alarm Report Primary IP Port Number box type the TCP IP port number used by the Galaxy Gold UI for reporting alarms in WIN PAK By default it is set to 10002 9 In the Control Command Port Number box type the TCP port used for Control Commands By default it is set to 10005 10 In the Remote PIN box type a PIN number to remotely access the Galaxy panel The default PIN number for the panel is 543210 11 In the Connection Password box type the password to connect WIN PAK to Galaxy panel The connection password is configured in the Galaxy Gold UI 12 Select or clear the Encryption check box to enable encryption of password when an alarm is sent to WIN PAK from the Galaxy panel 13 Under ADV click Add to create an ADV for the Ethernet module E080 of Galaxy Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 14 Click Next to advance to the Finish dialog box 15 Click Next to configure the Ethernet module for Galaxy The Ethernet module E080 for Galaxy panel is configured Refer to the Adding a Galaxy Panel section in this chapter for configuring the galaxy panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 79 WIN PAK User
87. Guide Badge Layout Introduction The following is a list of the maximum number of characters that can be printed using the Datacard IC III printer Table 7 5 Characters printed using Datacard IC ITI printer Track Type of character Maximum Bits per inch Characters Numeric l To Enter Magnetic Stripe Data 1 Right click on the badge outline and click Properties The Badge Element Layout dialog box appears 2 Click the Track X1 Track X2 or the Track X3 tab Badge Element Layout Ea Badge Colors Positioning Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Length Justify Fill Char Expression Disabled Add Edit Delete Move Up Move Down 3 Select Disabled IATA ABA or TTS from the list on the upper right corner 4 Click Add or Edit to define items to be added to the track The Badge Element Layout Enter Data Item dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 7 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Badge Element Layout Enter Data Item X Expression Card Number Fields Issue Activation Date Expiration Date First Name Dd MV Variable Length Length Fill o Justify N A y Cancel 5 Enter the following data items e Expression Any combination of text or database fields can be entered Type the desired text or double click the appropriate field in the Fields list to enter it in the Expression field The selected field appears within brac
88. Honeywell Access Sys tems or another supplier additional SOFTWARE such as but not limited to operating systems and or system utilities compilers or computer languages It will be the user s obligation to complete and register any other SOFTWARE agreements as required by the manufacturer Honeywell Access Systems assumes no responsi bility for any other manufacturer s SOFTWARE User Non Disclosure Agreement CONTENTS About this Guide SCOPE aoe co nnenuet bcaavactcucvaleveavelaueivadsieasulaleateseissesieseatinsiuateneeavasueutical I 1 Intended Audience seossesseoseessessessessecssossossesseosesssessessesssessessessessesseossossesse I 1 Prereguisite Skils isien nae aaeanoa a a aoaaa I 1 Document SUPT COUN EG iisen aaia aaa aaa aa aaa aaaea aaea aeiiaaie daaa I 1 SVMIDOl De NNIT N ciei a E I 3 COD ACIS osotan e aa e a e E a EE I 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Overview OE WIN PAR anona aaa cde conicessn stories sseses 1 2 WW TIN P ALK COMPONIST N T 1 2 WIN PAE SOVOTS arrosen E 1 2 WIN PAKR CHEM arseatet esac ese E 1 3 WIN PAK F atireS o rioroosscoiitroc novidade aaao oaie aeaa 1 3 SoftWare CONCE DIS sesccsiscesesnsdsatissceccsavccncsescteesasdecddeccesiesisesccusdcosesltesssesdaseouissiens 1 4 PA DSULA CUD CV ICES 6 odehe ihesuasi led taseUissedeseusstweimalateteleedaeeaidctabenyeboess 1 4 Floor Plan Vie Werna e A E 1 4 BIA Sa hee ihe onc AEE N E TTA 1 4 Card and Card Holde E ceana a r a a 1 4 latusiow Pane S arae a a EAE O
89. I O Poll Interval Select the interval at which the signal must be sent to the panel to verify the communication and check the panel s input and output states By default the frequency interval is 60 seconds b Panel CMD Retry Count Specify the number of times a command must be resent to the panel if the event of the panel not responding to the command By default the command is resent 3 times c Panel CMD Time Out Specify the waiting time for receiving a response from the panel and for time out of the command By default the loop waits for 5 seconds 12 Click Next to set the port for the loop 13 In the Port list select a port of the communication server to which the loop is to be connected The ports that are selected for the communication server and not used for other loops are listed 14 If you select a port a Select the transmission baud rate for the loop in Bits per second b Select the number of bytes that can be transferred in Data Bits Select a number between 4 and 8 By default it is set to 8 c Select the type of Parity for error detecting procedure By default it is set to None The available parity types are Even Odd Mark and Space Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 45 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops d Select the Stop Bits value By default it is 1 In serial communications a stop bit is an extra bit transmitted after each unit of information usually a byte to indicate th
90. Includes all card events Guard Includes all guard tour events WIN PAK User s Guide 15 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Digital Video c To select the camera display based on the alarm and card behaviors select the following options under Alarm amp Card Table 15 8 Describing the alarm and card options for filtering video display Transactions Includes card events of all transactions such as normal alarm or host grant Clears Includes the card alarm events that were cleared by the operator Acknowledgements Includes the card alarm events that were acknowledged by the operator Operator Messages Includes the card alarm events that were provided with the operator messages d To filter the transactions performed on specific ADVs devices click Filter ADVs The Filter Devices dialog box appears e Double click the branch folder to select all the devices in the branch OR Expand the branch folder and double click a device to select the particular device f Click OK to return to the Event Filter dialog box 4 To filter the card holders a Click the Card Holder Filter tab Event filter x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter First Name Last Name Clear All Card Number Reader Tracking Area Not Used z Card Codes Account Walid Card a Trace Card Door Unlocked x m Note Fields Field From To
91. Initialization Command box the command string that is sent to the panel at initialization is displayed h Inthe Number of cards for U option box enter the number of cards for the panel This option is enabled only if the U option is selected i In the Outputs for duress OD Option box enter the value for Outputs for duress This option is enabled only if the OD option is selected 10 Click Next to configure the Input points to the panel Configuring input points to the panel To configure input points to the panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Inputs dialog box select an input point check box under Name The other settings in the dialog box are applicable only for the selected input point Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 105 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration T T WIN PAK User s Guide ADW Add Edit Ea Isolate ees 5 No ADY Time Zone Delete None D Supervised Show Sec O Mn Hr Shunt Time jo il Debounce Time jo Sec I Interlocking o RG Point 1 NoADY Alarm Action Pulse Normal Action No Action Normally Open i Normally Closed Report Alarms Never Trouble Always Back Cancel Help Note e WIN PAK sets some input points as active and may assign them an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel e The settings of these input points can be changed but you ca
92. Interface and Comm Server Only the Communication Server and the related components Communication Server Only Notes Installing WIN PAK ona client workstation in a networked computer Installing additional communication servers on a networked computer where the networked computer is also used as a workstation Installing the communication server on a networked computer Installing Complete WIN PAK Installing User Interface and Communication Server Installing Communication Server i 1 To protect the database files from the failure of the operating system place them on a different drive partition 2 To isolate the database files from the database server place them on a separate hard drive 3 Install the database file on the database server This helps in effective usage of the WIN PAK back up and restore option WIN PAK User s Guide 2 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades Installing Complete WIN PAK You can install complete WIN PAK if you are installing WIN PAK on a stand alone computer To install Complete WIN PAK on your computer perform the instructions given in Installing WIN PAK on page 6 and follow these steps 1 On the WIN PAK Setup Type screen select Complete Installation and click Next The system checks for SQL Service status and displays the WIN PAK Destination Path screen WIN PAK Destination Path x WIN PAK Please indic
93. N 1000 or NS2 or P Series panel Provide a UPS or other backup power source for the WIN PAK computer and any other associated communication devices Provide a safe location for the computer and communication Keep the muster system on line not buffered to ensure timely and complete information Perform regular checks to ensure that the muster system is functioning properly Check that all panels are maintaining the correct time and date It is critical that the time and date be correct on card reads at the muster readers If the time and or date are earlier than that of other reads in the system they are ignored Program the scheduler to update the panel time and date at least once a day 10 Create a check list for muster procedures 11 Test the Muster Report printer WIN PAK User s Guide 11 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Configuring Tracking Areas Tracking areas can be defined as branches inside the Tracking and Mustering area tree in the WIN PAK User Interface Nested tracking areas can be created by defining branches one inside the other After adding the branches for the tracking areas you can add the readers in the tracking areas as entrances Adding a Tracking Area Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears MA Tracking Area Ioj x E E Tracking and Mustering Areas F a Ad
94. NAK remote communication loop To isolate a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop ie 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder and right click the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears To isolate floor plans from an ADV of 485 ACK NAK remote communication a Click the Floor Plans tab The floor plans associated to the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop are listed Select the floor plans to be isolated from the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the panel loop 4 To isolate operator levels from or an ADV of 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop a Click the Operator Levels tab The operator levels associated to the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop are listed Select the operator levels to be isolated from the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the panel loop To remove the panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 68 Document 7 001009 Revision 01
95. Never On This Timezone is never or 1 Holiday Group lt Back Mert gt Cancel Help Tip If you want to remove a time zone from the Selected Time Zone list select the time zone and click Only the time zones that are listed in Selected Time Zone are available for readers input points and output points of this panel 2 Select the holiday group in the Holiday Group list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 85 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 3 Click Next to set the panel options The Panel Configuration Options dialog box appears Setting the panel options You can set certain panel options such as anti passback groups key pads for providing access for the readers input points and output points attached to the panel e Anti passback Anti Passback discourages card holders to enter without using their cards Anti passback violation occurs at the following scenarios a If you have entered the building without using the card and exited from the building using your card And then if you try to enter the building the access is denied b If you have entered the building using the card and exited from the building without using the card And then if you try to enter the building the access is denied Notes T Anti passback requires a reader on each side of the door If anti passback is selected for a panel in the Options tab the anti passback is locally implemented e In the tw
96. Now A list of ADVs with similar names are retrieved in the list c Select an ADV from the list and click OK to return to the properties dialog box d Enter the angle at which the ADV must be rotated in Rotation Angle By default the rotation angle is set as zero e Select the Show Name check box to display the name of the ADV below the image in the floor plan design window f Select the Show Tooltip check box display the ADV name as a tool tip 4 To set the color blink and default options for the ADVs click the Status Configuration tab WIN PAK User s Guide 12 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Door Properties General Status Configuration No Alarms Alarms Normal my Faut E a Trouble oo Ww Unknown i Ep Dy Vv Checks indicate blinking colors Save as Default Ack Alarm Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition x a To change the colors for each state Normal Fault Trouble and Unknown double click the color swatch to open the Color dialog box b Select a standard color or create a custom color and then click OK The selected color appears in the swatch c Repeat this for every color you want to change d To set the blink option for a state condition combination select the check box provided next to the color swatch Clear the check box to remove the blink option 5 Select the Save as Default check box to set the configuration details as default 6 Click OK to save the ADV pro
97. OK Cancel oox 13 In the Port list select a port of the communication server to which the loop is to be connected The ports that are selected for the communication server and not used for other loops are listed 14 If you select a port a Select the communication baud rate for the loop in Bits per second b Select the number of bytes that can be transferred in Data Bits Select a number between 4 and 8 By default it is set to 8 c Select the type of Parity for the error detecting procedure By default it is set to None The available parity types are Even Odd Mark and Space d Select the Stop Bits value By default it is 1 In serial communications a stop bit is an extra bit transmitted after each unit of information usually a byte to indicate that transmission of that unit is complete 15 If you select a TCP IP Connection port a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name of the computer where the loop is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 16 If you select a TCP IP Encrypted Connection port Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 41 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name and the Encryption Password of the computer where the loop is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 17 Click Next to display the C 100 Loop Configuration Finish dialog box 18 Click Finish to add the C 100 panel loop and return to the Device window The c
98. Order Fun from Archive Database M Date and Time Range Run Report From Sunday April 03 2005 al i To Sunday April 03 2005 j 2 Time Range Only list Operator Actions between this hours each day Mefaule Filters eal E P3 td Fa From JO mo 0 E m Ee 53 b Under Date and Time Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis El button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in the corresponding boxes d To generate reports for actions occurring during the specified period select the Only list operator actions between this hours each day check box under Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 53 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes 3 To filter only the specific operator actions a Click the Operator Actions tab b Under Operator Actions select or clear the operator actions to be included or excluded By default all the actions are selected Tip Click Select All to select all the actions or click Deselect All to clear all the actions 4 To filter the list of operators to monitor their actions a Click the Operators tab b Under Operators select or clear the operators to be included or excluded By default all the operators are selected Tip Click Select All to select all the operators or click Deselect All to clear all
99. P Series Panel C m Done 2 Click Create New Account and then click Next The Account dialog box appears Pf QUICK START WIZARD Account QUICK START WIZARD Account oe a Create New Account Account page allows you to ar create anew account New Account Account Name Account 3 Finish Enter a unique account name in TIMEZONES the field provided and click CARDS Next You will see the SITE confirmation message on the LOOP next page for any modification PANEL in the account name before you SIO BOARDS pricHa DONE 3 Type a unique Account Name and click Next A confirmation message appears for the account name 4 Click Next A new account is created and the Configure dialog box is displayed with the Add Time Zones option selected 5 Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click Pm Done B and perform the steps that follow Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Associating Time Zones to Accounts A time zone is the defined time interval for accessing the particular area You must associate Time Zones to an account as time zones are specific to an account To associate time zones to the accounts using QSW 1 Inthe Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click Add Time Zones and click Next The Time Zones dialog box appears The Time Zone dialog box displays the available time zones and accounts ff QUICK START WIZARD
100. PM tet Set as Default Cancel 2 Under Delimiter select the separator to separate columns of the report in the WIN PAK User s Guide report file Tip If you want to set your own delimiter click Other and type the separator in the provided text box To set or change the default path of the report file click the ellipsis El button next to Directory to save File to and browse through the folder The selected path is displayed in the Directory to save File to box To set the parameters for the file name a In Default File Name type the name of the file and the file format For example Report txt b Select the Include Report name in File name check box to include the name of the report in the file name mentioned in the Default File Name box c Select the Include Date and Time in File name check box to include the current date and time of the report generation in the file name mentioned in Default File Name After setting these parameters the name of the file is displayed in File Name Example When you generate a card report if you type Sample txt in Default File Name and select the Include Report Name in File Name check box the name of the file would be SampleCard txt The name of the report file is Report txt 1f you do not set any of these parameters 17 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report 5 To set the default parameters click Set as Default 6 Click O
101. Re None hd ne Sec SIO BOARDS DONE lt Back Next gt Cancel Select the Reader Board Type Depending on the type the number of readers is displayed Select the Reader Board Address Type the Name of the reader Select the Time Zone for the reader during which the reader is active Set the Pulse Time for the reader Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each of the readers and click Next The Continue dialog box appears Click Back if you want to change the settings or click Next to save and return to the Configure page oe Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click I m Done B and perform the steps that follow Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Saving the Configuration After completing the required configuration you must save the configuration details using the I m Done option Note that the configuration details are NOT saved permanently when you click the Next button after each configuration To save the configuration details and to generate the summary report 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click I m Done and click Next The Saving Configuration dialog box appears l QUICK START WIZARD Saving configuration QUICK START WIZARD Saving configuration ACCOUNT TIMEZONES CARDS SITE E Accounts Loop Timezones PANEL SIO BOARDS M Sites DONE Loops V Panels Reader boards T Cards A
102. Revision 01 Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours f Guard Tour f amp Sequenced Guard Tour R Unsequenced Guard Tour Guard Tour Record Sequenced Guard Tour 3 Type a Name for the guard tour 4 Click the Sequenced Check Point and the Unsequenced Check Point tabs to enter the checkpoint details for the guard tour Refer to the Adding Unsequenced Check Points and Adding Sequenced Check Points sections in this chapter for information on defining sequenced and unsequenced check points for the guard tour 5 Click Apply to create the guard tour 6 Click OK to create the guard tour and to close the Guard Tour Record dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours Adding Check Points Readers and Input points can be added as sequenced and un sequenced check points to the guard tour Note Itis mandatory to add at least one check point to the guard tour Adding Sequenced Check Points 1 In the Guard Tour Record dialog box click the Sequenced Check Point tab Guard Tour Record Fa Name Sequenced Check Point Unsequenced Check Point Select Readers Selected Check Points E Check Point Valid Only Time hh mm hh mm hh mm 1 TEMPLATE Panel 2 In 10 N A 00 01 00 00 00 00 Alarms T Visible ey OK Cancel Apply Help 2 Under Select click Inputs to assign input point
103. Revision 01 17 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report To delete all the History Report templates l 8 Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and Right click the History folder and click Delete All A message asking for confirmation appears Click Yes to confirm the deletion Note All the report templates are deleted except for the templates that are used in the schedule Generating and Printing a Report To generate a report l 2 3 Choose Reports gt Reports or click the Reports zd icon on the toolbar The Reports window appears ET Reports T Pepot Description Access Area Report E Access Level Access Level Report Attendance Attendance Report Card Card Report ka Ber ee er A meer D Detail View Search and Sort Search Field All Edit Criteria Search For Lopy Delete lsolate Sort Bp Report of Report Options To generate a report based on the filtering parameters select and double click a report from the list OR Select a report from the list and click Report Options The corresponding Report dialog box appears Set the filtering parameters for generating the report Refer to the corresponding report section in this chapter for setting the filter parameters WIN PAK User s Guide 17 8 Document 7 001009 R
104. Revision 01 8 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Additional Information 9 Select the tab in the Name list You can also select multiple tabs by holding the SHIFT key or CTRL key while selecting 10 Click Remove to isolate the selected tabs from the tab note fields or click Remove All to isolate all the note fields A confirmation for isolation appears 11 Click Yes to confirm the isolation To delete a note field 1 In the Note Field Template window select the note field from the list 2 Click Delete A confirmation for deletion appears 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Configuring Card Holder Tab Layout A card holder tab layout is a collection of user defined note fields For example Educational Info tab may contain the note fields such as College Name Passing Year Aggregate and so on This card holder tab layout will be displayed in the Card Holder window Card Holder Tab Layout Record x Tab Name Educational Info Account Account z Mote Fields Included in this Tab Order Name O Bl Passing Year Add Bz Aggregate z R H3 College Name _Femove Card Holder Jasmine Cynthia Basic Info Personal Detaile Educational Info Employment Details Cards Attach User Codes Card Biometrics Note Freld Card Holder Data Aggregate _ _ Mote Field Ord College Hame E Cancel Figure 8 1 Customizing Card Holder information using Card Holder Tab Layout
105. Select the type of the report to be generated in the Report Type list e Card Holder To generate the report for card holders e History To generate the report of the history 2 Select the template for the report in the Report Template list The templates are listed for the selected report type You must have created the templates using the Report Template menu option 3 Click Reconfigure to edit the report template configuration The Report Card Holder or Report History dialog box appears Refer to the Report Templates section in the chapter Reports for adding or editing a report template 4 Select the Print Report check box to print the report immediately after the configuration 5 Select the E Mail Report check box to send the report to the selected e mail Ids after the configuration 6 Click EMail IDs to select the e mail Ids for sending the report The Select Email Ids dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 9 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule Select Email Ids f X Show Ids from the Account Consolidated Id List balcha chandrasekharahoneywell com sactik ala narayanan ahoneywell com Message Recipients 7 Select the Id type in the Show Ids from the Account list The available Id list types are Consolidated Id List To Id List Cc Id List and Bec Id List The e mail Ids of the selected ID type are listed 8 Select the Id from the list and click To or Ce
106. Server To edit the communication server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the communication server and click Configure The Com Server Configuration dialog box appears Com Server Configuration l x Basic Information Forts Name COMSERVER Description The first com served Machine name jie ODTXP5LPZ61S El Protocol end point E566 Alarm Priority for notification feo Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement o write Transactions to file Add Edit solate Delete P Show f Windows HT 410 windows 2000 or P Operating System Cancel Apply Help 4 Edit the required details of the communication server Refer to the Adding a Communication Server section in this chapter for field description WIN PAK User s Guide 11 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Isolating and Deleting a Communication Server You can delete a communication server only if you delete the devices attached to the communication server In addition you must isolate an ADV of the communication server from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a communication server To isolate a communication server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Device
107. Support Center Disk Management La Remote Control Operators las Services and Applications 4 On the navigation pane select and double click Power Users The Power Users Properties dialog box appears Power Users Properties EI General Cei Power Users Description In legacy applications in addition to certified applications Members Add Bemare OF Cancel Apply 5 Click Add to add domain users to the group 6 Type the network domain name and user name in the DOMAIN USER NAME format Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration Select Users Computers or Groups EI Select this object type Users or Groups Object Types From this location PACRIM Locations Enter the object names to select examples PACRIM IME 295379 Check Names UserName Network Domain Name Advanced Cancel ee 7 Click OK The user is added to the Power Users group Power Users Properties ed Ea General Csi Power Users Description n legacy applications in addition to certified applications Members bs PACRIM14E 295379 OK Cancel Apply 8 Click OK to save the Power User Properties Configuring the Log On Property of WIN PAK Servers Before you configure the Log on property of WIN PAK servers add the domain user to the local System Administrator or Power Users Group To configure the log on pr
108. Time Zone list select a Time Zone during which the door must be kept unlocked Select the Control Mode This is an auto relock function By default the field is set to Strike off when door closed but can be set to strike off when door is opened Click OK to return to Direct Interlocks dialog box Free egress input Free Egress Input is used for indicating which input must be used for the Free Egress device and for configuring a door s free egress point Free Egress Input can only be linked to an input point l In the Direct Interlocks dialog box click Free Egress Input The PRO 2200 Free Egress Input dialog box appears PRO 2200 Free Egress Input Fa SIO Board Board 1 Port 3 S10 0 2 Reader Cancel Input In 4 K Disable Egress for Timezone None Select the SIO Board with which you want to configure the free egress point Select the Input that you want to use as the Free Egress Input Note The Input list contains only active input points that are not added as ADVs The contents of the list are dependent upon the SIO Board selected In the Disable Egress for Time Zone list select a time zone during which the Egress is disabled Click OK to return to Door Interlocks dialog box Status input Status Input indicates the status of the door such as normal closed forced open ajar and so on The Status Input may only be linked to an input It is normally connected to a door position
109. Type Card Frequency Repot Frequency Monthy Command File nn Wal Remote Area Next Scheduled Date amp Time 4 4 2006 fel Haut Minute E E How Card Frequency Report Configuration Configure Print Report Remote Area T Butter T Unbuffer Send Card DE Changes F Send Date and Time Cancel Apply Help Figure 9 1 Scheduling a task for the Card Frequency Report task type WIN PAK User s Guide 9 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule In addition to the basic steps perform the following steps for scheduling a task 1 In the Schedule dialog box under Card Frequency Report Configuration click Configure The Report Card Frequency Report Configuration dialog box appears Report Card Frequency Report Configuration g l X Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter Print Previews Pritt Export File Daily Time Range Estim Pages T Only list events between these hours each day ero Ta Clear All m T 2a m a Save amp Close Time one GM7 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi z 2 To set the date and time range for generating the card frequency report click the Date and Time Filter tab a To generate reports for events occurring during the specified period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From a
110. User s Guide User Interface Introduction Introduction The WIN PAK PE User Interface enables you to configure monitor and control the entities in the Access Control System The User Interface can be installed on the computer in which the Database Server resides or on One or More computers connected to the Database Server on a network Closing or quitting the User Interface does not stop the WIN PAK PE operations and the Database Server Communication servers and the other services still continue to run This chapter describes how to log on to the WIN PAK User Interface and about its various elements Elements in the User Interface include windows menus toolbars and status bar In addition you can learn how to gain access to the WIN PAK help WIN PAK User Interface Elements The elements in the WIN PAK User Interface are e Windows e Menu bar e Toolbar e Status bar Logging on to WIN PAK To log on to the WIN PAK user interface 1 Double click the WIN PAK PE User Interface icon on your desktop The Connect to Server dialog box appears 2 Type the User Name and Password Note If the User Interface is not on the same computer as that of the Database Server configure the details of the database server through the System Manager T Refer to the section Setting User Interface Workstation in the Getting Started chapter for more details on setting the database server 3 Click Connect Note Administrator h
111. We Dueira A EA N rata tiete 3 13 Knowing more about WIN PAK Pro cccceeeesessccccseccceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeees 3 13 Chapter 4 Getting Started Introd cHOm s siriene E E N EE 4 2 Remote Client Server Configuration cccsscccccssssssssssssssssccccccssssssssssssees 4 2 Domai Environment tetas acetate tear anaetes eadald meta asa nees 4 2 Adding Domain USerTS sseesseeeeeeeseeeeeseessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss 4 2 Configuring the Log On Property of WIN PAK Servers 4 4 Setting Domain Environment ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeas 4 6 Firewall EXCeptOn Seine S siipeen ae EAS 4 7 Unblocking WIN PAK Services on Windows XP SP2 4 7 Disabling Firewall in Windows 2003 Servet ccccccccseeeees 4 10 Enabling Ports in Windows XP cceeccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i ii WIN PAK User s Guide Contents WorkGroup Environment ogc seis in E E E 4 10 Comparison between Domain and Workgroup Environment 4 11 System WANA GOR onnios a aa S EE ee EE a 4 12 Seline RPC Endpoints sycisriaipi a E aeatena ial 4 12 Setting User Interface Workstation cccccccssssssccccccccecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 13 Service MEANAVER aissos anasa a a a aeaa eaii iaa 4 14 User Tntert aCei a a a aa 4 15 Loet mo Ole T A T T 4 15 Loson Ol Erea a en ERNE neat ee nee nee 4 16 Oi Ce WIN PARK erpressen en e a a set ead atesnoreds
112. access frequency falls between the frequency limits 4 To generate card frequency report based on the card holders a Click the Card Holder Filter tab Report Card Frequency Fa Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter Run from Archive Database First Mame Last Mame Print Previews Frint Card Number oOo O Kl Export File Tracking Area Estim Pages Mot Used Clear All Card Codes Account Walid Card account i Trace Card Close Cloor Unlocked b Type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder or select them by clicking the ellipsis El button c Type the Card Number of the card holder or select it by clicking the ellipsis El button d To generate the card frequency reports of the card holders accessing a specific area select an area in the Tracking Area list that are configured in Tracking and Mustering Area e Select one or more Card Codes which define the card transaction f Select the Note Fields to be displayed in the report You can also specify the range if you select the numerical note field 5 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing 6 Click Print to print the card frequency report 7 Click Close to return to the Reports window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Card History Report The Card History report contains the history of card transaction
113. and To values 4 Click OK to upload the user code details to the Galaxy panel Uploading Date and Time You can upload the current date and time of the WIN PAK system to the Galaxy panel To upload the current date and time 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Upload date and time for uploading the current date and time A confirmation message to stop the polling appears 2 Click Yes to stop polling at communication server and upload the current date and time to the panel Working on Virtual Keypad The virtual keypad is displayed in WIN PAK for the user to change the Galaxy panel configuration details To view and operate on virtual keypad 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Virtual Keypad The Galaxy Panel Virtual Keypad appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 154 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Galaxy Paneli irtual Keypad x Se Ae earch Screen Displ 12 23 TUE 27 JUN eee ee i Keypad Keys Connectivity Status 2 Use the keys on your keyboard to operate on keypad The connectivity status is shown at the bottom of the keypad When the connectivity is lost the connectivity status color changes to red 3 Click the button to close the keypad Isolating and Deleting a Galaxy Panel You can delete the configuration details of the Galaxy panel from WIN PAK However the panel ADVs must be isolated from the floor plans and the operator levels Isolating a G
114. and help files OR Editing existing language information 2 Selecting a language for translation If a language text file is present the user interface is translated based on the information present in the text file In case of a new language the text file would initially be empty You are provided with the option of entering the translated text for the captions in the dialog boxes menus and the other text present in the user interface These entries are updated in the language text file and are used for translation Note English United States is the default language used for WIN PAK and its details cannot be edited WIN PAK User s Guide 16 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Translation Language Configuration Adding or Editing Language Information You can add a new language for translation by providing the following information e the language name e the language text file e the language help file Note Before adding a language ensure that the language text file and help file chm are present in the WINPAKPRO Language Files folder Adding a New Language Note Honeywell recommends you to contact its support center for creating language text files 1 Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Available Languages Configuration Window Hel Define gt Device gt Time Management gt Card Holder gt Badge gt Select Language g f Translate Available Languages g Command Fi
115. are DS and DVIP Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 35 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration 5 Type a Name and the brief Description for the dedicated micros 6 Type the User name and Password These fields are mandatory 7 Under Communication Settings type the Machine Name or IP Address of the Dedicated Micros You can use the Browse button to select the machine name 8 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the Access DVPRO digital video The Abstract Device Record Access DVPRO DVSS dialog box appears Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 9 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Digital Video Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Select the Show check box to view the ADV details 10 Click Next to add ADVs to the digital video cameras The Dedicated Micros Camera Configuration dialog box appears Dedicated Micros Camera Configuration j2 NoADY _ 3 No ADV 4 No ADV 5 No ADV J6 No ADV No ADV 8 No ADV C 9 No ADY C110 No ADY C 11 No ADY 12 No ADY Ad Pan and tit amera Wile lt Indietro Fine Annulla 11 Configure ADVs for every camera that is attached to the digital video To configure an ADV a Select and double click
116. are changed are affected by the Workstation Defaults settings Accounts Using accounts in WIN PAK you can group cards and card holders whose details can be modified by specific operators An account can be created with an account name and mapped to the operators who can access the account Newly added cards and cardholders must be added to the specific account Therefore card holder tab menus in the WIN PAK UI are available only when an account is selected WIN PAK User s Guide 5 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Accounts Adding an Account To add an account 1 Choose Account gt Edit The Account window opens ioixi Y Name I Datat ooo Account l Detail View Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Search For Delete Sort By Isolate Name Update List Print Report 2 Click Add to add a new account The Account dialog box opens Account Record f x Account Email Configuration Account Hame rT Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data B Data 7 Data 8 po Data 9 Po Data 10 Cancel Apply Help 3 In the Account tab type the Account Name The account name may include a maximum of 30 characters and is mandatory 4 Enter the additional information about the account from Data 1 to Data 10 For example you can enter the category of the account site name and so on 5 Click th
117. as doors If you have not set the anti passback option the readers are set for a free egress configuration If the anti passback option is set the reader settings are changed to anti passback settings In addition you can associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to the reader and the input point After the association you can set unset galaxy groups or arm disarm vista partitions using the privileged card Present the privileged card to the reader and press the input button to unset the galaxy groups or disarm the vista partitions However Present the privileged card to the reader to set the galaxy groups or arm the vista partitions associated to the reader To define a reader 1 In the Panel Configuration Readers dialog box select a reader from the list to view its settings The dialog box displays the panel configuration in a graphical form WIN PAK User s Guide 11 108 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration ADW Card FIN Time one Add FIN Only Time Zone Edit he e Isolate Delete GroupsPartitions zz Input to Setf rn Gros Partitions Anti Passback Vista Panel Partition 1 Vista Panel Partition 2 None In fe Hard Galaxy Panel Group 1 C Gut Soft Galaxy Panel Group 5 Groups Partiti Delete one Grps Partitions M Door Free Egress Input shunts Status Input lt Shunt Device R eader 1 Pulse No Action Direct Point Duti Free Egress Input Pu
118. b Under Frequency type the Lower Frequency Limit and Higher Frequency Limit to filter cards between these limits Note If you want to generate a report on cards that are not used select the Zero Frequency check box Te c To generate the card frequency reports by filtering the readers type the Reader name under Location or select the reader by clicking the ellipsis El button d To generate the frequency filter reports for access areas type the Access Area name under Location or select the access area by clicking the ellipsis E button e To include only certain devices click Filter ADVs to select the ADVs In the Filter Devices dialog box select the appropriate ADV or ADV type from the tree and click OK f Under Disposition select one of the following actions that must be performed on the cards that are filtered for frequency report e None Perform no action on the cards e Deactivate and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate and generate a report for the cards whose access frequency falls between the frequency limits e Deactivate Detach and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate detach and generate the report for the cards whose access frequency falls between the frequency limits WIN PAK User s Guide 17 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report e Reassign cards between limits to Access Level Reassign and generate the report for the cards whose
119. b Under Time Zone select one of the following options Table 17 19 Describing the time zone options Used Generates the report only on the used time zones Unused Generates the report only on the unused time zones Both Generates the report on the used and unused time zones 5 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 6 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 7 Click Close to return to the Reports window WIN PAK User s Guide 17 60 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Tracking and Mustering Area Report To generate a tracking and mustering area report 1 In the Reports window select the Tracking and Mustering Area report and click Report Options The Report Tracking and Mustering Area dialog box appears Report Tracking and Mustering Area X Filter Run from Archive Database Print Preview Print Export File Estim Fages Clear All Close A E Eo ete eee ee No filter or sorting options are provided for the access area report 2 Click Print Preview to view the Access Area Report prior to printing 3 Click Print to send the report to your printer 4 Click Close to return to the Reports window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 61 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report WIN PAK User s Guide 17 62 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Appendix Cold Restart on Power surge Caution
120. based on the selected option e Account e Card Holder e Access Level e Door Reader e Card Status e Activation Date Range e Expiration Date Range Note You can use the ellipsis button to search for these options T d Under No of columns to print e Select Print fewer columns if you want the report to contain only basic details of the card such as account first name last name access level and status e Select Print all columns if you want the report to contain all the details of the card 3 To sort the card report a Click the Sort tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Report Card Holder E X Card Holder Filter Sort Advanced Card Filter Bun from Archive Database I Sort Order Print Preview Print i Ascending C Descending Export File Estim Pages First Hame Z Clear All i Ascending Descending tHE Close Sort Orders Not Sorted i Ascending C Descending Under Sort Order 1 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the first level Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field Under Sort Order 2 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the second level If you select Not Sorted the report is sorted on the basis of the field selected in Sort Order 1 Click Ascending or Descendi
121. based on the selected panel type b Select a unique Panel Address c Click Next to add readers to a panel The Readers dialog box appears Type the Name of the reader Select the Time Zone during which the reader needs to be active Specify the Pulse time The WIN PAK system sends pulses to the panel at a defined interval for checking the panel status 6 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Repeat steps 2 to 7 for each reader and click Next The Continue dialog box appears Click Back if you want to change the settings or click Next to add a new panel and return to the Configure page 5 Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click Pm Done ia and perform the steps that follow Adding Readers to a P Series Panel This option is enabled only if a P Series panel is added To add readers to a P Series panel l a2 o ay a In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click Add Readers to a P Series Panel and click Next The Readers dialog box appears Pf QUICK START WIZARD Readers QUICK START WIZARD Readers ACCOUNT Add readers to panel Swords Panel3 Readers provide an access to TIMEZONES cardholders CARDS SITE The number of readers shown LOOP inthe Readers page depends PANEL on the panel ype selected Ma e aa a Piles time siise tine for each reader an Panel Name Time zone pulse time for each reader and a Panel3
122. button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in the corresponding boxes d To generate reports for messages sent and received during a particular period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes f Select the standard time zone in the Time Zone list 3 To filter log type of the log events to be included in the report a Click the Log Filter tab Report Galaxy Panel Log x Date and Time Filter Log Filter Run from Archive Database Print Preview Print Log Type W Zone W Group W User V Module Export File Estim Pages Clear All Close REEL b Click the ellipsis El button next to Panel to open Select dialog box c Search for the panel and click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 17 44 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report d Under Log Type select the log types such as Zone Group User or Module 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Guard Tour Report To generate a guard tour report 1 In the Reports window select the Floor Plan report and click Report Options The Report Guard Tour dialog box appears x Guard Tour Filter Cort Run f
123. capture a different image with the same index number the new A N photo replaces the existing photo Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information To attach a badge to a card holder 1 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Card Biometrics tab 2 In the Frame Selected list select Photo to attach a photo or badge to the card holder The Photo frame is highlighted and the attached photo is displayed in the preview area 3 Under Badge Layout select Badge Back or Badge Front to attach a badge to a card holder at the back or front Basic Into Personal Details Educational Info Employment Details Cards Attach User Codes Card Biometrics o o D Ta mm gu cL a T Badge Layout Name Honeywell r i Photo g s Sa An O T Ma A un pa A mo a 4 n D a ary Cd ak a mh 2 D wn Z Oo cc a E Da Badge Back i Badge Front Frame Selected Fhoto Eapture Export Import Delete 4 Select the badge design in the Badge Layout Name list The selected badge design is displayed in the preview area Tip To detach a badge select None in the Badge Layout Name list Attaching a signature to a card holder 1 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Card Biometrics tab 2 In the Frame Selected list select Signature to attach a signature to the card holder The Signat
124. card in the Access Level list You must assign an access level if you have selected the Status as Active or Trace 11 Type the Issue number to trace the number of times the card is issued 12 Type the unique PIN number The PIN number adds more security to the card 13 Select the Privileged check box if the card must be assigned as a privileged card The card holder can set or unset the galaxy groups associated to the WIN PAK User s Guide 8 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information reader on which the card is presented If the Vista feature is enabled the card holder can or arm or disarm the vista partitions Refer to the Configuring a reader to the panel section in the chapter Device Map for more details on associating galaxy groups or vista partitions to the reader Note This option is available only if you avail a license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel in WIN PAK i 14 Describe the card details in Description 15 Select the Visitor check box if the card holder is a visitor Note This option is available only if you avail a special license for integrating WIN PAK with Lobby Works T 16 Under P Series Trigger Control type the User Level number to trigger certain controls when this card is used You can use or L buttons to increase or decrease the current index number Refer to the Configuring triggers and procedures section in the chapter De
125. circuit Normally Closed circuit acts as an NC circuit Inverted e Relay defaults to an energized state e Pulsing the output de energizes it for its designated pulse time or pulses the output off At the end of the pulse time the output re energizes The output responds the same upon a valid egress a valid card read and or a manual pulse command e Energizing a relay turns the relay off LED off e De energizing a relay turns the relay on LED on e Normally Open circuit acts as a Normally Closed circuit Normally Closed circuit acts as a Normally Open circuit 28 Select the Interlocking check box to activate the interlocking for a particular output point Refer to the Interlocking Points on SIO Board section in this chapter for more details on interlocking 29 Click the Reader tab to configure readers for SIO board Note While configuring readers you can associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to the reader and the input point If you associate galaxy groups or vista partitions after the association you can set or unset galaxy groups or arm or disarm vista partitions using the privileged card To set the galaxy groups or arm the vista partitions associated to the reader you must present the privileged card to the reader and press the input button However to unset the galaxy groups or disarm the vista partitions you must present the privileged card to the reader i WIN PAK User s Guide 11 128 Documen
126. click Ail in the toolbar The Card Holder window appears fit Card Holder 3 In the Basic Info tab type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder These fields are mandatory Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information 4 Note The card holder details are specific to an account Therefore select an account before adding a card holder You cannot change the account while adding the card holder details Click OK The basic information is saved Providing card holder additional information Using the user defined tabs you can add the additional information of the card holder l 2 3 i WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Card gt Card Holder The Card Holder window appears Click Add The Card Holder dialog box appears Select the user defined tab to add the additional information of the card holder Note The user defined tabs are displayed in the Card Holder dialog box only if you have already defined these tabs in Card Holder Tab Layout Card Holder Jasmine Cynthia J x Basic Info Personal Details Educational Info Employment Details Cards Attach User Codes Card Biometrics Note Field Card Holder Data Enter the additional information of the card holder in the fields under the Card Holder Data column Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining user defined tabs Click Apply The additional info
127. command to the panel WIN PAK User s Guide 9 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule e Run Command File This schedule runs a command file at a specific time in a defined frequency e Run Guard Tour This schedule runs the guard tour in a defined interval e Run Report Generates the report at a defined interval e Send Date and Time Sends the system date and time to all the panels attached to WIN PAK e Update Custom Access Level Updates custom access level of cards in the panels at a defined frequency Refer to the Task Type section in this chapter for more details on task types and scheduling a task 5 In the Frequency list select how often the task is to be performed 6 Under Next Scheduled Date and Time select the date and enter the time in hours and minutes for the task to be performed WE To select the date click the ellipsis El button and select the date in the calendar e To enter the time type the Hour and Minute The hour ranges from 0 to 23 and minute ranges from 0 to 59 e To enter the current date and time click Now Task Type For every Task type that you select in the Schedule dialog box a different set of options appears This section describes the task types and guides you how to schedule a task for the various task types Activate and Deactivate Cards Select this task type to schedule a task for activating and deactivating the cards depending on the car
128. control area clear the presence of an ADV of the access DVPRO digital video in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Deleting an access DVPRO digital video After deleting the child nodes and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the access DVPRO digital video To delete an access DVPRO digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices that are added to the device map 3 Right click the access DVPRO digital video and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the digital video 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion The access DVPRO digital video is deleted from the device map Configuring a Fusion Digital Video To add a Fusion digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Digital Video The Digital Video Configuration dialog box appears Digital ideo Configuration x Name DYRA Description Del Type Fusion Show User Password Admin r Communication Settings Machine Name or IP Address Browse Port Number 4000 Cancel Help 3 Select the Type of digital vi
129. delete the command file server To delete a command file server l 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display servers and devices added to the device map Right click the command file server and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click OK to confirm the deletion The command file server is deleted from the device map Guard Tour Server Before using the Guard Tour functions you must configure the Guard Tour Server Normally this server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Adding a Guard Tour Server To add a guard tour server L 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Guard Tour Server The Guard Tour Server Configuration window appears Guard Tour Server Configuration x ADY Guard Tour Server Configuration Add Mame Guard Tour Edit Description r Isolate Machine name Delete JIEWODT2kaczzZ01s a l Show Protocol end point 5577 Cancel Apply Help Type the Name of the schedule server and the Description for guard tour server Create an ADV for the guard tour server Click Add under ADV to display the Abstract Device Record Server dialog box Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapt
130. denied on the reader even for the valid card read Note The Card PIN Time Zone and PIN Only Time Zone are enabled only if you opt for the Keypad option Te 7 To use the reader without attaching it to a door clear the Door check box For example a reader used in the muster area can be used without a door 8 Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties to create an ADV for the reader Note Once a reader is added to the device map you cannot attach the reader to a door or detach it from the door Therefore ensure the reader s usage before adding it to the Device Map oe If a reader is not attached to a door it remains as just a reader without any door properties If a reader is attached to a door the graphical form depicts the way the door is configured 9 To associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to this reader click Groups Partitions and select the groups from the list Note To dissociate the galaxy group or vista partition from the reader select the galaxy group or vista partition and click Delete Grps Partitions 10 To associate galaxy groups to the input point select the input point from the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list Note Only the input points that are configured in this panel and not interlocked are listed in the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list i 11 To change the input point used as a free egress input a Click Free Egress in the graphical form The Config
131. details of SIO Board WIN PAK User s Guide 11 126 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration SIO Board Configuration M 1 No ADV m 2 No ADY F Interlocking ill 24 Select the check box to select an output point and create an ADV Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 25 In the Time Zone list select a time zone during which the output point must be shunt or deactivated 26 Select Sec Min or Hr and enter a value in the Pulse Time field to set the amount of time that the output point is energized when triggered By default the field is set to zero but can be set from 0 through 32400 seconds 0 through 540 minutes 0 through 9 hours Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 127 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 27 In the Output Inverter list select a default setting for the output Table 11 6 Describing the Output Inverter settings Output Setting Normal e Relay defaults to a de energized state e Pulsing the output energizes it for its designated pulse time or pulses the output on At the end of the pulse time the output de energizes The output responds the same upon a valid egress a valid card read and or a manual pulse command e Energizing a relay turns the relay on LED on e De energizing a relay turns the relay off LED off e Normally Open circuit acts as a NO
132. duress 90 PFR Power Fail Reroute 89 PIN and Time Zone for PIN 87 Pulse Time 93 97 Report Alarms 92 Reverse Read LEDs 87 Setting the card format 84 Setting the panel options 86 Shunt Time 91 96 Site Codes 87 Status of the panel 83 Supervised 92 N 485 Local Connection 27 N 485 Remote Dialup 27 Nested Areas 7 Example 7 Network cards 5 WIN PAK User s Guide network environment 8 Note Field Template Report 51 NS2 Panel 98 Adding 98 Advanced Options 104 Anti Passback 109 Assigning time zones and holiday group 100 Card PIN Time Zone 110 Configuring a reader 108 Configuring input points 105 Configuring output points 107 Continuous Card Reads 102 Debounce Time 106 Direct Point 111 Duress Option 104 First Valid Read Activates Time Zone 108 Forgiveness 102 Free Egress 110 Global Anti passback 101 Host Grant 102 104 Initialization Command 105 Interlocking 107 Keypads 102 Outputs for duress 105 PIN 102 PIN Only Time Zone 110 Report ON OFF 108 Reverse Read LEDs 102 Setting the card format 99 Setting the panel options 101 Shunt Time 106 Site Codes 103 Supervised 106 O Online Help 13 Operator Actions Report 53 Toolbar buttons 55 Operator Level Report 57 Operator Levels 8 Adding 8 Document 7 001009 Revision B Configuring 9 Copying 13 Editing 13 Isolating and Deleting 14 Operator Report 52 Operators 8 Orientation 8 Output Points 27 P Pan Tilt Camera 27 Panel 27 Panel Configuration 82 Parameter
133. end of the 30 second Held Open Time the alarm is activated T 6 In the Mask Alarms for Time Zone list select a time zone during which the alarms must be masked 7 Click OK to return to the Door Interlocks dialog box 8 Click OK to save door interlocks Configuring triggers and procedures In response to a panel event trigger define a set of actions a panel must carry out The occurrence of the event triggers the execution of the procedure e Triggers and procedures are used to define interlocks an action on a point triggered by an action on a different point e Assigning points and readers to time zones can also be done through triggers and procedures on the P Series Intelligent Controller e User triggers are those defined for site specific events and actions Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 135 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration e User triggers are added edited or deleted at any time from the Triggers and Procedures dialog boxes of the P Series Configuration dialog boxes e System triggers are those created when points are assigned to interlock definitions System triggers can only be viewed and cannot be edited in Triggers and Procedures dialog box System Triggers and Procedures System triggers and procedures are created as a result of an interlock defined on one of the P Series Configuration SIO Board Inputs or Outputs tabs After an action is assigned to an interlock point two system t
134. end point Show 5599 3 Type a Name for the command file server 4 Type the Description for the command file server 5 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the command file server The Abstract Device Record Server dialog box appears Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 6 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Communication Server Configuration dialog box Notes i e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details 7 Enter the Machine Name for the communication server Tip To find the machine name a Right click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears b Click the Computer Name tab The machine name is displayed in the Full computer name field c Note down the machine name and click OK 8 Type a Protocol end point number that is not used by any another device on the network Note Each server must have a unique Protocol end point that can range from 1024 to 9999 The default number of Protocol end point need not be changed However you can change the number if you have multiple servers in your device map oe Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration 9 Click Next to proceed to the final dialog box
135. exiting a building Anti passback violation occurs at the following two scenarios e Jn Out In If you have entered the building using the card and exited from the building without using the card And then if you try to enter the building the access is denied Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 101 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration i i WIN PAK User s Guide e QOut In Out If you have entered the building without using the card and exited from the building using your card And then if you try to enter the building the access is denied Notes e Anti passback requires a reader on each side of the door If anti passback is selected for a panel in a given area the anti passback is globally implemented Forgiveness Anti passback violation can be forgiven by selecting the Forgiveness option When this option is selected all cards are reset during midnight Therefore the cardholders who have violated the anti passback option can now access their cards to enter the building This option is enabled only if Global Anti passback is selected Note If the anti passback option is not selected WIN PAK defaults to a free egress configuration In this case the door can be activated by a button motion detector or other devices For example with a NS2 panel card reader 1 activates one door and card reader 2 activates a different door Inputs 3 and 4 are reserved for the exit devices for these two doors which r
136. floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the CCTV switcher 5 To isolate operator levels from a CCTV switcher ADV a Click the Operator Levels tab The operator levels associated to the CCTV switcher are listed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the CCTV switcher and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the CCTV switcher c To remove the CCTV Switcher from the control area clear the presence of a CCTV switcher ADV in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 To isolate action group from a CCTV switcher ADV a Click the Action Groups tab The action groups associated to the CCTV switcher are listed b Select the action groups to be isolated from the CCTV switcher and click Remove The selected action groups are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the action groups from the CCTV switcher 7 To isolate ADV from a CCTV switcher ADV a Click the Action Groups tab The ADVs associated to the CCTV switcher are listed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 73 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map RS 232 Connection b Select the ADVs to be isolated from the CCTV switcher and click Remove The selected ADVs are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the ADVs from the CCTV switcher 8 Click OK Deleting a CCTV switcher Isolate the f
137. floor plans associated to the tracking and muster server is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the tracking and muster server and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the tracking and muster server 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of tracking and muster server a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the command file server is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the command file server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels c To remove the tracking and muster server from the control area clear the presence ofan ADV of the tracking and muster server in the control area clear the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Deleting a tracking and muster server After isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the tracking and muster server To delete a tracking and muster server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the tracking and muster server and click Delete A message asking for confirmation app
138. following message appears po Device a Devices AB Access DYPRO BS 485 fj 485 n 1000 Panel ot NS2 E El N52 panel WIN PAK PE JAN There ate no available ports on the selected communicatio server The requested move is not possible 8 8 Se Comm Server eG 485 ACKINAK Loop Baan C 100 Loop TG Mireck D Sariar Moving direct panels across communication servers To move a direct panel across communication servers 1 Select a direct panel not attached to a loop in the source communication server 2 Drag and drop the direct panel onto the destination communication server WIN PAK User s Guide 11 188 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group I x Eee ee Bee a CommandFile 5 Te COMSERVER ee lt 2 485 PCI ra ag ACKINGK Modem pool PA C 100 Loop BS CCT Switcher eo Modem Pool vn P Series H O P Series Loop ee P Series Modem pool BGT R5 232 Loop COMSERVER 2 D485 ACKINAK loop ag ag ACKINAK Modem pool cr C 100 Loop Cursor while moving ve P Series HO P Series Loop P Series Modem pool Euas a R5 232 Loop Di a COMSERVER 2 oo 485 ACK NAK loop 485 465 ee P Series 2 fee a R5 232 Connection ae oe R5 232 Panel 2 Fusion ew Ea tod Guard Tour br a Schedule Server me RS 232 Connection BGT R5 232 Panel i veel Fusion bees fied tod Guard Tour ic D Schedule Server
139. for all entrances in this area to allow access through these entrances for a particular time zone Select the time zone in the Time Zone list to determine periods of access 5 To search for a specific reader or device in a tree right click and select Find Type the full text and click OK The reader or device is selected 6 To refresh the list right click and select Refresh Copying the access level WIN PAK enables you to create a copy of the existing access level with the same properties To create a copy of an access level 1 Choose Card gt Access Level The Access Level window appears 2 Select the access level to be copied and click Copy The Access Level dialog box appears with the existing set up 3 Type the new Name for the access level By default the name is prefixed by the word Copy of 4 Change other settings if required and click OK This duplicates the access level Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Isolating and deleting access levels You cannot delete an access level when it is associated to a card or card holder In such a case you must isolate the access level from the card and card holder and reassign it to an alternate access level To isolate the access level l 2 5 Choose Card gt Access Level The Access Level window appears Select the access level to be deleted and then click Isolate
140. for the sound files or click Browse to locate the sound files folder By default the path is set to C Program Files WINPAKPRO Sound Files 3 In Path to Language Files text box type the path for the language files or click Browse to locate the language files folder By default the path is set to C Program Files WINPAKPRO Language Files 4 Click Apply to save the changes WIN PAK User s Guide 5 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings Setting the default wallpaper for WIN PAK User Interface To set the default wallpaper for WIN PAK 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Wallpaper tab Workstation Defaults Fa Defaults Alarm Printer Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore Default Bitmap None Colored Background Ealan m i Bitmap C Program Files WIN PARPRO Yw allpaperyyallPap Ea OF Cancel Apply Help 2 Click any of the following options for setting wallpaper defaults Table 5 3 Describing options for setting wallpaper Default Bitmap Retains the default bitmap set for the User Interface No wallpaper is set for the User Interface Colored Background Sets a wallpaper color for the User Interface Click Color and choose the background color Set a bitmap as a background for the User Interface When you select this option type the path of the image file or click Browse to locate the image file 3 Click Apply to save th
141. from WIN PAK to the C 100 loop Increasing the interval improves the bandwidth The default interval is set to 60 seconds as it is an optimal value 9 Select Buffer all panels on exit to buffer the events in all the panels when the communication server stops 10 Select Unbuffer all panels on startup to automatically unbuffer all panel events to WIN PAK when the communication server restarts 11 Select the standard Time Zone based on the loop location 12 Set the Panel Defaults for the panel loop Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 49 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops a I O Poll Interval Select the interval at which the signal must be sent to the panel to verify the communication and check the panel s input and output states By default the frequency interval is 60 seconds b Panel CMD Retry Count Specify the number of times a command must be resent to the panel if the event of the panel is not responding to the command By default the command is resent 3 times c Panel CMD Time Out Specify the waiting time for receiving a response from the panel and for time out the command By default the loop waits for 5 seconds 13 Click Next to set the port for the loop AS 232 Port Single Panel Configuration Port Settings Bits per Second 50 Data Bits fe Parity None Stop Bits hoo H IP Address or Node name Encryption Password lt Back Cancel Help 14 In th
142. fulfill the recommended requirements 2 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation System Requirements e Ifyou want to install WIN PAK in a computer that supports more than 100 readers 50 000 cards and 255 communication ports your computer must fulfill the performance requirements Hardware Minimum Recommended Performance Component Processor Intel Intel Pentium WE Ill Map 2 O O S Pentium IV Par Xeon 4 e 1GHz CPU 2 8GHz CPU 3 0GHz CPU PRAM OOOO 256 megabytes MB 512 megabytes MB 8 Gigabytes Hard Disk 2 1 GB with minimum 40 GB SATA or SCSI 36 GB 15k RPM SCSI free space OR hard disk in a RAID 5 36 GB 10k RPM SCSI configuration Serial l 2 As per the requirement communication ports Secondary Storage Tape or CD burner Tape or DVD burner DLT or DAT tape 1 2 if badging 1 2 if badging 1 2 if badging Monitor Display Size 15 Inches SVGA Size 17 Inches Size 19 inch Resolution 1024 x 768 Resolution 1024 x 768 Resolution 1280 x 1024 Colors 256 color Colors True color Color True color Pointing Device Mouse PS 2 mouse Mouse PS 2 mouse Mouse preferred preferred Video Capture Card A video capture card is required for transmitting the analog signals to digital signals and to fed the source of video to a computer where WIN PAK is installed The source of video may be a CCTV switcher or any camera used for photo snapping The video capture card can interact with the CCTV switcher and the video bad
143. having access in a selected access level Entrances not having access Entrances having limited access WIN PAK Help This section describes how to access the help topics of WIN PAK as and when you are working with the user interface Accessing the Online Help To access the WIN PAK Pro Online Help choose Help gt Help Topics or press F1 on the keyboard Accessing Help on Web You can access any information related to the Honeywell Access Systems from the web Through the web site you can view the Honeywell contact details and in addition you can register WIN PAK To access the Honeywell Access Systems website 1 Choose Help gt Honeywell Access Systems gt On the Web The Honeywell Access Systems website appears To view Honeywell contact details 1 Choose Help gt Honeywell Access Systems gt Contacts The Honeywell Access Systems website appears 2 Click Contact Us The contact details are displayed 3 To obtain the contact details of a specific team click the corresponding link Example If you want to obtain the contact details of technical support click Tech Support Knowing more about WIN PAK Pro To know about the copyright build and serial number details of WIN PAK Pro 1 Choose Help gt About WIN PAK PE The WIN PAK PE dialog box appears with the details of the build number copyright information serial number and URL of Honeywell Access Systems Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 13 WIN PA
144. hh mm type the grace period in hours and minutes allowed for presenting the card later than the time specified in Time hh mm 9 In hh mm type the grace period in hours and minutes allowed for presenting the card earlier than the time specified in Time hh mm 10 To add check point alarms to the reader or the input point select the reader or input device and click Update under Alarms Refer to the Setting Check Point Alarms section in this chapter for information on setting check point alarms 11 To view the check point alarms that are already set for the input point or reader select the Visible check box under Alarms The alarms set for the check point is displayed in the Abstract Device Record dialog box Note Clear the Visible check box to close the Abstract Device Record dialog box 12 To change the display order of the checkpoints e Select a reader or input point in the Selected Check Points list and click 1 to shift it to the top of the list e Select a reader or input point in the Selected Check Points list and click J to shift it to the bottom of the list Note Changing the display order of the check points does not affect the sequence in which the check points are accessed The check points are accessed only at the time entered in the Time hh mm box and after considering the grace periods Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours 13 To re
145. holder To edit the card details a Select the card from the list of cards and click Edit The Card Record dialog box appears b Change the required card details and click OK To delete a card a Select the card from the list of cards and click Delete A confirmation message appears for deletion b Click OK The card is deleted from the database To detach a card a Select the card from the list and click Detach The card is detached from the card holder Note If you detach a card it is dissociated from the card holder and not deleted from the card list Attaching user codes to a card holder A card holder can be attached to the user codes for accessing and working on the Galaxy panel or Vista panel To attach user codes to the card holder 1 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Attach User Codes tab Note The Attach User Codes tab is displayed in the Card holder dialog box only if you procure the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel features in WIN PAK WIN PAK User s Guide 8 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Card Holder Jasmine Cynthia x Basic Info Educational Info Personal Details Cards Attach User Codes Card Biometrics Panel Name m Available User Codes 5 USEROS 50 USERS50 100 USERI 200 USER2 222 USERAA 241 ATM241 242 ATM242 243 ATM243 244 ATM244 ATM245 User Codes associated Galaxy
146. holder are removed from the user interface One tracking area can be nested inside the other This enables better tracking of card holders in a specific area For example if Building1 is created as a tracking area then Floor 1 and Floor 2 can be created as nested areas in Building1 When a card holder enters Building1 the card read details are recorded and displayed in the user interface When the card holder moves to Floor1 the card read details are displayed for Floor1 Mustering Areas Mustering areas are logical areas defined with readers used for tracking card holder movements in the case of emergency situations like fire Muster readers are placed in the mustering areas which must be accessed by the card holders who are moving from the tracking areas into the mustering area The details of the card holders moving into the mustering areas are recorded and in addition displayed in the Tracking and Mustering View window of the user interface Tracking and Mustering tree In the Tracking and Mustering tree of the User Interface the tracking and mustering areas are configured as Branches and the readers are configured as Entrances WIN PAK User s Guide 11 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Exit Areas The entrances that are not defined as a part of the tracking and the mustering areas are considered as exit areas During WIN PAK in
147. holder information in the excel sheet 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 Enter the card and card holder information as in the order you defined in the WIN PAK Import Utility The name of the this sheet must be Sheet1 3 Save the excel sheet in the xls or csv format Note When you import an excel sheet to WIN PAK cards are assigned to the respective card holders as a row in the excel sheet contains complete information of a card and card holder The following image depicts the typical excel sheet that contains the card and card holder information T WIN PAK User s Guide 8 36 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information Columns Order Order Name First Name Card 3478 will be assigned to the card holder Flores Nelson Last Name Card Number Issue Number FIN Status Melson 3478 201 Warren Darmond 4893 127 326 2 12 4 2006 aro There a acr 4na 4734 4 Figure 8 2 Entering card holder data in the excel sheet Tips e Do not enter the field names in the first row If you enter the field names to identify the columns delete it before you import the data into WIN PAK e For the Status field type 1 2 or 4 to indicate the card status as Active Inactive or Trace Note Leave the Activation Date field blank if you specify the card status as Active or Trace T e Ensure that access levels are configured in WIN PAK for the respective account befor
148. in the Guard Tour Record dialog box 6 Under the Valid Only column in the Selected Check Points list specify the validity requirement of cards that must be accessed at readers e Type Y if only a valid card must be accessed at a reader e Type N ifa valid or an invalid card can be accessed at a reader Invalid cards are cards that do not have access rights on a specific reader Note N A is displayed for input points 7 To add check point alarms to the reader or the input point select the reader or input device and click Update under Alarms Refer to the Setting Check Point Alarms section in this chapter for information on setting check point alarms 8 To view the check point alarms that are already set for the input point or reader select the Visible check box under Alarms The alarms set for the check point is displayed in the Abstract Device Record dialog box Note Clear the Visible check box to close the Abstract Device Record dialog box 9 To remove a reader or an input point from the list of check points select the reader or input point in Selected Check Points and click X Setting Check Point Alarms You can track the movements of a guard by setting check point alarms For example alarms can be configured to track the various actions of the guard such as missing a check point visiting a check point at a time earlier than the stipulated time or visiting the check point at a time later than the stip
149. is the rejected card Valid Card The accessed card is the valid card Copying and Moving Loops and Panels The following functions can be performed across communication servers e Move an existing panel from one communication server to the other e Copy an existing panel to create a new panel with same settings in other communication server Moving Loops and Panels You can move loops and panels across communication servers if the following conditions are met 1 Ports are available in the destination communication server 2 The same type of loops are available in the destination communication server while moving panels attached to loops For example when you move a panel attached to a P Series loop the destination communication server must have a P Series Loop Moving loops across communication servers To move a loop across communication servers 1 Select a loop to be moved in the source communication server 2 Drag and drop the loop onto the destination communication server A message appears indicating that the port is reset for the loop Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 187 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group o Devices access DVPRO Comm Server J WIN PAK PE x eiin vas been reset 3 Click OK The loop is moved to the destination communication server 5 Note If the destination communication server does not contain a port and if you B attempt to move a loop the
150. list contains three more zones for you to define the custom T zone types WIN PAK User s Guide 11 158 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration ADW Zone Type Edit Mo Reponse 1 Partition Marne Mone Isolate ith Delete 2 Vista Panel Partition 3 O 18 No ADY lt Back Cancel Help 2 In the Zone Type list select the type of the zone 3 In the Partition Name list select the partition to which the zone belongs 4 Click Next to configure the vista panel outputs The Panel Configuration Output dialog box appears Configuring the vista panel outputs 1 In the Panel Configuration Output dialog box select an output and create an ADV for the output x Marcie aD Vista Panel Output 1 Vista Panel Output 2 O 4 No ADY O5 N o ADY L E Mo ADW Delete OF No ADY 8 No ADY 9 No ADY O10 No ADY O11 Mo ADY QO 12 o ADY O13 Mo ADY O 14 o ADY 15 No ADY 116 Mo ADY O 17 Mo ADY on E Edit Isolate lt Back Cancel Help 2 Click Next to define the user codes The Panel Configuration User Codes dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 159 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Defining user codes The user code is a unique code with a set of privileges for the user to work on the Vista panel keypad These user codes are associated to the card holder for t
151. loop e gp CommandFile Ol COMSERYER e E COMSERVER 2 oia Guard Tour att Track amp Muster 8 FA Databases H E Floor Plans Heg Reports Ee a User Interfaces Add Edit Copy Delete Isolate Red indicates no rights Yellow indicates view rights Green indicates operate rights view and edit White indicates delete rights Configuring rights summary chart Branch Database Device Change Delete Max None Operate Same View Operate Specific Operator Level Tree x x x x x Command File x x x Individual Command File x x Control Area x x x x Device Control Area x x X x Database x K x x Individual Database x x Floor Plans x x x Individual Floor Plans x x Reports x x x Individual Reports x x User Interface x x x x Individual User Interface x X x Options Description Change amp Operate Grant change rights to all database Grant operate rights to all controls and user interfaces Delete Grant delete rights for all database as a whole Grant change rights for all fields Maximum Grant delete rights to all databases Grant operate rights to all controls and user interfaces None Remove all rights from all items Operate Specific Same View WIN PAK User s Guide Grant operate rights to all items from branch or specific devices Leave all rights as they are Grant view rights to all items 9 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System S
152. millimeters or inches Click Apply to apply the dimensions to the badge outline 10 Click OK to apply the dimensions to the badge outline and to return to the Badge Definition window Note To change the badge orientation from landscape horizontal to portrait ia vertical enter a dimension in the Height box that is greater than the dimension in the Width box WIN PAK User s Guide 7 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Adjusting the Zoom factor The Zoom factor decides the view of the badge outline in the Badge Definition window 1 Right click in the Badge Definition window and select Zoom Factor The Zoom dialog box is displayed Fit window Custom fioo Fa rea 2 Select the required zoom factor or click Custom and type the zoom percentage 3 Click OK The badge outline in the Badge Definition window enlarges or reduces by the selected zoom percentage Specifying Grid Settings Grids are evenly spaced points on the badge layout area that assist in sizing and aligning items You can use the grid as a visual aid for placing items on the badge layout You can also enable the Snap setting for the grid which pulls any item moving close to the grid mark 1 Right click in the Badge Definition window and then click Grid Settings The Badge Layout Grid Settings dialog box appears Badge Layout Grid Settings Fa Spacing 1 92 in 1 mm 1416 in 2mm 1 8 in 3 mm
153. modem pool ia is copied and not the panels attached to it Initializing Panels Programming information entered into the WIN PAK System is sent to the panels before it takes effect e When panels are first added to the system they are initialized so that the information entered during panel configuration 1s sent to the panels e Likewise whenever there is a change in the panel configuration the new information is sent to the panels e The only exceptions to this are changes to individual cards and card holders which are automatically sent to the panels e Panels are initialized from the Floor Plan view the background or from the Control Map Note Panel Configuration Options reset all of your panel s programming Honeywell recommends that you select all options select the Select All check box when sending the Panel Configuration Options T Refer to the Initializing Panels from Floor Plan section in the chapter Floor Plan for details on panel initializing on floor plans Refer to the Initializing a Panel from Control Map section in the chapter Defining Areas for details on panel initializing on floor plans Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 191 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group WIN PAK User s Guide 11 192 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas 17 In this chapter Introduction 11 2 Defining Access Areas 11 2 Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas 11 6 Defining Control Areas 11
154. move AN Notes pats ea e You cannot move an entrance from and to the Exit Area branch e You cannot move an entrance from a mustering area branch to a tracking area branch Renaming a Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the branch you want to rename 3 Click Configure The Tracking and Mustering Area Configuration dialog box appears Tracking and Mustering Area Configurati x Mame Main Building Cancel D Mustering 4 Type the new branch name in the Name box 5 Click OK to rename the branch Removing a Branch or an Entrance 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the branch or the entrance you want to remove 3 Click Remove A message asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to remove the selected branch or entrance Note You cannot remove the Exit Area branch i Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Finding an Item in the tree l i Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears Right click the mustering area branch or entrance and click Find The Find Item dialog box appears Find ttem Sti Xx tem in tree to Search for Esi Cancel Type the item you want to search in the Item in tree
155. name E1 OO TsPSLP261 5 El Protocol end point 5568 Cancel Apply Help 4 Edit the required details of the schedule server x Refer to the Adding a Schedule Server section in this chapter for configuring guard tour server You can delete a schedule server only if you isolate the device or an ADV of schedule server from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a schedule server To isolate a schedule server l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the schedule server and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 11 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration x Floor Plans Operator Levels Operator Levels referencing device Schedule Server Remove Remove All V Present in Control Area Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of the schedule server a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the schedule server is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the schedule server and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans 5 To isolate operator levels from a device or an ADV of schedule server a Click the Operator Leve
156. of WIN PAK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 178 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 32 Describing P Series Dial Up Actions Action Message Description Incorrect Password An incorrect password attempt was made to access the controller Panel Configuration Error An error was generated by an incorrect panel configuration Panel Remote Dial Up Failed The N 485 remote dial up is NOT Working properly Panel Remote The N 485 remote dial up is working properly Dial Up Successful Poll Response The P Series Intelligent Controller is NOT responding to computer Alarm polling Poll Response The P Series Intelligent Controller is responding to computer polling Normal Primary Power Failure P Series Intelligent Controller primary power has been lost Primary Power Normal P Series Intelligent Controller primary power has been restored Tamper Switch Alarm The P Series Intelligent Controller service door is open Tamper Switch Normal The P Series Intelligent Controller service door is closed Unsupported Panel Table 11 33 Describing P Series Reader Actions Action Message Description Anti Passback Violation A card was denied entry because it has already been used going in out without properly going out in Anti Passback Violation door not used A soft Anti Passback violation has occurred The door w
157. only numeric Card Card numbers can only be numbers Numbers Port Settings Port for TCP IP Connection The port number of the panels in the TCP IP connection Port for TCP IP Encrypted The port number of the panels in the TCP IP Connection encrypted connection 3 Click Apply to save the defaults settings Setting defaults for alarm handling To set defaults for alarm handling 1 In the System Config dialog box click the Alarm Handling tab System Config Ei Defaults Alarm Handling EMail Configuration Login Logout Access Levels D Auto Popup Alarm View Window M Beep Until Alarm Acknowledged I Allow Alarm to be Silenced for 60 seconds M Do Not Close Window Until all Alarms are Acknowledged T Reissue Uncleared Alarms Require a Response when Acknowledging Alarms Automatically Clear Acknowledged Alarms T Clear Alarm on Normal Only Maximum of events in event view i O00 Auto clear alarms limit per point 100 Auto clear card reads limit per door 100 Cancel Apply Help 2 Set the following alarm settings Table 5 6 Describing options for alarm settings Auto Popup Alarm View When a new alarm is received the Alarm View Window window is opened restored or continues its display By default this check box appears selected WIN PAK User s Guide 5 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings Table 5 6 Describing options for alarm settings
158. operator level name in From and the last operator level name in To You can use the ellipsis button to find an operator level 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 57 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Schedule Report To generate a schedule report 1 In the Reports window select the Schedule report and click Report Options The Report Schedule dialog box appears Report Schedule l X Schedule Filter Sort Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Schedule Print fe All Update cards every day i One Export File Range Update cards every day Estim Pages Clear All 2 To filter the schedules to be included in the report a Click the Schedule Filter tab b Under Schedule select one of the following options Table 17 17 Describing the options for filtering schedules Generates the report that includes all the schedules One Generates the report for a single schedule When you select this option the From fiel
159. options e Leave Selection for all devices in this area as it currently is To leave the devices in this branch as it is selected or cleared e Un Select Filter out all devices in this area To clear the selection of all the devices in this branch The devices in this branch are not monitored e Select Include all devices in this area To select all the devices in this branch All the devices in this branch are monitored 8 To filter a device right click the device and select Invert Selection Status to select the device or clear the selection 9 Click OK to return to the Filter Devices dialog box 10 Click OK to save the filter selection Only the alarms that occur in the selected area and device are displayed in the Alarm View window Note The filter settings are lost after you close the Alarm View window Therefore to view the floor plan with filter settings you can open the Alarm View window from the Floor Plan the chapter Floor Plan for details on creating an Alarm View in the Floor Plan WIN PAK User s Guide 15 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Alarm View Viewing Alarm Details To view the details of an alarm 1 Choose Operations gt Alarms or double click an alarm to open an Alarm View dialog box 2 Select the Details check box The Alarm Details window is displayed Reader Paint NI O00Panell Reader 3 3 31 2005 8 54 00 AM Door Forced Open 331 2005 8 54
160. or site code mode A valid facility or site code door used was presented The door was opened by card holder Trace Card A card that is traced was used and entry was granted Valid Card door A valid card was presented to the reader but the door was not opened not used during its pulse time Valid Card door A valid card was presented to the reader and the door was opened used Table 11 34 Describing P Series Input Generic Input P Series Supervised Actions Action Message Description Input Active The input is in the alarm state Input Normal The input is in the normal state Input Troubled The status can not be accurately displayed because of tampering Table 11 35 Describing P Series Output Output P Series Actions Action Message Description De energized The output is not energized Energized The output is energized Trouble The output is not responding Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 181 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 36 Describing Galaxy Panel Action Groups Action Message Description Alarm Cancel Alarm Reset Automatic Test Battery Restore The Module Battery which was low is restored Battery Trouble The Module Battery is low Code Tamper Wrong code alarm act Comm Fail The communication between module and RS485 1s lost Comm Restore The communication between module and RS485 is
161. plan linked to the source floor plan is displayed To open event view and alarm view e Right click EB for event view or E for alarm view in the floor plan view and click Open The event view or the alarm view window appears Table 12 2 ADV Control Functions from Floor Plan eon Switch Aao All Alarms cien All Alarms C 100 Local Connection Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms C 100 Remote Connection Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Doors Unlock Lock Shunt Unshunt Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Input Points Acknowledge all Alarms Clear all Alarms Shunt Unshunt Restore to Time Zone Modem Pool Hang Up Modem Reset Modem Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms CCTV Monitor Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms N 485 Remote Dialup Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms WIN PAK User s Guide 12 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Table 12 2 ADV Control Functions from Floor Plan Control Functions Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All ADV
162. rchive Database P Floor Plans to Print Print Preview Print Export File From fe All Alarm Whew i C Ore To C Range Alarm View kaj Estim Pages Metafile Hame dii Clear All None r ADY Type Cloze All r 2 To filter floor plans to be included in the report a Click the Floor Plan Filter tab b Select one of the following options under Floor Plans to Print Table 17 9 Describing the options for filtering floor plans Generates the report that includes all the floor plans WIN PAK User s Guide 17 42 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Table 17 9 Describing the options for filtering floor plans Generates the report for a single floor plan When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the floor plan to generate the report You can use the ellipsis l button to find the floor plan Generates the report for the range of floor plans When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the starting floor plan name in From and the ending floor plan in To You can use the ellipsis l button to find the floor plan 3 To filter floor plans based on metafiles select the Metafile Name in the list 4 To filter a specific ADV select an ADV Type in the list and enter the name of the ADV Use the ellipsis El button to find an ADV 5 To sort the list in the repor
163. received the window will pop up automatically The Autocard Lookup window displays the card holder picture if available name of the card holder card number time date reader name and the status of the card read Activating Autocard Lookup To activate an Autocard Lookup window 1 Choose Operations gt AutoCard Lookup The AutoCard Lookup Waiting for card read window appears Autocard Lookup Waiting for card read T Buffer Control Hert l Show Note Fields Ab 2 Set the Priority of card read The card holder details of all card reads having a higher priority lower number than this priority is displayed in Autocard lookup The priority of a given card read event is set in the reader s Action Group Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in the chapter Device Map for details on setting the priority for an action 3 To specify the areas and panels of card reads click Control The Filter Devices window appears WIN PAK User s Guide 15 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Autocard Lookup Filter Devices Iols aad A E N1000Pnelt Reader 2 of E N1000Pnelt Reader 3 MB N1000P nell Reader 4 H MG N1000Panelt Input H A E N1000P ane Output Cancel 4 Expand the panel by clicking on the plus signs 5 Right click the readers that you want to monitor through Autocard Lookup and select Invert Selection Status 6 Click OK to re
164. records to be displayed in from the Database for the Maintenance window for Selection list Enter a Selecting List number between 20 and 200 Default value is 200 Maximum Records returned The maximum number of records to be displayed in from the Database for Find the Maintenance window for Find list Enter a List number between 1 and 1000 Default value is 20 Live Monitor From the defined list of CCTV monitors the selected monitor output is connected to the video capture card Therefore the video signal from that monitor output is displayed in the Live Monitor view Default is None Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 21 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Table 5 1 Describing options for setting defaults Defaults Option Confirm Card Deletes Always Show Record View Freeze Client and Wait A message asking for confirmation appears when you attempt to delete a card By default this check box appears selected When you open the Maintenance window the Detail window for the selected item is opened simultaneously By default this check box appears cleared If the operator leaves the WIN PAK User Interface idle for a certain period the session expires Therefore the operator must log on to the system again By default this check box appears cleared The period for inactivity is set in the Wait box The period ranges from 1 to 60 minutes Default value is 10 minutes 3 Cli
165. restored Control Unit Fuse The control unit fuse is restored Restore Control Unit Fuse The control unit fuse is in trouble Trouble Local Program End Engineer mode exited Manual Test Engineer test Module AC Fail Module AC Fail is restored Restore Module AC Fail Module AC Fail is in trouble Trouble Module Removed Module Removed Panel Cold Start Power Up Panel Power Up Warm start of panel Program Begin Engineer mode entered Recent Close Panel Full Set Remote Call End Remote Call End Remote Call Start Remote Call is complete RF Jam RF signal is jammed RF Jam Restore RF signal which was jammed 1s restored s WIN PAK User s Guide 11 182 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 36 Describing Galaxy Panel Action Groups Action Message Description RF NVM RAM RF NVM RAM Fail Fail Standby Battery Standby Battery is low Low Standby Battery Standby Battery is OK OK Tamper Alarm Module is tampered Tamper Restore Module tampered is restored Tel Line Fail Restore Module telephone line fail is restored Tel Line Fail Module telephone line fail is in trouble Trouble Time Date changed The time and date of the panel is changed Unset Early Panel is unset Walk Test End Walk Test is finished Walk Test Start Walk Test is started
166. settings To configure the system settings 1 In the P Series Configuration System dialog box select the standard Time Zone for setting the time zone for the PRO 2000 Intelligent Controller P Series Configuration System l x Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai New Delhi Daylight Savings E Groupt No of Card Holders lelete 5000 M Show T Enable card user levels far tigger control No of Transactions to hold when offline fi 0000 Host Grant Open Door and Update Panel lt Back Cancel Help Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 117 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration WIN PAK User s Guide Select the Daylight Savings group for setting the daylight saving option in the P Series Intelligent Controller Refer to the Daylight Saving Group section in the chapter Time Management for more details on configuring daylight saving groups In the No of Card Holders text box specify the maximum number of card holders details to be stored based on the memory available in the board By default you can store details of 5000 card holders in controller Select the Enable card user levels for trigger control to trigger certain controls on the usage of specific cards In the No of Transactions to hold when offline text box specify the number of transactions to be buffered in the controller By default you can store 10000 transacti
167. system Badge Badge is a template or a design for creating a card WIN PAK includes a full featured badge layout utility for designing creating and printing badges Badge design includes magnetic stripe encoding barcoding signatures and so on Card and Card Holder A card is an identity proof of a person and a card holder is a person who holds the card Multiple cards can be assigned to a single card holder to provide different access Intrusion Panels Galaxy and Vista panels are intrusion panels that enable you to monitor and control intrusions in your organization To enable this feature in WIN PAK procure the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel from Technical Support Honeywell Access Systems WIN PAK User s Guide 1 4 Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B Installation In this chapter Introduction 2 2 System Requirements 2 2 Installation and Upgrades 2 5 Licensing and Registration 2 19 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation The WIN PAK installation chapter describes the step by step procedure for installing uninstalling and registering the WIN PAK software In addition it provides the hardware and software requirements and prerequisites for installing the WIN PAK The WIN PAK installation setup installs the required components and programs depending on the type of installation The WIN PAK software is distributed on an auto run CD with release notes and other techni
168. the Devices folder 3 Right click the non ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of non ACK NAK remote communication loop a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the non ACK NAK remote communication loop is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the non ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 63 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the panel loop 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of non ACK NAK remote communication loop a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the non ACK NAK remote communication loop is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the non ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the panel loop c To remove the panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of non ACK NAK remote communication loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Deleting a non ACK NAK remote communication loop After deleting the panels attached to the panel loops and isolating the associated floo
169. the Isolate dialog box 2 Click each tab and dissociate the record by clicking Delete or Delete All A message asking for confirmation appears 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Printing Details You can print the record list using the Print Report option provided in the Maintenance window 1 In the Maintenance window click Print Report A dialog box for specifying the print settings appears 2 Specify the settings for previewing or printing the required information in the report 3 Click Print on the window to print a report Note To view the report before printing click Print Preview T Toggle between Maintenance windows You can open more than one Maintenance window at the same time 1 Open two or more Maintenance windows 2 Choose Window in the menu and click the appropriate window to activate it A tick mark is displayed to the left of the window name in the menu and the corresponding window is activated Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 11 WIN PAK User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Example a Open the Card and the Time Zone windows by choosing Card gt Card and Configuration gt Time Management gt Time Zone from the menu b Choose Windows in the menu The Card and Time Zone window names are listed in the menu c To activate the Card window click Card Or to activate the Time Zone window click Time Zone A tick mark appears on the left of selected option in
170. the Password tab to set the password a Type the New Password for the operator to log on This field is mandatory Password is case sensitive and you can enter maximum of 20 characters b Retype the password in Confirm New Password 6 Click the Operator Information tab The field inside this tab varies according to the operator type WIN PAK User s Guide 5 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i T System Settings Operators Operator Password Operator Information Operator Password Operator Information Operator I 4 Operator Mame f ohn Michael if ohn Michael Description Description Operator Record x Operator Record x Operator Password Operator Information Operator Password Operator Information Operator Level Operator Level Add Shift Guard None Card Holder Card Holder Noe gt Cs Time Zone Time Zone None None x Y ae Enis O SY z Engish i sts s s YS ti Available Account Selected Accounts Delete Available Account Selected Accounts Account Delete Account Accounts Ok Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help Operator Administrator Select an operator level in the Operator Level list to assign access rights to the operator Note The Administrator has rights to view edit and delete in WIN PAK and so the Operator Level Time Zone and Accounts options are not
171. the Port on Server list select the port on the communication server to which the modem must be connected The list of ports on the communication server and are not used in any modem pool or loop is displayed Note You cannot add a modem to a modem pool without having a specific port to the modem However you can define a modem pool without adding a modem to it and you can add modems later Click OK to close the Modem Configuration dialog box and return to Modem Pool Configuration dialog box 10 Create an ADV for the modem pool Click Add under ADV enter the ADV properties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 58 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools 11 Click Next and in the next dialog box click Finish The modem pool is added to the Communication Server Editing a Modem Pool To edit a modem pool 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the modem pool ACK NAK or non ACK NCK and click Configure The Modem Pool Configuration dialog box appears for the ACK NAK or non ACK NAK modem pool Modem Pool Configuration Non ACK NAK j X Basic Information Add Edit Description oO Modems in Fool Jsolate Delete F Show Add Add Modem 2 Configure Delete Cancel Ap
172. the badge A signature pad Honeywell Access Systems PB SIG CAP or PBSIGCAPLCD must be connected to the computer to capture signatures The captured signatures are saved in vector format and placed on the cards stretching proportionally to fill the signature placeholder The signature background is made transparent to be placed on top of any other object on the badge e To add a signature to the badge outline a Click 7 on the toolbar WIN PAK User s Guide 7 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction b Click and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the signature The signature is now placed on the badge outline e To change the signature index a Right click on the signature and click Properties b Click the Signature tab Badge Element Layout Ea Signature Colors Positioning Signature Index fil a Cancel Apply Help c Type or select the Signature Index Note Signature Index indicates which card holder signature must appear on the card The default is 1 i d Click Apply to place the signature in the badge outline Placing a Bitmap on a badge Graphic images such as a logo or symbol can be placed on the badge You can either create or scan your image and save it as a bitmap graphic file Windows Bitmap bmp JPEG jpg Targa tga or TIFF tif files are supported e To add a bitmap on the badge outline a Click l on the toolbar b Cl
173. the date and time to the file name select the Include Date and Time in File Name check box g To set the delimiter and file name information as default for all text files click Set as Default h Click OK to export card holder details to the file 8 To know about the number of pages that would be printed click Estim Pages 9 To clear the filter criteria click Clear All 10 To close the Report Tracking and Muster View dialog box click Close Defining Control Areas Control areas are logical areas containing devices such as communication servers loops panels input points output points groups and readers Control Areas are defined by creating a Control Map of the devices and adding them to a tree structure This map shows the status of each device the set of actions to be performed for the device when an event takes place and the relationship between the various devices Control Maps are defined by adding a site adding branches to the site and then adding devices to the branches The devices can also be added directly to a site FE Control Area 7 m HTSL Bang E Quick Start Control Area o jE c00 Loop Panelt fll C 100 Loop Panelt R gt C 100 Loop Panelt R 1 Output fll C 100 Loop Panelt R2 gt C 100 Loop Panell R2 Output SI0 P Series panel S10 1 D P Series panel B1 R 1 2 E P Series panel B1 R2 o EE QuickStart Firstrle i Access DYPRO Camera 1 Ey Schedule Server Ef Symbiosis O x
174. the entire tonal range of the captured image Compress The captured image is saved as a jpg file If required use the slider to adjust the compression of the saved image The lower the number the greater the compression Note Images lose quality as they are compressed and thus it is recommended to avoid over compressing Example A setting of 100 applies the least amount of compression and provides the best image quality A setting of 30 applies the most compression but provides lower image quality g Click OK to save the photo and close the Capture Image window Note A camera Web camera Analog camera or USB camera must be connected to the system for capturing an image If you are using an analog camera use the Frame Grabber to convert analog signals to digital signals for the system to understand the signals i 6 To export the captured image into a file a Click Export A confirmation message appears indicating that the image 1s exported RS xl AN Image File Exported Successfully The image is exported to a file and the file is stored in the Database Exported Files folder in the WIN PAK installation path The format of the file is lt First Name gt b lt Last Name gt b lt index of the photo gt jpg where b indicates blank b Click OK To capture additional card holder photos e Follow the same procedure of capturing a card holder s photo e Change or increase the Index number Caution If you
175. the event carries a new sequence ID When a report is sorted by the Sequence ID the events of the specific ID are grouped together in a chronological order This makes it easier to view relative to other system wide events 4 To filter card events based on the card holders a Click the Card Holder Filter tab Caution Do not select too many options for selection criteria as it may A N result in not finding records meeting the selected criteria Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Gon om Archive Database fi First Name Last Name Oracte 5 E amp Print Preview Card Number Reader Pri r A tint Tracking Area Export File Ne aoe Fa Estim Pages Card Codes Valid Card z il Trace Card Door Unlocked x Email Note Fields Fan Field From Ten Close b Type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder or select them by clicking the ellipsis El button c Type the Card Number of the card holder or select it by clicking the ellipsis El button d To generate the card history reports of the card holders accessing a specific area select an area in the Tracking Area list that are configured in Tracking and Mustering Area e Select one or more Card Codes which define the card transaction f Select the Note Fields to be displayed in the report You can also specify the range if you select the numerical note field 5 Click Print P
176. the list T 9 Select the blockout in the list and click Place The blockout is placed on the badge layout in the Badge Definition window Note A blockout once placed cannot be moved on the badge layout However you are provided with the option to edit its size and also to delete it To edit a blockout i 1 Right click on the blockout on the badge layout and then click Blockouts The Badge Element Layout Blockout Item Definitions dialog box appears 2 Select the blockout in the list and click Edit The Badge Element Layout Add Edit Blockout Item dialog box appears You can edit the details of the blockout such as the Name the distance of the blockout from the badge printable area and the height and width of the blockout To delete a blockout 1 To delete the blockout that is placed on the badge layout right click on the blockout on the badge layout and then click Delete Object OR To delete the blockout and its definition right click on the blockout on the badge layout and then click Blockouts The Badge Element Layout Blockout Item Definitions dialog box appears Select the blockout in the list and click Delete Setting a Badge Background You can import or capture background images for the badge layouts You can also set the width height aspect ratios and the tiled appearance of the image 1 Right click anywhere on the badge outline and click Properties The Badge Element Layout dialog box appear
177. the text in the Search For text box e Greater Than Searches for an item that is alphabetically or numerically greater than the text in the Search For text box e Less Than Searches for an item that is alphabetically or numerically less than the text in the Search For text box 4 Type the text to be searched in the Search For text box Note If you have selected Last Log In in the Search Field list click the button below Search For and select the date i 5 Select an item in the Sort By list e None No sorting required e Other items Sorts the list in the ascending order of the selected item 6 Click Update List to list the searched items in the sorted order Tip e To sort the entire list a Click the column title The list is sorted in the ascending order of the column OR Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 19 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Select All in the Search Field list Select an item in the Sort By list Click Update List The entire list is sorted based on the selected item e To view the list of operators who have not yet logged on a Select All in the Search Field list and select Last Log In in the Sort By list b Click Update List The Not Yet Logged In operators are displayed first in the list Deleting an Operator To delete an operator 1 Choose System gt Operator The Operator window appears 2 Select the operator to be deleted and click Delete The s
178. to Search for box Click OK The item if found is highlighted in the tree Notes e From a tracking area you cannot search for a branch or an entrance in the mustering area e Right click on a branch and click Refresh to refresh the items in the tree Tracking and Muster View The tracking and muster view enables you to view the details of the card holders who are present in the tracking and the mustering areas The tracking and the muster areas are displayed in a tree in the Tracking and Muster View window Select the tracking or muster area in the tree to view the details of the card holders present in the area Before viewing the muster information ensure the following l 2 Verify that muster reads from the panel have the correct time and date If the date and time are wrong stop the presentation of cards and send the time and date to the panel Test the correction Repeat all card presentations Multiple presentations of the same card at the muster reader do not adversely affect the result of the muster as the most recent time and date stamp is displayed Viewing the Tracking and Mustering details To view the details of card holders in tracking or mustering areas l WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Operations gt Tracking and Mustering The Tracking and Muster View window appears 11 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Wal Tracking and Mu
179. to the holiday group 11 After adding the required holidays click OK Editing a Holiday Group To edit a holiday group l a A UQ N Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Holiday Group The Holiday Group window appears with the list of existing holiday groups Select a holiday group from the list Click Edit The Holiday Group Record dialog box appears Change the required details If you want to add a holiday to a holiday group click Add and follow the same procedure as in Adding a Holiday Group Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting a Holiday Group If a holiday group is associated to a panel you cannot delete the holiday group until you isolate it from the panel To isolate a holiday group 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Holiday Group The Holiday Group window appears with the list of existing holiday groups Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Daylight Saving Group 2 Select a holiday group from the list eA 6 7 8 Click Isolate The Isolate dialog box appears with the list of associated panels Isolate Ei Panels referencing Holiday Group Holidays Offices Panel Mame M1000Fanell 1 ltem Holiday Group to which selected Panels will be reassigned None Reaszign Reazzign All Select a panel and reassign it to a different holiday group Click Reassign to reass
180. tour server is deleted from the device map Schedule Server Before using the Scheduling functions you must configure a Schedule Server Normally the Schedule Server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Adding a Schedule Server To add a schedule server l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Schedule Server The Schedule Server Configuration window appears Schedule Server Configuration Fa Schedule Server Configuration A Dw Edit eee Description Isolate Server Machine name Delete lt 1 amber Show Protocol end point 5588 Cancel Apply Help Type the Name of the schedule server Type the Description for the schedule server Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the schedule server The Abstract Device Record Server dialog box appears Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration 6 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Schedule Server Te if 8 i Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details Enter the Machine Name fo
181. tracking and mustering areas Defining Access Areas Access Areas are the logical areas in the Access Control System in which entrances such as doors and readers are placed The access area definition in WIN PAK appears as a tree to which branches and entrances can be added The access areas are represented as branches and panels readers and doors are represented as entrances by which you can gain access to the areas An entrance can be added to the Access Area folder or it can be added to a branch inside the Access Area folder Example If a reader R1 1s located in the first floor of a building you can define First Floor as the branch and R1 as the entrance within First Floor WIN PAK User s Guide 11 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Eix ees Access Orea bre E P Series panel B1 R 1 oO P Series panel B1 R2 Show Available Devices Entrance Branch Defining Areas Defining Access Areas Readers loops and doors that are already defined in the device map can be added to the access areas The access areas are later mapped to access levels The card holders who are associated with the access levels can gain access to the entrances in the access areas Adding a Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears 2 Right click the Access Area folder or branch and select Add Branch The Configure Branch dialog box appears FF Access Area Pije x
182. using QSW you can edit the configuration settings using the corresponding WIN PAK menu options Launching Quick Start Wizard As QSW requires access to several WIN PAK databases you must log on with administrator privileges to access QSW When you log on to WIN PAK Quick Start Wizard is automatically started Notes e Ifyou do not want QSW to start automatically Clear the Show the Quick Start Wizard after each Log in check box in the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box e To manually launch the quick start wizard Choose Configuration gt Quick Start Wizard from the main window of WIN PAK The Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 6 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Creating an Account To create a new account using QSW 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Welcome dialog box click Create New Account and click Next The Configure dialog box appears PF QUICK START WIZARD Configuration Options QUICK START WIZARD Configure DNT Select one of the following configuration options Create New Account option Start allows you to create new 2 New Account Create New Account account 3 Finish TIMEZONES C Add Time Zones Select this option and click Next C Add Cards to existing Account Eircom a to configure an Account C Add New Site C Add New Loop to existing Site SIO BOARDS DONE C Add New Panel Add New Readers to existing
183. you must change the status input or free egress input of the reader before disabling T For 2 readers SIO board In 1 and In 3 are status inputs and In 2 and In 4 are free egress inputs Whereas for 1 reader SIO board In 1 is the status input and In 2 is the free egress input Refer to the Free egress input and Status input sections in this chapter for more details on free egress input and status input 13 In the Time Zone list select a time zone during which input point must be shunt or deactivated 14 Type the Hold Time to report the Normal state of the input point only after a specified duration By default it is set to zero Note The reporting of the Input point Normal state is delayed for a period hold time when the input returns to normal condition from the alarm or trouble condition T WIN PAK User s Guide 11 124 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 15 Enter the debounce cycle time in Debounce Cycles If an input point state changes before the debounce time the change is not reported Debounce time can be set from 2 60 through 15 60 of a second Example If the debounce time is set to 4 and if the Alert state of the input point changes to the Normal state before the debounce time the Alert state is not reported 16 In Shunt Time select Sec Min or Hr and specify the shunt time By default the field is set to zero but can be set from 0 through 32400 seconds 0 through 5
184. you need to reinitialize the panels 4re you sure you want to make this change A similar message is displayed when you switch from Precision to Multiple access level 3 Click Yes to confirm the switching 4 Click Apply to save the access level settings 5 Click OK to save the changes and close the System Config dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 33 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings WIN PAK User s Guide 5 34 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Quick Configuration 6 In this chapter Quick Start Wizard 6 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Quick Start Wizard Overview T i Quick Start Wizard QSW is an optional interface to configure the basic functionalities like creating an account adding a new time zone and so on with default settings However you can perform these operations using the WIN PAK menus also e Ifyou are new to WIN PAK you can quickly start with WIN PAK for performing few basic operations using QSW e Ifyou are already using WIN PAK you can still proceed with QSW for configuring the basic operations Configuration Options Quick start wizard enables you to configure the following e Creating an Account e Adding a Time Zone e Adding Cards to an Account e Adding a Site e Adding Loops to a Site e Adding a Panel e Adding Readers to a P Series Panel Note After configuring these options
185. z Door Normal 20 Search and Sort 8 Door Troubled 20 O T H ld ound File oorbell way ua Search Field SE Expired Card 30 All hd S Focad Opan 20 Digital Video Camera None Criteria z Host Grant Card downloaded 79 z 2 Host Grant Door unlocked 79 m Wita Ta Haag te Print 7 Search For Lene ee id URE Fa D gt Message The door has been left open longer than it should be Sort By Priority 20 Send Email I based on a valid entry None 7 Time Zone Always teers 3 Edit the required details and click OK The action group for the selected device is changed globally Refer to steps 8 to 16 of the Adding an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on setting the action group properties Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 169 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Te Note After you create the Action Group except Custom it can be used as a template for other devices of the same type Copying an Action Group You can create a copy of an Action Group with the same set of properties and then you can define a different set of properties To create a copy 1 Select the action group and click Copy The selected action group is duplicated 2 Select the copied action group and click Edit to change the settings Deleting an Action Group If an action group associated to an ADV is still in use reassign the ADV associated to it to a diffe
186. 0 100 20 0 Add Vert Mag Stipe Left 25 0 0 10 5 85 0 Vert Mag Stipe Aight 36 5 0 0 10 5 85 0 Edit Vert Punch Bottom 180 745 140 40 Vert Punch Top 16 0 1 5 140 640 Delete 2 Click Add if you are creating a new blockout or Edit if you are making WIN PAK User s Guide changes to an existing blockout The Badge Element Layout Add Edit Block Item dialog box appears Badge Element Layout Add Edit Blockout Iteni x Mame mooo jo Milimeters from left edge of the printable area jo Milimeters from top edge of the printable area y jo Millimeter width of blockout item cs jo Millimeter height of blackout iter dy Cancel Type a Name for the blockout In the Millimeters from left edge of the printable area x box type the distance of the blockout from the left edge of the badge printable area In the Millimeters from top edge of the printable area y box type the distance of the blockout from the top edge of the badge printable area 7 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction 6 In the Millimeter width of blockout item dx box type the width of the blockout 7 In the Millimeter height of blockout item dy box type the height of the blockout Note You may have to measure an actual card and print a test card to determine the exact position for the blockout 8 Click OK The Badge Layout Blockout Item Definitions dialog box appears with the blockout added in
187. 00 Data Bits E Parity None Stop Bits fi x IP Address or Node name Encryption Password cme Heo 3 Type a Name for the CCTV switcher This field is mandatory Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 69 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map CCTV Switcher 4 Type a Description for the CCTV switcher 5 Select the manufacturer of the CCTV switcher in the Type list 6 In the Port list select a port of the communication server to which the CCTV Switcher is to be connected The ports that are selected for the communication server and not used for other loops are listed 7 If you select a port a Select the transmission baud rate for the switcher in Bits per second b Select the number of bytes that can be transferred in Data Bits Select a number between 4 and 8 By default it is set to 8 c Select the type of Parity for the error detecting procedure By default it is set to None The available parity types are Even Odd Mark and Space d Select the Stop Bits value By default it is 1 In serial communications a stop bit is an extra bit transmitted after each unit of information usually a byte to indicate that transmission of that unit 1s complete 8 If you select a TCP IP connection a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name of the computer where the CCTV switcher is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 9 If you select a TCP IP encrypted connection a Type the TCP IP IP Addres
188. 00 AM Door Forced Open Operator Mame eooo Message The door is in the alarm mode due to invalid entry El Ack Hear Add Hote Close The Alarm Details window displays the following information e Name ofthe reader input or output point from where the alarm is triggered e The date and time of the alarm and the state of the reader or point e Indication of whether the alarm has been acknowledged or cleared e The name of the operator who has acknowledged or cleared the alarm e The message box to display the note added by the operator while acknowledging or clearing the alarm 3 To acknowledge the alarm select the alarm and click Ack 4 Toclear the alarm select the alarm and click Clear 5 To add a note to an alarm while acknowledging or clearing click Add Note The Add Operator Note dialog box appears Add Operator Note x Operator Note Downloaded card to West Entry panel Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Autocard Lookup 6 Type a message in the Operator Note and click OK 5 Note The operator notes are included in history and can be printed using the ZA History report Autocard Lookup The Autocard Lookup feature enables you to view the card holders details from the designated readers or card reads that have a status priority higher than a designated threshold If the Autocard Lookup window is minimized and a card read is
189. 00 IV Panel Actions 10 177 Describing P Series SIO Board Actions cccssesseeeeeeeeeens 10 178 Describing P Series Dial Up Actions ccccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 10 179 Describing P Series Reader ACtions ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 179 Describing P Series Input Generic Input P Series Supervised Actions 10 181 Describing P Series Output Output P Series Actions 10 181 Describing Galaxy Panel Action GroupS cccesesseseeeeeeeeees 10 182 Describing RS 232 Action Groups ssescccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 183 Describing RS 232 Port Single Panel Action Group 10 183 Describing Schedule Server Action Groups 0cssseeeeeees 10 184 Describing Tracking Server Action Groups seseeseeeeees 10 184 Describing Video Switcher CCTV Switcher Action Groups 10 184 Describing Galaxy Communication Actions seeseeeeee 10 184 Describing Galaxy Group ACtIONS ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 10 185 Describing Galaxy Keypad Actions cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 186 Describing Galaxy Keyprox Actions cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 186 Chapter 11 Defining Areas Typical ADVs and Control Functions ccccccccccscseseeeeeeeeeees 11 26 Describing panel initialization Options csssssseeeseeeseeeeees 11 31 Describing fields in the Status dialog bOX cc
190. 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings Setting System Defaults Defaults can be set for certain functions in WIN PAK For example you can configure system settings related to ADV access card number length alarm handling e mail configuration and type of access levels To set the system defaults 1 Choose System gt System Defaults The System Config dialog box appears System Config x Defaults Alarm Handling EMail Configuration Login Logout Access Levels W Grant all operators access to ADs notin Control Area Masimum Length of Card Numbers gt M Allow only numeric Card Numbers Port Settings Port for TCP IP Connection feom Port for Encrypted TCPYIP 710 Connection 2 Click each tab and configure the settings 3 Click OK to save the system default settings Configuring default settings To configure the defaults settings 1 In the System Config dialog box click the Defaults tab 2 Set the following defaults options Table 5 5 Describing the options for setting the defaults Grant all operators access Select the check box to grant permission to all to ADV not in Control Area operators for accessing ADVs that are not in the Control Area Maximum Length of Card The maximum length for card numbers Numbers Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 27 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Table 5 5 Describing the options for setting the defaults Allow
191. 0am 00pm 7 days 6 00am 00pm 7 days per week fincl 1 Edit amp 6to6 Sample by Sasi 2 amp Regular 8 00 4M to 6 00 PM 2 ay 8 00am 5 00pm M F 8 00am 5 00pm Monday Friday excl 1 amp 4 00pm 1 2 00am M F 4 00pm 1 2 00am Monday Friday excl 1 s 2 Selected Time Zone Description No Slots Holiday Group Holiday for Tamil Nadu Government Holidays lt Back Cancel Help Tip If you want to remove a time zone from the Selected Time Zone list select the time zone and click 1 The time zones that are listed in Selected Time Zone are available for readers inputs and outputs of this panel 2 If you are using holiday overrides select the holiday group in the Holiday Group list 3 Click Next to set the panel options The Panel Configuration Options dialog box appears Adding SIO boards to Intelligent Controller The number of readers inputs and outputs that can be connected to the controller 1s based on the type of SIO Board that is added to the Intelligent Controller The available SIO Board types are SIO Board Type Maximum Maximum Maximum Inputs Outputs Readers omen S Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 121 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration SIO Board Type Maximum Maximum Maximum Inputs Outputs Readers lata ae ee This section explains how to add an SIO board of 2 Reader I O board type You can use the same procedure for adding other types of SIO boa
192. 1 jm PTE SF SS Tech Dept miL pee A a a beers Ls IZ 7 Production Women Copi Ofi i a i Theatre ANS ral ee A Oey Sake ar aer meer el ae Resizing and Previewing Floor Plan Views You can resize a floor plan view by adjusting the zoom percentage In addition you can preview the floor plan view to view the entire floor plan as a snap shot inside the floor plan view window Resize the floor plan view Using the Zoom factor you can enlarge or reduce the size of the floor plan to a specific percentage To set the zoom factor 1 Right click anywhere in the floor plan view 2 Select Zoom from the pop up menu The Zoom dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 12 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 4 Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Fit window i Custom Select the zoom percentage for enlarging or reducing the size of the floor plan view or click Custom and type the required percentage Click OK to save the zoom percentage Note Right click anywhere in the floor plan view and select Undo Zoom to view the floor plan in its original size Previewing floor plan view You can preview the floor plan view and customize the preview area To preview the floor plan l 2 Right click anywhere in the floor plan view Select Show View from the pop up menu A preview of the floor plan view is displayed Right click anywhere in the floo
193. 1 Device Map Panel Configuration 13 After you complete adding Triggers and Procedures click Next to advance to the Finish dialog box 14 Click Finish to complete the direct P Series panel configuration Adding P Series Panel in Modem Pool The procedures for adding a P Series panel in a Modem Pool is similar to adding a Direct P Series panel When you add a P Series panel in the Modem Pool you must provide Remote details of the panel and more details on System settings Refer to the Adding a P Series Panel section in this chapter for more details on panel configuration This section helps you in detailing procedures for providing Remote details and System settings Configuring remote details When configuring a P Series panel on a Modem Pool the Remote dialog box appears next to the Basic dialog box To configure the remote 1 In the P Series Configuration dialog box enter the Panel Phone Number for the remote site Enter the number as it would be dialed including any required prefix or area code This is the phone number the system uses to connect to the panel P Series Configuration Remote Panel Phone Number Call In Option Add es A Host Modem Delay Before Connect Modem 1 s po Sec New Password Number of Redial Attempts Confirm Password Redial Delay Wait Time for Disconnect po Sec lt Back Cancel Help 2 Select a Host Modem The options in this fi
194. 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the RS 232 panel loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Isolate Device or ADY l X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device AS 232 Loop Remove Remove All ID items Eancel Help 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of RS 232 panel loop a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the RS 232 panel loop is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the RS 232 panel loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the panel loop 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of RS 232 panel loop a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the 485 PCI panel loop is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the RS 232 panel loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the panel loop c To remove the panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of RS 232 panel loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 52 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Deleting an RS 232 panel loop
195. 10 19 Isolating and Deleting a Schedule Server cceceeeeees 10 20 Trackin and MUStEr SCUV EM humosueiersoi n a as 10 22 Adding a Tracking and Muster Server cccccccceeeeeeeeees 10 22 Editing a Tracking and Muster Server ccccscceeeeeeeeeees 10 23 Isolating and Deleting a Tracking and Muster Server 10 24 Dinal y 1S Oa aee E A dence iain eindite wdends te ER AEE 10 26 Configuring an Access DVPRO Digital Video 10 26 Editme an Access DV PRO reismentu ni 10 28 Isolating and Deleting an Access DVPRO eeeeeceeeeeees 10 29 Configuring a Fusion Digital Vide0 cceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 31 Editing a Fusion Digital Video cc ccccccscssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 33 Isolating and Deleting a Fusion Digital Video 00 10 33 Configuring a Dedicated Micros Digital Video 608 10 35 Editing a Dedicated MICTOS ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeees 10 37 Isolating and Deleting an Access DVPRO eccceeeeees 10 37 COMMUNICATION LOOPS sisisitetss vasieeateessnseienssivedsieateisiwiavasiacevadencenatentinelcdceneies 10 39 C KOO Paner 010 6 eee ete ee ee enter rn Pe rer ee er en Ie een Prey Pel PE 10 39 Adding a COO Pane lOO p is casiesigs tes seastel vodea uta cesenereceiensudeonesines 10 39 Edine a C 100 Panel LOOD nomi 10 42 Isolating and Deleting a C 100 Panel Loop ee 10 42 ASC BE AIG LE OO
196. 100 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the C 100 panel loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Plang Operator Levels Operator Levels referencing device C 100 Loop Remove Remove All W Present in Control Area M iltern Eancel Help 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of C 100 panel loop a Click the Floor Plans tab The floor plans associated to the C 100 panel loop are listed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the C 100 panel loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated from the C 100 loop OR Click Remove all to isolate floor plans from the panel loop 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of C 100 panel loop a Click the Operator Levels tab The operator levels associated to the C 100 panel loop are listed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the C 100 panel loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the panel loop c To remove the panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of C 100 panel loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 43 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops Deleting a
197. 1009 Revision 01 11 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Introduction Introduction The chapter Device Map describes how to configure servers loops panels modem pools and so on which includes adding abstract devices and action groups Device Map Structure The Device Map in WIN PAK is a graphical tree structure that represents the physical connections of the devices Devices include communication hardware servers panels readers and CCTV equipment The following is the list of device types that can be added to the Device Map e Servers e Communication Servers e Communication Loops e Panels e Abstract Devices In the Device Map tree structure under the Devices folder Servers and CCTV Switcher form the high level nodes of the tree Communication Server is one of the servers added to the Devices folder where you can add loops modem pools and also direct connections to the P Series panels Physical devices such as card readers keypads input points and output points are defined while configuring panels The following picture depicts the structure of the Device Map tree Devices Command File Guard Tour Tracking and Communication Server l RS 232 Loop Legend Parent Node hla Node Figure 11 1 Graphical representation of the Device Map tree structure WIN PAK User s Guide 11 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Introduction Physical Devices and Abstract Devices Abstract Devices logically repr
198. 11 175 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 28 Describing NS2 Panel Actions Action Message Description Panel Communication with the control panel has been lost Communication Alarm Panel Communication with the control panel has been restored Communication Normal Panel Reset The control panel has been reset Poll Response The control panel is NOT responding to computer polling Alarm Poll Response The control panel is responding normally to computer polling Normal Primary Power Failure Control panel primary power has been lost Primary Power Normal Control panel primary power has been restored Tamper Switch Alarm The control panel service door is open Tamper Switch Normal The control panel service door is closed Table 11 29 Describing N 1000 II PW 2000 IT Panel Actions Action Message Description Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is not working Failure Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is working Normal Panel Communication with the control panel has been lost Communication Alarm Panel Communication with the control panel has been restored Communication Normal Panel Reset The control panel has been reset WIN PAK User s Guide 11 176 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 29 Describing N 1000 II PW 2000 H Panel Actions
199. 11 5 Remain a Brane eenen n Rai 11 5 Removing a Branch or Entrance sacinienomenniiii i a ais 11 5 Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas cccssssssccccccccsssssssssssssees 11 6 Configuring Tracking Areas cccccccsscssssssscceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessesseesseeeees 11 9 Adding a Tracking Area Branch cccccecssscssssceccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 9 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i viii WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Adding an Entrance to the Tracking Area ccccccecsssccccsccceceeeeceeeeeeeees 11 10 Moy meant P UhAnC e saae Dea eoste E E 11 11 R namine a Brane eee ee ee ee T rR mene ee ee oe 11 11 Removing a Branch or an Entrance cccccccscccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 11 11 Fodmnean Hemninihe Se amass a 11 12 Contiourine Musterring Areas eaccoir cones ee E 11 13 Adding a Mustering Area Branch cccccesssscccsccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 13 Adding an Entrance to the Mustering Area ccceccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 11 14 MOV NG ai E NaN E sasae cece secs Stason hs case cece ce 11 15 Renaming a rane enean in E serena es eae 11 15 Removing a Branch or an Entrance cccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 11 15 Panini At lem in LS TEC eusroet E EE E 11 16 Tracking and Muster VieWanicreicgenni ne o a a 11 16 Viewing the Tracking and Mustering details 11 16 Deleting a Card holder from the Tracking and Muster View 11 18 Printing Tracking and Mustering details
200. 12 Select or clear the Pan and Tilt check box to define the fusion camera as a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera or as a stationary camera 13 Type the title for the camera in Camera Title 14 Click Finish to save the digital video WIN PAK User s Guide 11 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Editing a Fusion Digital Video To edit a Fusion digital video Device Map Server Configuration 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the Fusion and click Configure The Fusion dialog box appears Digital Video Configuration Fusion Camera Configuration Mame Fusion Description Type Fusion T User Password C Communication Settings Machine Name or IF Address i 99 63 45 768 Browse Fort Humber aoon A Dw Add Edit leolate Delete P Show Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the corresponding tab and make the required changes Refer to the Configuring a Fusion Digital Video section in this chapter for configuring Fusion digital video 4 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting a Fusion Digital Video You can delete a fusion digital video only if you isolate an ADV of fusion digital video from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a fusion digital video To isolate a fusion digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map
201. 2 or Access Level doesn t belong to the specified account Mandatory data is missing for CardNumber CardStatus is mentioned as Active Trace but Activation date also specified Error Invalid Access Level Operator1 or Access Level doesn t belong to the specified account CardStatus is mentioned as Active Trace but Activation date also specified Error The Activation date cannot be the same or after the Expiration date CardStatus is mentioned as Active Trace but Activation date also specified Error The Activation date cannot be the same or after the Expiration date CardStatus is mentioned as Active Trace but Activation date also specified Error The Activation date cannot be the same or after the Expiration date M 4 gt Hih Sheeti 3 Review and correct the errors in the source file The following table lists the possible errors and provides the corrective action to resolve them Table 8 5 Error types and Corrective Actions Error Type Corrective Action Datatype mismatch This error may occur if you have entered alphabets for numeric datatype and vice versa Check the datatype and enter the correct data Card Number Avoid duplicate card numbers already exists in the Database Card Status is The activation date is not applicable for the card status of Active or mentioned as Trace Therefore if you have entered 1 or 4 in the card status Active Trace but column leave the Activation Date column empty Activatio
202. 2 Describing Galaxy Communication Actions Action Message Description Galaxy Galaxy Communication is in trouble Communication Alarm Galaxy Galaxy Communication is working properly Communication Ok Galaxy Polling Galaxy is started polling Started WIN PAK User s Guide 11 184 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 42 Describing Galaxy Communication Actions Action Message Description Galaxy Polling Galaxy is stopped polling Started Table 11 43 Describing Galaxy Group Actions Action Message Description Group Alarm Galaxy Group alarm is cancelled Cancel Group Alarm Galaxy Group alarm is confirmed Confirm Group Alarm Reset Galaxy Group alarm is reset Group Automatic Set Galaxy Group is automatically set Group Bypass Galaxy Group is bypassed Group Closing The Galaxy group auto arm extend is delayed Extend Group Early Unset The Galaxy group is unset early Group Fail to Set The Galaxy group 1s fail to set Group Full Set The Galaxy group is set Group in Alarm Group in Alarm Group Late to Open Group Late to Set Group Normal Group returned to Normal Group Part Set Group Part Unset Group Rearm after alarm Rearm after alarm Group Recent Close Previous alarm was within 5 mins of set Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 185 WIN PAK Us
203. 2005 12 00 00 4M Thursday March 31 2005 12 00 00 Add Edit Delete OF Cancel Apply Help 3 Type a Name for the daylight saving group and a Description 4 Click Add to add daylight savings to a daylight saving group The Daylight Time Saving dialog box appears Daylight Time Saving x Start Date and Time Thureday March 31 2005 El 12 00 00 AM Cancel End Date and Time Thursday March 31 2005 BETE 5 To set the Start Date and Time a Click the ellipsis El button to open the calendar b In the calendar select the month year and date or click Today if you want to select the current date c Click OK The date is selected and the calendar is closed d Type the start time You can use or arrow to increase or decrease the current time 6 To set the End Date and Time a Click the ellipsis El button to open the calendar b In the calendar select the month year and date or click Today if you want to select the current date c Click OK The date is selected and the calendar is closed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Daylight Saving Group d Type the end time You can use or arrow to increase or decrease the current time 7 Click OK to add the daylight time saving Editing a Daylight Saving Group To edit a daylight saving group 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Daylight Saving Group The Daylig
204. 2006 20 21 04 Admin Operator logged Out Mar14 2006 10 52 22 Admin Operator logged In Mar14 2006 13 53 44 Admin Operator logged Out Mar14 2006 14 03 19 Admin Operator logged In Mar15 2006 12 49 14 Admin Operator logged Out Mar15 2006 13 50 14 Admin Operator logged In Mar20 2006 12 46 40 Admin Operator logged In Mar20 2006 13 39 19 Admin Operator logged Out Mar21 2006 19 20 46 Admin Card Add Mar21 2006 19 20 49 Admin Card Delete Mar21 2006 21 09 47 Admin Card Add Hand Tool Mar21 2006 21 15 17 Admin Card Delete Mar22 2006 11 14 55 Admin Card Add Mar 22 2006 12 22 05 Admin Card Delete Mar 22 2006 12 38 57 Admin Card Add Mar 22 2006 12 39 11 Admin Card Delete Mar 22 2006 12 40 33 Admin Card Add Mar 22 2006 12 40 35 Admin Card Delete Mar 22 2006 12 45 44 Admin Card Add Mar 22 2006 12 45 47 Admin Card Delete Mar22 2006 12 53 46 Admin Card Add Mar22 2006 12 54 09 Admin Card Delete Toolbar buttons on the report You can perform additional operations on this report using the toolbar available on the top of the Operator Actions Report window The following image illustrates the toolbar buttons Table 17 15 Defining toolbar buttons Toolbar button Copies the content of the report and it can be pasted in any of the text OC applications like Word Excel Notepad d Find Searches for a particular text in the report When you click this Next O Single Page Multiple Pages button the Find dialog box appears Enter the t
205. 3 Release the mouse button at the destination communication server The direct panel is moved Moving panels across communication servers To move a panel attached to a loop 1 Select a panel attached to a loop in the source communication server 2 Drag and drop the panel onto the destination communication server 01 xi 51 x ABE AccessDVPRO deen S CommandFile 5 Te COMSERVER ie 100 Loop P Ea 4ACKINGE Modem pool PA C 100 Loop BG CCTY Switcher Direct P Series Cursor ce Modem Pool while P Series moving GH P Series Loop eo P Series Modem pool BSH R5 232 Loop A COMSERVER 2 a ie 485 ACKINAK loop E E00 Loop Panell oe P Series 2 fe R5 232 Connection ROS 85 292 Panel F Fusion n 4ACKINGE Modem pool PA C 100 Loop BG CCTY Switcher pe E Direct P Series ce Modern Pool se P Series HO P Series Loop pa P Series Modem pool ROS 5 292 Loop Eb By COMSERVER 2 D485 ACKINAK loop 485 gt P Series 2 Ss Ea F Guard Tour A R5 232 Connection be 2 Schedule Server iT R5 232 Panel 3 Release the mouse button at the same type loop of the destination communication server The panel is moved Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 189 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Copying Loops and Panels You can create a copy of loops and panels onto another communication servers if the following conditions are met 1 Ports are available in the destination communication server
206. 40 minutes 0 through 9 hours 17 In the Mode list select the mode of input point Table 11 4 Describing the modes of input point The input acts normal reporting alert normal and troubled states Non Latching Entry A door is set up as an input point with an entry delay of 10 seconds If the door remains open more than 10 seconds it is reported Exit The exit delay is the amount of time a contact can be unshunted unmasked before being reported Latching Entry If a door set up as an input point with an entry delay of 10 seconds the card holder has 10 seconds to shunt the point otherwise it reports as an alarm Even if the point returns to normal before the entry delay time if the point has not been shunted masked it reports as an alarm Exit The exit delay is the amount of time a contact can be unshunted unmasked before being reported 18 Enter the entry delay time in Entry Delay This is the duration an input point can remain open before an alarm is activated This field defaults to zero seconds but can be set up to 255 seconds 19 Enter the exit delay time in Exit Delay This is the duration a point can be unshunted unmasked before being reported as an alarm This field defaults to zero seconds but can be set up to 255 seconds Note The Entry Delay and Exit Delay fields are enabled only for Latching and Non Latching mode of input points we 20 Select the Interlocking check box to activate the interloc
207. 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report e You can use the ellipsis button to select a server Loops The Device Map Report displays the details of a single loop like C 100 485 PCI of all or the selected communication server You are also provided with an option to display the details of all or a range of loops x Device Filter Loop Filter Bun from Archive Database 7 Print Preview 485 PCl P Series AS 232 Port Print EJ Export File Estim Pages Communication Server Loops to Print Al Clear All One Range HEEL Close To select the type of loop a Click the Loop Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as Loops b Under Type select the type of loop C100 485 PCI P Series or RS 232 Port c Enter the name of the Communication Server to include only the loops that are available in the selected communication server You can use the ellipsis E button to select the communication server To select the range of loops a Under Loops to Print select one of the following options e All to include all the loops e One to include a single loop that you select in the From field e Range to include a range of loops that you select in the From and To fields e You can use the ellipsis E button to select a loop Panels The Device Map Report can display the details of a single panel like P Series NS2 of all o
208. 9 Click Back to change any installation settings or click Next The WIN PAK software is installed and then WIN PAK Setup Complete screen appears 10 Click Finish to complete the installation Installing User Interface The User Interface is installed at each workstation across the Local Area Network LAN Note While installing at a workstation on a LAN ensure that the installation directory resides on a shared drive mapped in the target system If not the installation fails when the system reboots and attempts to re establish connection to the host directory To install WIN PAK User Interface only perform the instructions given in Installing WIN PAK and follow these steps 1 On the WIN PAK Setup Type screen select User Interface Only and click Next The system checks for SQL Service status and displays the WIN PAK Destination Path screen WIN PAK Destination Path aS x WIN PAK Please indicate where you want to install your WIN PAE executables Destination Folder C Program Files WINPARPAO Browse lt Back Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 2 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades Note In the following screens the default path settings for installation database archive file database file and language file are displayed T 2 Click Browse to change the destination folder and click Next in each screen The dialog box appears prompting you to create icons on the
209. 9 Revision 01 11 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas The readers 3 6 are defined in B because both the readers are used for entering into B Reader 3 is used for entering into B and reader 6 is used for quitting C and entering into B The reader 5 is defined in C as it is used for entering into C In addition this is included in B because C is defined within B In case of Non nested area The areas B and C are defined separately The readers 3 6 are defined in B because both the readers are used for entering into B Reader 3 is used for entering into B and reader 6 is used for quitting C and entering into B The reader 5 is defined in C as it is used for entering into C Muster System Precautions While creating mustering areas in WIN PAK keep the following precautions in mind l i NO 9 Use a separate dropline communication port to isolate muster readers from tracking units An alternate additional communication path from the N 1000 to the computer is achieved by using the N485DRLA Digital Redundant Loop Adapter Note Muster readers are not used for controlling a door Runa special line for the muster units to provide a unique data path even if the wiring from the main facility is damaged The tracking units also have a unique data path Use 485 communications with ACK NAK enabled A battery backup power supply is required for the 485 API 2 on any
210. AK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 151 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration To synchronize WIN PAK data with the Galaxy panel 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Synchronize The Synchronize with Panel dialog box appears Synchronize with Panel X Retrive Panel Data Zones Groups I Outputs User Codes Panel Data Cancel 2 Under Retrieve Panel Data select the required check boxes such as Zones Groups Outputs and so on 3 To specify the range of data to be retrieved select the required check box again The selection is grayed and the From and To boxes are enabled Synchronize with Panel X l Groups T Outputs l User Codes Panel Data From To f om a1 58 Cancel 4 Change the data range in the From and To boxes 5 Click OK A message asking for confirmation to stop polling at the Communication server appears 6 Click Yes to stop polling and start downloading data from the Galaxy panel to WIN PAK Note When you upload the data to the panel the panel data is overwritten with the VS B uploaded data WIN PAK User s Guide 11 152 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Viewing Panel Configuration Details You can view the latest configuration details of the Galaxy panel that were downloaded to WIN PAK To view the panel configuration details 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Configure The Galaxy di
211. AK User s Guide 12 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Adding a Floor Plan 1 Choose Configuration gt Floor Plan Definition The Floor Plan Definition window appears Floor Plan Definition Iof x Pm Online status Dublin AREAS i Online status outside Dublin I Detail View m Search and Sort Operations Search Field a All o Criteria Edit leony Search For Sort By Name bi Print Report 2 Click Add The Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box together with a blank window for creating a floor plan design appear Floor Plan Toolbox X Hame ooo Description Save amp Exit ___ Background Open Rit HAaSs tE BRE amp ADV Controls of SG m E amp so Galaxy Panel i ADV Controls of Vista Panel 3 Type a name for the floor plan in Name The name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters in length 4 Type a Description for the floor plan The description can be up to 60 alphanumeric characters in length 5 Click Open in the Background area The Open dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Open ajx Look in E FloorPlanlmage jt a Cosmic Studio 1 n Cosmic Studio 2 File name Files of type Metafiles wim Cancel E 6 Browse to the location of the image file and click Open
212. All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy MAX Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy RIOs Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Vista Panel Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Arm Away The panel completely arms the selected perimeter and interior burglary partitions by sensing the intruder s movements This option enables you to select multiple partitions of the panel Arm Stay Arms only the perimeter burglary protection guarding protected doors windows and other perimeter protection points in the selected partitions This enables automatic bypassing of certain areas that allows movement on those areas without causing an alarm Note To define the perimeter area the zone type of the zones must be defined as Perimeter while configuring the Vista Panel Disarm The panel disarms the selected burglary partitions silences alarms and audible trouble indicators This option enables you to select multiple burglary partitions in the panel Panel Reset Resets the panel Refresh Refreshes the latest status of the vista panel Vista Partition Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Arm Away The panel completely arms the perimeter and interior burglary partition by sensing the intruder s movements Arm Stay Arms only the perimeter burglary protection guarding protected doors windows and other perimeter protection points in the partition This enables automatic bypassing of certain areas that allows movement on those a
213. All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms N 485 Local Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Connection Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Output Points amp Groups Energize De energize Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Panel Initialize Cancel Initialization Buffer UnBuffer Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Refer to the Initializing a Panel from Control Map section in this chapter for initializing a panel Pan Tilt Camera Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms SIO Boards Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 27 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Table 11 1 Typical ADVs and Control Functions Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy Communication Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy Panel Galaxy Group Galaxy Zone WIN PAK User s Guide Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarm Set All Groups Panel sets all the groups associated to the panel Unset All Groups Panel unsets all the groups associated to the panel Reset Panel Resets the panel Bypass Zones Panel bypasses alarms from the selected zone types Unbypass Zones Panel stops bypassing alarms the selected zone types
214. Appendix Cold Restart on POWer Sur ge sssssssccccococosseseseececoossssssseecoocossssesceceeessssseeo 18 1 Index Document 7 001009 Revision 01 I Xil WIN PAK User s Guide LIST OF TABLES Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Installation Chapter 3 User Interface LOODI F BUON Saeni sd ecchs tin A AO 3 4 Menu names and Shortcut Keys ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeees 3 5 Search and Sort Options and Actions cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Buttons and Descriptions ccccececceccccccccceessseecccceeeceaeeseeeeeeees 3 10 Chapter 4 Getting Started Comparing the configuration between Domain Environment and WOrk Sroup EOVTONME Atea E E iaea needa 4 11 Chapter 5 System Settings Describing options for setting defaults nnnnnnnn000000000000000 5 21 Describing instances for activating a sound file cece 5 23 Describing options for setting wallpaper cssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 25 Describing restore options for OperatOLS cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 26 Describing the options for setting the defaults 006 5 27 Describing options for alarm settings cccccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeees 5 28 Chapter 6 Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Badge Layout Live Screen Video Image Settings ccccccccccssssssseeeeseeeeees 7 13 Live sorcen Grab Setini S eccrine ie a 7 14 Liye Screen PHOLO SCH Sioe h oi a rouse iolennareae 7 14 COOL SS WS cian cul ayr
215. CCTV Switcher Configuration dialog box appears CCTY Switcher Configuration X A Dw Add Edit Basic Information Cameras Monitors Description oe Delete Burle F Show Pott TEPAP Connection Fort Settings Bits per Second fmn z Data Bits les Parity None z Shop Bits a IP Address or Mode name Encryption Password Port Mo 3001 Cancel Apply Help 3 Configure the CCTV Switcher using the Basic Information Cameras and Monitors tabs Refer to the Adding a CCTV Switcher section in this chapter for configuring the CCTV switcher 4 Click OK to save the changes WIN PAK User s Guide 11 72 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map CCTV Switcher Isolating and Deleting a CCTV Switcher You cannot delete a CCTV switcher until you isolate CCTV switcher ADV from floor plans operator levels action groups and ADVs Isolating a CCTV switcher To isolate a CCTV switcher 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server 3 Right click the CCTV switcher and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 4 To isolate floor plans from a CCTV switcher ADV a Click the Floor Plans tab The floor plans associated to the CCTV switcher are listed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the CCTV switcher and click Remove The selected
216. CD Key details The CD Key is found in the front cover of the WIN PAK Quick Reference Guide 4 Click Next The setup verifies the CD key and displays the message for validity 5 Click OK The WIN PAK Setup Type screen appears WIN PAK Install x Setup Type Select the setup type that best suits your needs Select Database Installation Mode Contact Honeywell Access Systeme support prior to attempting a manual DB install f Install Automatically Highly Recommended Install Manually Expert Mode InstallShield Back Cancel 6 Select the Installation Mode as Install Automatically for auto installation Note You may need the support of Honeywell Access Systems for manual Ty B installation 7 Click Next The dialog box appears prompting you to create icons on the desktop 8 Click Yes to place the icons on your desktop The summary of the selected information is displayed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades WIN PAK Install x Start Copping Files Mi Setup has enough information to start copying the program files IF you want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Install Type Database Server Only Target Director C Program Files tw IHFAKFPARO User of Hext gt Cancel User Name
217. Component A is on b Select the Off Action that has to be taken by Component B when Component A is off Table 11 3 Describing the available actions for points Action Energize Description Turns the point on De Energize Turns the point off Pulse Energize the point for a set time Pulse Off Turn off a point currently pulsed When relay is energized it does Pulse Off and then return to Energized state This is rarely used and is used in addition to a command file No Action No change of state Component A Output 1 door strike relay Component B Input 1 door status switch Action 1 Follow Action 2 No Action Interlocking Examples Example 1 Component A Input 5 motion detector Component B Output 3 siren Action 1 Energize Action 2 De energize When the motion detector is triggered input 5 goes into active state output 3 energizes turning on the siren When input 5 returns to normal state output 3 de energizes turning off the siren Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 113 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Example 2 Component A Input 6 door status switch Component B Output 4 bell Action 1 Pulse Action 2 No Action When the door status switch is opened illegally input 6goes into active state output 4 pulses based on the pulse time set The pulse time is set in the Output Point dialog box A
218. D Database Server 3 Daylight Saving Group 22 Adding 23 Deleting 24 Editing 24 Default Settings 2 20 Defaults Option 21 Defining Areas 1 Defining Operators 15 Adding 15 Operator Level 17 Deleting 20 Editing 18 Searching 19 Sorting 19 Tips on Password 18 De fragmenting 21 Device Map Report 35 additional filter options 36 CCTV Switcher 38 Fusion 41 Loops 37 Modem Pool 39 Panels 37 RapidEye 40 Servers 36 Device Map tree 2 Digital Video 26 19 camera controls 20 Clip 19 Configuring a Fusion 31 Configuring an Access DVPRO 26 35 Dedicated Micros 26 35 Editing a Fusion 33 Editing an Access DVPRO 28 37 Filtering 23 Isolating and Deleting a Fusion 33 Isolating and Deleting an Access DVPRO Document 7 001009 Revision B 29 37 Live 19 Sub Type 35 Direct point 133 Domain Environment 2 Adding 2 Log On Property 4 Power Users 3 Setting 6 Door Interlocks 133 Control Mode 134 Direct Point 133 Disable Egress for Time Zone 134 Free Egress Input 134 Held Open Time 135 Pre Alarm Time 135 Status Input 134 Strike off 134 Strike Time 134 Doors 27 E Enabling Ports 10 Ethernet Module 77 Adding 78 80 Connection Password 79 Default Polling 78 Encryption 79 Galaxy Gold Port Number 79 Galaxy Gold User Interface 77 Panel Defaults 78 Poll Once 78 Polling Interval 78 Remote PIN 79 Zones 77 Event View 27 5 Alarm 6 Both 6 Card Read 6 Filter Devices 6 Filtering 6 Opening 5 Exit Areas 7 Document 7 001009 R
219. Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Guard Tour Running Guard Tours 6 To start the guard tour click Start The guard tour starts and the Next Check Point Last Check Point Time Left for Next Check Point Total Tour Time Left details are updated as the guard tour proceeds 7 To view the status of the checkpoints as the guard tour proceeds select the Record View Visible check box The Guard Tour Check Points dialog box appears Guard Tour Check Points Check Point ap HS2 Reader 1 00 01 00 15 2 N52 In 1 00 01 00 00 a To view the status of sequenced checkpoints click the Sequenced CheckPoints tab Note Alarms are displayed in the Alarm View window and Events are displayed in the Event View window according to the check point alarms configured for various action states b To view the status of unsequenced checkpoints click the Unsequenced CheckPoints tab The checkpoints the guard has visited is displayed in Red color c To close the Guard Tour Check Points dialog box clear the Record View Visible check box in the Guard Tour window 8 To pause the guard tour click Pause The button name changes to Resume 9 Click Resume to restart the tour 10 Click Cancel to stop the guard tour Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Running Guard Tours WIN PAK User s Guide 14 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions In this chapter Introduction Locate Card Holder Sy
220. E N1000PanettInp Unbuffer H N1000P anel Out H E Fusion DVB Set kade to UAusen 2 Right click the desired panel in the Control Map tree and select Initialize The Panel Initialization Options dialog box appears Note The options available on the Panel Configuration Options dialog box are device dependent i WIN PAK User s Guide 11 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Panel Initialization Options X Panel Configuration Options Time and Date Cards T Command File I Holidays D Time Zones Input Points T Output Points T Groups OF Cancel Refer to the Panel Initialization Options section in this chapter to know the description for initialization options 3 To send all types of information click Select All OR To update only the selected information select the corresponding check boxes 4 Click OK to update the panel details Refer to the Initializing Status section in this chapter for details on status of the initialization Panel Initialization Options Table 11 2 Describing panel initialization options Panel Initialization Description Options Panel Configuration Sends all panel configuration information This resets your panel Options programming It is recommended that you use the Select All feature button when the Panel Configuration Options are to be sent Time amp Date Updates panel time and date with th
221. Enter the required text inside the text box 3 Adjust the zoom percentage of the text box a Right click the text box and select Zoom to adjust the Zoom percentage of the text box The Zoom dialog box appears ES ll Fit window Custom mea b Select the zoom percentage or enter the percentage in Custom c Click OK to save the zoom percentage and to close the Zoom dialog box Adjusting the Size of the Floor Plan The zoom factor enables you to enlarge or reduce the size of the floor plan for a specified percentage To set the zoom factor 1 Right click anywhere inside the floor plan design 2 Select Zoom from the pop up menu The Zoom dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 12 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Fit window i Custom 3 Under Zoom to click the required percentage for enlarging or reducing the floor plan or click Custom and type the required percentage 4 Click OK to save the changes a Note Right click anywhere inside the floor plan design and select Undo Zoom to ZA display the floor plan in its previous size Previewing the Floor Plan You can preview the floor plan and customize the preview area To preview the floor plan 1 Right click anywhere inside the floor plan design 2 Select Show View from the pop up menu A preview of the floor plan is displayed 3 Right click anywhere in the floor plan preview and select View Area The F
222. FICE HOURS 8 AM to 5 PM CST PHONE 414 766 1700 FAX 414 766 1798 URL http www honeywellaccess com Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B l 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Contacts WIN PAK User s Guide l 4 Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B Introduction In this chapter Overview of WIN PAK 1 2 WIN PAK Features 1 3 Software Concepts 1 4 Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B WIN PAK User s Guide Introduction Overview of WIN PAK Overview of WIN PAK WIN PAK is a state of the art access control software that is compatible with Windows XP operating system and Win2000 or Win2003 server based operating systems The WIN PAK access control software uses access control mechanism to authenticate the employee access at security areas Access is authenticated by way of access cards or key codes provided to the employees In addition the access control tracks the employee access controls the entry and exit details and generates reports of all access cards and keycode activities AN Note By default WIN PAK supports the configuration and monitoring of the access control panels If you want WIN PAK to support intrusion panels you must procure the additional license from Technical Support Honeywell Access Systems WIN PAK Components The WIN PAK application is divided into three components Database Server Communication Server and User Interface These components can run on a single computer or on multiple computers allowing flexibility
223. Guard Tour Server to run the guard tour In turn the Guard Tour server communicates with the communication server to interact with panels or communicates with the database server to retrieve data in the SQL server Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Tracking and Muster Server The WIN PAK User Interface and other servers must communicate with the Tracking and Muster Server to monitor the tracking and mustering area In turn the Tracking and Muster server communicates with the communication server to interact with panels for retrieving the up to data on card reads Interacting with Intrusion Panels In WIN PAK the intrusions happening in the premises of the access control system are monitored using the Galaxy and Vista panels To monitor intrusions of a particular area in the access control system the Galaxy panel groups or the Vista panel partitions in that area must be activated To set the Galaxy groups or arm the Vista partitions you must 1 Associate Galaxy groups or Vista partitions to the readers and the input points Refer to the Configuring a reader to the panel section in this chapter for associating Galaxy groups or Vista partitions to the reader and the input point 2 Add these readers and input points to the access area Refer to the Adding a Device section in the chapter Defining Areas for adding readers to the access area 3 Assign access level
224. Include all devices in this area Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 15 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Event View Note You can also double click the branch to display the Set Device Selection for a Control Area dialog box 7 Select one of the following options e Leave Selection for all devices in this area as it currently is To retain the existing filters set for the devices in this branch e Un Select Filter out all devices in this area To clear the selection of all the devices in this branch The devices in this branch are not monitored e Select Include all devices in this area To select all the devices in this branch All the devices in this branch are monitored 8 To filter a device right click the device and select Invert Selection Status to select the device or clear the selection 9 Click OK to return to the Filter Devices dialog box Tip e To search for a branch or device a Right click the branch or device and select Find The Find dialog box appears b Type the item to be searched and click Find The first item in the tree that matches the criteria is highlighted e To refresh the tree right click the branch or device and select Refresh 10 Click OK to save the filter selection Only the events that occur in the selected area and device are displayed in the Event View window Note The filter settings are lost after you close the Event View window Therefore to view the
225. K User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Card Record X Card Properties Badge Card Number Status Issue Card Holder Access Level PIM Description Privileged CT Account accoun CO Visitor P Series Trigger Control Custom Access Level Add User Level ja Eal Action Group N one IE Activation Date Change Clear Expiration Date Change Clear Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the Card Properties tab It is selected by default 4 Type a unique Card Number 5 Click the ellipsis button to select the Card Holder The Select dialog box appears 6 Select the First Name or Last Name in the Find Key list 7 Enter the keyword in the Find What box and then click Find A list of card holders that matches the criteria is displayed Note To list all the card holders click Find without entering the keyword Select the card holder and click OK The Select dialog box is closed and returned to the Card Record dialog box T 9 Select the Status of the card e Active The card is ready for access It is selected by default e Inactive The card is on hold for access e Lost or Stolen The card is lost or stolen and the access is restricted e Trace The card is ready for access and given special attention while accessing The card details are displayed in Alarm View while accessing the card 10 Select the access level of the
226. K User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK Help WIN PAK PE WIN PAK PE WIN PAE PE Build 631 Copyright C 1998 2001 Honeywell Access Systems All Rights Reserved Serial Humber 2093 40 34050 33 Vieit us on the World Wide Web at http www honepwellaccess com 2 Click OK to close the window WIN PAK User s Guide 3 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started In this chapter Introduction 4 2 Remote Client Server Configuration 4 2 System Manager 4 12 Service Manager 4 14 User Interface 4 15 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Introduction Introduction This chapter describes how to configure client and server unblock firewall protections start and stop the WIN PAK services and to log on and log off from WIN PAK 6 Note Before you start working with WIN PAK make sure that you have configured B the settings that are described in this chapter Remote Client Server Configuration WIN PAK works both in Domain and Workgroup environment You can set the client server communication as per the need However the domain environment is set by default After changing the settings restart the servers and client for the changes to take effect Note Ensure that the client server communication setting matches across all the servers and client computers Domain Environment To work in a Domain Environment you must add the domain users to the lo
227. K to export the report to a file at the specified location Tip To open and view the report file browse through the specified location and open it Estimating the number of pages in the report To estimate the number of pages in the report 1 In the Report dialog box click Estim Pages The Print Progress dialog box appears showing the formatting status Print Progress i Formatting Record 1 of 2 Cancel Then the message box appears showing the number of estimated pages TS lx ANY The estimated number of pages is 10 2 Click OK to return to the Report dialog box Clearing the filter options To clear all the filter options set for generating the report 1 Click Clear All The user defined filter options are cleared in the Report dialog box Note The sorting options for the report are not cleared T Reporting from Archive Database When you restore a backup file you can either overwrite the information in the current database or you can restore to the Archive Database To view the reports from the Archive Database 1 Select the Run from Archive Database check box in the report window You can view the report from the archived database Closing the dialog box To close the Report dialog box 1 Click Close The dialog box is closed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Access Area Report The Access Area report displays th
228. Monitor window Button Control Description Button Pan Tilt Click the Pan and Tilt icon to display the Pan Tilt adjustment box Click and drag the red dot left or right to pan camera left or right Click and drag the red dot up or down to tilt the camera up or down Zoom Click the Zoom icon to display the Zoom adjustment box Click the drag the Zoom dot towards right to zoom the camera in Click and drag the dot towards left to zoom the camera out Iris Click the Iris icon to display Iris adjustment box Click and drag the Iris dot towards right to increase the aperture of the camera iris Click and drag the Iris dot towards left to decrease the aperture of the camera iris 7 Focus Click the Focus icon to display the Focus adjustment ae box Click and drag the Focus dot towards right to focus on C closer objects Click and drag the Focus dot towards left to n A focus on distant objects J Controlling the recorded video display In the recorded video window controls are provided to pause play fast forward adjust time and so on 1 Click Pause to stop the video and click Play to restart the video display all a l Rate Adjust tf 4 s 1 hour 1 hour Pause Pl Paused Fast a Normal Same Next Fast Time Image Forward 2 Adjust the Rate control to adjust the video play back speed 3 Adjust the Adjust control to adjust the time of the recorded video maximum to an hour before or after the cu
229. NAK Remote Communication Loop To edit a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and communication server 3 Right click the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Configure The 485 PCI Loop Configuration dialog box appears 435 PCI Loop Configuration X Basic Information Hub Settings Panel Defaults 170 Pall Interval Mame Edit Description lzolate Panel CMD Retry Count ACK AMAR 3 Pelete M Panel CMD Time Out Show 5 Buffer all panels on exit O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi bd Remote Phone Number Modem 23423 Modem 1 Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the panel loop using Basic Information and Port Settings tabs Refer to the Adding a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop section in this chapter for configuring the 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop 5 Click OK to save the changes Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 67 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools Isolating and Deleting a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop You cannot delete a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop until you delete the panels attached to it and remove all the references of an ADV of a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a 485 ACK
230. Note In the following screens the default path settings for installation database archive file database file and language file are displayed we 2 Click Browse to change the destination folder and click Next in each screen The dialog box appears prompting you to create icons on the desktop 3 Click Yes to place the icons on your desktop The summary of the selected information is displayed 4 Click Back to change any installation settings or click Next 5 After installation is complete the WIN PAK Setup Complete screen appears WIN PAK Install xj Start Copping Files My Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Install Type User Interface and Comm Server Target Directory C Program Files wtw IHFAKFPRO Language Fath C Program Files tW IHFAKRPROSL Language Files of k Hegt gt Cancel 6 Click Finish to complete the installation and restart the computer Installing Communication Server WIN PAK supports installation of multiple communication servers across a network After installing Database Server and User Interface multiple communication servers can be installed depending on your licensing limit WIN PAK User s Guide 2 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades To ins
231. O A ace 1 4 Chapter 2 Installation lntrod cton sso ea a a ar S a 2 2 OVEN CN ae as ees oe ee ect er ere eee ee 2 2 WINSP AKG APC tle Ctr Cte sidiccies y3 ces ion in ceases a AEE 2 2 System REGUIFEMCIIES woscesaecsteceleisiieeitehccsacsstivetueledeiseaidacsedsecsbadus cesvocsceasusieceiets 2 2 LAr Wale IRC QUILGINICING caxgicscucavasansusicbavanitea Aintustusditsvstenns detecsduceesnncee eu eottbes 2 2 Video Capire Car sores pes aisle cca ceases A 2 3 Modems and Communication Ports cccccccssssseseeeceeeeeeeeaes 2 3 Badene PRINCES 5 va caiionssvasieceuidc ATAA 2 4 Report Printe S sesiunea A st odiasadaveudaecseceses 2 4 Panel T TWITE are E AN E TER 2 4 Software Requirements siumo e a e n a a aaa 2 4 System Prereguisil ES rnnsun aa a a r a 2 4 Stand alone SYS SMS issii 2 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i i WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Networked SY SECIS manan a E garner ioneneenaiiae 2 5 Installation anid DP rades isis ssssiscscsscsscssesssedisversdesuatedieiserdisiveccavivesderssesssaaseves 2 5 OV ET VIC W epee ceil Aiea erect iar nants tea 2 5 lostalline WIN PA R oeeie ea tate sete EUNA O A E 2 6 lnstalline Complete WIN PA Reema a tact eaane eoseaedeunese 2 9 Installing Database SEVE ose vadaiasvedasoanssanasteasenosisatinenedtdenadestedaciadesaveiandes 2 12 lastalline User Tin Cer aC Enervon EE T E EE 2 14 Installing User Interface and Communication Server cceeesseeeeeees 2 15 Installing Communic
232. OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 34 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Deleting a fusion digital video After deleting the child nodes and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the fusion digital video To delete a fusion digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the fusion digital video and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 3 Click OK to confirm the deletion The fusion digital video is deleted from the device map Configuring a Dedicated Micros Digital Video Ensure that you configure the Digital Video before using the Dedicated Micros functions Note You must procure the license for dedicated micros for enabling this feature in WIN PAK T To add a new Dedicated Micros 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Digital Video The Digital Video Configuration dialog box appears Digital Yideo Configuration Description Type Dedicated Micros hd Sub Type ps x User Password Communication Settings Machine Name or IP Address Browse 3 Select the digital video Type as Dedicated Micros The relevant fields are enabled 4 Select the Sub Type of the dedicated micros The available sub types
233. P aeie aN E 10 44 Addie a3 5 PC LP anel LOO site paroaneaitiotstesntoannedsd votaateteneete 10 44 Editing a 485 PCI Panel Loop cccccecccccccesscceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 46 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 I vi WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Isolating and Deleting a 485 PCI Panel Loop 0 10 47 RS 2232 Paine lt LOOP eere tat seater we eaten ey ota tase T 10 48 Adding an RS 232 Panel Loop ccccccccssssssescseseseeeeeseeees 10 48 Editing an RS 232 Panel LOop cccccccccccccssssennnsssssessesseeees 10 51 Isolating and Deleting an RS 232 Panel Loop 10 51 Pep eres Pane F OOP ia a 60s32edagarssan caesar A 10 53 Addie a F series Panel LOOD recreen n 10 53 Editing a P Series Panel Loop reccasnoirenanrenseai 10 55 Isolating and Deleting a P Series Panel Loop 04 10 55 Modem Fools sescesuasccsisivecsividcoszcadsavs ae ENEE EE SENSE an 10 57 PACING a Modei POO lerruaai tienda arsed ET T cies 10 57 Ecitine a Modem Poo lessiu a aden 10 59 Isolating and Deleting a Modem Pool ecscccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 59 Isolating a Modem Pool isco k issih tacituee tats A 10 59 Deleting a Moden Poo lerriaren 10 60 C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop 10 61 Adding a C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication WOO Dieta a ee eee 10 61 Editing a C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication EDO eena ee eee er ane ee en eee nae eer ee ee eee eee T
234. PAK Note Ensure that the above mentioned features are supported by the switchers and cameras T 1 To view the title of the camera that is monitored right click in the live view area and select Send Camera Titles 2 To view the time and date right click in the live view area and select Send Time and Date Refer to the CCTV equipment manual to ensure that title time and date features are supported Table 15 4 Describing control buttons on the Live Monitor window Control Description Button Adjusting Click and hold the upper half of Focus In Focus Out to Focus slowly focus on closer objects Click and hold the lower half of the button to slowly focus on distant objects Adjusting Click and hold the top half of Iris In Iris Out to slowly Iris increase the aperture opening of the camera iris allowing more light in Click and hold the bottom half of the button to slowly decrease the aperture of the camera iris letting in less light Adjusting Click and hold the upper half of Zoom In Zoom Out to Zoom slowly zoom the camera in Click and hold the lower half of the button to slowly zoom the camera out Adjusting The control arrows on the Live Monitor window pan Pan Tilt the camera left and right and tilt it up and down Click and hold the camera control arrows to move the camera The left arrow pans to the left The right arrow pans to the right The up arrow tilts the camera up while the down arrow tilts the c
235. PAK User s Guide 7 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction e Click Font to modify the font and color of the field name f Select the Size font to box check box if you want to resize the font to fit the text block g Click Apply to add the text box to the badge outline Placing a Photo You can place a placeholder for the card holder s photo on the badge design When the badge is assigned to a card and card holder the card holder s photo 1s placed at the photo placeholder e To add a photo on the badge outline a Click B on the toolbar b Click and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the photo The photo is now placed on the badge outline e To change the photo properties a Right click on the photo and click Properties b Click the Photo tab Badge Element Layout Ea Fhoto Colors Positioning Fhoto Indes f I Stretch width W Stretch Height I Keep Aspect Ratio Ghosting Cancel Ayan Help c Type or select the Photo Index Note The Photo Index indicates which card holder picture must appear on the badge The default is 1 d Select the Stretch Width check box to stretch the width of the photo e Select the Stretch Height check box to stretch the height of the photo f Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box to retain the aspect ratio of the photo while stretching its height and width g Increase or decrease the Ghosting option to set the d
236. Panel Galaxy Panel U Vista Panel U Add Remove 2 Inthe Panel Name list select the panel to which you want to associate the user codes The user codes that are configured for the selected panel are listed out The Panel Name list contains the Galaxy and Vista panels that are configured in the Device Map Refer to the Adding a Galaxy Panel or Adding a Vista Panel section in the chapter Device Map for configuring panels in WIN PAK 3 In the Available User Codes list select the user codes to be associated to the card holder 4 Click Add The selected user codes are moved to the User Codes associated list Tip If you want to remove the associated user codes select the user codes from the User Codes associated list and click Remove Printing a badge and card report To print a badge associated with the card 1 Select the card from the list and click Print Badge The badge 1s printed OR Perform the following steps a Select the card from the list and click Print The Select Printed Output dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information b Click Print Cards The Print Badge Preview of the badge associated to the selected card appears Print Badge Preview 1 of 1 Ea Honeywell A Gi Julie ORT Preys ert c Click Print The badge is printed Note Use the Pre
237. Properties Local Computet J Jed EA General Log n Recovery Dependencies Log on as f Local System account Allow service to interact with desktop This account Browee Easswond Eontr password fou can enable or disable this service for the hardware profiles listed below Hardware Profile Profile 1 Enabled Enable Disable 3 Click the Log On tab 4 Click This Account By default Local System account is selected 5 Enter the domain user account or click Browse to select the user account The domain user account is added to the System Administrator or Power User group in the Adding Domain Users section in this chapter 6 Type your Password and re enter the password for confirmation in Confirm password Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration General Log On Recover Dependencies Log on as Local System account F Allow service to interact with desktop i This account PACRIMTNES0BB79 O Browse Fassword CCST TTITITETLTT Confirm password eseesessssess 7 Click OK to save the changes Follow the same procedure for setting the Log On As property of all the other WIN PAK Servers Notes ce e Restart the system to see the changes e Log onto WIN PAK Server System using any account local or domain However the client system must be logged on with the domain user account
238. R Loop Name Loo 3 1 Start P P Choose the Loop Type from the 2 Loop Node Name IP Address existing list Depending on the 3 Panel loop type the supported panel 4 Readers types will be shown in the Panel 5 Finish page PANEL SIO BOARDS DONE Note WIN PAK supports three types of communication protocals such as Local TCP IP and Dial Up lt Back Next gt Cancel Select the Communication Type It determines the type of protocol used for communication Select the Loop Type The available loop types are Direct and 485 ACK NAK Type the Loop Name WIN PAK supports three types of communication protocols namely Local TCP IP and Dial Up The loop configuration differs based on the protocol type selected for communication If you select Local as the Communication Type select the Communication Port name connected to the panel OR If you select TCP IP as the Communication Type type the Node Name or IP Address of the loop OR If you select Dial Up as the Communication Type Select the Communication Port name T P Type the Modem Pool Name P Type the Modem Name Type the Local Phone Number e Type the Remote Phone Number f Type the Password Click Next The Panel dialog box appears 6 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Panel Add panel to loop Loop Panel Type NS2 x Panel Name Loop1 Panel1 T x Panel Address 1 Start 2 Loop 3 Panel 4 Readers 5 Fi
239. REEEE PRERER ERT RERTETE _ i 0 Ts a Ts se 20 oO Ts _ 6 OT s For Help press F1 Note The Two Page button toggles between Two Page and One Page If you want to restore the single page display click One Page 6 To close the preview window and print the report a Click Print The Print dialog box appears Print EIE Hame Wiel Ont2ks009PLUO5 ka Properties Shatus Ready Type HP Laserlet 8750 PCL 6 Where PLUTO South Wing Sth Floor Comment HP Laserjet 8150DN Print to file Copies Number of copies i Print range i All f Pages from tof pi T Collate f Selection Cancel b Select the printer in the Name list and set the print properties c Click OK The report is printed to the selected printer 7 To close the preview window without printing the report click Close WIN PAK User s Guide 17 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Printing the report To print the report 1 Click Print in the Report dialog box The Print Progress dialog box appears showing the formatting status Print Progress l Formatting Record 1 of 2 Cancel Then the Print dialog box appears Print eee zixl Frinter Hame Wiel Onteks009 PLU05 Properti
240. Select a Time Zone during which the output point must be turned on 4 Select Sec Min or Hrs and enter the Pulse Time to set the period during which the output point must be energized when triggered 5 Set the Interlocking for the output point Refer to the Interlocking section in this chapter for more details on interlocking Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 93 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 6 Click Next to set the group properties The Panel Configuration Group dialog box appears Note This dialog box appears only if you have opted for Group option in the Panel Configuration Options dialog box Configuring groups to the panel A group is one or more active output points that are grouped together Output relay groups enable a card read to activate more than one output relay for applications such as elevator control As many as 32 groups can be defined per panel To define an output group WIN PAK User s Guide 1 In the Panel Configuration Groups dialog box select a group under Name The output points belonging to the selected groups are listed in Available Outputs Mame Available Outputs ADV loop Grp 1 a loop Grp 2 Edi Isolate Delete Move To Selected C Show Time Zone Select All De Select All Selected Outputs Sec Minn Hr Out Pulse Time lo M Interlocking fe OD OG Foint 1 loop In 1 ius On Action H
241. Set Timed Set Panel sets all the zones after a specific time Group Bypass Panel bypasses alarms from all the zones in the group Group Unbypass Panel stops bypassing alarms from all the zones in the group Refresh Refreshes the latest status of a group 12 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Table 12 2 ADV Control Functions from Floor Plan Galaxy Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Bypass Zone Panel bypasses alarms from the zone Unbypass Zone Panel stops bypassing alarms from the selected zones Force bypass Zone Forcefully bypasses the zones which cannot be bypassed using the Bypass Zone option For example Fire Refresh Refreshes the latest status of a zone Galaxy Output Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Activate Activates the output Deactivate Deactivates the output Refresh Refreshes the latest status of an output Galaxy Keypad Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy MAX Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Galaxy RIOs Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Vista Partition Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Arm Away The panel completely arms the perimeter and interior burglary partition by sensing the intruder s movements Arm Stay Arms only the perimeter burglary protection guarding protected doors windows and other perimeter protection points in the partition This enables automatic bypassing of certain areas that a
242. Setting Domain Environment To set the domain environment 1 Choose Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt System Manager The System Manager window appears System Manager X Communication Server Muster Server Command File Server User Interface Database Server Database Archive Server Scheduler Server Guard Tour Server RPC Security Options Client Server Communication Settings DOMAIN Environment Recommended WORKGROUP Environment Note All the Client and Server Machines should be configured with the Same Settings Cancel 2 Click DOMAIN Environment Recommended and click OK This sets the Domain Environment WIN PAK User s Guide 4 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration Firewall Exception Settings The Windows Firewall protection system blocks the WIN PAK services in a networked system Therefore you must unblock the WIN PAK services before using WIN PAK Unblocking WIN PAK Services on Windows XP SP2 WIN PAK services must be unblocked only if the Windows Firewall status is set to On Therefore check the firewall status in the Windows Firewall dialog box To check Firewall Status and unblock WIN PAK Services 1 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and open Windows Firewall The Windows Firewall dialog box appears 2 Check the status of Windows Firewall If the option Off not recommended is set no need of pr
243. T 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Mew Delhi r Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the loop using the Basic Information and Port Settings tabs WIN PAK User s Guide 11 46 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Refer to the Adding a 485 PCI Panel Loop section in this chapter for configuring 485 PCI panel loop 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting a 485 PCI Panel Loop You cannot delete a 485 PCI panel loop until you delete the panels attached to it and remove all references to the 485 PCI panel loop from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a 485 PCI panel loop To isolate 485 PCI panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the 485 PCI panel loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device 485 PCI Mame Description Floor Remove Remove All Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of 485 PCI panel loop a Click the Floor Plans tab The floor plans associated to the 485 PCI panel loop are listed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the 485 PCI panel loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the panel loop 5 To isolate operator
244. T WIZARD Continue ACCOUNT 1 Start 2 New Account Finish No information has been saved to WIN PAK s database at this TIMEZONES Pai tas point in time Ifyou need any modification you can go back and do CARDS SITE so now Once the Next button is pressed you will not be able to go back and modify the settings In such cases you need to click A Cancel and start over again SIO BOARDS Click Next to continue further DONE 5 Click Back to change the settings or click Next The time zones are associated to the accounts and the Configure dialog box is displayed with the Add Cards to existing Account option selected g Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click Pm Done B and perform the steps that follow Associating Cards to an Account As the cards are specific to an account they must be associated to an account before you create new cards To add new cards and associate them to an account 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click to select Add Cards to existing Account 2 In the Account list select an account for associating cards to an account P QUICK START WIZARD Configuration Options x QUICK START WIZARD Configure ACCOUNT Select one of the following configuration options Add Cards io existing Account TIMEZONES ro Rew A option allows you to add cards CARDS reate New Account to the selected account s C Add Time Zones a 2 Cards e oe Sele
245. Table 11 1 Explaining Shunt Time and Debounce Time Scenario Shunt Time Alarm raised at 6 Enter the time interval after which the changed state of an input point is reported Example An input point with a debounce time of 5 can be in active condition for five seconds before it is reported as an alarm The same is true when returning to normal condition The input point would not report as normal until it was in the normal state for five seconds Note If the value is set to zero the debounce time is a minimum of 33 seconds on events going to normal but alarms are reported immediately The debounce time is 0 seconds on alarm 7 Select the Supervised check box to report the troubles when there is a change in the state of input points 8 Select Normally Closed or Normally Opened to specify the normal state of the door Note All N 1000 PW 2000 alarm input points and N 1000 PW 2000 with an AEP 5 default to Normally Closed N 1000 PW 2000 III IV inputs can be configured for Normally Open circuits and 3 state supervised circuits 9 Under Report Alarms select the following e Never To prevent from reporting the alarms e Always To report alarms Trouble To report the trouble conditions This is typically used for egress devices to detect tampering This option is enabled only for supervised input point 10 Set the Interlocking option for the input point Refer to the Interlocking section in this chapter for more
246. The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices 3 Right click the fusion video and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 33 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device Fusion Remove Remove All 2 items Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV ofthe fusion digital video a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the fusion digital video is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the fusion digital video and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the fusion digital video 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the fusion digital video a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the fusion digital video is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the fusion digital video and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the fusion digital video c To remove the fusion digital video from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the fusion digital video in the control area clear the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click
247. The selected graphic file opens in the window behind the Floor Plan Toolbox window and is also saved in the WINPAK PRO Database FloorPlanImage folder 7 Add ADVs links and text objects to the background Refer to the Creating Floor Plan Design section in this chapter for more details on adding ADVs links and text objects to the floor plan 8 In the Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box click Save amp Exit to save the floor plan and return to the Floor Plan Definition window 9 Click Close X to close the Floor Plan Definition window a Note The ADV controls of the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel are available only if ia the license for the Galaxy and or Vista panel is procured Creating Floor Plan Design Designing a floor plan involves e Placing ADVs that must be monitored and controlled from the floor plan e Adding text blocks and links to other floor plans e Adding Event View and Alarm View links to the floor plan To create a floor plan design 1 Choose Configuration gt Floor Plan Definition The Floor Plan Definition window appears 2 Click Add to add a new floor plan or highlight a floor plan from the database list and click Edit to modify the selected floor plan The Floor Plan Toolbox window together with the floor plan design window appear 3 Add ADVs Floor Plan links Alarm View and Event View Links and Text Blocks to the floor plan Refer to the sections Adding an ADV to the Floor Plan A
248. Top Properties on Cancel b In the Badge Items list select the item to be moved c Click Up to move the item up or click Down to move the item down d Click Top to bring the selected item to the upper layer of the badge e Click Properties to open the Badge Element Layout dialog box for the selected item The item s properties can be edited without changing its layering order f Click OK to save the changes To select an item in the layering order click the Select Next Item button Each time you click the button it moves to the next item Continue clicking the i button until the item you want is selected Configuring Badge DLLs A specific dynamic link library dll file 1s required for the video capture card TWAIN device and signature pad used with the WIN PAK System The DLLs for currently supported hardware are included in the WINPAK PRO directory and are installed from within WIN PAK 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge DLL s The Badge DLL s dialog box is displayed Badge DLL s x Capture Driver Type Microsoft Direct DLL Video Capture Card DLL R Signature Pad DLL cancel 2 Select one of the following Capture Driver Type options e Microsoft DirectX Click this option if you want to capture the video using DirectX and no specific video capture card driver 1s required Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 29 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction oe
249. Type of connection Serial RS 232 or TCP IP used for connecting the P Series directly to the Host computer P Series Configuration Connection Settings x No Port Device Inactive nd Bits per Second IC Reply Timeout 500 mSec Poll Delay j Sec TCP IP Retry Connect Interval fis Sec IP Address or Node Name of the IC a f22 lt Back Cancel Help 2 If you select the connection type as Serial RS 232 enter the following a Port The port in which the panel is connected to the communication server b Bits per Second The communication rate for the panel This field defaults to 38400 but can be set at 9600 or 19200 as well depending on the baud rate set on the Intelligent Controller c RTS Mode The RTS Mode Request to Send enables the Host PC to know that the Intelligent Controller is ready to send information The RTS Mode defaults to Always On The Toggle RTS Mode applies when there is an RS 485 to RS 232 converter that requires a handshake The Toggle option is never used for a direct connection 3 If a network card is installed on the computer and the PRO Intelligent Controller is configured for a TCP IP connection enter the following a IC Reply Timeout It is the duration the Host computer waits for an acknowledgment after it has sent an outgoing packet Note If acknowledgment is not received within the specified time the Host PC resends the packet The host ret
250. VPRO digital video To isolate an access DVPRO digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the access DVPRO digital video and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 29 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Isolate Device or ADY p X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device AccessD PRAO Remove Remove All 1 iltem Eancel Help 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of the access DVPRO digital video a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the access DVPRO digital video is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the access DVPRO digital video and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the access DVPRO digital video 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of access DVPRO digital video a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the access DVPRO digital video is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the access DVPRO digital video and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the access DVPRO digital video c To remove the access DVPRO digital video from the
251. WIN PAK 16 19 9 WIN PAK User s Guide R Readers 27 Registering WIN PAK 19 Registering WIN PAK Online 20 License Key 21 Remove Branch 11 15 Remove Entrance 11 15 Report Templates 3 Card Holder Report Templates 3 History Report Templates 5 RPC connection 11 RS 232 Connection 74 Adding 74 Editing 76 Isolating and Deletin 76 Port Settings 75 RS 232 Panel Loop 48 Adding 48 Editing 51 Isolating and Deleting 51 Loop Verification Interval 49 Panel Defaults 49 Port 50 Ruler Measurement 7 Run Report 11 Report Type 16 S Saturation 13 16 Schedule 7 a task 7 Activate and Deactivate Cards 9 Card Frequency Report 10 Deleting 19 Dial Remote Area 13 Editing 19 Guard Tour Configuration 15 Run Command File 14 Run Guard Tour 15 Run Report 16 Send Date and Time 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Task Type 9 Task types 8 Update cards every day 7 Update Custom Access Level 18 Update Custom AL every day 7 Update date and time every day 7 Schedule Report 58 Schedule Server 3 Adding 18 Editing 19 Isolating and Deleting 20 Search 10 Sentinel Hardware Lock Drivers 18 Sequenced check point 2 Sequenced check points 4 Server Configuration 4 Command File Server 10 Communication Server 5 Digital Video 26 Guard Tour Server 14 Schedule Server 18 Tracking and Muster Server 22 Setting background color 15 Shortcut Keys 5 Signature Index 23 SIO Boards 27 Site 7 Add Branch 21 Snap to Grid 10 Software Requirements 4 Sort 10 sound file
252. WIN PAK SE PE The Complete Access Control Software User s Guide User Non Disclosure Agreement l Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Honeywell Access Systems 1999 2001 Honeywell Access Systems All rights reserved Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft SQL and MSDE are either registered trade marks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Burle Javelin Panasonic Philips Vicon Dedicated Micros Geutebruck Pelco Wiegand Hughes IDI Proximity Casi Rusco Cotag Proximity Dorado Mag stripe Cards Sielox Wiegand Cards Sielox Proximity Cards NCS 25 Bit Cards NCS 29 Bit Cards Kidde Cards Continental 36 Bit Cards Continental 37 Bit Cards and other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners WIN PAK SE PE User s Guide User Non Disclosure and License Agreement Important This Agreement must be read before proceeding with any Honeywell Access Systems software By installing this soft ware you agree to the terms of this Agreement Important This software is a proprietary product of Honeywell Access Systems It is protected by copyright a
253. WIN PAK User s Guide 11 76 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the RS 232 connection is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the RS 232 connection and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the RS 232 connection 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of RS 232 connection a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the RS 232 connection is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the RS 232 connection and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the RS 232 connection c To clear the presence of an ADV of RS 232 connection in the control area clear the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK Deleting an RS 232 Connection Isolate the associated floor plans and operator levels from RS 232 connection to delete the RS 232 connection To delete an RS 232 connection 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server 3 Right click the RS 232 connection and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the RS 232 connection 4 Click OK to delete The RS 232 connection is deleted
254. Wiegand style 5 wire keypads are used the keypad is treated as a reader and this option must be cleared PIN and Time Zone for PIN The PIN number must be entered in the keypad during a particular time zone before presenting a card to gain access in an entrance e Continuous Card Reads Card readers do not recognize valid cards while the corresponding output is energized Continuous Card Reads enables card readers to read cards continuously independent of output pulse time Example When Output 1 is assigned a 10 second pulse time a valid card read at Reader 1 causes Output 1 to energize for 10 seconds During this time the card reader does not recognize any other valid cards if the Continuous Card Reads option is not selected e Reverse Read LEDs This option reverses the standard LED operation of the reader If this option is selected a reader that normally changes from green to red on a valid card read changes from red to green e Host Grant Host Grant option provides the fault tolerance even if the card is not found in the panel Host Grant options are used when for example a number of cards have been entered in the database but have not yet been downloaded to the panel e Site Codes Site codes ensure that the card belongs to the facility where the card is used for gaining access The site code is encoded with a card number on cards e Hardware Options Hardware Options enable you to include additional input and ou
255. Wl 53154 wan honepwellaccess com eee ee eee eee ee eee eee seen eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees No will restart my computer later 4 Back Finish Eancel 14 Click Yes I want to restart my computer now to restart your computer after installation OR Click No I will restart my computer later to complete the installation without restarting your computer 15 Click Finish to complete the installation Installing Database Server You can install the database server on the computer connected to a network To install only the database server perform the instructions given in Installing WIN PAK and then follow these steps 1 On the WIN PAK Setup Type screen select Database Server Only and click Next The system checks for SQL Service status and displays the WIN PAK Destination Path screen WIN PAK Destination Path i p xj WIN PAK Please indicate where you want to install your WIN PAK executables Destination Folder C Program FilesswINPAKPRO Browse Baek Cancel _ WIN PAK User s Guide 2 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades Note In the following screens the default path settings for installation database archive file database file and language file are displayed 2 Click Browse to change the destination folder and click Next in each screen The WIN PAK User Information screen appears 3 Type your Name Company and
256. Zone in which it operates To configure the system settings WIN PAK User s Guide 1 In the P Series Panel Configuration Remote dialog box click Next The P Series Configuration System dialog box appears P Series Configuration System Time Zone Add GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v Daylight Savings No of Card Holders 5000 Enable card user levels for trigger control No of Transactions to hold when offline No of Transactions to accumulate before dialup fi 0000 7000 Host Grant Open Door and Update Panel lt Back Cancel Help 11 142 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 2 In the Time Zone list select a standard time zone which indicates the panel location The default time zone depends on the time set in the local system 3 In the Daylight Saving Group list select a daylight saving group for this panel This field defaults to None 4 In the No of Card Holders field specify the maximum number of card holders details to be stored based on the memory available in the board By default you can store 5000 card holders details in the controller 5 Select the Enable card user levels for trigger control to trigger certain controls on the usage of specific cards 6 In the No of Transactions to hold when offline text box specify the number of transactions to be buffered in the controller By default you can
257. a particular period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes f Select the standard time zone in the Time Zone list 3 To select the associated camera and recorded video clip based on the type of card events a Click the Transaction Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Digital Video Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Clear All Transaction Types I Alarm Operator W Card Database W Guard Eeee pemet Alarm amp Card J Transactions M Acknowledgements W Clears IY Operator Messages Filter ADs T Sort on Sequence ID Cancel Apply Help b To filter the video display based on the transaction types select the following options under Transaction Types Table 15 7 Describing the transaction types for filtering video display Card Option Description Alarm Includes alarms in Alert and Normal states System Alarm Includes events of system type alarms not wired points such as Poll Response alarms Operator Includes events of operator activities such as log on and log off Database Includes events of basic database activities such as time date operator update delete or add action to a particular database Card
258. age Information 3 Adding Readers to a P Series Panel 11 Administrators 5 ADV Action Groups 170 ADV Control Functions 18 19 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Arm Away 20 Bypass Zone 20 Galaxy Communication 19 Galaxy Group 19 Galaxy Keypad 20 Galaxy MAX 20 Galaxy Output 20 Galaxy Panel 19 Galaxy RIOs 20 Galaxy Zone 20 Panel Reset 21 Part Set 19 Reset Panel 19 Set Group 19 Unbypass Zone 20 Unset Group 19 Vista Output 21 Vista Panel 21 Vista Partition 20 Vista Zone 20 Alarm View 26 8 Acknowledge 10 Add Note 10 Alert State 8 Cnt 8 Command buttons 10 Control Functions 9 Filter Devices 11 Filtering 11 Normal State 8 Open Default Floor Plan 10 Opening 8 right click menu options 9 Trouble State 8 Viewing 13 Archive Database Server 3 Areas Add Branch 3 Add Entrance 4 Introduction 2 Move entrance 5 Remove Branch 5 Remove Entrance 5 Rename Branch 5 Aspect Ratio 14 21 24 WIN PAK User s Guide 19 2 Associating Cards to an Account 5 Associating Time Zones to Accounts 4 Attendance Report 17 Card Report 19 filter 18 sort 18 AutoCard Lookup 14 Activating 14 Buffer 15 Priority 14 Show Note Fields 15 B Background Image 12 Badge Background 11 Badge Definition window 7 Badge Designs 6 Badge DLLs 29 Badge Elements Bar Code 24 Bar code 20 Barcode Options 26 Bitmap 20 23 Item layering order 28 Photo 20 21 Properties 27 Shape 20 22 Signature 20 22 Text 20 Badge Layout 2 Add New 2 3 Configure 2 Conf
259. al device Each ADV is associated to an Action Group An Action Group defines the priority of a given event related to the device as well as any actions that take place in response to an event When you edit an Action Group all ADVs associated to the action group are updated Configuring an Abstract Device This section describes how to add edit delete an abstract device Adding an Abstract Device You can add an abstract device only while configuring the device map However you can edit or delete an ADV using the Abstract Device window To configure an ADV 1 Open the Abstract Device Record Configuration window You can open this window by clicking Add under ADV in any device configuration dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 163 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Abstract Device i WIN PAK User s Guide Abstract Device Record Entrance X ADY Name P1 R3 Description Default Floor Plan None m Action Group Name Door Add Rename Delete Action Anti Passback Violation Priority 30 4 Send Email I Time Zone Always On Write to History Print on alarm printer m Actions Command File on Receive None Acknowledge None 7 Clear None Sound File Ei Digital Video Camera None Alarm Detail View Message Card was denied entry because it has already been used going in out with out properly going out i
260. alaxy panel To isolate a Galaxy panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the Galaxy panel and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 155 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device Galaxy Panell Name Description Remove ieee meee E guipment Remove All Eancel Help 4 To isolate ADVSs of the Galaxy panel from the floor panel a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the panel is displayed b Select the floor plans and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the ADVs of Galaxy panel from the floor plan 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the Galaxy panel a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the panel is displayed b Select the operator levels that must be isolated from the communication server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated from the communication server OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the communication server c To remove the communication server from the control area clear the presence of an ADV
261. alog box appears x Basic Groups Zones Output RIOs User Codes Keypad Max Edit Description hhh Isolate Jeete Type M Show Firmware Version 450 OK Cancel Help 2 Click the required tab to view and edit the ADV details Refer to the Adding a Galaxy Panel section in this chapter for more details on editing Galaxy Panel configuration details Downloading Log Data You can download the log information of the Galaxy panel into WIN PAK To download the log data to WIN PAK 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Download log data A confirmation message asking to stop the communication server appears CS hlet Connecting to Galaxy will stop Polling at Comm server Do you wish to continue ae S 2 Click Yes to stop the communication server and download the log data to WIN PAK If you click No you cannot download log data to WIN PAK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 153 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Uploading User Code You can upload a range of user code details that are configured in WIN PAK to the Galaxy panel To upload the user code to the Galaxy panel 1 Right click the Galaxy panel and select Upload User Code The Upload User Code dialog box appears x Manager Code Cancel 2 Type the Manager Code If the manager code is invalid you cannot upload the user code 3 Under Range type the From
262. ame 16 CCTV Options 18 Clearing Limits 18 control buttons 17 21 Controlling the Camera 17 Setting Home 18 Setting Pan and Tilt 17 LobbyWorks 41 Document 7 001009 Revision B Locate Card Holder 2 Logging Off 16 Logging On 15 Logging on to WIN PAK 2 Login using current Windows user at startup 32 Loop 7 Luminosity 16 M Magnetic Stripe Encoding 17 Enter Data 18 Main Window 3 Maintenance Window 7 Add Edit and Delete records 10 Isolating Record 10 Opening 7 Printing Details 11 Searching and Sorting 9 Toggle 11 Viewing Information 7 MDAC 18 Menu Bar 5 Micro Cobox 81 Micro Cobox converter 81 Modem Pool 27 Modem Pools 57 Adding 57 C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK 61 Editing 59 Isolating and Deleting 59 Local Phone Number 58 monitoring the actions 2 Alarm View 2 Autocard Lookup 2 Digital Video 2 Event View 2 Live Monitor 2 System Events 2 Multiple 33 Muster System Precautions 8 Mustering Areas 6 13 Add Branch 13 19 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Add Entrance 14 Find Item 16 Move Entrance 15 Rename Branch 15 Mustering areas 2 N N 1000 PW 2000 Panel 82 Adding 82 Anti passback 86 Assigning time zones and holiday group 85 Configuring a reader 95 Configuring groups 94 Configuring input points 91 Configuring output points 93 Continuous Card Reads 87 Debounce Time 91 96 Egress Input 96 Forgiveness 86 Groups 86 Hardware Options 87 Host Grant 87 Interlocking 92 Keypads 87 OD Duress Option 90 Outputs for
263. amera down If the cursor is moved over the live viewing area arrows appear Clicking these cursor arrows has the same effect as the control arrow buttons Setting Pan and Tilt Limits Panning and tilting limits are set for each camera to ensure that the camera does not pan or tilt to a point that is stressful on the camera Perform the following steps to set the upward tilt limit for a camera Repeat these steps for downward tilt left pan and right pan on each camera Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Live Monitor View 1 Using the upward and downward arrows tilt the camera to the highest required point 2 Right click the upward arrow and select Set Limit from the control menu displayed Clearing Limits To clear the pan and tilt limits 1 Right click the arrow for which you want to clear limits and select Clear Limit from the control menu Setting Home Position Home Position is the camera view set for each camera to bring back its home position with the current focus aperture and zoom settings This is the most utilized camera view Home button To set the home position e On the Live Monitor window click the square button located among the pan tilt arrows The following steps outline setting a home position 1 Adjust the pan tilt and aperture settings for the view that you want to make your home position 2 Right click Home and click Set Home T
264. and enter the date and time from when you want to view the clip 4 Ifyou want to filter the events to be displayed in the Digital Video display click Filter Refer to the Filtering Events section in this chapter for details on filtering the events 5 Click Show to view the live video or the recorded video The Digital Video Display window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Digital Video Digital ideo Display J ioj xj Maximum Video Displays fie x Multi RU Camera 2 Camera Controls for live video 6 Use the camera controls in the lower left corner of the Digital Video Display window to adjust the camera as required Note The Digital Camera controls placed on the lower left corner of the live video display helps to adjust the camera Focus Iris Zoom and Pan and Tilt Te Controlling live video display You can control the focus iris zoom and pan and tilt of the cameras using the camera control available at the bottom of the live video display mem Focus Controls FanTilt x Iris Controls Zoom Controls Pan and Tilt Controls Figure 15 1 Depicting camera controls on the live digital video display WIN PAK User s Guide 15 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Digital Video The following table describes the control buttons on the live digital video display Table 15 5 Describing control buttons on the Live
265. anel 5 Select the Type of the vista panel WIN PAK supports two types of Fire Burglary Panels PANEL VISTA 250FBP and PANEL VISTA 128FBP Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 157 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Note The number 250 128 in the panel types indicates the maximum number of zones that a panel can support and the FBP indicates that the panel is a Fire Burglary Panel Te 6 Click Next to configure the vista partitions The Panel Configuration Partitions dialog box appears Configuring the vista panel partitions In the Vista panel a set of zones can be grouped and called as partitions Note Honeywell recommends you to partition by grouping zones based on your building structure T 1 In the Panel Configuration Partition dialog box create an ADV for the partition x ADY Add M l Vista Panel Partition 1 a 3 NoADY oa L 4 No ADY Isolate O 5 No ADY O 6 No ADY Delete O NoADY 8 No ADY C Show lt Back Cancel Help 2 Click Next to configure the vista panel zones The Panel Configuration Zones dialog box appears Configuring vista panel zones A zone is the area covered by an input device in the Vista panel that monitors intrusions and creates alarms 1 In the Panel Configuration Zones dialog box select the panel zone and create an ADV Note The number of zones in the Name list depends on the selected panel type In addition the
266. anel is procured Select the device to be added and click Add Note To select the multiple devices press and hold down CTRL and click each entrance Click Close or clear the Show Available Devices check box to close the Add Devices dialog box The device s are displayed in the Control Area window Moving a Device To move a device from one branch to another l Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears 2 Click the device you want to move 3 Drag and place the device on the branch or the site to which you want to move Removing a Site Branch or Device l Choose Configuration gt Define gt Control Areas The Control Area window appears Right click the branch site or device you want to remove Click Remove A message asking for confirmation appears Click OK to remove the selected site branch or device The site branch or device is removed from the control map Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Viewing Control Maps Control Map enables you to view and control the devices belonging to the control area In addition you can view the status acknowledge and clear alarms and run various commands for each device Controlling Devices from a Control Map 1 Choose Operations gt Control Map The Control Map window appears FE Control Map Control Area G Servers J 485L
267. any and all copyright notices and other markings and notices present on the originals From time to time as they become available Honeywell Access Systems may notify you of any enhancements or updates released by Honeywell Access Systems for SOFTWARE licensed hereun der Any such updates offered would be subject to standard Hon eywell Access Systems terms and charges if any Only registered licensees will be offered any such updates The license of the SOFTWARE provided by this Agreement shall not be assignable or otherwise transferable by you except that if you are a legally constituted organization you may transfer the license as part of a transfer of your entire business or assets or that portion of your business or assets to which the license of the SOFTWARE per tains NOTICE This SOFTWARE is licensed not sold It is licensed to licensees including end users without either express or implied warranties of any kind on an as is basis Honeywell Access Systems makes no express or implied warranties to licens ees including end users with regard to this SOFTWARE includ ing merchantability fitness for any purpose or non infringement of patents copyrights or other proprietary rights of others Honeywell Access Systems shall not have any liability or respon sibility to licensees including end users for damages of any kind including special indirect or consequential damages arising out of or resulting from any programs s
268. applicable for the Administrator Ifthe operator is also a card holder select the Card Holder from the list or use the ellipsis button to locate the operator in the card holder list Select the Time Zone during which the operator has to log on to the system Note If no time zone is assigned to an operator the operator can log on to WIN PAK any time 10 Select the language of the operator in the Language list 11 Under Available Account select the list of accounts to which the operator can have access and then click Add The accounts are moved to Selected Accounts Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 17 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators 12 If you want to remove an account from Selected Accounts list select the account and click Remove The selected account is moved to Available Accounts 13 Click OK to add the operator Tips on Password A good strategy for choosing a password is it must be easy to remember but hard to decode The following list provides tips on choosing such a password e Pick a simple phrase preceded or followed by one or more numbers e Use a password without spaces and capitalize each character Such passwords cannot be easily decoded either by a random number generator or by a dictionary decoder e For tight security use a combination of both letters and numbers Avoid familiar terms such as your company name initials birth dates and so on Caution Passwords are case sensitive
269. ard Holder Readers TimeandDate E Exit Arearcard reads not shown 0 car 20641 __ Valid Card N1000Panell Reader2 5 38 00 PM 4 1 2005 m First Floor North Reader 1 m First Floor North Reader 2 E N1000Panell Reader E RemoteN1000Panell Reader 2 E RemoteN1000Panell Reader 3 E RemoteN1000Panell Reader 4 E N1000Panel Reader 2 E N1000Panell Reader 3 E N1000Panell Reader 4 E RemoteN1000Panell Reader 1 IV Refresh list periodically Refresh Print Delete Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas 4 Select the Refresh List periodically check box to automatically update the list of card holders every few seconds Alternatively click Refresh to refresh the list of card holders 5 Click Close X on top of the window to close the window Deleting a Card holder from the Tracking and Muster View When a card holder has moved out of the tracking area without accessing the reader in the area you can delete the card holder details from the Tracking and Muster View window To delete the details of a card holder 1 In the Tracking and Muster View window select the card holder detail from the list on the left pane 2 Click Delete to delete the card holder detail Printing Tracking and Mustering details 1 In the Tracking and Muster View window click Print The Report Tracking and Muster View dialog box appears Repor
270. ard holders When you select this option the First Last Name and Last Last Name are enabled To specify the range enter the starting last name of the card holder in First Last Name and ending last name in the Last Last Name c To filter the report based on the card holders access level select it in the Access Level list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 29 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report d To filter the report based on the card holders account select it in the Account list To include all the accounts select Available Accounts e To include the note fields in the report select the following options under Note Fields Table 17 7 Describing the options for filtering note fields To include NO note fields in the report To include all the note fields in the report Select To select a specific note field that must be included in the report When you select this option the ellipsis l button beneath the Select option is enabled 1 Click the ellipsis L button to display the Select Note Fields dialog box Select Note Fields i X Mote Fields card holder note Name plates Cancel 2 Select the note fields that must be included in the report 3 Click OK to return to the Report Card Holder dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 17 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Table 17 7 Describing the options for filtering not
271. are used in the panel If you are using Wiegand style 5 wire keypads the keypad is treated as a reader and this option must be cleared Select the PIN check box if a keycode must be entered before presenting a card to gain access Note Do not select this check box if the door is using keypads without readers Select a time zone in the Time Zone list during which a PIN is required for card access Select the Continuous Card Reads check box to enable card readers to read cards continuously independent of output pulse time Select the Reverse Read LEDs check box to reverse the standard LED operation of the reader If this check box is selected a reader that normally changes from green to red on a valid card read changes from red to green In the Command File list select a command file that is applicable to a panel 11 88 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 10 Select the following Host Grant options to grant the permission for the card holders even if the card is not found in the panel e Disable Denies access to the card holders whose card details are not present in the panel e Open Door Enables the door to open even if the card is not found in the panel e Open Door and Update Panel Enables the door to open and also to download the card details to the panel Therefore the panel is updated 11 Enter a Site Code to ensure that cards belong to the facility where access is att
272. area tree of the WIN PAK User Interface Nested mustering areas can be created by defining branches one inside the other After adding the branches you can add the readers in the mustering areas as entrances Adding a Mustering Area Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears loxi S Tracking and Mustering Areas 1 2 eo Exit Ar Add Entrances Configure Remove wt Refresh F5 Find F3 M Show Available Devices 2 Right click the Tracking and Mustering Areas folder or the branch where you want to add the new branch and select Add Branch The Tracking and Mustering Area Configuration window is displayed Tracking and Mustering Area Configuratii x Mame Main Building Cancel D Mustering AN Note You cannot add mustering area branches to the Exit Area branch poe is 3 Type a name for the mustering area in Name 4 Select the Mustering check box to define the area as a mustering area 5 Note The check box appears disabled if you are defining an area inside another B mustering area 5 Click OK The new branch is displayed in the Tracking Area window a Note The icon for the branches defined as mustering area appears as 0 Ss Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Adding an Entrance to the Mustering Area 1 Choose Configuration gt Define
273. ars Importutitity ee xl A The database changes are permanent and it is advisable to take the backup before proceeding i Cancel 6 Click OK to import the data A message appears indicating that import is successful Importutiity ee A Successfully imported the data into the Database Correcting Errors in Excel Sheet Errors might occur while importing the data from the excel sheet You cannot import the card and card holder information to WIN PAK until you correct these errors To view and correct the errors 1 Incase of errors during an import the following dialog box appears prompting you to open and view the error list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 39 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information SS tl 6 While importing some errors are detected No data is saved into the database Please correct the data and try again Do you want to see the errors now 2 Click Yes to view the errors The ErrorLog xls file is opened 21x B C D E F G H J K cA 1 SINo IRecord Description e 0 Datatype mismatch for column ActivationDate Card Number already exists in the Database 3456 CardStatus is mentioned as Active Trace but Activation date also specified Datatype mismatch for column CardStatus Error Invalid Card Status Value Trace Error The Activation date cannot be the same or after the Expiration date Error Invalid Access Level Operator
274. as a whole grant Change rights for all fields Cancel 3 Select the appropriate option to set the rights for the database Configuring rights for reports To assign rights to an individual report 1 In the Operator Level window expand the Reports branch and select a report 2 Right click the report and select Configure The Configure Rights dialog box appears Configure Rights xX Run Report Cancel 3 Click None to provide no access or click Run Report to provide rights for running the selected report 4 Click OK To assign the same rights to all the reports 1 In the Operator Level window select the Reports branch 2 Right click Reports and click Configure The Configure Rights dialog box appears Configure Rights xj fF DAME ccc Leave all rights as they are None Remove all rights from all items Operate Grant Run Report rights to all tems Cancel 3 Select the appropriate option and click OK The selected rights is assigned to all the reports 5 Note Fach device database and user interface element in the control tree is B color coded based on the rights assigned to it Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 11 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators F Operator Level O o iol x Operator Level Operator Level Lie Bor i Sample J Operator Level Tree 2 Command Files 5 68 Control Area He Quick St art Control Area ymbiosis oka ADY For C 100
275. as not opened by the card holder Anti Passback Violation door used A soft Anti Passback violation has occurred The door was opened by the card holder Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 179 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 33 Describing P Series Reader Actions Action Message Description Card Not Found A card was denied entry because it was unknown to the reader Door Ajar The door has been left open longer than it should be based on a valid entry Door Locked Door is in a Locked mode of operation No card access granted free egress is allowed Door Normal The door position is now closed Door Troubled The door status can not be accurately displayed due to tampering Door Unlocked A card was presented to the reader while the door was unlocked Duress request denied A duress code was entered Access was denied Duress door not used A duress code was entered Access was granted Door was not opened Duress door used A duress code was entered Access was granted Door was opened Forced Open The door is in the alarm mode due to invalid entry Free Egress door not used Free egress request was granted Door was not opened Free Egress door not verified Free egress request was granted Door is not monitored Free Egress door used Free egress request was granted Door was opened Ho
276. as privileges to access all Accounts whereas Operator has privileges to access only certain accounts The title bar of the WIN PAK Main window displays the name of the active account E The WIN PAK PE Account name Operator window appears after you have logged on to the WIN PAK application WIN PAK User s Guide 3 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Knowing more about the User Interface EA WIN PAK PE account 1 Admin s Title Bar File View Account Operations Card System Reports Configuration Window Help aE E _ Gil j gt Jy a Toolbar Menu Bar UUN E di E d Status Bar For Help press F1 Figure 3 1 GUI Elements in the WIN PAK User Interface Note If you have selected All Accounts using the Select option in the Account menu the following toolbar icons and menu options appear disabled e Card 2H and Cardholder Mil icons in the toolbar TE e Sub menu options in the Card menu e Options in the Cardholder sub menu of the Configuration menu WIN PAK Windows The WIN PAK user interface comprises a single Main window multiple Maintenance windows and Tree windows The Main window is started as soon as an Operator logs on to the WIN PAK user interface It comprises the options for performing various operations in WIN PAK The Maintenance windows enable you to perform various operations for WIN PAK entities The Tree windows enable you to view the details o
277. at transmission of that unit 1s complete 15 If you select the TCP IP Connection port a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name of the computer where the 485 PCI loop is configured The corresponding port number is displayed in Port No 16 If you select the TCP IP Encrypted Connection port a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name and the Encryption Password of the computer where the 485 PCI loop is configured The corresponding port number is displayed in Port No 17 Click Next to display the 485 PCI Loop Configuration Finish dialog box 18 Click Finish to add the 485 PCI panel loop and return to the Device window The corresponding loop icon is displayed for the panel loop in the Device tree structure For the communication port loop the 5 icon is displayed For the TCP IP port loop the s icon displayed Editing a 485 PCI Panel Loop To edit a 485 PCI panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the 485 PCI loop and click Configure The Loop Configuration dialog box appears Loop Configuration i xX Basic Information Fort Settings ADY Add Edit Isolate Delete Show Panel Defaults 170 Pall Interval E0 Sec Description ACK MAK a Panel CMD Retry Count 3 Panel CMD Time Out 5 Buffer all panels on exit Unbuffer all panels on startup Time one GM
278. ate where you want to install your WIN PAK executables Destination Folder C Program Files wINPAKPRO Browse lt Back Cancel 2 By default the installation path is C Program Files WINPAKPRO To change the path click Browse and navigate to the destination folder 3 Click Next The WIN PAK Destination Path screen appears displaying the WIN PAK database file paths 4 To change the path click Browse and navigate to the destination folder for each database file 5 Click Next The WIN PAK User Information screen appears WIN PAK User Information 2 x Please enter the CD key number for this WIN PAK installation You can optionally enter the name and company registered as WIN PAK a ena aa herana acon ms Name User Company BT is SSSSCis Back C re Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades 6 Type your Name Company and CD Key details The CD Key is found in the front cover of the WIN PAK Quick Reference Guide 7 Click Next The setup verifies the CD key and displays a message of its validity WIN PAK InstallShield Wizard i x G The CD key For WIN PAK PRO 2005 has been determined to be walid 8 Click OK The WIN PAK Setup Type screen appears WIN PAK Install E Setup Type x Select the setup type that best suits your needs Select Databaze Installation Mode Contact Honeywell A
279. ating and Printing a Report A x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Hun from Archive Database Alarm Point Print Preview l Print m Alarm States IV Input Normal Export File V Input Alarm V Input Trouble Estim Pages MV Door Normal V Door Forced Open Clear All MV Door Trouble MV Door Ajar Close b In the Alarm Point text box enter the device or point name You can also use the ellipsis E button to find the device or point on which the alarms to be viewed c Select the Alarm States that must be included in the report Note The options in Alarm Filter tab are enabled only if you have selected Alarms transaction type in the Transaction Filter tab 6 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing 7 Click Print to print the card history report 8 Click Close to return to the Reports window Holiday Group Report To generate a holiday group report 1 In the Reports window select the Holiday Group report and click Report Options The Report Holiday Group dialog box appears Report Holiday Group d E xj Holiday Group Filter Sort Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Holiday Group Print fe All i One Export File Range Estim Pages Clear All 2 To filter the holiday groups to be included in the report a Click the Holiday Group Filter tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 50 Document 7 001009 Revi
280. ation 1 6 In this chapter Introduction 16 2 Language Configuration 16 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Introduction Introduction WIN PAK allows you to translate the language of its user interface to languages other than English The User Interface is translated based on the entries in language text files A language text file contains entries in English and the corresponding entries in the language to be translated for the captions in the dialog boxes menus and other text in the WIN PAK user interface The text files for French German Dutch Italian English Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese languages are available by default in the WINPAKPRO Language Files folder of WIN PAK Translating WIN PAK User Interface involves 1 Adding a new language with its text and help files into the WINPAKPRO Language Files folder 2 Selecting the language for translation 3 Modifying the translated text if required for the dialog box captions menus and the other text in the User Interface By default WIN PAK is designed to work with U S English operating systems Therefore a special version of WIN PAK is required to work with the operating systems of other languages Contact the technical support of Honeywell Access Systems for support on international operating systems Language Configuration T Configuring language details involves 1 Adding a new language with its text
281. ation Servet ccccccccccccccccccccccccccsecccccccceceeeeseeeeeseeeeeens 2 16 Additional Installation Components cccccccccssssccccccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 2 18 External Components sssrinin inin N E E AE 2 18 Foreign Language Installation 200 00 ccccccceesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Upgrading WINER AK es icc cietannss ona avtie et atneente ein ao eee 2 19 LICENSING and Registration cisisiiciisiecesiceticaieisiesssis reusseeuavanssudeapelastavelaveavebasveans 2 19 Reorsterme Wy UN PAs heseses teeta eet atone ole estan eade reeselnaste 2 19 Registering WIN PAK Online 2 0 0 cccccsssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 20 Upgrading WIN PAK Licemse cc cccccccccseccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Cautiomon License Tiles sis tinsestosrste erste E I E a 2 21 De fragmenting Disk DI ive 0 0 0 cccccccsssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Chapter 3 User Interface NGO CUCU iesin e aeee a EENEN EEEE 3 2 WIN PAK User Interface Elements essecceeceeccsecccccoccsocsssssssssssssssssssessseesee 3 2 Locems onto WIN PAR ee ea ee 3 2 Knowing more about the User Interface ccc ccccccccccccccccceeeeeceeececeeeeeeees 3 3 Wy EN PA Ke Wid OWS oceanie a E cons eee 3 3 The Mdn Wat OW gpitescacsanat teeta dileiesla alain aA 3 3 Maintenance WY 119 OW oreren onnea sa steerer wane 3 7 Tee Window Aisne nite ananassae 3 12 WINPAK Help itececectecnesetschecetecsseticocet e a e E 3 13 ACCESS INO he Online HeD srna eect eee 3 13 Accessing Helpon
282. cal System Administrator or Power Users Group and then unblock the WIN PAK services from Firewall protection Adding Domain Users To add the domain users 1 Log on to the system as Administrator where WIN PAK Servers are installed 2 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and open Administrative Tools gt Computer Management The Computer Management window appears Note If Windows XP is installed on your computer switch to Windows Classic view i 3 Choose System Tools gt Local Users and Groups gt Groups WIN PAK User s Guide 4 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration C Computer Management IOl x al File Action View window Help a an 2g Computer Management Local Efi System Tools WF Administrators Administrators have complete and urr H E Event Viewer Ce Backup Operators Backup Operators can override secur F eon Lay Guests Guests have the same access as me Ee serene arDupe La Network Configuration 0 Members in this group can have some gi Ee Power Users Power Users possess most administrat a aes Logs and Alerts Ee Remote Desktop Users Members in this group are granted the l a Device Manager C Replicator Supports file replication in a domain bS Storage La Users Users are prevented fram making acci Removable Storage Ee Debugger Users Debugger users can debug processe Disk Defragmenter La HelpServicesGroup Group for the Help and
283. cal documents WIN PAK Architecture WIN PAK is a multi tier client server distributed application consisting of three primary modules the Database Server Communication Server and User Interface The WIN PAK modules installed on different computers are networked and connected through RPC and LPC This allows extremely flexible WIN PAK program components to run as full services in Windows XP The WIN PAK software is shipped with debug versions of the services which provide a console output window However avoid daily usage of these versions as they are reserved for error isolation WIN PAK provides the System Manager utility to configure connection information The System Manager directs the User Interface and other remote servers to the Database Server Note To optimize the resource usage stop the unused services using System Introduction Introduction Overview software ZA System Req Manager For example stop the Guard Tour Server or the Muster Server if not used uirements Hardware Requirements This se WIN PAK User s Guide ction provides you the list of hardware requirements for installing WIN PAK If you want to install WIN PAK in a stand alone computer that supports 1 to 10 readers 250 cards and 2 communication ports your computer must fulfill the minimum requirements If you want to install WIN PAK in a computer that supports 1 to 100 readers 5 000 cards and 8 communication ports your computer must
284. ccess Systeme support prior to attempting a manual DB install Install Automatically Highly Recommended Install Manually Expert Mode InstallShield g Back Cancel 9 Select the Installation Mode as Install Automatically for auto installation Note You may need the support of Honeywell Access Systems for manual installation i 10 Click Next A dialog box appears prompting you to create WIN PAK shortcuts on your desktop WIN PAK LUC 2 Do you want desktop icons ta be created For WIM PAK and its support applications ae e 11 Click Yes to place icons on your desktop The Start Copying Files screen that summarizes the selected information is displayed WIN PAK User s Guide 2 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades WIN PAK Install my i Start Copying Files 12 If you want to change any setting click Back OR click Next to start the installation WIN PAK Install my i Setup Status Metals rel 13 After completing the installation the WIN PAK Setup Complete screen appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades bse WIN PAK Install WIN PAK WIN PAK Setup Complete Click Finish to begin using Win Pak Thank you for purchasing WIN PAK We believe you have just installed the finest access control system available Honeywell Access Systeme 135W Forest Hill Ave Dak Creek
285. ce or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 37 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Plane Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device AccessD PRAO Remove Remove All 1 iltem Eancel Help 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of the dedicated micros digital video a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the dedicated micros digital video is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the dedicated micros digital video and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the dedicated micros digital video 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the dedicated micros digital video a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the dedicated micros digital video is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the dedicated micros digital video and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the dedicated micros digital video c To remove the access DVPRO digital video from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the dedicated micros digital video in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 38 Document 7 001009 Rev
286. ceeeeees 8 9 Configuring Autocard LOOKUP cccccccccccsscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseeees 8 10 Contiourine Access Levels seriene a SaS 8 10 Adding a New Access Level ccccccccccsssssssssssssssseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 8 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 I iV WIN PAK User s Guide Contents COnMeUIING ACCESS ATE There iis E 8 12 Configuring Card and Card Holder Information cccccscsssssssssssssees 8 14 Adding a Card and Card Holder Information cccccccceeceeeeeeeees 8 14 Adde A Card Holde cuss maces ncceunetsnsd tents E 8 14 Editing Card Holder Information cccssesseeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 26 Deleting a Card HOMER ssi sisisaien ess dicnsiatsdneden dassicaneeseseden wos dceaebooncdavs 8 26 Addam sC dean eaa E a 8 27 ENS a G a e a e EEA E E 8 32 Dee aC na E Renner entre eeieerne eretaer 8 32 Addine Bulk Card Sessur a eee en 8 33 Deletns Cards BUIK esasen 8 34 Assigning a Card to a Card Holder ywarssssrscesactacientecasnrenectesvens vee 8 34 Importing Card and Card Holder Information cccccccssssssssssssssccees 8 35 Logging on to Import Utility sccceiseceseisaseacieakensasspeetnrtentsadseed ade sieteaedasceaedes 8 35 De timing Order Of Fieldin a a r ides nas cas ene 8 35 Entering Card and Card Holder Information in an Excel Sheet 8 36 Assionme Default V ales ius ececes ce sncesnaatiensess E as 8 37 lmipertine trom Excel SRC auries ei E EE EE Ei 8 38 Correcting Errors in Excel Sheet
287. ces databases reports user interface and so on To configure access rights for an operator level 1 Choose System gt Operator Level The Operator Level window appears T Note The Operator Level window is divided into two panes the left pane and the right pane The left pane displays the list of operator levels and the right pane displays the operator level tree in which you can set the access rights for the selected operator level E Operator Level l Add Shift Guard By Admin Second Shift Guard Add Edit Copy Delete Isolate Document 7 001009 Revision 01 eC Operator Level Tree Command Files Control Area E Floor Plan RRP Refresh F5 Find F3 JY Reports User Intert WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators 2 In the left pane select an operator level in the Operator Level list 3 Right click the control area device database or user interface to configure 4 Configure rights for an entire branch an individual device database report or user interface element Configuring rights for an entire branch To configure access rights for an entire branch 1 In the Operator Level window right click the main branch and select Configure to configure the rights for all the devices in one branch at once The Configure Rights dialog box is displayed C Same Leave all rights as they are i None Remove all rights from all items Vie
288. ch as normal alarm or host grant Clears Reports the card alarm events that were cleared by the operator Acknowledgements Reports the card alarm events that were acknowledged by the operator Operator Messages Reports the card alarm events that were provided with an operator message d To filter the transactions performed on specific ADVs devices click Filter ADVs The Filter Devices dialog box appears e To select a device expand the corresponding folder and double click a device Note The devices of the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel are also displayed if you have procured the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel features in WIN PAK T f To select all the devices in a folder e Double click the corresponding folder The Set Device Selection for a Control Area dialog box appears e Click an appropriate option and click OK The dialog box is closed g After selecting the required devices click OK in the Filter Devices dialog box to return to the Report History dialog box h Click the Sort on Sequence ID check box if you want the report to be sorted by the sequence number given to each action in the data base When a new event is identified it is given a sequence ID and any change carries a new sequence ID When a report is sorted by the Sequence ID the ID number groups the events together in chronological order This makes it easier to view information relative to other system wide
289. ck Apply to save the changes Setting defaults for alarm printers By default alarms are displayed only in the alarm view window and are not printed If required you can configure the settings in the alarm printer to print all alarms as soon as they are displayed in the alarm view window To configure alarm printer settings 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Alarm Printer tab WIN PAK User s Guide Workstation Defaults Fa Defaults Alarm Printer Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore Printer M Print Alarms Vile1 Ont2ksO03 URAOS Print To Port I Print directly to port Port Name Lines per page Cancel Apply Help 5 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings 2 Select the Print Alarms check box to print the alarms 3 To select a local printer a In the Printer list select a printer from the list of printers installed in Windows OR To select a printer in the network a Under Print to Port select the Print directly to port check box b In the Port Name list select the name of the port connected to a printer c In the Lines per page box enter the number of lines to be printed in a page By default it is 66 4 Click Apply to save the changes Setting defaults sound settings To activate sound files on certain instances 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Sounds tab Workstation Defaults Ei Defaults Alarm P
290. ck Card Holder The Card Holder window appears Using the keyboard 1 Press ALT combined with the short key for the menu you want to access 2 Press the underlined alphabet of the option you require Example To gain access to the Floor Plan menu press lt Alt gt O and then press F The Open Floor Plan window appears Status Bar The Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the Main window By default the status bar is displayed in the window However you can choose not to display the status bar by clicking the Tool option in the View menu For Help press Fi m MLM The Status bar displays the following information e The message For Help press F1 at the left corner e A description of the option that you have highlighted in the menu or the toolbar e The messages for setting permissions and for establishing communication server connections when you log on to WIN PAK e The message for disconnecting from the server when you log off from WIN PAK Sub menus and Pop up menus on right click When you right click inside certain dialog boxes a pop up menu appears displaying a set of options specific to the dialog boxes WIN PAK User s Guide 3 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Example 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click Devices to display a sub menu 3 Move the mouse pointer on Add to display another sub m
291. ck OK to save the bar code data items and to return to the Badge Element Layout dialog box Note Repeat the procedure until all data items have been added h To reorder the data items in a track click Move Up and Move Down T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction 1 To remove a data item from the list select it and click the Delete button j On the Badge Element Layout dialog box click Apply to save the data items for the tracks or click OK to save the data items for the tracks and to return to the Badge Definition window e To change the appearance of barcode data a Right click on the barcode and click Properties b Click the Barcode tab Badge Element Layout x Barcode Data Barcode Colors Positioning Tert Style Ratio EE Defaut Spacer Bearer Thickness Font Ad P Zz o I Show Text W Show Spacer e Arial W Bearer Bar Switch Text Courier New TH Bearer Bar T Check Digit 2 Bold Check Digit F Italic Cancel Apply Help c Enter the following barcode options Text Text to be displayed above the bar code Style Style setting for the barcode characters Table 7 6 Style for Bar Codes WIN PAK User s Guide 7 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Ratio Determines the ratio of thickness of the thin bars to the thick bars in the bar code For example a ratio of 2 00 means that thic
292. ck Yes to accept the License agreement The Site Information page appears 4 Enter the required details and click Next The Authorized Dealer Information page appears 5 Enter the dealer information and click Next The Enter the CD Key page appears 6 Select WIN PAK PRO from the list of Honeywell products 7 Type the CD Key in the provided box 8 Click Submit The Site Key is displayed Note If the CD Key is invalid the system prompts you to provide the Site Code number 9 Make a note of the Site Key Close the browser and return to WIN PAK i WIN PAK User s Guide 2 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i Installation Licensing and Registration 10 In the License dialog box type the Site key produced by the online registration 11 Click Save License Key This activates the license for WIN PAK Note The Site Key is sent you through e mail Upgrading WIN PAK License You can upgrade your WIN PAK license to overcome the limitations of the WIN PAK software Example You may need to upgrade your WIN PAK license from single user license to multi user license Before upgrading the license get the new CD Key from Honeywell Access System Support Service To upgrade your WIN PAK license 1 Choose Help gt Honeywell Access Systems gt License The License dialog box appears 2 Type the new CD Key 3 Click Save CD Key This upgrades your license Caution on License Files we The encryption software
293. ck box 6 Click OK Deleting a communication server After deleting or moving the devices and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the communication server To delete a communication server l Zz Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the communication server and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears win pakPE ee xl The selected device has not been deleted Ensure the device has no child devices before attempting to delete it Click OK to confirm the deletion The communication server is deleted from the device map Command File Server Before using the Command File functions you must configure the Command File Server Normally this server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Adding a Command File Server To add a command file server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Command File Server The WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Server Configuration dialog box appears 11 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Command File Server Configuration l xX ADY Hame Command File Server Description Edit Isolate Machine name PAGG B Delete Protocol
294. cking the sign Control Area g x Symbiosis El Duick Start Control Area Cancel Beam Schedule Server fee efi C 100 Loop Panell jee E gt C 100 Loop Panell A1 Output bs E C100 Loop Panell F1 Jeon E C 100 Loop Panell AR2 Output E C 100 Loop Fanell A T lal P Series panel SIO 1 se lal P Series SERE R1 i fl mer 101 M c Right click the device and click Select The icon for the selected device appears in red Note You can select multiple devices in the control map T d Click OK to close the Control Area dialog box and to return to the Filter tab of the properties dialog box Note The Selection field displays the name of the selected device or displays Multiple if more than one device has been selected e Under On select Alarm Reads Card Reads or Both T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition f Click OK Adding a Text Box to the Floor Plan You can add a text box to a floor plan for creating legends or to give special instructions to the Operator viewing the floor plan After you drag and drop the text box to the floor plan background enter the text and resize or reposition the text box to accommodate the text The Text box has no Control Properties to configure To add a text box to the floor plan 1 In the Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box drag amp and place it in the floor plan design window 2
295. cluded only if the input is Supervised Table 11 25 Describing Modem Pool ACK NAK Actions Action Message Description Modem Pool OK Modem pool is working properly Modem Pool Modem pool is NOT working properly Trouble WIN PAK User s Guide 11 174 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 26 Describing Modem Pool non ACK NAK Actions Action Message Description Modem Pool OK Modem pool is working properly Modem Pool Modem pool is NOT working properly Trouble Table 11 27 Describing Monitor CCTV Monitor Actions Action Message Description CCTV Monitor Monitor is working properly OK CCTV Monitor Monitor is NOT working properly Trouble Table 11 28 Describing NS2 Panel Actions Action Message Description Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is not working Failure Auxiliary Port The auxiliary communication port is working Normal External 5 Volt Normal The 5 Volt reader power is normal External 5 Volt The 5 Volt reader power is shorted Alarm Ground Fault An input point or reader is shorted to earth ground causing a ground Alarm fault Ground Fault An input point or reader that caused the ground fault has returned to Normal normal Low Voltage Battery voltage is low Alarm Low Voltage Battery voltage is normal Normal Document 7 001009 Revision 01
296. cluding the P Series Intelligent Controller Multiple communication servers can be configured in WIN PAK in a networked environment This speeds up the communication when there are many devices in the communication However it depends on the type of WIN PAK license that you availed Adding a Communication Server To communicate with system devices such as panels readers inputs or outputs you must configure the Communication Server for your access control system The Communication Server can be installed on the same machine as the Database Server or on another computer in a networked system To add a communication server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Communication Server The Com Server Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears Com Server Configuration Basic Information Hema Communication Server Description Edit Machine name SAPPHIRE E lsalate Protocol end point B56 Delete Alarm Priority for notification jeo P Shaw Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement fo write Transactions to file Operating System f Windows HT 40 windows 2000 oar Cancel Help 3 Type a Name for the communication server It can be up to 30 characters 4 Type the Description for the communication server It can be up to 60 characters 5 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the comm
297. control panel is not responding to computer polling Alarm Poll Response The control panel is responding normally to computer polling Normal Primary Power Failure Control panel primary power has been lost Primary Power Normal Control panel primary power has been restored Tamper Switch Alarm The control panel service door is open Tamper Switch Normal The control panel service door is closed Table 11 31 Describing P Series SIO Board Actions Action Message Description Poll Response The SIO Board is NOT responding to polling Alarm Poll Response The SIO Board is responding to polling Normal Primary Power Failure Primary power is down Make a service call Primary Power Normal You have about 2 hours of backup power Tamper Switch Alarm The PRO 2200 enclosure is open Check to see if service is done or dispatch security as needed The tamper switch is a Norther Computers switch When the door to the enclosure is opened switch open the firmware reports a Tamper Switch Alarm immediately which is also shown at the same time as a Tamper Switch Alarm in the Alarm View of WIN PAK Tamper Switch Normal The PRO 2200 enclosure is now closed When the door to the enclosure is closed switch closed the firmware reports a Tamper Switch Normal after approximately 3 seconds which is also shown at that time as a Tamper Switch Normal in the Alarm View
298. cribes the list of mask properties Table 8 1 Describing mask properties with examples Input Mask Description Example character O in ene Only numbers 0 9 are allowed DOB HHH 2 Only alphabets a z or A Z are allowed alphabets a z or A Z are Only alphabets a z or A Z are allowed Only alphanumeric characters 0 9 a z and A Z are allowed Only upper case alphabets A Z are Time UU allowed Only lower case alphabets a z are allowed Any characters are allowed including special characters WIN PAK User s Guide 8 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Table 8 1 Describing mask properties with examples Input Mask Description Example character Name O a aes the list of items oe Red Green Blue Escape Defines the character position in the note Character field x Name Phone Template HHH HHH HitHextension t t Cancel 5 Click OK to create a new note field template Note To use the note fields in the card holder the note fields must be added to a card holder tab layout we Searching and Sorting Note Field Templates To search and sort a note field template 1 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Note Field Template The Note Field Template window appears 2 Select an item in the Search Field list e All Lists out all the note field templates e Name Searches for similar note field
299. ctthis option and selectthe 3 Finish Add Cards to existing Account Account BN account from existing list SITE C Add New Site f a Click Next This will take you to LOOP the Cards page to configure PANEL cards SIO BOARDS C Add New Panel i DONE C Add New Loop to existing Site Symbiosis C Add New Readers to existing P Series Panel C m Done lt Back Next gt Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard a WIN PAK User s Guide 3 Click Next The Cards dialog box appears Pf QUICK START WIZARD Cards QUICK START WIZARD Cards Add cards to account Enter the Start card number and the End card number in the respective fields Accountl First card number in the range fi 161 Last card number in the range fi 162 Expiration Date Choose the expiration date for the new cards using the calendar icon This indicates thatthe cards will not hawe access after this expiration date The activation date is same as the date of card creation lt Back Next gt Cancel Type the First card number in the range and the Last card number in the range For example if you want to add the card numbers ranging from 100 to 150 enter 100 and 150 in the respective boxes If you want to add a single card enter the same number in both the boxes Select the Expiration Date using the icon You can use the card to access only until t
300. d d Click OK to return to the Procedure Definition dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 137 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 7 If you select Delay as an Action Target type perform the following steps a In Seconds to Delay box type the number of seconds to delay for proceeding to the next action P Senes Triggers Action Definition b Click OK to return to Procedure Definition dialog box After you define the procedures the actions are listed in the Procedure Definition dialog box P Series Triggers Procedure Definition x peer oS 8 Click OK to return to the Triggers and Procedures dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 11 138 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration P Series Configuration _ Add Edt Delete FE Rex Button S9 Procedure Actions E Unlock Door _ Action Point E wait b Seconds to Delay 5 Lock Door j Action Energize Deenergize PSeriesPanell Out 481 Board 2 Port 3 SIO 30 16 Relay Output Board 2 Port 3 SIO 30 16 Relay Output PSeriesPanell Out 482 Tip The newly defined procedure is shown in the Procedures list To look at the detailed view of each action defined for this procedure expand the Procedure Actions tree Adding a new trigger After defining the procedures it must be associated to a trigger for triggering an action To add a new trigger 1 Click
301. d e You cannot import card and card holder information to WIN PAK e You cannot add cards in bulk e You cannot print badges However registering the software enables you to overcome the preceding limitations Registering WIN PAK Before you register the WIN PAK software make a note of the CD Key and Site Code The CD Key number is located on the inner side of the front cover of the WIN PAK Quick Reference Guide To view the Site Code 1 Choose Help gt License The License window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Licensing and Registration License x Status Valid Last Update 37 19 2005 9 42 46 PM Client Licenses 4 Comm Server Licenses 7 CD Kep 2048 E4 32840 293 Save CD Kep Site Code DFo7 5CAC CBE 4 COOD Ad Save icense kep License Kep 2 Make a note of the Site Code This is a unique number that identifies your computer Registering WIN PAK Online You can register your WIN PAK software online The registration can be done using the Honeywell Access Systems web site To register WIN PAK online 1 Launch Internet Explorer type www honeywellaccess com in the address bar and then press ENTER OR Choose Help gt Honeywell Access Systems gt Registration The Honeywell Access Systems web page is displayed 2 Choose Support amp Resources gt Register Products The Product Registration page appears 3 Cli
302. d 485 non ACK NAK loop Actions 10 170 Describing C 100 loop Actions ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 10 170 Describing Camera CCTV camera Actions 000sseeeee 10 171 Describing Camera PTZ CCTV camera Actions 005 10 171 Describing Cards Entrance Reader Actions 000eeeeee 10 171 Describing Command File Server Actions c seeeeeeeeeeees 10 172 Describing Communication Server ACTIONS ccceceeeeeee 10 172 Describing Door Entrance Actions ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 172 Describing Door Output Actions ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 10 173 Desci Bine Group AUCTIONS esre a weenie tt 10 173 Describing Guard Tour Sequenced Group Actions 0 10 173 Describing Guard Tour Server Group Actions 0008 10 174 Describing Guard Tour Unsequenced Actions 000000e 10 174 Describing Input Alarm Point Input Supervised Actions 10 174 Describing Modem Pool ACK NAK Actions cc eeeeee 10 174 Describing Modem Pool non ACK NAK Actions 068 10 175 Describing Monitor CCTV Monitor Actions 00eeeeeee 10 175 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 li ii WIN PAK User s Guide Tables Describing NS2 A Panel ACHONS ss cccicss csernsictiicneentneenetataces 10 175 Describing N 1000 I PW 2000 II Panel Actions 00 10 176 Describing N 1000 III PW 20
303. d Branch A E Exit At Add Entrances ffi NE ar onFigure Must Remove a r Refresh Foy Find F3 Show Available Devices 2 Right click the Tracking and Mustering Areas folder or the branch where you want to add the new branch and select Add Branch The Tracking and Mustering Area Configuration dialog box is displayed Tracking and Mustering 4rea Configuratir x Mame Main Building Cancel D Mustering Note You can add only entrances and not branches to the Exit Area branch that is created by default T 3 Type a name for the tracking area in Name 4 Select the Mustering check box to define the area specified in Name as mustering area Note This check box is disabled if you are defining an area inside another T mustering area 5 Click OK The new branch is listed below the Tracking and Mustering Areas folder in the Tracking Area window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Adding an Entrance to the Tracking Area 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the branch to which you want to add an entrance and click Add Entrances The Add Devices dialog box appears with the list of all entrances 3 Alternatively select the Show Available Devices check box The Add Devices window appears with the list of all entrances 1x E E Tracking and Mus
304. d Card Holder Information x Apri z 2005 7 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Cancel a 28 29 30 31 1 E Today 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 mes 4 5 6 E 6 Select the Month Year and then select the date 7 To select the current date click Today and then click OK to return to the Custom Access Level dialog box 8 To set the end date for the customized access click None in Last Valid Date The Last Valid Date dialog box appears 9 Select the date in the same way that you have selected for First Valid Date and click OK Note If you want to clear the dates click Clear next to First Valid Date and or Last Valid Date i 10 Select the Show Original Access only check box to view the original access levels of the areas 11 Click OK to save the access levels and return to the Card Record dialog box Defining an action group for the card 1 In the Card Properties tab click View next to Action Group The Abstract Device Record dialog box appears 2 Select the Name of the action group and click OK The Abstract Device Record dialog box is closed Defining an activation and expiry date 1 In the Card Properties tab click Change under Activation Date to define or change the activation date the date on which the card is activated The Select Activation Date calendar appears Note The Activation Date is enabled only if you select the Status as Inactive i NO Select the activa
305. d Swipe 76 bit generic _F on_fsn_2 6 5 1D 1 Bil B _B3_B4 NR 1 Magstripe Swipe NR573272 bit _F on_fsn_32_5_ D Bl B2_ B3_B4 HID 34 bit _Feon_fsn_34_5 10 1 Bi B BS Bd cI 1 Wiegand Card Insert 76 bit _F on_fsn_2 6 11 0 1 B1_B _B3_B4 PR 1 280 Cotag Proximity 32 bit _F pon_fsn_32_S5_ D Bi B 2_ B3_B4 HG 1 Hand Geometry 37 bit _F on_fsn_32_5_ 8 D Bl B2 BR Bd 5 Conductor Keypad 3z bit _F on_fsn_32_5 6 _ D_A_B1_B2_B3_B4 Dorado Magstripe Cards 34 bit _F on_fsn_34_5 1 0 Bil B _B3_B4 Sielox Wiegand Cards 34 bit _F on_fsn_34_5 1 D0 1 Bl B _B3_B4 Sielox Proximity Cards 32 bit _F on_fsn_32_5 6 D Bl Be_B3_B4 Where on panel address number and sn format slot number Note Default formats for slots 1 2 and 3 are CR 1 Wiegand Card Swipe Reader NR 1 Magstripe Swipe Reader and PR 2 Hughes IDI Proximity Reader You can edit the default card format values and also you can enter the card formats for other WIEGAND card format Click Next to assign time zones and holiday group to this panel The Panel Configuration Time Zones dialog box appears Assigning time zones and holiday group to a panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Time Zones dialog box select the time zones WIN PAK User s Guide from the Available Time Zone list and click l The time zones are moved to the Selected Time Zone list For multiple selections use the SHIFT and CTRL keys 11 100 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration
306. d a Description for the Galaxy panel 11 144 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Panel Configuration Basic x Name Add E alaxy Panel Description oo Type GALAXY _504 Firmware Version M Show 450 7 Cancel Help 2 Details for Type and Firmware Version are automatically downloaded from the panel to WIN PAK 3 Click Next to view the groups in the panel The Panel Configuration Groups dialog box appears Setting panel groups A set of zones can be grouped in the Galaxy panel and called as groups A zone is an area covered by the input device in the Galaxy panel By default all the zones are grouped under one group and later various groups are configured using the Galaxy Gold User Interface 1 In the Panel Configuration Groups dialog box double click a group in the Name list to rename it Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 145 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration oe x ADY Name Ade Galaxy Panell Group 1 Group Description 2 Galaxy Panell Group 2 f 3 Galaxy Panell Group 3 4 Galaxy Panell Group 4 Alarm report Timezones Isolate 5 Galaxy Panell Group 5 6 Galaxy Panell Group 6 Report Alarms in Timezone Delete 7 Galaxy Panell Group 7 Always 8 Galaxy Panell Group 8 Show 9 Galaxy Panell Group 9
307. d activation and deactivation dates However this task is scheduled by default If you select this type perform the following steps 1 In the Schedule dialog box select how often the task is to be performed in the Frequency list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Schedule Schedule Schedule Name Activate and Deactivate Cardd Type Activate and Deactivate Cards Frequency Monthly ka Command File Wal Remote Area Next Scheduled Date amp Time iain 9 2006 E Hour Minute pe alo a Now Remote rea T Buffer T Unbuffer Send Card DE Changes Send Date and Time Cancel Apply Help 2 Under Next Scheduled Date and Time select the date and enter the time in hours and minutes for the task to be performed Notes Te e To select the date click the ellipsis E button and select the date in the calendar e To enter the time type the Hour and Minute The hour ranges from 0 to 23 and minute ranges from 0 to 59 e To enter the current date and time click Now 3 Click OK to save the schedule Card Frequency Report Select this task type if you want to generate the Card Frequency Report at the defined intervals If you select this type the Card Frequency Report Configuration form appears on the lower left corner of the Schedule dialog box Schedule Schedule Mame Tours and Activities
308. d is enabled Enter the name of the schedule to generate the report You can use the ellipsis l button to find a schedule Generates the report for the range of schedules When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the first schedule name in From and the last schedule name in To You can use the ellipsis button to find a schedule 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted WIN PAK User s Guide 17 58 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Time Zone Report To generate a time zone report 1 In the Reports window select the Time Zone report and click Report Options The Report Time Zone dialog box appears Report Time Zone X Time Zone Filter Sort Advanced Time Zone Filter Bun from Archive Database 7 Time one Print Preview From f All f 2 00am 8 00am M F ki Print One To Range f 2 Oan 2 00amn t F Export File Estim Pages Account Accoun ie Clear All E Sa E E E es 2 T
309. dding Cards After saving the configuration details the Summary Report dialog box appears Ff QUICK START WIZARD Summary Report QUICK START WIZARD Summary Report ACCOUNT TIMEZONES CARDS SITE _tjAccounts LOOP PANEL SIO BOARDS Done 1 Start 2 Save READER BOARDS Report READERS 4 Finish 2 8 00am 5 00pm M F Mon Fri Excluding Holidays 2 Inthe Summary Report dialog box click Print to print the configuration details or click Finish to close the QSW dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 6 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout F In this chapter Configuring a Badge Layout 7 2 Creating Badge Designs 7 6 Configuring Badge DLLs 7 29 Setting up Badge Printers 7 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Introduction Badge layouts are templates that define the size placement and properties of a badge Properties of a badge are its printable size its background color and the magnetic stripes used for encoding cardholder information In addition the badge layout is defined with placeholders for cardholder information such as photo note fields signatures and bar codes When a badge layout is later associated with a card the card holder information such as photo signature and any other note field information is automatically entered on the badge This creates individual badges for every cardholder These cards are used as photo IDs and acc
310. dding Links to other Floor Plans Adding Alarm View and Event View links to the Floor Plan and Adding a Text Box to the Floor Plan for information on adding ADVs links or text objects to the floor plan WIN PAK User s Guide 12 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Adding an ADV to the Floor Plan ADVs that must be monitored and controlled from the floor plan are added to the floor plan design After adding ADVs to the floor plan you can set the control properties for each of them The control properties vary for each ADV control The following are the common control properties that can be set for an ADV General Configuration Enter the ADV name Link the ADV control to the ADV Set the rotation angle of the ADV Specify whether the ADV name must appear with the ADV control in the floor plan Specify whether a tool tip for the ADV must appear when you move the mouse over the ADV Status Configuration Color A color swatch appears next to the various states for the selected ADV the states vary depending on the type of device Change the color scheme by selecting new colors for the three conditions no alarms alarms alarms acknowledged for each state Blink Set the blink settings for the various ADV states To add an ADV to the floor plan 1 In the Floor Plan Toolbox window drag and drop an ADV into the floor plan background Refer to the following table for in
311. dding a P Series Panel A P Series panel is added to a P Series Loop a P Series Modem Pool or directly to a Communication Server A direct connection to the Intelligent Controller enables the Host PC to communicate directly with the P Series panel through RS 232 connection or through TCP IP on the P Series panel P Series panel types available in WIN PAK are PRO 2000 and PW 5000 Eight SIO Boards can be included in the PRO 2000 panel and 32 SIO Boards can be included in the PW 5000 panel Setting Up a Direct Connection To set up a direct connection of P Series panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the communication server folder and select Direct P Series Panel The Panel Configuration Basic dialog box appears P Series Configuration Basic E x Name Direct P Seried Description Type PRO 2200 v IC Address M Show i Host Retry Count 3 Time to IC Offline fi 5 Seconds Cancel Help WIN PAK User s Guide 11 114 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 3 Type a unique Name for the panel This field is mandatory 4 Type the Description of the panel 5 Select the type of panel in the Type list The available P Series panel types are PRO 2000 and PW 5000 6 Inthe IC Address enter a unique address of the Intelligent Controller board It must be uniquely de
312. de Device Map Panel Configuration Defining user codes User code is a unique code with a set of privileges for the user to work on the Galaxy panel keypad The number of user codes that can be set in the panel can vary based on the Galaxy panel type These user codes are associated to the card holder for the card holder to access the Galaxy panel In WIN PAK UI you can set the user name and password for the user code However the privileges for the user are set in the panel and cannot be modified in WIN PAK UI 1 In the Galaxy User Codes dialog box to change the user name and password select a USER in the list and type the User Name and User PIN under User Changes Galaxy User Codes x PIN lt p User Changes 1 John User Name E E E p E 5 USER me 4 USER see User PIN 5 USER me i Delete 6 USER si 7 USER 8 USER 9 USER 10 USER 11 USER 12 USER 13 USER 14 USER 15 USER meen ig lt Back Cancel Help 2 Click Next for setting the keypad or Max for configuring Galaxy panel The Keypad amp MAX dialog box appears Defining a keypad and MAX A keypad is a data input device for the Galaxy panel WIN PAK enables you to work on keypad from WIN PAK using the virtual keypad MAX is the reader that helps the WIN PAK users to gain access to a particular area and WIN PAK enables you to set the MAX You can define ADVs for the various keypads and MAX that are conn
313. deo as Fusion 4 Type the Name and the brief Description for the Fusion DVR 5 Type the User name and Password The User and Password fields are mandatory 6 Under Communication Settings type the Machine Name or IP Address of the Fusion DVR You can use the Browse button to select the machine name Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 31 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration 7 Enter the Port Number which is the same as the port number configured in Fusion DVR However Honeywell recommends the default port number 8 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the digital video The Abstract Device Record dialog box appears Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 9 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Digital Video Configuration dialog box Notes Te e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details 10 Click Next to add ADVs to the fusion cameras The Fusion Camera Configuration dialog box appears Fusion Camera Configuration X Edit Isolate Delete Show W Pan and Tilt Camera Title ee o Back Cancel Help 11 Create an ADV for each camera attached to the digital video Select an ADV double click to enter a name and press ENTER or click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties and click OK
314. desktop 3 Click Yes to place the icons on your desktop The summary of the selected information is displayed 4 Click Back to change any installation settings or click Next 5 After the installation is complete the WIN PAK Setup Complete screen appears WIN PAK Install xX Start Copping Files Mi Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Install Type User Interface Only Target Directory C Program Files wtw INFAKPRO Language Fath C Program Files wW IN PAKPAO SLanguage Files of k Mext gt Cancel 6 Click Finish to complete the installation Installing User Interface and Communication Server To install WIN PAK User Interface and Communication Server perform the instructions given in Installing WIN PAK and follow these steps 1 On the WIN PAK Setup Type screen select User Interface and Comm Server and click Next The system checks for SQL Service status and displays the WIN PAK Destination Path screen Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades WIN PAK Destination Path j z WIN PAK Please indicate where you want to install your WIN PAE executables Destination Folder C Program Files WINPAKPAO Browse lt Back Cancel
315. details on interlocking 11 Click Next to configure the output points to the panel The Panel Configuration Outputs dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 92 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Configuring output points to the panel To configure output points to the panel 1 Inthe Panel Configuration Outputs dialog box select an output point check box under Name The other settings in the dialog box are applicable only for the selected output point Panel Configuration Outputs Ei ADW Lea Mame wW 1 loop Out 1 wW 2 loop Out 2 Edit Isolate Delete r Time Zone None Add Show Sec Mn CH Pulse Time E I Interlocking te Se og Paint i lop Ind A On Action Fallow OffAction NoAction Back Cancel Help Notes T e WIN PAK sets some output points as active and may assign them an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel e The settings of these output points can be changed but you cannot make it inactive if it is interlocked with an input point 2 Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK define an ADV for each output point Note In the ADV definition three actions are listed for an output point Energized De Energized and Trouble In an output point Trouble means that WIN PAK cannot determine if the output is energized or de energized T 3
316. dialog box The details of the newly added language are listed Click OK to close the window Editing a Language l T Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Available Languages The Edit List of Available Languages dialog box appears Select the language you want to edit and then click Edit The Configure Language dialog box appears Edit the Language Name File and Help File Click OK to save the changes and return to the Edit List of Available Languages dialog box Note The text file for the language English United States cannot be edited Deleting a Language l WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Available Languages The Edit List of Available Languages dialog box appears Select the language you want to delete and then click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click Yes to confirm the deletion 16 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Translation Language Configuration Selecting a language for translation You can select a language for translating the WIN PAK user interface When a language is selected the WIN PAK user interface is translated based on the entries in the language text file In addition you can set the language for operators using the Operator option in the System menu The WIN PAK user interface is translated to the language of the operator who logs on to WIN PAK Refer to the Defining Operators section in the chapter System Settings fo
317. djusts the value of color in the image This corrects incorrect coloring of images Sharpen Sharpens blurry images by increasing the contrast of the adjacent pixels Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Table 7 2 Live Screen Grab Settings Setting Description Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image These settings are applied to the camera when an image is captured If you are not using a flash set the Contrast the same as the Video settings If a flash 1s used reduce the Contrast settings lower than the Video settings This prevents overexposure of the picture Note The exact settings must be determined by experimentation as they vary depending on the type of flash distance from the subject and other lighting being used Note If you are not using a flash set the Grab settings to the same values as the Video settings If you are using a flash reduce the Grab Brightness and Contrast The exact settings will vary depending on the type of flash and other lighting The exact settings can only be determined by experimenting T 4 Click Freeze to capture the image 5 To crop the captured image use the cropping frame or enter the image proportion in Aspect Ratio and select the Lock Aspect Ratio check box Tip If you are using the default badge size set the aspect ratio t
318. dow shows the number of state changes in a point 2 Click Close to close the Alarm View window iE Note By default alarms that are displayed in the alarm view window beep until they are acknowledged This default setting can be changed in System Defaults Refer to the Setting defaults for alarm handling section in the chapter System Settings for changing the default settings for handling the alarms Handling Alarms using the right click menu options When you right click the alarm it enables the list of options to handle the alarm tasks Based on the selected alarm type the list of menu options differs Control Functions The control functions pop up on right click menu options differ based on the alarm type Input alarms Acknowledge Clear Open Default Floor Plan Add Note Shunt Unshunt and Restore to Time Zone Door alarms Acknowledge Clear Open Default Floor Plan Add Note Unlock Lock Pulse Timed Pulse and Restore to Time Zone Reader alarms Acknowledge Clear Open Default Floor Plan and Add Note Reader or Point alarm which is attached to a camera Acknowledge Clear Open Default Floor Plan Add Note Digital Video Live and Digital Video Retrieval Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Alarm View e Panel System alarms Acknowledge Clear Open Default Floor Plan Add Note Buffer and Unbuffer Table 15 2 Describing the basic right click menu o
319. ds are defined by card number access level and the status of the card whether Active or Inactive Badge designs can be assigned to the cards and cards can be assigned with a PIN number for enabling high security WIN PAK enables you to add a single card or a bulk of cards Later the cards are associated to the employees visitors and so on In addition you can define a card as a privileged card that can be used for setting the Galaxy group or arm the Vista partitions However you must procure the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel to avail this facility in WIN PAK Card Holders A Card Holder is a person who holds a card Card Holders in WIN PAK are defined by information such as First Name and Last Name and User defined fields referred to as note fields These fields are used for storing the additional information of a card holder such as qualification passing year employee number and so on In addition a card holder can be associated to user codes for accessing the Galaxy panel or Vista panel However you must procure the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel to avail this facility in WIN PAK Note Before you configure the card and card holder details Honeywell recommends you to define the following e Time Zones e Devices e Access Areas e Badge Design 99 66 Refer to the Time Management Device Map Defining Areas and Badge Layout chapters for more details on the above ment
320. ds to a card holder Refer to the Adding a Card Holder section for more details on adding card holders WIN PAK User s Guide 8 34 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information Importing Card and Card Holder Information The WIN PAK Import Utility is used for importing the card and card holder details into WIN PAK from an excel sheet When you import these details into WIN PAK cards are assigned to the card holders accordingly Importing card and card holder details to WIN PAK involves 1 Defining note fields and card holder tab layouts and configuring access levels Refer to the Configuring Additional Information section in this chapter for more details on defining note fields card holder tab layouts and access levels 2 Defining the order of the fields 3 Entering card and card holder details in an excel sheet 4 Assigning default values to certain fields like Activation Date Expiration Date and User defined fields 5 Importing the excel sheet into WIN PAK 5 Note Ensure that you logged on to WIN PAK client system before using Import Z Utility Logging on to Import Utility To log on to WIN PAK Import Utility 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt WIN PAK Import Utility The Login Information dialog box appears Login Information X User m 2 Type the Name of the user and the Password AN Note Only the Administrat
321. e In addition to the basic steps perform the following steps for scheduling a task 3 In the Schedule dialog box under GuardTour Configuration select the guard tour in the Guard Tour list 4 To select the card attached to the card holder guard click the ellipsis d button and select the card If you want to remove the card click Clear 5 Click OK to save the schedule Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Schedule Run Report Select Run Report as a task type if you want to generate card holders report or history report at a defined interval In addition the reports that are configured in Report Templates can be executed When you select this task type the Configure Reports frame appears on the lower right corner of the Schedule dialog box UU xi Schedule Schedule Hame Tours and Activities Tore ater Frequency Monthy Command File i ial Remote Area Next Scheduled Date amp Time 4 4 2006 E Hour Minute js jas How Configure Reports Report Type Card Holder z Report Template Mone I Print Report Felfontigure MW E Mail Report EMail IDs Cancel Apply Help Remote Sree T Buffer l Send Date and Time T Unbutfer F Send Card DE Changes Figure 9 5 Scheduling a task for the Run Report task type In addition to the basic steps perform the following steps for scheduling a task 1
322. e maximum value you can specify is 99 Notes Te e Each action must be set with a priority for considering the action as an alarm or an event When an action is triggered the action priority is compared with the values set for Alarm Priority for notification and Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement fields that are configured in the Communication Server e The action is considered as an alarm if the action priority is less than the value in the Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement field e The action is considered as an event if the action priority is greater than the value in the Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement Example Alarm Priority for notification is set as 20 and Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement is set as 50 in the Com Server Configuration window If you set 15 as the action priority it is considered as an alarm If you set 35 as the action priority it is considered as an alarm and event 9 Select the Send Email check box if e mails must be sent to the configured e mail ids when the action takes place 10 Select the Time Zone for the action The default setting is Always as the defined actions take effect regardless of the time 11 Select the Write to History check box to write the event into the log file 12 Select the Print on alarm printer check box to print the action details on the alarm printer 13 Under Command Files on select a Command File to be executed for the actio
323. e Access from all entrances in this area Set Access for all entrances in this area Time Zone Always On This Timezone is always on e Leave Access for all entrances in this area as it currently is to continue the same for each entrance in this group e Remove Access from all entrances in this area to deny access through these entrances for this access level e Set Access for all entrances in this area to allow access through these entrances for a particular time zone Select the time zone in the Time Zone list to determine periods of access 4 Click OK to set the access for the selected area and return to the Custom Access Level dialog box Custom Access Level 30627 Access Area TZ Always On E Loopi Panell Ri TZ Always On E Loopi Panell R2 TZ Always On E Loop1 Panel1 R3 TZ Always On E Loopi Panell R4 TZ Always On Show Original Access Only I First Yalid Date None Clear Last Valid Date None Clear Cancel Note The Blue dot indicates that the access area is customized for this card If you want to restore the original access level for a group or entrance right click the customized group or entrance and click Restore Original Access T 5 To set the start date for the customized access level click None in First Valid Date The First Valid Date calendar appears WIN PAK User s Guide 8 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card an
324. e Email Configuration tab to enter the e mail Ids Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 3 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Accounts Account Record x Account Email Configuration m Email Configuration To ff Cancel Help 6 In the To box type the e mail ID of the user to whom the account specific alarms must be reported Note You can enter multiple e mail IDs separated by semi colons In the Cc B and Bcc fields you can type the e mail IDs of the users to whom the copy of the mails must be sent w 7 Click OK to save the account information Note Select the required account before entering an account sensitive information 8 Selecting an Account To select an account in WINPAK 1 Choose Account gt Select or press F2 The Account window opens lolx Contact Name E Search and Sort r Operations Search Field ae An o a Criteria Edit Search For Delete Sort By Account Name v Update List Print Report WIN PAK User s Guide 5 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Administrators 2 In the Account Name list select the required account 3 Click Select NG Note Alternatively double click the required account to select it Editing an Account To edit an account in WINPAK 1 Choose Account gt Edit The Account window opens 2 Click the required account to be edited and click the Edit button Re
325. e Filter Sort Run from Archive Database Print Preview Tracking Area Tracking and Mustering Areas Print Card Holders Export File All Estim Pages Clear All i One Group August 25 2005 Bl pb august 25 2005 E 23 _ Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report 2 To filter the tracking area card holder and date a Click the Attendance Filter tab b Select an area in the Tracking Area list The areas or branches configured in Tracking Area are listed Tip To include all the areas select Tracking and Mustering Areas in the Tracking list c Select one of the following options for filtering the card holders under Card Holders Table 17 3 Describing the card holder filter options for Attendance report a ee Can Ge E E E E a report for all the card holders in the specified area Generates the report for a single card holder When you select this option the Card Number and Name fields are enabled Enter the card number or name of the card holder to generate the report You can use the ellipsis button to find the card holder Generates the report for a particular group When you select this option the Access Level and Note Field fields are enabled Enter the access level and select the note field to generate the report If you select a note field the text box appears next to it and enables you to enter the val
326. e Map Panel Configuration Te TE 2 Define an ADV for each output point Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK Note In the ADV definition three actions are listed for an output point Energized De Energized and Trouble In a output point Trouble means that WIN PAK cannot determine if the output is energized or de energized 3 Select a Time Zone during which the output point must be activated 4 Select the First Valid Read Activates Time Zone check box to activate the output point only when a valid card is read though the time zone is set for the output point And then at the end of the Time Zone the output is turned off automatically Note To enable this option you must have selected the time zone 5 Select the time unit for the pulse time and then select the Pulse Time to set the maximum time required for the output to be energized when it is triggered 6 Select the Interlocking check box to interlock the points Refer to the Interlocking section in this chapter for more details on interlocking 7 Select the required Report ON OFF option 8 Click Next to configure the reader of the panel The Panel Configuration Readers dialog box appears Configuring a reader to the panel The number of readers available for the panel depends on the type of panel being configured The WIN PAK system automatically adds readers to the panel By default all available readers are active and are defined
327. e Port list select a port of the communication server to which the loop is to be connected The ports that are selected for the communication server and not used for other loops are listed 15 If you select a port a Select the transmission baud rate for the loop in Bits per second b Select the number of bytes that can be transferred in Data Bits Select a number between 4 and 8 By default it is set to 8 c Select the type of Parity for the error detecting procedure By default it is set to None The available parity types are Even Odd Mark and Space d Select the Stop Bits value By default it is 1 In serial communications a stop bit is an extra bit transmitted after each unit of information usually a byte to indicate that transmission of that unit 1s complete 16 If you select TCP IP Connection port a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name of the computer where the panel is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 17 If you select TCP IP Encrypted Connection port WIN PAK User s Guide 11 50 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name and the Encryption Password of the computer where the panel is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 18 Click Next to display the Finish dialog box 19 Click Finish to add the RS 232 panel loop and return to the Device window The corresponding loop icon is displayed for the panel loop in t
328. e branches and entrances or readers that are configured in Access Area To generate an access area report 1 In the Reports window select the Access Area report and click Report Options The Report Access Area dialog box appears Report Access Area OOS ACCess Area x Fiter Run from amp rchive Database P Print Preview Pin __Expotfiie __Expotfiie O Estim Pages O Estim Pages Ceara All No filter or sorting options are provided for the access area report 2 Click Print Preview to view the Access Area Report prior to printing 3 Click Print to send the report to your printer 4 Click Close to return to the Reports window Access Level Report The Access Level report contains the available access levels and the corresponding branches or readers that are configured in Access Level To generate the access level report 1 In the Reports window select the Access Level report and click Report Options The Report Access Level dialog box appears Report Access Level X Access Level Filter Srani Run from Archive Database P Access Level Print Preview One Export File Range Estim Pages Account eco o Clear All Ea ee EE E E Sess 2 To generate reports for the specific access levels and account a Click the Access Level Filter tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report b Under Acc
329. e fields Field To filter the note fields information that must be displayed in the report The number of drop down lists depend on the number of available note fields When you select a note field the From and To fields are enabled From Ta Color T Blue Fed Select None Hi None None None 1 Enter the corresponding information in the From and To fields These fields are case sensitive if the note field template is defined for a note field Example If you select Color in Field and you select Blue in From and Red in To the card holder details that contain Blue through Red colors are included in the report 3 To sort the report in the ascending or descending order of a specific field a Click the Sort tab Report Card Holder l X Card Holder Filter Sort Advanced Card Filter Bun from Archive Database I Sort Ordert Print Preview Print i Ascending Descending Export File Estim Pages Sort Order First Hame r i Ascending i Descending Clear All tHE Close Sort Orders Not Sorted f Ascending Descending b Under Sort Order 1 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the first level c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 31 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report
330. e floor plan view Clear this check box to open the target floor plan in a new window 9 Click OK Adding Alarm View and Event View links to the Floor Plan Alarm View and Event View links enable you to view the alarms and events occurring for a device from the floor plan To add an Alarm View or an Event View link to the floor plan 1 In the Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box select the E for Alarm View or B for Event View and drag it to the floor plan design 2 Right click the link object and click Control Properties A properties dialog box appears Event iew Properties X Hame Event View Rotation Angle jo M Show Name W Show Tooltip Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 12 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition 3 To set the general properties for the view link click the General tab a Type a Name for the link b To rotate the ADV control enter the Rotation Angle or use the scroll bars to select an angle from the list c Select the Show Name check box to display the Name below the ADV in the floor plan d Select the Show Tooltip check box to display the ADV name as a tool tip 4 To select the device for which event or alarm views must be displayed in the floor plan click the Filter tab Alarm iew Properties E X On as Alam Reads Card Reads Both m None Cancel a Click Control to open the Control Map b Expand the Control Map by cli
331. e name in the field provided and click Next ou will see the confirmation message on the next page for any modification in the site name before you proceed S10 BOARDS DONE lt Back Next gt Cancel 2 Type a unique Site Name and click Next The Continue dialog box appears 3 Click Back to change the site name or click Next A new site is created and the Configure dialog box is displayed with the Add New Loop to existing Site option selected 5 Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click Pm Done B and perform the steps that follow Adding a Loop to a Site Loop refers to the communication method used for communicating between the workstation and the panel Adding a Loop to a Site process includes adding a panel to a loop and adding readers to a panel To add a loop to a site 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click Add New Loop to existing Site 2 Click the Site to be associated with the loop and then click Next The Loop dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard WIN PAK User s Guide FP QUICK START WIZARD Loop QUICK START WIZARD Loop Add Loop to Site Sitel ACCOUNT TIMEZONES Choose the Communication gaa Mer Type from the drop down list TCP IP E CARDS Pegi lee yale i This refers the type of protocol SITE Loop Type Direct used for communication ESE
332. e network time and date You may notice a pause for up to 50 seconds when the time and date are sent because the time is sent at the top of the computer minute up to 10 seconds Closed circuit acts as a NC circuit Sends card information to the panel When sending cards it is recommended that you re initialize the panel by choosing Select All This ensures that old card information is removed when the new card information is added When cards with an Active or Trace status are added edited or deleted from the card or card holder database this information is automatically sent to the panels All other card information changes are sent using this command Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 31 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Additionally new or updated information on the following features functions and panel elements are sent to the panel Access Levels Access Control Areas Card Formats Command File Conversion Tables Groups Holidays Inputs IC Configuration Input Groups Input Scan Outputs Procedures Actions SIO Boards Triggers Reader LED Buzzer specs Time Zones Initializing Status As the panel initializes a status window indicates the status of sending the information If an error occurs the status window indicates which command caused the error Initializing N1000P anelt1 Steps Sending Panel Configuration Options Message Count BEE Statue Panel In
333. e reader check points is specified sequenced and un sequenced Alarms for the various check point states are defined by associating an action group to each check point and by specifying the action priority Based on the priority an event is displayed or an alarm is triggered for the specific action For example if an alarm must be triggered when a guard misses a check point it can be configured by setting the priority for the Missed action state for the check point When the guard tour is run and if the guard misses the check point an alarm is triggered based on the action priority After a guard tour is configured it can be run to monitor the guard s movements at the various check points As the guard tour progresses alarms and events are displayed in the Alarm or the Event window for the various action states of a check point Configuring Guard Tours Configuring guard tours involves e Adding a guard tour e Defining readers and input points as a part of sequenced and unsequenced check points e Associating action groups to check points and specifying priority for each state together with the command file to be executed when the action occurs Adding a Guard Tour Adding a guard tour involves defining a name for the guard tour and specifying at least one check point for the guard tour To add a guard tour 1 Choose Configuration gt Guard Tour The Guard Tour window appears WIN PAK User s Guide 14 2 Document 7 001009
334. e sent The Configuration Email Ids dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 5 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings Cancel 8 Type the e mail Ids in the From To Cc and Bec text boxes Tip To enter multiple e mail Ids you can use the semicolon as a separator 9 Click OK to save the e mail details and return to the System Config dialog box 10 Click Apply to save the e mail configuration details Configuring automatic log on and log off settings You can set the WIN PAK system to log on automatically when you launch WIN PAK In addition you can set to close the WIN PAK User Interface when you log off from the system To configure the log on and log off settings 1 In the System Config dialog box click the Login Logout tab System Config Ed Defaults Alarm Handling EMail Configuration Login Logout Access Levels Login Logout a E Loot usina current Windows user ab startup T Close WIN PAK when user logs out You must create a group named WIN PAF on the database server or the Primary Domain Controller in order to enable the Login using curent Windows user at startup option Cancel Apply Help Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 31 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings 2 Select the Login using current Windows user at startup check box if you want the WIN PAK system to log on automatically using Windows logon user name w
335. e the details of check point alarms and return to the Guard Tour Record dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 14 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Guard Tour Running Guard Tours Running Guard Tours Guard tours are run to monitor and track the movements of guards You need to configure the guard tour server for running guard tours Refer to the Adding a Guard Tour Server section of the Device Map chapter for information on configuring a guard tour Running a guard tour involves e Selecting the guard tour you want to run e Specifying the card that is used by the guard for accessing various check points e Starting the guard tour e Viewing the status of the sequenced and unsequenced check points that the guard accesses while the guard tour progresses e Viewing the alarms and events generated for the actions configured for the various check point states in the guard tour Starting a Guard Tour 1 Choose Operations gt Guard Tour The Guard Tour window appears F Guard Tour Of x R Sequenced Guard Tour R Unsequenced Guard Tour P Detail View m Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Search For Sort By Tour Name r Update List Print Report 2 Click Start The Guard Tour Available Tours dialog box appears with the list of configured guard tours Guard Tour Available Tours Ei First Check Point Seguenced G M1000Panell 00 01 Cancel Un
336. e wallpaper settings Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 25 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Setting defaults for Restore options To configure the restore options in the WIN PAK User Interface 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Restore tab Workstation Defaults Fa Defaults Alarm Printer Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore W Restore Main Window Position and Size Operator W Restore Main Window Position and Size I Restore Window Position and Size O Reopen windows Cancel Apply Help 2 To set the restore option for the main window before logging on to the WIN PAK system a Select the Restore Main Window Position and Size check box to retain the last size and position of the main window 3 To set the restore options after logging on to the WIN PAK system a Under Operator select the following restore options Table 5 4 Describing restore options for operators Restore Main Restore Main Window E E E P O T T position and size of the main window in the Position and Size previous session are restored Restore Window The position and size of the secondary windows in Position and Size the previous session are restored Reopen Window The windows that were kept open in the previous session are re opened 4 Click Apply to save the restore settings 5 Click OK to save the workstation settings and close the dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 5 26 Document 7
337. e you enter the name of the access levels e Avoid duplication of card numbers e To assign default values for fields leave the fields blank You can assign default value to the Issue Number Status Access Level Activation Date and Expiry Date fields and the user defined fields e Use the format for note field templates for the user defined fields e To assign the photo of the card holder enter the name of the photo image file in the Photo column Assigning Default Values You can assign the default values to certain fields like Issue Number Status Access Level Activation Date and Expiration Date You can also assign default values for user defined fields To assign the default values to certain fields 1 Log on to the WIN PAK Import Utility The WIN PAK ImportUtility window appears 2 Select the Account for assigning the default values The fields for the selected account are displayed in Columns Order 3 Under Columns Order select the field to which the default value must be assigned The Default Value box appears on the right Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 37 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information Fal WIN PAK ImportUtility x Account Account2 E Default Value Access Level Activation Date Expiration Date Picture CSV File Path gl Images Folder g Cancel 4 Type or select the default value that must be assigned to all the card holders
338. ear the Background Color box to select a background color for the element e Select the Transparent Background check box to set a transparent background to the element f Click Apply to set the common properties for the element e To position the element a Right click on the element and click Properties b Click the Positioning tab Horizontal Position Vertical Positior Orientation Middle i Tog fo Height 2 Lett jo Width 22 Lenter Select the Horizontal Position of the element a o Select the Vertical Position Select the Orientation f Type the Top Left Height and the Width of the badge in millimeters g Click Apply to apply the badge outline tem layering order Badge items are layered as they are placed When an item is selected it is brought to the top of the layering order Layering can also be controlled using the Change Layering icon on the toolbar in the Badge Definition window e To change the items in the layering order a Click on the toolbar in the Badge Definition window The Badge Element Layout Badge Item Layering dialog box appears displaying the list of elements placed on the badge WIN PAK User s Guide 7 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Badge Element Layout Badge ltem Layering x Badge Items Text Technology Solutions Lab Bitmap Honeywell jpg Photo Index 1 Brightness 0 Up Down
339. ears for deleting the server 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion The tracking and muster server is deleted from the device map Digital Video we Digital Video is defined as a digital video recorder system In WIN PAK the video is viewed using the Digital Video Display window This window can also be triggered by an action of the panel To do that you must select a camera for the panel action in ADV configuration As panels the digital video configuration does not have a defined set of action groups Therefore if you want to set an action group to the ADV you must add a custom action group The digital videos supported by WIN PAK are RapidEye Fusion and Dedicated Micros Configuring an Access DVPRO Digital Video Ensure that you configure the Digital Video before using the Access DVPRO functions Note For Access DVPRO RapidEye Software needs to be installed on the computer from where it has to be viewed To add a new Access DVPRO 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the Devices folder and choose Add gt Digital Video The Digital Video Configuration window appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Digital ideo Configuration x Name Add Edit Description Type Access DYPRO Show User Password EE ee Cancel Help 3 Select the Type of digital v
340. ected to the Galaxy panel 1 In the Keypad amp MAX dialog box select a keypad or MAX in the Name list WIN PAK User s Guide 11 150 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Keypad amp MAX x ADY Name Add V 1 Galaxy Panell KeyPad 0 r Keypad MAX 2 Galaxy Panell KeyPad 0 Key Pad Ea VIEME alaxy Panell MAX 4 G MAX meee Delete Address Show Z 17 No ADV I 18 No ADV KA 1A ha AN z lt Back Cancel Help Select the type of keypad under Keypad Max Set a unique address for the keypad or MAX In the Name list double click a name and press ENTER to create an ADV for the keypad Click Next to finish the Galaxy panel configuration Click Finish The Galaxy panel is configured Right Click Menu Options The following options are available when you right click the Galaxy panel i Synchronize Edit Configuration Download Log Data Upload User Code Upload Date and Time Work on Virtual Keypad Note WIN PAK enables Galaxy to stop polling at communication server when you perform any of these options except for editing the configuration details Synchronizing with Galaxy Panel Synchronizing the data in the Galaxy panel with WIN PAK ensures that the data in WIN PAK is updated with the latest data in Galaxy In addition any changes made in the Galaxy panel after it was downloaded to WIN PAK are also updated in WIN P
341. ection This field is mandatory Type a Description for the RS 232 connection Under Port Settings select a Port for the RS 232 Connection NH On A W If you select a port a Select the transmission baud rate for the switcher in Bits per second b Select the number of bytes that can be transferred in Data Bits Select a number between 4 and 8 By default it is set to 8 c Select the type of Parity for the error detecting procedure By default it is set to None The available parity types are Even Odd Mark and Space d Select the Stop Bits value By default it is 1 In serial communications a stop bit is an extra bit transmitted after each unit of information usually a byte to indicate that transmission of that unit 1s complete 7 If you select a TCP IP connection a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name of the computer where the RS 232 protocol is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 8 If you select a TCP IP encrypted connection a Type the TCP IP IP Address or Node name and the Encryption Password of the computer where the RS 232 protocol is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 9 Create an ADV for the RS 232 Connection Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 75 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map RS 232 Con
342. ed to filter the devices or cards Live Monitor e The Live Monitor window displays the live video from the CCTV camera Digital Video e The Digital Video Display window displays the live video or the recorded video from the DVRs WIN PAK User s Guide 15 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Locate Card Holder Locate Card Holder The Locate Card Holder option reports the card holder details time and location of the cards that are used by the card holder To locate a card holder by a card number or a card holder name l T Choose Operations gt Locate or click 4 on the toolbar The Locate Card Holder dialog box appears Locate Card Holder i xX Locate by aa Card Number Name Under Locate by click Card Number or card holder Name Click the ellipsis J button to search for the card holder The Select dialog box appears Select Fa Find Key Last Name 7 Find what ki Find Select an item in Find Key and enter the keyword in the Find What box Click Find The card holders that match the criteria are listed Note If you want to list all the card holders leave the Find What box empty and click Find Select the card holder and click OK The dialog box is closed and the selected card holder name is displayed in the Locate Card Holder dialog box Click View to view the card holder details The Locate Result dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15
343. edule generated by WIN PAK Change the required details and click OK to save the changes Deleting a Schedule To delete a schedule l Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Schedule The Schedule window appears Select the schedule to be deleted and click Delete You can also delete the default schedule generated by WIN PAK Click Delete The selected schedule is deleted Holiday Group Holiday group is a set of holidays For example you can group the holidays like Christmas Thanks Giving Day and Independence Day as a Government Holiday group Holiday Groups are useful for grouping the departments that would close on holidays and the departments that would remain open on holidays Associating Holiday Groups to Panels A holiday group can be associated to a panel to control or restrict the panel access on holidays For example the access of the doors attached to the panel can be restricted on holidays Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Holiday Group Associating Holiday Groups and Time Zones When Time Zones and a Holiday Group are assigned to a panel the start and end times for the H1 and H2 time slots are applicable to the Holiday Group Adding a Holiday Group To add a holiday group 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Holiday Group The Holiday Group window appears fe Holiday Group ii Holidays Offices E Holidays General D Detail view
344. eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 11 33 Chapter 12 Floor Plan ADV Icons and DeSCTription cccccseccccccccceeeeeeeeccceeeeeaeeeeees 12 5 ADV Control Functions from Floor Plan cc eeceeeccecceeeee ees 12 18 Describing panel initialization Options ccceccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 12 22 Describing fields in the Status dialog DOX eects 12 24 Chapter 13 Command File Command and Parameter list for ADVS ccc ec ceceececeeceeeees 13 6 SIO EE E E E ENE tenths sommes 13 9 1E E ANE E E EE OE EOR E E E ET EA 13 9 Chapter 14 Guard Tour Chapter 15 Monitoring Actions Describing various states of alarm and the relevant colors 15 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 ii ili WIN PAK User s Guide Tables Describing the basic right click menu options for handling alarms 15 10 Describing command buttons in the Alarm View window 15 10 Describing control buttons on the Live Monitor window 15 17 Describing control buttons on the Live Monitor window 15 21 Describing the Live Video Display control options 15 22 Describing the transaction types for filtering video display 15 24 Describing the alarm and card options for filtering video display 15 25 Chapter 16 Translation Edit Dialog Text Elements and Descriptions 0008 16 6 Translate Menu Text Elements and Description 16 9 Translate Other Text Options
345. eeeees 17 7 Deleting a History Report Template cc eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 7 Generating and Printing a Report scccssssescccccocsssssesceccococssssseesecceeosssseeo 17 8 ACCES SATC ROPO cries i E T TEE 17 14 Access Level REPOL annro a E eee 17 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i Xi WIN PAK User s Guide Contents ACCOUNT REDON since ices aceiiayactetes iat S 17 16 Andan EREDO free nan ne ar ERED MED EEOS Soe A SEM 17 17 CREDO y Renee rr ERED E men oreo mStar een teens nt SARE ECRER NY Pe Ce ROME OU EO NT 17 19 Card Frequency REDO eneren a Matec alesse ets 17 22 Card History RE POL creiran ar SEa 17 26 Card Holder RepOnl ennenen esi eee 17 29 Card Holder Tab Layout Report ccccccccccscccccceeeceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeees 17 33 Command File Cp Ott areires E T 17 33 CnTolA ra REPO ensenis iria TES 17 35 Device Map Repo scrocco ton iao aa ONE 17 35 Floor Plam Repor ehois n teen ee a eee 17 42 Galaxy Panel TOS REPO ruis E E OEE EENE 17 43 Guard TOUr REDOT eierne E eet ees 17 45 FAIS ORY REPOT mersis t E AE conden EN EEEO EON 17 46 Holiday GTOUP REPO erise EE O OTE 17 50 Note Field lemplate Report sninn eee 17 51 Operor Repor zea a A malauaansansanaeass 17 52 Operator ACHONS Report sasien RE ADEI aeni 17 53 Operator Level Repon soina a eases aaa ad 17 57 Schedule Repor aae e A E 17 58 Time Zone Report soren n eae es 17 59 Tracking and Mustering Area Report ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 17 61 Chapter 18
346. ees 10 80 Panel COMM GUT AMON scissa aenaran a E 10 82 Adding an N 1000 PW 2000 Panel ccccccssssscccccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 82 Adding a INS 2 Panne lice iativascntuss oti elessies teticc tans r a S 10 98 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i vii WIN PAK User s Guide Contents TCC T NO CMe i healer cu rie atte aaah N ienenaaiant seh ieetelcuctpetadaety 10 112 TALETIOCKING EX AMP ICS sesen e TTE 10 113 AGING a P Series Pale vsisicsnctidnanstbs vaxsauiuoddea ER 10 114 petting Up a Direct Connection sessiun aaa 10 114 Interlocking Points on SIO Board cccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 132 DG OPINLCLIOC KS arerin A EEA 10 133 Adding P Series Panel in Modem Pool ccccccccssscccceececeeeeeeeeeeees 10 141 Addin a Galaxy Panele inersiionn a nates canes eee 10 144 Right Click Meni Options osrsrnr anisa a E E EAEE 10 151 Synchronizing with Galaxy Panel eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseen 10 151 Viewing Panel Configuration Details cc cccccceeeeeeeeeees 10 153 Downloading Log Data nr n EEN 10 153 Uploading User COG eC riaicsincaucsentinceunrthedtmndnatbu deanesddedeaaieoees 10 154 Uploading Date and Time arrenar aa aa 10 154 Working on Virtual Keypad ccccccccccscccsceccecccctceeeeeeeeeeees 10 154 Isolating and Deleting a Galaxy Panel cc cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 10 155 Adding ay ista Pane lesioetan i E haataeelods 10 157 Edine a Vista Paine oer AA ie ccasceee cess 10 160 Isolati
347. egree of transparency for the photo Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Note A ghosted photo is harder to photocopy and provides added security against unauthorized reproduction of ID badges h Click Apply to place the photo in the badge outline Placing a Shape on the Badge outline e To adda shape on the badge outline a Click SIl on the toolbar b Click and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the shape The shape is now placed on the badge outline e To change the properties of the shape a Right click on the shape and click Properties b Click the Shape tab Badge Element Layout x shape Colors Fositioning Bounded FR Bound Independent Bound Orm svidth Round in Height i Elipse i Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Pe Wid Bumed 20 Line width 5 Cancel Apply Help c Under Shape Type click to change the type of the shape If you click Rounded Rectangle set its properties in the options provided under Rounded Rectangle frame s Hegn tumed pel d In the Line Width box type the width for the shape outline e Click Apply to place the shape in the badge outline Placing a Signature on the Badge outline You can place Signature placeholders on the badge where you need the card holder s signature to appear When the badge is assigned to a card holder the card holder s signature is applied to
348. egress devices to detect tampering This option is enabled only if the input point is supervised 9 Set the Interlocking for the input point Refer to the Interlocking section in this chapter for more details on interlocking 10 Click Next to configure the output points to the panel The Panel Configuration Outputs dialog box appears Configuring output points to the panel To configure output points to the panel 1 Inthe Panel Configuration Outputs dialog box select an output point check box under Name The other settings in the dialog box are applicable only for the selected output point Panel Configuration Qutputs X ADY Edit N52 Panell Out 1 i NS2 Panel Out 2 Add O 3 No ADY 5 No AD E Mo ADY Delete Time Zone Show Mone D First Valid Card Read Activates Time Zone f Sec Min f Hr Pulse Time ji M Interlocking ie COo G Paint 4 No ADY Report ON Off f Never On Action Follow Off Action No Action Always lt Back Cancel Help Note WIN PAK sets some output points as active and may assign an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel and whether or not you have chosen the anti passback option The settings of these output points can be changed but you cannot make it inactive 1f it is interlocked with T an input point Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 107 WIN PAK User s Guide Devic
349. eld are those previously entered in the Modem Pool when the interface was set up Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 141 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration In the New Password text box enter a password and re enter the password in the Confirm Password field WIN PAK requires a password for remote dial ups The password can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length Refer to the PRO 2200 Intelligent Controller Installation Manual for details on setting the password switch In the Call In Option list select an event that determines when the remote panel calls in to the communication server Enter a value in the Delay Before Connect text box if a pause is required between the dialing prefix and the phone number Enter the value in the Number of Redial Attempts text box By default it is set to 3 but can be up to 50 In the Redial Delay text box enter the time allowed between dial attempts This field defaults to 60 seconds but you can enter between 5 to 120 seconds Inthe Wait Time for Disconnect text box enter the time allowed before disconnecting By default it is set to 30 seconds but can be from 1 through 30 seconds Click Next to save the panel remote configuration Configuring system settings Several broad operating parameters are set up using the System dialog box including those dealing with the PRO 2200 Intelligent Controller board capabilities as well as the Time
350. elease locks just like a valid card read Keypads Indicates that the panel is using matrix style 11 wire keypads If Wiegand style 5 wire keypads are used the keypad is treated as a reader and this option must be cleared PIN The PIN number must be entered in the keypad before presenting a card to gain access at an entrance This option is disabled and it is selected when the Keypad option is selected Continuous Card Reads Card readers do not recognize valid cards while the corresponding output is energized Continuous Card Reads allow card readers to read cards continuously independent of output pulse time Example When Output 1 is assigned a 10 second pulse time a valid card read at Reader 1 causes Output 1 to energize for 10 seconds During this time the card reader does not recognize any other valid cards if the Continuous Card Reads option is not selected Reverse Read LEDs This option reverses the standard LED operation of the reader If this option is selected a reader that normally changes from green to red on a valid card read changes from red to green Host Grant 11 102 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration The Host Grant option provides the fault tolerance even if the card is not found in the panel Host Grant options are used when for example a number of cards have been entered in the database but have not yet been downloaded to the panel e Site Codes Site codes ens
351. elect the card to be edited from the list and click Edit The Card Record dialog box appears Refer to the Adding a Card section in this chapter for information on editing the card Deleting a Card To delete a card 1 Choose Card gt Card or click in the toolbar The Card window appears WIN PAK User s Guide 8 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 3 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Select the card to be deleted from the list and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears if you have set to confirm the card deletion in the Workstation Defaults setting Delete Card x re you sure you want to s7 delete Card 5673 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The card is deleted Adding Bulk Cards To add cards in bulk l N Choose Card gt Bulk Card Add The Bulk Card Add dialog box appears Bulk Card Add x Start Number End Number Status Inactive T Access Level l Visitor None Badge Front Badge Back None None Account Account m Activation Date Expiration Date Change Clear Change Clear Progress Type the Start Number and the End Number of the card series For example type 100 and 200 to add 100 cards starting with the card number 100 Select the Status of the cards Select the Access Level of the cards Select the Visitor check box if the cards are for visitors
352. elected operator is deleted Default Settings Defaults can be set for certain system functions in WIN PAK However you can change these default settings For example you can set the deletion of a card without asking for a confirmation message WIN PAK menus for configuring workstation and system settings are e Workstation Defaults e System Defaults Setting Workstation Defaults Defaults can be set for alarm printer sound files paths wallpapers and restore options To set the workstation defaults 1 Choose System gt Workstation Defaults The Workstation Defaults dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 5 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings Workstation Defaults Fa Defaults Alarm Printer Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore Maximum Records returned from the Database for Selecting List 200 Maximum Records returned from the Database for Find List 20 Live Monitor Mone r W Confirm Card Deletes Always show record view Freeze Client Wait fic minutes 2 Click each tab to configure or change the default settings 3 Click Apply to save the settings Configuring default workstation settings To configure the default workstation settings 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Defaults tab 2 Set the following settings Table 5 1 Describing options for setting defaults Maximum Records returned The maximum number of
353. em 6 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 7 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 8 Click Close to return to the Reports window Card Frequency Report The Card Frequency Report enables you to generate a report to know the number of times a card holder has accessed a particular reader using the card This report also helps the user to obtain the details of the unused cards and to prevent any misuse of the card To generate a card frequency report 1 In the Reports window select the Card Frequency report and click Report Options The Report Card Frequency dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 17 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Report Card Frequency Fa Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter Ron fiom eretive Wetatase fe Date Range Print Preview From Tuesday April 12 2005 E j Ta Tuesday Aprl 12 2005 a 23 Print Export File ERE Daily Time Range Estim Pages T Only list events between these hours each day From To Cemal fp fe E 23 Hd mH z z m z Close Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi 2 To filter the records based on the specific date and time ranges Click the Date and Time Filter tab b Under Date Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in t
354. em Once the pool is defined the panel loops are added to the modem pool rather than adding them directly to the communication server as is the case with local loops Note Any modem that is supported by the Windows operating system can be used for panel communication Adding a Modem Pool To add a modem pool 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click communication server and select the type of modem pool connection The Modem Pool Configuration Basic Information dialog box for the selected modem pool type appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 57 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools T WIN PAK User s Guide Modem Fool Configuration HNon ACK NAK Basic Information Mame Add Dial up Description Edit North South Veil solate Modems in Fool Delete edd Modem 1 P Show Delete Back Mest gt Cancel Help Type a unique Name for the modem pool This field is mandatory Enter a Description for the modem pool Click Add on the left of the dialog box to add the modems to the pool The Modem Configuration dialog box appears Modem Configuration x Name Modem 3 Local Phone Number eses Fort on Server Ho Fort Device Inactive r Cancel Type a unique Modem Name and the Local Phone Number for the modem These fields are mandatory In
355. empted You can enter up to eight site codes Tip To enter a site code double click any cell in the table type the site code and press ENTER If no site code is defined the reader does not check for site codes to enable card access Note When the card formats for the panel is ABA card formats site codes cannot be entered T 12 Under Hardware Options select the required hardware expandable boards check boxes for including the additional input or output points Note If the Groups option is selected in this dialog box you can select one or two AEP 3 Output Expansion Boards Each board adds eight output relays to a panel T 13 To configure the Advanced options a Click Advanced The Panel Configuration Advanced Options dialog box appears Panel Configuration Advanced Options Advanced Options CIPFR Power Fail Reroute Cancel OOL 16 bit card number plus sitecode OIU option Initialization Command YEMAKPGZ0 Number of Cards Option jo Outputs for duress OD Option jo fo fo jo b Select the Multiple Interlock Protection MIP check box to return all input points tied to a single output to a normal state before the output is de energized Without MIP just one input returning to the normal state de energizes the output This is available with all the PW 2000 series panels c Select the PFR Power Fail Reroute check box to allow Input 8 Primary Power to be re routed to Input 9 P
356. ent 7 001009 Revision 01 I V WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Chapter 10 Device Map PRG O UCU O Msisi a E tceasts tdvasssucessdlaneanceavwcusesvenees 10 2 Device Map STUCI rankena a eautas tence dee ieee 10 2 Physical Devices and Abstract Devices cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 3 Servers atid DEVICES aka E ERN 10 3 Interacting with Intrusion Panels 0 0 0 0 cccccssseeseeseeseseeeeeees 10 4 Server COMMGUT ALON sasore iaiaaeaia aeaa aata 10 4 COMMUNICA on Serve osi miesibadievntacniwuusannaleue simile davede untae 10 5 Adding a Communication Servet cccccccccscsccsccccteeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 5 Editing a Communication Server ccccccccccsscssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 8 Isolating and Deleting a Communication Server 666 10 9 Command TUE SOT VSL oases csite descr heat Meconl iss Goa uatl Seanetnweee a aaectan ans 10 10 Adding a Command File Server cccccseeeesssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 10 Editing a Command File Server ccccccsccesesseeeeeeeeeees 10 12 Isolating and Deleting a Command File Server 10 12 Ua TOUR SENE er A S 10 14 Adding a Guard Tour Servet cccccccccsssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeees 10 14 Etting a Cuad Our SCL Ver ee acid Mise oe eects 10 15 Isolating and Deleting a Guard Tour Server cccceecees 10 16 SENEE SS CRY Cl sii cents tee ran ceaa R EOT 10 18 Addin a Schedule SerNeiosrareiea eee 10 18 Edining a Schedule SCY CF assieme a nine eae
357. enu E Device Mie E Add Communication Server Find F3 Command File Server Schedule Server Guard Tour Server Tracking amp Muster Server Digital ideo Figure 3 2 Sub menus and Pop up menus Maintenance Window The Maintenance windows enable you to perform the following operations on various WIN PAK entities e Adding editing deleting and printing data e Searching for and sorting data e Viewing the details of previously entered data Opening a Maintenance Window To open a Maintenance Window choose the menu option or click the icon in the toolbar for the operation you want to perform The corresponding Maintenance window appears For example if you want to configure the Card Holder Tab Layout choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Card Holder Tab Layout The Card Holder Tab Layout window appears which enables you to add edit delete view card holders in addition to other card holder operations Viewing Information You can view the details of previously entered information in a Maintenance Window The information is listed in a table in the window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 7 WIN PAK User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements List of records T Detail view Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Search For Sort By Card Humber r Figure 3 3 Viewing information Edit Print Badge Delete leolate
358. enves oma 4 16 Chapter 5 System Settings OV OL VICW oooi E E 5 2 PRC COMMS oiis on a Ea EENE E 5 2 PACING AI NC COMIN aenea aE N N cna annee ones 5 3 SEIEC HNO Al ACCOUNT cacancl asses canes ispactals cous weeseseule a e OE 5 4 Editing anr FC COMIN eas osc goa dears ao een ata ee eee 5 5 Deleting an AC COUT ta ctoncet taeda nteotetaecteseietiwenteeeseeresineeee as 5 5 ACAUMDIS UAL OES erissa ns saaa E a EE 5 5 OER ALOUS opisie aaa a a couse ubsausb enue A 5 8 Operator Level Sarria E A eae ewes 5 8 Adding an Operator Level ccccccccsssssssssssesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 Configuring Operator Levels enrere nn E 5 9 Copyine am Operator Weve lien scores a stearate ae 5 13 Editin an Operator LEV CS lictedssiestiesiaveliedesats teadesatien exatdeetieeeaead 5 13 Isolating and Deleting an Operator Level eccceeeeees 5 14 De tinine Operator acces xhosten acess in astern EE EE EEE icese ee 5 15 Adding an Operat0r ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceeeees 5 15 TADS One PaSS WO ds a a a A 5 18 Edine all O Peralor ere neon eae io eet 5 18 Searching and Sorting Operators ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 19 Deleting Ati Operator ese a Pane erence edt cteee 5 20 Detaul SOCOM GS iss csstturcicvdeiniovesscisvidesverida nesses eiisnisntiahidiesicieraiiutedee 5 20 Setting Workstation Defaults 20 0 0 cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeesesesssssseaaaaaes 5 20 DE LUNG System Defalis oscena E Aa 5 27 C
359. eo display using the Iris Zoom Focus Pan and Tilt controls that are located to the right of the viewing screen In addition you can capture and save individual frames For Live Monitor view you must e Equip your computer with a video capture card e Connect the CCTV Switcher to the video capture card e Define cameras and monitors on the Device Map e Select the CCTV Switcher monitor for Live Monitor view while setting the Workstation Defaults Live Monitor View To open the Live Monitor view 1 Choose Operations gt Live Monitor The Live Monitor dialog box appears Live Monitor Lab Area 2 To enlarge the size of the Live Monitor view click and drag the corners of the dialog box 3 To view a different area from a different camera select the camera in the drop down list Capturing a Frame from the Live Monitor View To capture a frame from the Live Monitor view freeze the live view and then save the frame 1 To freeze a view right click anywhere in the live area and select Live 2 To save the frame right click the frozen video and select Save 3 Select a path enter a filename and click Save to save the image as a jpg file 4 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 15 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Live Monitor View Controlling the Camera You can control the focus aperture adjustment zoom pan and tilt and homing presets of switchers and cameras remotely through WIN
360. equency Limit to filter the cards between these limits Note If you want to generate a report of cards that are not used select the Zero Frequency check box To generate the card frequency reports by filtering the readers type the Reader name under Location or select the reader by clicking the ellipsis d button To generate the frequency filter reports for access areas type the Access Area name under Location or select the access area by clicking the ellipsis d button To include only certain devices click Filter ADVs to select the ADVs In the Filter Devices dialog box select the appropriate ADV or ADV type from the tree and click OK Under Disposition select one of the following actions that must be performed on the cards after you have filtered for frequency report a None Perform no action on the cards b Deactivate and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate and generate a report for the cards whose access frequency falls between the frequency limits c Deactivate Detach and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate detach and generate a report for the cards whose access frequency falls between the frequency limits 9 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule d Reassign cards between limits to Access Level Reassign and generate a report for the cards whose access frequency falls between the frequency limits 9 To filter the card holders for generating the ca
361. er s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 43 Describing Galaxy Group Actions Action Message Description Group Reset Reset is required to do any operation at the Group Required Group Unbypass Group is unbypassed Group Unset Group is unset Group Walk Test Group walk test is finished End Group Walk Test Group walk test is started Start Lid Tamper Lid is tampered Lid Tamper Lid tamper is restored Restore Table 11 44 Describing Galaxy Keypad Actions Action Message Description Keypad Alarm Keypad raised an alarm Keypad The communication with keypad is lost Communication Loss Keypad OK Keypad is working properly Keypad Tamper Keypad is tampered Keypad Tamper Keypad tamper is restored Restore Table 11 45 Describing Galaxy Keyprox Actions Action Message Description Door Forced Door Propped The door is supported with a prop Invalid Card The accessed card is invalid Keyprox Alarm WIN PAK User s Guide 11 186 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 45 Describing Galaxy Keyprox Actions Action Message Description Keyprox The communication with keyprox is lost Communication Loss Keyprox OK Keyprox is working properly Keyprox Tamper Keyprox is tampered Keyprox Tamper Keyprox tamper is restored Restore Rejected Card The accessed card
362. er computer connected to the network You can run several client computers and can access the single Database Server simultaneously The number of client computers depend on the WIN PAK license type WIN PAK Features T Installation Handles large and complex installations including the configuration of the WIN PAK environment Secured Environment Supports Tracking and Mustering reporting to indicate the location of people for enabling the secured environment Additionally intrusions at different areas can be monitored if you have the license for the Galaxy and or Vista features in WIN PAK Live Monitor Display Provides CCTV control with live monitor display The CCTV switchers are Burle Dedicated Micros Fusion Geutebruck Javelin MaxCom MaxPro NCI CCTV Panasonic Pelco Vicon and VideoBlox WIN PAK Services In addition to the database server and the communication server WIN PAK contains four other servers Command File Server Text files containing device instructions are stored in the Command Files database The commands in the command files can be sent to the devices automatically on receiving acknowledging or clearing an alarm The command files can also be executed manually Guard Tour server A Guard Tour is a defined series of check points a guard must activate within a given amount of time The check points are readers or input points where the guard presents the card or presses the button Muster S
363. er for more details on ADV configuration 11 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration 5 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Guard Tour Server Te 6 7 8 9 Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details Enter the Machine Name for the guard tour server Tip To find the machine name a Right click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears b Click the Computer Name tab c Look for Full computer name field This is the machine name of your computer d Note down the machine name and click OK Type a Protocol end point number that is not used by any other device on the network Note Each server must have a unique Protocol end point that can range from 1024 to 9999 The default number of Protocol end point need not be changed However you can change the number if you have multiple servers in your device map Click Next to proceed to the final dialog box for the Guard Tour Server Configuration Click Finish to add the server Editing a Guard Tour Server To edit a guard tour server l 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right cl
364. er is higher than the Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement value 10 Set the Alarm Priority for required acknowledgement value An action with T higher priority than this value and with lower priority than Alarm Priority for notification value is displayed as an alarm in the Alarm View Note Ensure that this value is higher than the priority number set in the Action Group while adding an ADV for the communication server If you enter lower value than the priority number the action is not displayed in Alarm View or in Event View Rather it is stored in the history of events 11 Select the Write Transactions to file check box to write a record of the oe WIN PAK User s Guide server transactions message exchanges between communication server and panels into a text file This file is used for debugging purposes Notes e For N 1000 PW 2000 panel types the text file is generated every hour with the name of the file that indicates the date and time of the file generation This file is stored in the RSDUMP folder where the WIN PAK system is installed 11 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration e For P Series panel types the transactions are written in the MCBdebug txt file Here the same file is updated every time the file is generated This file is stored in C Windows System32 or C Winnt System32 folder based on the operating system used in the computer 12 In the Operatin
365. erated from this zone must be reported Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 147 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 3 Select the Always Report Trouble check box to report troubles irrespective of the selected time zone 4 To edit the zone ADV configuration click Edit under ADV Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 5 Click Next to view the output configuration details The Panel Configuration Output dialog box appears Setting panel outputs An output is a device triggered by the input device to indicate a change in the device status The indication could be an alarm or an action that normalizes the situation For example in case of glass break the output device could be a Siren that beeps the alarm sound In case of fire indication the output device could be a Sprinkler which sprinkles the water to set off the fire 1 Inthe Panel Configuration Output dialog box double click an output in the Name list to rename it Panel Configuration Output i x Name Output Function 10 No ADY C 11 No ADY Edit T 12 No ADV I T O No ADW eee Isolate J 14 a No ADY Latch 15 No ADY 16 No ADY 17 No ADY 18 No ADY 19 No ADY 20 No ADY 21 Galaxy Panell Qutput 1051 22 Galaxy Panell Output 1052 23 Galaxy Panell Output 1053 2 Output 1054 Reset
366. ers In that case you must select the other reader 37 Click Door Interlocks for configuring door interlock The Door Interlocks dialog box appears Refer to the Door Interlocks section in this chapter for more details on door interlock 38 Anti Passback discourages card holders to enter without using their cards Under Anti Passback select the Direction and Processing Mode for the anti passback e Direction enables you to specify if the reader is in or out It is None by default e Processing Mode enables you to specify the processing mode of the reader Hard When an anti passback violation occurs the reader strictly restricts the access Soft When an anti passback violation occurs the reader allows the access but sends a report on anti passback violation Reader Based Timed APB A card cannot be swiped twice at the same Anti Passback reader before the time specified for the delay Card Based Timed APB A card cannot be swiped twice anywhere in the system before the time specified for the delay Panel Based Timed APB A card cannot be swiped twice at the same panel before the time specified for the delay WIN PAK User s Guide 11 130 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 39 Select the following Control Flags Table 11 7 Describing Control Flags Control Flag Description Deny a duress Works in a card and PIN mode only Unless this option is request selected dure
367. erver A Muster Server is enabled in the event of an emergency and allows the card holders to swipe the readers Muster areas are logical areas that contain readers to be used by the card holders only if there is a call for muster in the event of a disaster for example Schedule Server The Schedule server schedules the list of events to be performed at predetermined time and intervals such as hourly daily or monthly Note The WIN PAK services are installed while installing the Database Server or the complete WIN PAK They are started automatically after installation Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B 1 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Introduction Software Concepts Software Concepts Abstract Devices An abstract device is a logical representation of a physical device The ADVs can be associated with any hardware device including communication interfaces panels alarm points entrances and CCTV equipment The ADVs help in monitoring the device status and controlling the actions of a physical device through the Control Map Floor Plan or Alarm View Floor Plan View The Floor Plan provides a graphical representation of a building which includes the placement of the physical devices such as doors panels inputs outputs and CCTV equipment The floor plans can also be a loop wiring diagram a simple grid or a picture of an area where the device is located The floor plan views can be tailored to the specific needs of your access control
368. ervices or materials made available hereunder or the use or modification thereof WIN PAK SE PE User s Guide NOTICE Honeywell Access Systems makes no claim or war ranty with respect to the fitness of any product or SOFTWARE for a specific application and assumes no responsibility for instal lation This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied No representative or agent of Honeywell Access Sys tems may make any other claims to the fitness of any product for any application So long as the SOFTWARE licensed hereunder remains a part of Honeywell Access Systems Honeywell intends to issue periodic enhancements and updates which will include corrections of pro gramming errors discovered or brought to Honeywell s attention However Honeywell shall not be obligated to issue such enhancements or updates on any particular schedule NOTICE The SOFTWARE contained herein is licensed as a service only for no particular application It is not to be consid ered or construed as a good for product definition within the meaning of the uniform commercial code and applicable state law Honeywell Access Systems makes no commitment to con tinue producing this or any other compatible SOFTWARE nor makes any commitment as to marketing the SOFTWARE in any given territory NOTICE This license Agreement is for Honeywell Access Sys tems SOFTWARE and or documentation only The SOFTWARE requires that the user obtain either from
369. es Shatus Ready Type HP Lazeret 8150 PCL 6 Wher PLUTO South Wing 5th Floor Comment HP Laserjet 91500N Print to file Copies Humber of copies li Print range i All Pages from tof pi I Collate Cancel f Selection 2 Select the printer in the Name list The corresponding printer details are displayed 3 Click Properties to set the printer properties 4 Select the Print to File check box to save the report as a file Note The report is saved as prn file in the WIN PAK installed path with the default name Output However you can change the path and the file name i 5 Under Print Range select All to print all the pages 6 Click OK The report is printed to the selected printer Note If you have selected the Print to file check box the Print to File dialog box appears Change the path and file name if required and click OK i Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Exporting the report to a file You can export the reports to a file The available file formats are txt and csv To export a report into a file 1 In the Report dialog box click Export File The Export File dialog box appears i Semicolon i Comma Directory to save File to SS Default File Name txt M Include Report Name in File Name I Include Date and Time in File Name File Hame access Area 4 19 2006 4 54 20
370. es e Cancel Apply Help 5 Edit the details of the vista panel as required Refer to the Adding a Vista Panel section in this chapter for editing vista panel configuration details Isolating and Deleting a Vista Panel You can delete the configuration details of the Vista panel However the panel ADVs must be isolated from the floor plans and the operator levels Isolating a Vista panel To isolate a vista panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the Galaxy panel and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 161 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Isolate Device or ADY l X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device Wista Panel Remove Remove All 1 iltem Eancel Help 4 To isolate the ADVs of the Vista panel from the floor panel a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the panel is displayed b Select the floor plans and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated from the floor plan OR Click Remove all to isolate all the ADVs of the Vista panel from the floor plan 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the Vista panel a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels a
371. es on the list Fields The list contains all the note fields defined for card and cardholder Double click to select a field and to add it to Expression e Variable Length Select the check box ifthe field length in the bar code must match the number of characters in the data item e Length The data item is truncated or padded so that it precisely matches the number of characters Note This option is not available if the Variable Length check box is selected T e Fill Enter the character to be used to pad the data to fit a fixed length field e Justify Ifa data item is shorter than the number of characters allotted for it it can be justified left center or right within those characters All other characters are set to the Fill character 6 Click OK to save any changes and return to the Badge Element Layout dialog box Note Repeat the procedure until all the data items have been added Te To reorder the data items in a track click Move Up and Move Down 8 To remove a data item from the list select it and click the Delete button 9 On the Badge Element Layout dialog box click Apply to save the data items for the tracks or click OK to save the data items for the tracks and to return to the Badge Definition window Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Placing Elements in the Badge Outline After designing the badge outline you can place items or elemen
372. es panel loop This field is mandatory 4 Type a Description of the panel loop 5 Note An ADV cannot be created for the P Series panel loops as the panel is B directly connected to the WIN PAK system 5 Click Next to include port details Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 53 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops Loop P Sernes Configuration Port Settings lt Back Cancel Help fort Device Inactive Bits per Second 3400 z IC Reply Timeout 500 msec ATS Mode JAlways On oat In the Type list Serial RS485 is displayed by default When you establish a PRO 2200 panel loop the only applicable type is RS485 In the Port list select a port of the communication server to which the loop is to be connected The ports that are added to the communication server and are not used by any other device are listed 7 Enter the following port details Bits per Second The transmission baud rate of the communication port The default baud rate is 38400 It can be set to 9600 or 19200 when the RS 485 communication port is used IC Reply Timeout The duration the Host PC waits for an acknowledgment after it has sent an outgoing packet If acknowledgment is not received within the specified time the Host PC re sends the packet The host retries according to the Host Retry Count set in the panel RTS Mode The Request to Send mode that enables the host PC to know that the Intelligent Con
373. escription H Machine name E1 OO TPSLP261 5 EA Protocol end point 5500 Hours of History to Prime on startup Cancel Apply Help A D Add Edit Jeolate Delete Show 4 Edit the required details of the tracking and muster server Refer to the Adding a Tracking and Muster Server section in this chapter for configuring the tracking and muster server 5 Click OK to configure the tracking and muster server Isolating and Deleting a Tracking and Muster Server You can delete a tracking and muster server if only you isolate an ADV of tracking and muster server from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a tracking and muster server To isolate a tracking and muster server l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the tracking and muster server and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 11 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Plang Operator Levels Operator Levels referencing device Track Muster Remove Remove All W Present in Control Area M iltern ance Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of tracking and muster server a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of
374. esent physical devices in the access control system Physical devices and connections must be configured as ADVs in WIN PAK Servers and Devices WIN PAK has different servers to perform different tasks The following is the list of servers in WIN PAK for handling different functions Database Server The WIN PAK User Interface and other servers must request the Database Server to fetch the data from the SQL database In addition whenever the data is updated in the WIN PAK UI it is sent to the Database server to update the data in the SQL database Archive Database Server The WIN PAK user has an option to restore the backed up data and view the reports from the Archive Database Server Communication Server The communication server establishes the connection between panels and WIN PAK or other servers Therefore the servers must request the communication server to interact with panels Command File Server The WIN PAK User Interface and other servers must communicate with the Command File Server to execute the command file In turn the Command File server communicates with the communication server to send the commands to the hardware that are configured in Command File server Schedule Server The Schedule Server communicates with the Database Server to configure the schedules and it communicates with other servers to run the schedules Guard Tour Server The WIN PAK User Interface and other servers must communicate with the
375. ess Level select one of the following options Table 17 1 Describing the filter options for Access Level report Filter Option Action Generates the report for all the access levels Generates the report for only one access level When you Select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the access level to generate the report You can use the ellipsis button to find the access level Generates the report for the range of access levels When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the starting access level name in From and the ending access level name in To You can use the ellipsis E button to find the access level c Select the Account on which the access levels are configured Note By default the current account is selected To generate the reports of the access levels configured in all the accounts select Available Account 3 To sort the report by access level name a In the Report Access Level dialog box click the Sort tab Report Access Level xX Access Level Fiter Sort Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Print i Ascending Descending Export File Estim Pages Clear All b Under Sort Order select the field Name by which the list must be sorted If you select Not Sorted the list is sorted in any order c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order
376. ess cards Badges can be displayed on the screen or printed on paper or on cards Badges are printed on Technology or non Technology cards Any Windows compatible printer ink jet laser or PVC card printer can be used for printing badges Special PVC card printers enable double sided printing and magnetic stripe encoding Configuring a Badge Layout Configuring a badge layout involves e Selecting an account Select the individual account for which you want to create a badge layout or specify all accounts e Adding a new badge layout Create a badge layout with a name and description e Creating badge designs Place elements on the badge layout bitmaps placeholders for cardholder photo bar codes and so on and set various properties for the badge elements Selecting the Account You can create badge layouts for a particular account or for all accounts To select an account 1 Choose Account gt Select The Select Account dialog box appears Select Account X Y Account 2 To configure badge layouts for a particular account select the account in the list OR To configure badge layouts for all accounts select lt All Accounts gt in the list 3 Click OK to save the account information for creating badge layouts and to exit from the Select Account dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 7 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Adding a New Badge Layout 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility
377. ess level start date and expiry date in the panel If this schedule is not generated the panel will still consider the global access level of an operator Update date and time every day Updates the date and time in the panel every day If this schedule is not generated the panel does not sync with the system time and it may cause in outdated data in the panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Schedule Schedule Ht Update cards every day Activate and Deactivate Cards Daily Friday April 01 2005 12 01 00 AM H Update Custom AL every day Update Access Level Daily Friday April 01 2005 12 01 00 AM l l H Update date and time every day Send Date and Time Daily Friday April 01 2005 3 00 00 AM 2 Click Add The Schedule Record dialog box is displayed Schedule TousendAcivies Dial Remote Area 7 3 31 2005 I 4S5ACK NACKLoop Ra O 3 Type the Schedule Name for the task 4 Select a task Type Based on the selected task type other options on the dialog box may be activated Task types include e Activate and Deactivate Cards Activates or deactivates cards depending on the card activation and deactivation dates This helps to update the card details in the panel e Card Frequency Report Generates the card frequency report in a defined interval e Dial Remote Area Establishes the dial up connection between WIN PAK systems and sends the
378. ettings Operators Copying an Operator Level To create operator levels that are similar to each other but with a few minor differences copy an existing operator level and then make changes to the copy 1 Choose System gt Operator Level The Operator Level window appears 2 Select the operator level to be duplicated 3 Click Copy The Operator Level dialog box appears Operator Level x Description Operator with admin privilege Cancel 4 Type a new Name for the operator level The default name of the copy is the same as the original with the prefix Copy of and the default description is the same as the original 5 Type a new Description for the operator level if required 6 Click OK to save a copy and return to the Operator Level window Note The access rights for the copy is the same as the original If you want to change the access rights you can select the copied operator level and configure the new access rights T Editing an Operator Level To edit the name or description of an operator level 1 Choose System gt Operator Level The Operator Level window appears 2 Select the operator level and click Edit The Operator Level dialog box appears 3 Enter the new Name and or Description and click OK Note To edit the access rights of an operator level you can select the operator level and configure new access rights i Refer to the Configuring Operator Levels section
379. events 4 To filter the card events based on the card holders a Click the Card Holder Filter tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 48 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Caution Do not select too many options for the selection criteria as it may A N result in not finding records meeting the selected criteria x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Hun from Archive Database A First Name Last Name Print Preview l Print Card Number Reader Tracking Area Estim Pages Not Used Clear All Card Codes Account l alid Card a Trace Card Close Door Unlocked Ad Note Fields Field From To Type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder or select them by clicking the ellipsis El button Type the Card Number of the card holder or select it by clicking the ellipsis El button To generate the card history reports of the card holders accessing a specific area select an area in the Tracking Area list that are configured in Tracking and Mustering Area Select one or more Card Codes which define the card transaction Select the Note Fields to be displayed in the report You can also specify the range if you select the numerical note field 5 To filter further on alarm events a Click the Alarm Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 49 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Gener
380. evision 01 11 119 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Configuring ABA card format This section helps you to configure the 12 digit ABA card format for the P Series Intelligent Controller To configure the 12 digit ABA card format 1 In the P Series Configuration Card Formats dialog box select the default card formats Format 1 Format 2 and Format 3 and set each format as Not Used 2 Then select Format 4 and set the Custom option to set the ABA card format 3 Select the Format Type as ABA and set the following Site Code No value Card ID Offset 0 35 bit Corporate Cards Cleared Minimum of digits on l card Maximum of digits on 12 card Site code digits Start digit 1 No of 0 Cardholder ID digits Start digit 1 No of 12 Issue code digits Start digit 1 No of 0 4 Click OK to save the ABA format configuration details WIN PAK User s Guide 11 120 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Assigning time zones and holiday groups to a panel To assign time zones and holiday groups 1 In the Panel Configuration Time Zones dialog box select the time zones from the Available Time Zone list and click 1 The time zones are moved to the Selected Time Zone list For multiple selections use the SHIFT and CTRL keys x ADY Available Time Zone Description SN Slots Add a 12 00am 8 00am M F 12 00am 8 00am Monday Friday excl 1 amp 6 0
381. evision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Previewing a report To see the preview of a report before printing the report 1 In the Report dialog box click Print Preview The preview of the corresponding report is displayed EA WIN PAK PE account 1 Admin Deacriztion ConCigured Branches Readers Accace Ares ceaeclec nsadar SeGitec alwaye On Wanre Oeacription Syc admin ConCiqured Branches Readers Magnifier icon If you place the cursor on the preview area the pointer changes to a magnifier icon 2 To enlarge the preview size a Click Zoom In OR Click anywhere on the preview area using the magnifier icon Ensure that the Zoom In button is enabled before clicking 3 To reduce the preview size a Click Zoom Out OR Click anywhere on the preview area using the magnifier icon Ensure that the Zoom Out button is enabled before clicking 4 Ifthe report runs to more than a page click Next Page or Prev Page to move to the next and previous pages of the report 5 If you want to preview the report on two pages click Two Page Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report EA WIN PAK PE account 1 Admin Print Next Page Prey Page One Page ZoomIn Zoom Gut Close MAPPED T T T e ee FREE RRR RRR ERERREE I PREEEP EERE EE
382. evision B External Components 18 F Features 3 Firewall Exception Settings 7 Disabling Firewal 10 Unblocking WIN PAK Services 7 Floor Plan 1 Adding 3 Adjusting the size 12 Alarm View Links 2 10 18 Controlling System Devices 17 Deleting 15 Editing 14 Event View Links 2 10 18 Other Floor Plan Links 18 Previewing 13 Text Blocks 12 Text blocks 2 Floor Plan Control Removing 14 Floor Plan Controls 13 Copying 14 Pasting 14 Resizing Rotating and Re arrangins 14 Floor Plan Definition 2 Floor Plan Design 4 Adding ADV 5 Other Floor Plan Links 9 Floor Plan Operations 15 Floor Plan Report 42 Floor Plan Views 15 Opening 15 Previewing 16 17 Resizing 16 Foreign Language Installation 18 Free egress input 134 G Galaxy devices Activated 26 19 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Bypassed 25 Deactivated 26 Tamper 25 Unbypassed 25 Galaxy Panel 144 Add 144 Alarm report Timezones 146 Chime 147 keypad 150 MAX 150 Omit 147 Output Function 148 Output Mode 149 panel groups 145 panel outputs 148 panel zones 146 Part Set 147 Resp Time 147 Right Click 151 Download 151 153 Synchronize 151 Upload Date and Time 151 154 Upload User Code 151 154 Virtual Keypad 151 154 RIO board 149 SIA 147 user codes 150 Zone Type 147 Galaxy Panel Log Report 43 Generating and Printing a Report 8 Clear 13 Close 13 Estimate 13 Export 12 Preview 9 Print 11 Report from Archive Database 13 Ghosting 21 Grab settings 13 Grid Settings 9 Group
383. ext and click Find Changes the view of the report to a single page This button is enabled only when you view the report in multiple pages pages click and select the number of pages in the drop down list box Reduces the size of the page display This button is disabled when a Zoom Out Zemou the page size is less than or equal to the window size Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 55 WIN PAK User s Guide Sends the report to the printer Changes the view of the report to multiple pages To view multiple Reports Generating and Printing a Report Table 17 15 Defining toolbar buttons a Zoomin Enlarges the size of the page display Zoom Reduces or enlarges the size of the page display based on the selected percentage Displays the previous page of the report This button is disabled if you are in the first page M Previous Page M Next Page Displays the next page of the report This button is enabled if you are in the last page Page No Total no Displays the page number of the current page total number of of pages pages To move to the desired page type the page number in the text box and press ENTER Move Displays the previously viewed page Note that it is not the previous Backward page Wove Rorward Functions reverse to the Move Backward button Exports the report to the image file in TIFF format Note When you click the Export button Save Report to dialog box appears Browse
384. ey 5 13 Check Point Alarms 7 Check Points 4 Comm Server 26 Command Buttons Acknowledge 10 Clear 11 Close 11 Freeze 11 Command buttons Silence 11 Command File 1 Add 2 Add Custom Command 4 Adding Commands 3 Configuration 2 Edit 4 Parameters 3 Run 9 Command File Report 33 Command File Server 3 27 19 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Adding 10 Editing 12 Isolating and Deleting 12 Present in Control Area 13 Command list 6 Communication Loops 39 Communication Server 3 5 Adding 5 Alarm Priority for notification 6 Alarm Priority for required acknowledge ment 6 Editing 8 Isolating and Deleting 9 Multi Port board 7 Protocol end point 6 Communication Type 8 Dial Up 8 TCP IP 8 Comparison 11 Compress 14 Configuring a reader galaxy groups 95 96 108 131 privileged card 95 108 vista partitions 95 108 Configuring default settings 27 Configuring default workstation settings 21 Configuring rights for an entire branch 10 Configuring rights for an individual device 10 Configuring rights for databases 10 Configuring rights for reports 11 Configuring rights summary chart 12 Control Area Report 35 Control Areas 20 Add Device 22 device type 23 Galaxy devices 25 Add Site 21 Move Device 23 Remove Branch 23 Remove Device 23 Remove Site 23 Rename Site or Branch 22 Control areas 2 Control Maps 20 24 WIN PAK User s Guide 19 4 Controlling Devices 24 CrypKey Licensing Drivers 18 Custom Command 3 4
385. f devices ADVs areas and operator levels and their relationship in a graphical tree The Main Window The Main Window consists of a Title bar Menu bar Toolbar and the Resize buttons The title bar displays the following details e WIN PAK with the year of its release e Account e Operator Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 3 WIN PAK User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements e Watchdog Timer The Watchdog Timer is represented by the blinking green sphere icon to the left of the Honeywell Access Systems logo on the toolbar It sends continual pulses to the computer to verify that the connection to the server s is alive Toolbar The toolbar appears below the menu bar in the Main window The toolbar comprises the icons for the frequently used WIN PAK operations The toolbar is displayed by default in the Main window However you can choose not to display the toolbar by clicking the Tool option in the View menu File View Account Operations Card System Reports Configuration Window Help Table 3 1 Toolbar Buttons Log In Enables you to log on to WIN PAK and connect to the WIN PAK database server Select Account Displays the Select Account dialog box allowing an authorized operator to select an account and Acknowledge incoming alarms to be viewed acknowledged and cleared View Events Opens the Event View window which displays the current system activity in real time Dynamic Alarm V
386. fer to the Adding an Account section in this chapter for more details on editing an account Deleting an Account To delete an account that is not in use in WINPAK 1 Choose Account gt Edit The Account window opens 2 Click the account you want to delete and click the Delete button ea Li x is indicating that the account cannot x Problems were encounterd that prevent this Account From being deleted be deleted if the account you This Account still has 1 Cards assigned to it d l t All cards must be removed From this Account elete This Account still has 1 Card Holders assigned to it All Card Holders must be removed From this Account e is used by one or more ozs p OK entities in the system To delete this account you must remove all the LI x dependencies ANY The account you have selected to delete is the account under which you are logged on You must switch to a different account before the selected account may be deleted OR e is active To delete this account you must switch to a different account Administrators Administrator is created by default by WIN PAK on installing the WIN PAK User Interface The user name is admin with no password You can change the user name and password to ensure security To change the default settings for Administrator 1 Choose System gt Operator The Operator window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 5 WIN PAK User s Guide System Setti
387. fined for each panel Refer to the PRO 2200 Intelligent Controller Installation Manual for details 7 Enter the value for Host Retry Count The Host Retry Count is the number of times the Host computer has to send a command packet to the Intelligent Controller if the Host computer receives e A bad command packet from the Intelligent Controller e No response from the Intelligent Controller for the command packet sent from the Host computer Note Host Retry Count can be set from 2 to 10 with 3 as the default A range of 2 to 4 is recommended for most applications retry counts above 4 would be used in extreme circumstances such as in a noisy environment T 8 Enter the value for Time to IC Offline This is the maximum time allowed for the software to declare the panel as offline when there is no response from the Intelligent Controller Note The Time to IC Offline can be set from 10 to 65 seconds with 15 seconds as the default A range of 10 to 30 seconds is recommended for most applications 9 Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties to create an ADV for the P Series panel i 10 Click Next to configure the connection settings Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 115 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Configuring the connection settings To configure the connection settings of the direct P Series panel 1 In the P Series Configuration Connection Settings dialog box select the
388. floor plan with filter settings you can open the Event View window from the Floor Plan T Refer to the Adding Alarm View and Event View links to the Floor Plan section in the chapter Floor Plan for details on creating an Event View in the Floor Plan Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Alarm View Alarm View An alarm is an event or an access control activity that must be acted upon as soon as it has occurred The Alarm View window displays alarms when they occur and continuous to beep the sound until it is acknowledged The Alarm View window is divided into two horizontal panes Incoming alarms are displayed in the upper pane according to priority and time The color of an alarm indicates the state of an alarm Various states of alarms are Table 15 1 Describing various states of alarm and the relevant colors Alert State The initial state of an alarm is Alert state When an Red alarm is in this state the immediate action must be taken Example A person tries to open the door forcefully This is an alarm in the Alert state Normal State When the access control activity becomes normal Green the alarm in Alert state goes to Normal state Example When the forced open door is closed Trouble State Any problem that occurs in the device is reported Yellow as an alarm in Trouble state Example A reader is tampered Note An N 1000 PW 2000 panel can only detect a trouble condi
389. for the Command File Server Configuration 10 Click Finish to add the server to the Device Map Editing a Command File Server To edit a command file server l 2i Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the command file server and click Configure The Command File Server Configuration dialog box appears Command File Server Configuration X ADW Command File Server Configuration Add Description Machine name E1 0D TsPSLP261 5 ie Protocol end point 5599 Cancel Apply Help Edit the required details of the command file server Refer to the Adding a Command File Server section in this chapter for configuring a command file server Click OK to configure the command file server Isolating and Deleting a Command File Server You can delete a command file server only if you isolate an ADV of the command file server from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a command file server To isolate a command file server l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the command file server and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 11 12
390. formation on ADV icons ADV names and description Table 12 1 ADV Icons and Description Cie Signals an alarm condition Input Il Signals an input condition or state that is not associated with an alarm condition Used with Entrance ADV Door II Used with Entrance ADV for configuring four different types of doors namely left right double or garage Each door type displays an open or closed animation Cie Used with all control panels Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Table 12 1 ADV Icons and Description Loop C 100 Used with C 100 ADV Loop PCI Used with N 485 PCI ADV Used with Modem Pool ADV Communica Used with the communication server ADV tion Server Used with relay output ADV Used with relay group ADV Used with the CCTV switcher ADV Used with the monitor ADV Stationary Used with the stationary camera ADV Camera Used with the reader ADV Pan Tilt Used with pan tilt camera ADV Camera Used for providing any additional information in the floor plan Command Used with the command server ADV File Server Enables you to select and run a command file Used with the SIO Board ADV Provides tamper and power status of the PRO 2200 SIO boards Galaxy Used with Galaxy Ethernet module E080 ADV Communica tion Used with Galaxy panel ADV WIN PAK User s Guide 12 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan
391. from the device map Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel T Galaxy panel helps you to monitor and track intrusion happening at different zones in the access control system Zones are areas monitored by a device in the galaxy panel Galaxy panel is configured in the Galaxy Gold User Interface application and then downloaded to WIN PAK However the virtual keypad provided on WIN PAK enables you to configure certain features in the Galaxy panel Note You must have a unique user name and password to operate on the virtual keypad WIN PAK communicates with the Galaxy panel through the Galaxy Ethernet module Therefore you must configure Galaxy Ethernet Module in the communication server Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 77 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel to add the Galaxy panel in WIN PAK When you add the galaxy panel its connection with WIN PAK is established and the panel configuration details are downloaded to WIN PAK Adding a Galaxy Ethernet Module To add a galaxy Ethernet module 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the communication server and choose Add gt Ethernet Module Galaxy Single Panel The Ethernet Module configuration dialog box appears Ethernet Module configuration l X Mame Panel Defaults Add Galaxy Ethernet Wod Default Polling Description Edit lzalate i Foll Once i Polling Interval fa
392. g System area the OS of the WIN PAK system is displayed 13 Click Next The Com Server Configuration Ports dialog box appears Com Server Configuration Ports x ADW Multi Port Boards Edit Isolate Adad Delete Eonhgue OCOM 10 izj Delete lt Back Nert gt Cancel Help 14 In the Ports list select the required check boxes for the COM port that are used on this server for the access control equipment 15 If the server has a Multi Port board a Click Add under Multi Port Boards The Add Multi Port Board dialog box appears with a list of compatible multi port boards Add Multi Port Board X Board Type Diobsod PCIE ahateen ii eiat b Select a multi port board in the Board Type list The available board types are Boca BB1004 Boca BB1008 Boca BB2016 Digiboard PC 4 Digiboard PC 8 and Digiboard PC 16 c Click Next The DigiBoard Configuration dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration D igiBoard Configuration Fon anesse a IRQ 1 000 5 2 0000 3 oggi lt Eack 4 OO00 Sl en 6 0m0 Cancel d For each port set a unique address and IRQ value Consult the board manufacturer s documentation for further information e Click Finish to close the Add Multi Port Board dialog box 16 Click Next and then click Finish to add the communication server to the Device Map Editing a Communication
393. ge asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion Note You cannot remove an entrance if it is assigned to an access level T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Tracking and Mustering areas in WIN PAK are logical areas consisting of entrances and are used for tracking cardholder movements Tracking Areas A tracking area is an area defined for tracking cardholder movements When a cardholder presents a card in the tracking area a read event is recorded along with the card read details ot In the preceding diagram A B C and D are Tracking Areas Readers 1 4 and 9 allow access to Tracking Area A Readers 3 and 6 allow access to Tracking Area B Reader 5 allows access to Tracking Area C and Reader 8 allows access to Tracking Area D The first time a card holder presents a card at one of these readers the details of the read event are recorded and displayed in the Tracking and Mustering View window of the User Interface Each time that card is presented at one of the readers in that same area the details of the latest card read is displayed in the user interface When the card holder moves to a different tracking area the card read details for the new area 1s displayed When the card holder moves out of the tracking area to a non tracking area the last card read details of the card
394. ge attached to the WIN PAK software However a single computer supports only one video capture card Therefore when both the CCTV switcher and video badging is used in a computer the badging camera signal is routed to the CCTV switcher and back to the WIN PAK software Honeywell recommends PBVP15 video capture card Modems and Communication Ports Modems and communication ports are required when the mode of communication between loop and server computer is dial up Modems and communication ports are supported by Windows XP operating system and Win2000 or Win2003 server based operating system Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation System Requirements Badging Printers The Windows Operating System supports any type of badge printer However for two sided PVC encoding or magnetic stripe encoding the PBVP35 series Ultra Rio or Tango printer 1s required Report Printers The Windows Operating System supports any type of printer for printing the reports However for single line printing a dot matrix printer such as the PB PRINTER is sufficient Panel Firmware The PW 2000 or N 1000 family of control panels must have firmware of version 8 02 or later The NS2 and P Series panels must have firmware of version 1 04 or later Software Requirements The following table describes the software requirements to install WIN PAK on your computer Popnas System Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Micros
395. ground or click OK to apply the image to the badge background and to close the Badge Element Layout dialog box To capture an image using a camera 1 On the Badge tab of the Badge Element Layout dialog box click Capture The Capture Image dialog box opens displaying the live view from your video camera WIN PAK User s Guide 7 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Note Ensure that you have installed the necessary video equipment including a supported video capture card or a compatible TWAIN device T Refer the Configuring Badge DLLs section in this chapter for details on configuring DLLs for Video Capture Cards Capture Image ok Cancel geese os Lock Aspect Aspect Ratio 0 625 Settings gt gt 2 Click Settings to expand the window and access the video settings Capture Image x Wideo OF Brightness a Contrast a Cancel Saturation _4 Sharpness a W Lock Aspect Grab Brightness a Contrast a Photo Brightness a Aspect A atio Compress al 3 Adjust the Video and Grab settings for a satisfactory image Table 7 1 Live Screen Video Image Settings Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image The difference in highlights and shadows is increased or decreased Adjusts the vibrancy or the level of color in the image Hue A
396. groups or vista partitions to the reader and the input point After the association you can set unset galaxy groups or arm disarm vista partitions using the privileged card Present the privileged card to the reader and press the input button to unset the galaxy groups or disarm the vista partitions However present the privileged card to the reader to set the galaxy groups or arm the vista partitions To define a reader 1 In the Panel Configuration Readers dialog box select a reader from the list to view its settings The panel configuration is depicted on the lower half of the dialog box Panel Configuration Readers X Reader dd 1 PW2000 Reader 1 Enable PIN Edit Isolate Delet GroupsPartitians Rae Vista Panel Partition Input to Sets rm Arps Fartitions BE o Vista Panel Partition 2 hna i Delete ior i Grps Partitions M Door Free Egress Input shunts Status Input lt Shunt Device R eader 1 Pulse Ho Action Direct Paint Duti Free Egress Input Pulse Time 10 sec Ind Follow No Action Status Input Shunt Device In 1 Shunt Time 15 sec Back Ment gt Cancel Help Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 95 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Note The Direct Point the point that is pulsed on a valid card read Pulse Time Status Input and Shunt Time and Free Egress Input are displayed Te 2 Select a reader from the Reader list
397. hapter 6 Quick Configuration OUICK Start W UZ ar Ocssaccceccarasecasccseetetacdevcdiuaccdsiebicdsassiedinascetasacdeuesseciecaieocecestaees 6 2 OVON O seit a ssa ea heen ss acne erin doen A T he ie eae 6 2 Configuration OPUONS ss iecciordsu tnt a eens 6 2 Launching Quick Start Wizard cicecssisercriccnirrn e a 6 2 Creatine aT AC COMME aeara N NN 6 3 Associating Time Zones to ACCOUNTS nnnneneeneessesssssssssssssssssssssssrrreenn 6 4 Associating Cards to an ACCOUNT ue icics neces ciinii a 6 5 Addin a New DU ore arnar n A T 6 7 Adding a Loop 10a Sie nsancnee n E E R 6 7 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i iii WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Addin aP Pane lasses E T ested E EO 6 10 Adding Readers to a P Series Panel nonrsnnioinsicinniiiniciansinnian 6 11 Savin he CON Me Ural OM peses rnia a EE E aeeten aise 6 12 Chapter 7 Badge Layout NTR CE OCU COON asniensis 7 2 Configuring a Badee Layouts ie diaries lenieieihy alee elas iki erie ad 7 2 DeleCling THe A CCOUML rasieren aoa aE E E EEEE 7 2 Adding a New Badce Layout sueroaren 7 3 Searching and Sorting Badge Layouts cccccsesteeeeeees 7 4 Copyine a Badge Layo t arrio iran e T 7 5 Etun a Badee Lavolan ER 7 5 Wiew ine a Bad ee Cayol A T 7 5 Isolating and Deleting a Badge Layout cecccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Creatine Badge DesSions nessen irora T aa ee oe es 7 6 VCC Wy ects ia ie ae tate e abused as cette hllusanateonlauesadle 7 6 Know more about the Badge Definition w
398. he Device tree structure For the communication port loop the icon is displayed For the TCP IP port loop the a icon is displayed Editing an RS 232 Panel Loop To edit an RS 232 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the RS 232 loop and click Configure The Loop Configuration dialog box appears Loop Configuration X Basic Information Fort Settings Panel Defaults ADWY Add 15 232 Pane 10 Poll Interval Edit Description Eo Sec lsolate Panel CMD Retry Count Loop Verification Interval Sec 3 Delete 60 Panel CMO Time Out I Show 5 Buffer all panels on exit O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi z Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the loop using the Basic Information and Port Settings tabs Refer to the Adding an RS 232 Panel Loop section in this chapter for configuring the RS 232 panel loop 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting an RS 232 Panel Loop You cannot delete an RS 232 panel loop until you delete the panels attached to it and remove all the references to the RS 232 panel loop from floor plans and operator levels Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 51 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops Isolating an RS 232 panel loop To isolate RS 232 panel loop
399. he Devices folder 3 Right click the communication server and click RS 232 Port Single Panel The RS 232 Port Single Panel Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 48 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops RS 232 Port Single Panel Configuration Basic Information f X A Mame Panel Defaults Dw R5 232 ParelLood 1 0 Poll Interval Ma Description Edit Panel CMO Retry Count eater Loop Verification Interval Sec p ei Panel CMD Time Out B 5 Sec Chins Buffer all panels on exit Show O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Mew Delhi og 4 Back Cancel Help 4 Type a unique Name for the panel This field is mandatory 5 Type a Description of the panel 6 Create an ADV for the RS 323 loop Click Add under ADV to display the Abstract Device Record Server dialog box Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 7 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the RS 232 Port Single Panel Configuration dialog box Notes i e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Select the Show check box to view the ADV details 8 Increase or decrease the Loop Verification Interval Sec to verify whether the loop is responding when a signal is send
400. he WIN PAK User Interface e When you select an Unbuffer command the event details that are buffered in the panel are transmitted to the WIN PAK User Interface and can be viewed through the Event View and Alarm View windows Buffer command can be either hard or soft The following window appears when you select the Buffer command for panels Buffer 8 xl Mode G Soft Hard Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 13 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Command File Command File Configuration The Hard and Soft buffer options are explained in the following table as scenarios Table 13 2 Scenario 1 Action Result Buffer Command at P M Events buffered in the panel from 1 P M Buffer Command at 2 P M Events continue to be buffered in the panel even after 2 P M Unbuffer Command at 3 P M Events buffered after the last buffer command are sent to WIN PAK Therefore the events buffered only between 2 to 3 P M are sent to WIN PAK Second Unbuffer Command at3 Events buffered between the first and the P M second buffer commands are sent to WIN PAK Therefore the events buffered between Ito 2 P M are sent to WIN PAK Table 13 3 Scenario 2 Buffer Command at 1 P M Events buffered in the panel from 1 P M Buffer Command at 2 P M Events continue to be buffered in the panel even after 2 P M Single Unbuffer Command at3 All the buffered events from 1 P M to 3 P M P M are sent to WIN PAK Running a Command File
401. he camera returns to this view anytime you click Home WIN PAK CCTV Options Pan Camera Time Pan Tit Zoom Focus Iris Seek Set Select Brand ES E5 a al a E E E EJ B Bue x EDES Micros ween a e ec ee panaseric x o o x x x eo eo e e x e e reo x o e x x xf ele ele x x gt wen x e fx fx x fxfolelelel x x X option is available and usable through WIN PAK O option either not available or not supported by WIN PAK WIN PAK User s Guide 15 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Digital Video Digital Video The Digital Video Display shows the live video or the recorded video from the selected DVRs At the maximum it can display videos from 16 cameras Opening the Digital Video Display The Digital Video Display window opens automatically when an action triggers this window to open However you can open the video display window manually To open the digital video display 1 Choose Operations gt Digital Video The Digital Video window is displayed Digital ideo Reader Point Filter Video Cameras View Video Live DYA C 2 d hats Clip From FF DVR Camera 3 FF DVA Camera 4 4 1 2005 FF Fusion DVRA Camera 1 10 591 7 PM 2 Select the cameras in the Cameras list For multiple selections use the SHIFT or CTRL key 3 To view live video click Live OR To view the recorded clip click Clip From
402. he card holder to access the Vista panel In the WIN PAK UI you can set the password for the user code To set the password for the user code 1 In the Panel Configuration User Codes dialog box select a code Panel Configuration UserCodes X ADW Edit PIN a UsePIN D O00 esz LS r 2 3 4 5 B Fi m 4 lsolate Delete tL oe O03 oo4 O05 O06 oof 00g a P Show lt Back Cancel Help In the UserPIN box type the password for the selected user code Click Next to finish the vista panel configuration The Panel Configuration Finish dialog box appears Click Next to configure the Vista panel Editing a Vista Panel To edit the vista panel configuration details l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder and the communication server to display the loops and devices added to the communication server Expand the Vista Port and select the Vista panel Right click the Vista panel and click Configure The Panel Configuration dialog box appears 11 160 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Panel Configuration xj A Add Edit ias Basic Partitions Zones Output UserCodes Hame Vista Pane solate Delete P Show Description Type PANEL_VISTA_250FBP Firmware Revision rev
403. he communication server and click Panel Loop C 100 The C 100 Loop Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 39 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops WIN PAK User s Guide C 100 Loop Configuration Basic Information Mame Panel Defaults Add E 100LoopSecondFloor 0 Poll Interval Description e Sec Edit NothandSouth Panel CMD Retry Count ee Loop Yerfication Interval Sec p elete 60 Panel CMD Time Out 5 Show Buffer all panels on exit Unbuffer all panels on startup Time Zone GMT 05 30 Calcutta Chennai Mumbai New Delhi ng Remote Phone Mumber Modem 4 Back Cancel Help Type a unique Name for the panel loop This field is mandatory Type a Description for the panel loop Create an ADV for the communication loop Click Add under ADV to display the Abstract Device Record Server dialog box Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Communication Server Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Select the Show check box to view the ADV details Increase or decrease the Loop Verification Interval Sec to verify whether the loop is responding when a signal is send fr
404. he corresponding boxes d To generate reports for events that occurred during the specified period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled Daily Time Range IY Only list events between these hours each day Minutes Hours Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi ag e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes f Select the standard time zone in the Time Zone list 3 To set the card frequency limits a Click the Frequency Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Report Card Frequency Fa Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter Bion fem arerive Database f Frequency Print Preview Lower Frequency Limit Upper Frequency Lirit fil s00 Print Zero Frequency Export File Estim Pages Clear All Access Level Fiter ADs None Deactivate and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate Detach and Report cards that are between the Limits C Reassign cards between limits to Access Level None Note Frequency Filter is used for finding the reader or the access area in which cards are less frequently accessed This helps you to take some action on the particular reader or the access area like unlocking the reader always T
405. he expiry date Note The activation date is the same as the current date In the demo version of WIN PAK the Add Cards to existing Accounts option is disabled Click Next A warning message appears if you attempt to create the existing cards Quick Start Wizard xj You have chosen to add a range of cards that will overlap at least one existing card Mo existing cards will be modified You like to continue adding this range of cards WAME szNameCardExistsMessage Yes Mo Click Yes to continue adding the new cards and to retain the existing cards The Continue dialog box appears OR Click No to change the card range and then click Next The Continue dialog box appears Click Back to change the card settings or click Next This associates the cards to an account and the Configure dialog box appears with the Add New Site option selected Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click I m Done and perform the steps that follow 6 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Adding a New Site Site is a logical representation of the physical location in WIN PAK To add a new site 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click to select Add New Site and then click Next The Sites dialog box appears Pf QUICK START WIZARD Site QUICK START WIZARD Sites Create new Site Add site by specifying the Site Name Site name Enter a sit
406. he user interface The language text file is updated with the modified entries Note You can add or edit the translated captions for dialogs menus and other text only after selecting a language for translation Refer the to Selecting a language for translation section in this chapter for more details on selecting a language for translation Adding or Editing entries for dialog boxes 1 Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Dialogs The Edit Dialog Text dialog box appears x Total Dialogs 324 Translated 0 Out of Date 0 Dialog Caption _ SSS 495 PCl Loop Configuration Hub Settings Abstract Device Record 27 2303 6806 6807 6805 2232 2274 2276 2377 2288 4659 4200 2387 e o Access DYPRO Camera Configuration Access DYPRO General Propose 0 Access DYPRO DYSS Configuration Access Level Account Record Account Add Devices Add Multi Port Board Add Operator Note Alarm of oro orlorl orlrorl orl o lo o o Bg o for or ro l ono oro loa lo a 3 2 6 a 1 Action Group 1 4 4 4 4 8 Alarm Details Table 16 1 Edit Dialog Text Elements and Descriptions Total Dialogs The total number of dialog boxes for translation Translated The total number of fields in the dialog box that has been translated Out of Date The number of dialog boxes that were translated in the previous version of WIN PAK applies only to a WIN PAK upgrade WIN PAK User s G
407. hen you launch the application Note To enable this check box you must create a group named WIN PAK in the Windows User Group or in the Primary Domain Controller i 3 Select the Close WIN PAK when user logs out check box if you want to close the WIN PAK system when you log off from WIN PAK Configuring access levels for cards You can configure the number of access levels that can be assigned to a card To configure the access levels for cards 1 In the System Config dialog box click the Access Levels tab System Config Ed Defaults Alarm Handling EMail Configuration Login Logout Access Levels Access Levels ie Precision Multiple Cancel Apply Help 2 Under Access Levels click any of the following options e Precision Only one access level that must be assigned to a card When this access level is selected more memory is consumed e Multiple A maximum of six access levels can be assigned to a card Note When you switch from Precision to Multiple access level the following warning message appears i WIN PAK User s Guide 5 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Default Settings x Switching from PRECISION to MULTIPLE Access levels Will Free up memory on the P Series system The PRECISION ACCESS LEVEL For all existing cards will become MULTIPLE ACCESS LEVEL For that card Make a DATABASE BACKUP before you convert your system After conversion
408. here might be a difference in the color shade of the badge when it is printed as compared to its shade on the monitor i Tip Solid dark colors may not print evenly on all printers Honeywell recommends that you use a light colored or a white background for the badge Setting Magnetic Stripe Encoding Magnetic stripe data can be defined for all the three tracks Note Certain encoders and cards do not support Track 3 Check your printer and card supplier before setting magnetic stripe encoding i For each track specify the magnetic stripe format IATA ABA or TTS The industry standard for track format assignment is Track 1 IATA Track 2 ABA Track 3 TTS The NR 1 WR and the NR 5 KP read ABA on Track 2 and the NR 2 WR reads ABA on Track 1 Each track can have a number of data items which is limited by the amount of data that can fit on a given track Only certain ASCII characters can be used depending on the format selected for that track IATA supports alphanumeric characters 0 9 and A Z and various punctuation characters ASCII 32 95 Lower case letters are converted to upper case as IATA does not support lowercase letters Use a character in the place of a field separator ABA supports only numeric characters 0 9 and various punctuation characters ASCII 48 63 TTS supports only numeric characters 0 9 and various punctuation characters ASCII 48 63 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 17 WIN PAK User s
409. ht Saving Group window appears with the list of existing daylight saving groups 2 Click Edit The Daylight Saving Record dialog box appears with the details 3 Change the details of the daylight saving group 4 If you want to add new daylight timing to a daylight saving group click Add and follow the same procedure of adding daylight timing as in Adding a Daylight Saving Group 5 Click OK to save the changes Deleting a Daylight Saving Group T If a daylight saving group is associated to a panel you cannot delete the daylight saving group To delete a daylight saving group 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Daylight Saving Group The Daylight Saving Group window appears with the list of existing groups 2 Select a daylight saving group from the list 3 Click Delete The selected Daylight Saving Group is deleted Note If you attempt to delete a daylight saving group that is associated to a panel the following warning message appears WIN PAKPE O O OOO I Ii x IN This daylight saving group is used by F Series Daylight Saving Group not deleted Click OK to close the message box WIN PAK User s Guide 9 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map 1 1 In this chapter Introduction 11 2 Server Configuration 11 4 Communication Loops 11 39 Modem Pools 11 57 CCTV Switcher 11 69 RS 232 Connection 11 74 Ethernet Module Galaxy Panel 11 77 Panel Configuration 11 82 Document 7 00
410. htness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image These settings are applied to the camera when an image is captured If you are not using a flash set the Contrast to the same as the Video settings If a flash is used reduce the Contrast settings to lower than the Video settings This prevents overexposure of the picture Note The exact settings must be determined by experimentation as they vary depending on the type of flash distance from the subject and other lighting being used Note If you are not using a flash set the Grab settings to the same values as the Video settings If you are using a flash reduce the Grab Brightness and Contrast The exact settings may vary depending on the type of flash and other lighting The exact settings can be determined only by experimenting We d Click Freeze to capture the image e To crop the captured image use the cropping frame or enter the image proportion in Aspect Ratio and select the Lock Aspect Ratio check box Tip If you are using the default badge size set the aspect ratio to 625 to fill the entire badge outline WIN PAK User s Guide 8 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information f Adjust the Photo settings of the captured image Table 8 4 Live Screen Photo Settings Setting Description Photo Brightness Lightens or darkens
411. ick Edit The Badge Definition window appears 3 Edit the Name and Description of the badge layout 4 Click the amp icon Viewing a Badge Layout 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears 2 Select the badge layout you want to view and select the Detail View check box The Badge Definition window appears with the details of the selected badge layout Isolating and Deleting a Badge Layout 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction 2 Select a badge layout and click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Delete Badge Layout Xj 2 re vou sure you want to delete Badge Layout Sample 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the badge layout If cards are associated to the badge layout the Badge Layout Delete dialog box appears with the list of linked cards Badge Layout Delete k x Layout assigned to CadNunbe Cancel Deleteting this layout will clear the link to the listed cards 4 Click Delete to remove the link between the badge layout and the linked cards and to delete the badge layout A Caution Be cautious while deleting a badge layout as it could be attached to thousands of cards Creating Badge Designs Overview Designing badges involves l
412. ick Set Defaults to retain the default settings 11 Click OK to save the panel configuration Adding a NS2 Panel A NS2 panel can be added to an RS 232 single panel and 485 PCI panel loops To add a NS2 panel l 2 3 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder and the communication server folder Right click the RS 232 Loop or 485 PCI Loop and select Add New NS2 Panel The Panel Configuration Basic dialog box appears Panel Configuration Basic i X A Dw Add Hame Description Edit lsolate Firmware wersion F Show Status Address fi 4 Back Cancel Help 4 Type a unique Name for the panel This field is mandatory 5 Type a Description for the NS2 panel WIN PAK User s Guide 11 98 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 6 Select the type of panel in the Type list The only available type is NS2 7 Select the firmware version number of your panel in the Firmware Version list This refers to the version of firmware of the PROM chip in your NS2__ panel The default is 1 0 or later 8 Select the Status of the panel e Active If the panel is configured and presently connected to the WIN PAK system e Inactive If the panel is configured but temporarily disconnected for maintenance purpose When you add or delete a card to an inactive panel the card details are simply saved
413. ick and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the bitmap The bitmap is now placed on the badge outline e To change the bitmap properties a Right click on the bitmap and click Properties b Click the Bitmap tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Badge Element Layout Ea Bitmap Colors Positioning Bitmap Image Honeywell jpg Stretch Height Keep Aspect Ratio Import Cancel Apoly Help c Select an image from the Bitmap Image list or click Import to import a bitmap d Select the Stretch Width check box to stretch the width of the photo e Select the Stretch Height check box to stretch the height of the photo f Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box to retain the aspect ratio of the photo while stretching its height and width g Click Apply to place the bitmap in the badge outline Placing a Bar Code on the Badge e To add a bar code on the badge outline a Click ill on the toolbar q b Click and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the bar code The bar code is now placed on the badge outline e To add bar code data items a Right click on the bar code and click Properties b Click the Barcode Data tab Badge Element Layout Ea Barcode Data Barcode Colors Positioning Length Justify FillChar Expression Add Edit Delete Move Up Mave Down Cancel Appp Help
414. ick the C 100 or 485 non ACK NCK remote communication loop and click Configure The Loop Configuration dialog box appears for the selected loop type 11 62 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools C 100 Loop Configuration l X Basic Information ADW Add Mame Panel Defaults C 100 Remote Loo 10 Poll Interval Edit Description E0 SEC Isolate fed Panel CMD Retry Count Loop Verification Interval Sec 3 Delete 60 Panel CMD Time Out Show 5 Buffer all panels on exit O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi Remote Phone Number Moder 345342 Madem 1 Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the loop using the Basic Information tab Refer to the Adding a C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop section in this chapter for configuring the non ACK NAK remote communication loop 5 Click OK to configure the panel loop Isolating and Deleting a non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop You cannot delete a non ACK NAK remote communication loop until you delete the panels attached to it and remove all the references of an ADV of a non ACK NAK remote communication loop from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a non ACK NAK remote communication loop To isolate a non ACK NAK remote communication loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand
415. ick the guard tour server and click Configure The Guard Tour Server Configuration dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Guard Tour Server Configuration X Guard Tour Server Configuration ADW Add Edit Description Machine name Delete E1 OO TsPSLP261 5 E ma Skaw Protocol end point 5577 Cancel Apply Help 4 Make the required changes of the guard tour server Refer to the Adding a Guard Tour Server section in this chapter for configuring guard tour server 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting a Guard Tour Server You can delete a guard tour server only if you isolate an ADV of the guard tour server from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a guard tour server To isolate a guard tour server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the guard tour server and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration x Floor Plans Operator Levels Operator Levels referencing device Guard Tour Remove RemoveAll V Present in Control Area Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of the guard tour server
416. ideo as Access DVPRO 4 Type a Name and the brief Description for the Access DVPRO 5 Type the User name and Password These fields are mandatory Note The Access DVPRO name 1s identical to the RapidEye Site name The User name and Password are used for controlling the digital video device and they must be identical to the User name and Password defined in the RapidEye software 6 Click Add under ADV to create an ADV for the Access DVPRO digital video The Abstract Device Record Access DVPRO DVSS dialog box appears T Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 7 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Digital Video Configuration dialog box Notes i e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details 8 Click Next to add ADVs to the digital video cameras The Access DVPRO Camera Configuration dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 27 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration No ADY No ADV No ADY No ADY No ADY Delete No ADY No ADY JE Show _ 9 No ADY 10 No ADY P11 No ADY 12 No ADY x MV Pan and Tilt on mon amp w N g Camera Title coos eo 9 Configure an ADV for each camera attached to the digital video Se
417. idth select the Lock Aspect check box i Adjust the Compression setting at this point if required Note 100 is the least compression and the best quality 30 is the highest compression and the lowest quality i j Click OK to close the dialog box and import the photo 5 To capture a photo using a camera a Click Capture The Capture Image window appears with the live show from your video camera b Click Settings to expand the window and access the video settings Capture Image X Video OK Brightness a i gt 34 Contrast af E gt 35 Cancel Saturation _ af 2 32 Freeze Hue 2j 0 I Sharpness al 2 0 M Lock Aspect Grab Aspect Ratio Brightness _ a 34 i 12040816326 E E E ae Photo Brightness _ i 40 Compress 4 gt 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information c Adjust the Video settings for a satisfactory image Table 8 2 Live Screen Video Image Settings Setting Description Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image Adjusts the vibrancy or the level of color in the image Hue Adjusts the value of color in the image This corrects the incorrect coloring of images Sharpen Sharpens blurry images by increasing the contrast of the adjacent pixels Table 8 3 Live Screen Grab Settings Brig
418. iew Opens the Alarm View window which allows el Control Map Opens the Control Map window which can be used for controlling the devices and for providing an alternate means of acknowledging and clearing alarms Run Command File Displays the Run a Command File dialog box enabling you to run command files containing device instructions Open Floor Plan Opens the Open Floor Plan window enabling you to open floor plans Locate Last Card Opens the Locate Card Holder dialog box enabling Card Holder you to search for a card by card holder name or card Transaction number and view the time and place where the card was used WIN PAK User s Guide 3 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Table 3 1 Toolbar Buttons Card Opens the Card window enabling you to search and sort the card list and to add edit or delete cards Card Holder Opens the Card Holder window enabling you to search and sort the cardholder list and to add edit or delete card holders Add Card Holder Opens the Card Holder window enabling you to add card holders Run Report Opens the Reports window enabling you to generate view and print reports Help Topics Opens the WIN PAK Pro Help the online help for WIN PAK Auto Logout from all Logs the operator out of the user interface and all the servers servers Menu Bar The menu bar appears at the top of the Main window and comprises menus to carry out vari
419. if you are logging on to WIN PAK in the WIN PAK authentication mode OR Set the Value data of WinAuth as 1 if you are logging on to WIN PAK in the Windows authentication mode Note In the Windows Authentication mode the values for Pass and User are considered by default and so setting these key values can be ignored E 6 Close the Registry Editor window WIN PAK User s Guide 8 42 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management In this chapter Introduction 9 2 Time Zone 9 3 Schedule 9 7 Holiday Group 9 19 Daylight Saving Group 9 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Introduction Introduction The chapter Time Management describes how to configure a time zone holiday group daylight saving group and to schedule a task Time Zone A time zone is a group of time slots that define the access of the associated item For example the time zone can be mapped to an access level When a card holder is associated to an access level the card holder s access 1s allowed or denied depending on the time zone associated to the access level You can create any number of Time Zones However a maximum of 63 time slots can be downloaded to a PW 2000 series panel and 255 time slots can be downloaded to a PRO 2200 Intelligent Controller Refer to the Time Zone section in this chapter for configuring a time zone Schedule A schedule is planned task that must be perf
420. ight corner of the screen or clear the Detail View check box in the Maintenance Window to close the Detail View Card dialog box Searching and Sorting You can search for and sort the details displayed in the list in a specific order using Search and Sort option in the Maintenance window Note The number of items returned as search result depends on the value set for the Maximum Records returned from the Database for Find List field in the Work Station Defaults Set the value by choosing System gt Workstation Defaults and clicking the Defaults tab i Search and Sort Search Field ll m Criteria Search For Sort By Last Name T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 9 WIN PAK User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Table 3 3 Search and Sort Options and Actions Options Actions Search Select the item to be searched Criteria Select the criteria for search Search For Type a letter word phrase or numeric expression that you want to search Select the field based on which the records in the list must be sorted In addition it indicates the order in which the search results are displayed Sort By Update List Click this button to perform the search In addition this button updates the list with the sorted information Adding Editing and Deleting records The action buttons provided under the Operations area of the Maintenance window enables you to add edi
421. ign the selected panel to a different holiday group A confirmation message appears OR If you want to reassign all the panels to the selected holiday group click Reassign All A confirmation message appears Click OK to confirm reassignment Repeat steps 4 to 6 to isolate the holiday groups from the panels Click OK to close the dialog box To delete a holiday group l 2 3 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Holiday Group The Holiday Group window appears with the list of existing holiday groups Select a holiday group from the list Click Delete The selected holiday group is deleted Daylight Saving Group You can create a custom daylight saving group for the locations where the standard daylight saving group is not used These daylight saving groups are attached to the panels for using the custom timings T WIN PAK User s Guide Note The Daylight Saving Group is applicable only to P Series Panels PRO 2000 Intelligent Controller 9 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Daylight Saving Group Adding a Daylight Saving Group To add a daylight saving group 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Daylight Saving Group The Daylight Saving Group window appears 2 Click Add The Daylight Saving Record dialog box appears Daylight Saving Record x Davlight Saving Mame Daylight Savings Time Description Saves the Daylight time Thursday March 31
422. iguring 2 Copying 5 Deleting 5 Editing 5 Isolating 5 Placing Elements 20 Search 2 Searching 4 Selecting the Account 2 Sorting 4 Viewing 5 Document 7 001009 Revision B Badge printable size 8 Badge Printers 30 Configure 31 Badging Printers 4 Blockouts 10 Buffer Command 8 C C 100 Local Connection 27 C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Adding 61 Editing 62 Isolating and Deleting 63 C 100 Panel Loop 39 Adding 39 Editing 42 Isolating and Deleting 42 Loop Verification Interval 40 Panel Defaults 40 port 41 TCP IP Connection 41 TCP IP Encrypted Connection 41 C 100 Remote Connection 27 Capture Image 12 Card 2 Privileged card 28 privileged card 2 P Series Trigger Control 29 Card Frequency Report 22 card frequency limits 23 Card Holder Filter 25 Disposition 12 24 Frequency Filter 12 24 Zero Frequency 12 24 Card History Report 26 Daily Time Range 26 Sort on Sequence ID 27 Card Holder user code 18 Card Holder Report 29 Advanced Card Filter 32 filter the note fields 31 Select Note Fields 30 Document 7 001009 Revision B sort the report 31 Card Holder Report Templates Adding 3 Deleting 5 Editing 4 Searching 4 Card Holder Tab Layout Report 33 Card Holders 2 user codes 2 Card Report Advanced Card Holder Filter 21 Badge Back 22 Badge Front 22 Badge Print Status 22 filter 19 PIN 1 22 sort 20 CCTV Monitor 27 CCTV Switcher 69 26 Adding 69 Camera Title 71 Editing 72 Isolating and Deleting 73 Parity 70 CD K
423. ilter Bun from Archive Database Print Previ Account Account x dada ac Print Export File Card Estim Pages M Transactions M Acknowledgements IY Clears V Operator Messages Clear All Filter ADs Sort on Sequence ID Close b Select an account in the Account list c To filter the report based on the card behaviors select the following options under Card Table 17 5 Describing the card options for filtering card events Transactions Reports card events of all transactions such as normal alarm or host grant Clears Reports the card alarm events that were cleared by the operator Acknowledgements Reports the card alarm events that were acknowledged by the operator Operator Messages Reports the card alarm events that were provided with an operator message d To filter the transactions performed on specific ADVs devices click Filter ADVs The Filter Devices dialog box appears e Double click the branch folder to select a all the devices in the branch OR Expand the branch and double click a device to select the particular device of the branch f Click OK to return to the Report History dialog box g Click the Sort on Sequence ID check box to sort the report by the sequence number of each action Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 27 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report When a new event is identified it is given a sequence ID and any change in
424. ime Slot Time Slot Shows time slot for Saturday Set 1 Set 2 5 To define a time slot a Click any of the weekdays and drag the mouse pointer to reach the end time of the time slot OR Right click any of the weekday to display the Time Zone Range dialog box Enter the Start Time and End Time and click OK to set the time slot Time one Range xj Start Time End Time fison Delete Range cancel _ Note The Mouse Time box indicates the time at the mouse pointer i When you hover the mouse pointer over the time range area the time at the mouse pointer is displayed in the Mouse Time box When you define a time slot the start and the end time 1s displayed in the Mouse Time box when you click and drag the mouse pointer For an already defined time slot the start and the end time is displayed in the Mouse Time box when you hover the mouse pointer over the time slot Tip It is sufficient to define the time slot for Monday so that you can copy the time slot for the rest of the weekdays using the Copy Monday to Weekdays option WIN PAK User s Guide 9 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Time Zone 6 If you want to set the hour format of the ruler as 24 hours select the Military Time check box 7 After you set the time range for Monday click Copy Monday to Weekdays to copy it to the other weekdays Tip If you want to delete the time slot place the cursor over the time s
425. in configuring a networked system WIN PAK Servers Database Server The database tables can store organize and retrieve data using the WIN PAK Database Server This data is accessible to Communication Server and User Interface for retrieving and generating the reports The Database Server can be installed on the client computer or any other computer connected to the network Communication Server The Communication Server routes User Interface requests as well as the access transactions to the panel The panel in turn processes the transactions and sends the information to the Database Server as well as responses to the User Interface through the Communication Server While the communication server is sending information to the database server it can receive a request from the user interface In such cases of conflict the Communication Server considers the user request as a higher priority and stalls the panel database server communication till the time the user request is processed The Communication Server can be installed on the client computer or any other computer connected to the network WIN PAK User s Guide 1 2 Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B Introduction WIN PAK Features WIN PAK Client User Interface The User Interface helps WIN PAK operators to communicate with the access control system The User Interface can be installed on the computer where the Database Server or the Communication Server is installed or any oth
426. in this chapter for details on configuring access rights to an operator level Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 13 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators Isolating and Deleting an Operator Level You cannot delete an operator level if the operator level is already assigned to an operator Therefore before deleting an operator level reassign the operator to a different operator level Isolating an operator level To reassign operators to a different operator level and to isolate the operator level l Choose System gt Operator Level The Operator Level window appears 2 Select the operator level to be isolated and click Isolate The Isolate dialog WIN PAK User s Guide box appears Isolate Ei Operators referencing Operator Level Operator A Mame Description John i ltem Operator Level to which selected Operators will be reassigned Add Shift Guard Reazzign Reazzign All Select the operator from the list For multiple selections press SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting the operators Select the different operator level to which the operators must be assigned Click Reassign to reassign the selected operators A message asking for confirmation appears OR Click Reassign All to reassign all the operators A message asking for confirmation appears In the confirmation message click OK to confirm the reassignment The selected or all the operator levels are reassigned
427. indow 0 7 7 Changing the Ruler Measurement ccccccccccssssesseeseeeeeees 7 7 Setting the printable size of the badge eee 7 8 Adjusting the Zoom factor ccccccccceccssssccsssssssesseseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 9 Specifying Grid Seting Sensei te n E EEE OE a 7 9 SSE DIOCKOUIS cinis E 7 10 Setting a Badge Background cc ececcccccccecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 11 Setting a background Color i eeeeseeeeseseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaaes 7 15 Setting Magnetic Stripe Encoding ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 Placing Elements in the Badge Outline cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 20 Conficurine Bad 6 ec Lis os sicetal shes an E TERO 7 29 Seting up Badge Printe Secr athe eae area 7 30 DE A E E E E E E A N aeaetiactatnitias 7 30 Configuring Badge Printers corossat ana aaa 7 31 Chapter 8 Card Holders CODY CE VOW airis A NEN 8 2 Configuring Additional Information ssseccecocsossssssececcocosssssseeeecosossssssssee 8 3 Selec UNT An ACCOUN osea TE EAEAN T EEEE 8 3 Contigurine Note Field Template krenreccesii an N a 8 4 Adding a Note Field Templateccenccrnen 8 4 Searching and Sorting Note Field Templates eee 8 5 Isolating and Deleting a Note Field Template 8 6 Configuring Card Holder Tab Layout oo cccccccccccceeeeeesseeesesseeeens 8 8 Adding a Card Holder Tab Layout c cc eeccecccceceeceeeeeeeeeees 8 8 Rearranging the Card Holder Tab Layouts ec
428. indow appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the Card Holder folder Right click the report template and click Find The Find Item dialog box appears tem in tree to Search for Cancel Type the name of the template to be searched and click OK The template starts with the specified name is highlighted 17 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Report Templates Deleting a Card Holder Report Template To delete a Card Holder Report template l 4 Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the Card Holder folder Right click the report template and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears CS 8 6 lsl AN Delete Card Holder2 ReportTemplate 7 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The selected report template is deleted To delete all the card holder report templates l Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and Right click the Card Holder folder and click Delete All A message asking for confirmation appears Click Yes to confirm the deletion Note All the card holder report templates are deleted except for the templates that are used in the schedule Defining History Report Templates Adding a History Report Template To define the History report template l Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Re
429. ing a Vista Panel section in this chapter for configuring the galaxy panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 81 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Panel Configuration The panel configuration is required in setting up your access control system Configuring panels include e Setting up card formats e Configuring different types of readers and keypads e Configuring input and output points with numerous options As the number of options to set up the panel is too high adding panels to a large system can be a time consuming job To reduce the time effort e Define a panel and make a copy of it to create panels e Define templates for action groups and use it to define ADVs of the same action type e Copy an action group and edit This enables you to create a variety of action groups quickly Panels are configured in WIN PAK by adding them to the Device Map Adding an N 1000 PW 2000 Panel A N 1000 or PW 2000 panel can be added to C 100 and 485 PCI panel loops To add an N 1000 PW 2000 panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server folder E Device Oy El Devices BP Cromand File Server Ba Communication Server ee 4854CK NACK Modem Pool BR A85PCILoop i ao a First Floor Loop Ea ModemPosIC1 00Lo0p l Q 4a5Loop O e colec en ModemPoolF l l vee PSeresLoop Configure on San
430. ion 01 li iV WIN PAK User s Guide About this Guide Scope The WIN PAK User s Guide helps you in installing configuring and using the WIN PAK access control software In addition this guide includes the Special Applications section which describes the configuration of the several other applications to use WIN PAK Intended Audience This guide is intended for the WIN PAK operators and Administrators Prerequisite Skills Knowledge of Access Control System and its terminologies Document Structure The guide is divided into several chapters for better organization The following table describes the details of what is covered in each chapter Chaperone 1 Introduction Gives an overview CSc CC WIN PAK and explains the key software concepts and features Chapter 2 Installation Covers the system requirements installation procedures licensing and registration information Chapter 3 User Interface Explains the basic convention used in the user interface of the WIN PAK software This chapter also includes the procedures to access the Help Chapter 4 Getting Explains the basic configuration details of the client and Started server This helps you to get started with the WIN PAK software It also includes the configuration details of WIN PAK services Chapter 5 System Describes how to configure WIN PAK users and to set or Settings change the default settings of WIN PAK Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B l 1 WIN PAK Use
431. ioned sections WIN PAK User s Guide 8 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Configuring Additional Information As card holder information is specific to an account you must select an account before you start working with card holders If required you can also configure the following additional information before you configure a card holder e Note fields e Card holder tab layouts e Access levels Note field is a user defined field for adding additional information to the card holder These note fields are grouped together to form a card holder tab layout Access level is a level of access provided to the Card Holders for various doors in the WIN PAK system Note The detailed information on note fields card holder tab layouts and access levels are explained in the forth coming sections i Refer to the Configuring Note Field Template Configuring Card Holder Tab Layout and Configuring Access Levels sections in this chapter Therefore configuring a Card Holder includes e Selecting an Account You must select a specific account to enable the Card Holders menu options e Configuring Note Field Template You can configure a note field template and associate it with the card holder tab layout e Configuring Card Holder Tab Layout You can configure a card holder tab layout and associate it to card holders e Configuring Access Levels You can configure va
432. is acknowledged The background color of the acknowledged alarm changes to grey and the text color changes to green normal yellow trouble and red alert depending on the state of the device It remains in the lower pane of the window until it is cleared WIN PAK User s Guide 15 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Alarm View Table 15 3 Describing command buttons in the Alarm View window Silence This enables you to silence the alarm for 60 seconds without actually acknowledging it This feature is enabled in the Alarms Handling section of the System Default Configuration Clear To clear one or more transactions select them from the list and click Clear Freeze To temporarily stop the display of incoming messages click Freeze When you Click Freeze the button toggles to Release Freezing stops the screen from scrolling as new information appears Click Release to return the Alarm View to its normal functions To quit Alarm View click Close AN Note While acknowledging or clearing alarms to select multiple alarms is In sequence Press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last alarms in the range At random Press and hold the CTRL key and click each alarm Filtering Alarm Views The Alarm View is provided with an option to filter areas and devices for monitoring card reads or alarms on a particular area or device Filtering could be very useful for instances such as a particu
433. is des cet aes teroe elaine dora eaeie 7 16 Characters printed using Datacard IC III printer 0 0 7 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 ii i WIN PAK User s Guide Tables SMIET BIr COCs ceca naam taetnases 7 26 Chapter 8 Card Holders Describing mask properties with examples cccccceceeeeeees 8 4 Live Screen Video Image Sui es vices evendecsvioedadenzaet vee dacsentes 8 22 Live screen Grab SCN OS aeea ena eee di aan cor ieletess 8 22 Live Screen Photo SEUSS acuta seas tik tiated E 8 23 Error types and Corrective Actions ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 40 Chapter 9 Time Management Describing Dial Remote Area commands cccccccceeseeeeeees 9 14 Chapter 10 Device Map Explaining Shunt Time and Debounce Time eee 10 92 Describing the anti passback Options ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 109 Describing the available actions for points sseeeeeeeeees 10 113 Describing the modes of input pOint cccceccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 125 Describing Input Circuit Types sareen e EE 10 126 Describing the Output Inverter settings ccceeseeeetees 10 128 Descon COnuromb la gS os sasseecicaiotersoasaverseston a suastuersausoucedeastvers 10 131 Describing Online Door Mode options c ceseesessseeseseeeeees 10 131 Describing Zone Properties acess a a a A eee 10 147 Describing Output Propertie Secci 10 148 Describing 485 ACK NAK an
434. ision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Deleting a dedicated micros digital video After deleting the child nodes and isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the dedicated micros digital video To delete a dedicated micros digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices that are added to the device map 3 Right click the dedicated micros digital video and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion The dedicated micros digital video is deleted from the device map Communication Loops A communication loop is an interface between the panels and the communication server It must be added to an existing communication server on the Device Map You must have an available communication port for each panel or a communication loop to be added to a loop Note You must create an ADV for each loop panel and other communication interfaces while configuring them C 100 Panel Loop Panels using 20 milliamp communications can be connected to the WIN PAK system by a C 100 communication adaptor The C 100 connection is defined by adding it to the Device Map Adding a C 100 Panel Loop To add a C 100 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and then right click t
435. itialization Ok Cmd Status __ Error Message A Figure 11 1 Showing the status of initialization WIN PAK User s Guide 11 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Table 11 3 Describing fields in the Status dialog box Field name Description Steps Indicates what information is sent Message Count Indicates the progress of messages sent Status Indicates whether the proceeding initialization is successful or has failed Cmd Status Indicates if a command has timed out Error Message Indicates if any errors occurred while transmitting information to the panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 33 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps WIN PAK User s Guide 11 34 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan In this chapter Introduction 12 2 Floor Plan Definition 12 2 Floor Plan Operations 12 15 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Introduction Introduction A floor plan is a map or plan of a building used for viewing monitoring and controlling devices in the Access Control System This chapter describes how to create floor plans and to control system devices using floor plan views A floor plan comprises a floor plan background on which ADVs links and text blocks are placed Images photos and simple graphs can be imported into the floor plan background These images are imported as gra
436. k bars are twice the width of thin bars Spacer Adds space before and after the bar code when Show Text is enabled Bearer Thickness Thickness in points of the bearer bars Font Adj Adjusts the font size in relation to the bar code Show Text Displays the bar code data as text underneath the encoded information W Bearer Bar Displays the width bearer bars top and bottom borders H Bearer Displays the height bearer bars left and right borders Check Digit For error detection Show Spacer Displays space before and after the bar code data Switch Text Switches the top and bottom text The bar code data displayed as text is placed above the bar code and the text entered into the Text field is displayed below the bar code Check Digit 2 For error detection Arial Arial is the text font Courier New Courier New is the text font Bold Applies bolding to the text Italic Italicizes the text Common properties of elements e To set the colors for the elements a Right click on the element and click Properties b Click the Colors tab Foreground Color Background Color T Transparent Background c Click the ellipsis button provided near the Foreground Color box to select a foreground color for the element Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 27 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction d Click the ellipsis button provided n
437. king for a particular input point Refer to the Interlocking Points on SIO Board section in this chapter for more details on interlocking Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 125 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 21 Select the Input Circuit Type for specifying whether a point is supervised or unsupervised The available types are Table 11 5 Describing Input Circuit Types NC No end of line Refers to contact points that always touch when a device 1s Normally Closed in its normal position A normally closed device such as most door contacts complete a circuit when they are in their normal at rest condition NO No end of line Refers to contact points that do not touch when a device is Normally Opened in its normal position A normally open device such as most REX switches complete the circuit when pushed NC Std end of line Refers to a three state circuit Alert Normal or Trouble Normally Closed in a normally closed contact points NO Std end of line Refers to a three state circuit Alert Normal or Trouble Normally Opened in a normally opened contact points 22 In the Transaction Mask list select the type of transaction mask that enables masking for the log of transaction information related to input points By default it is Log all Transactions indicating that all input points are monitored and all transaction is logged to WIN PAK 23 Click the Output tab to configure the output point
438. l e Access Levels e Access Control Areas e Card Formats e Command File e Conversion Tables e Groups e Holidays e Inputs e IC Configuration e Input Groups e Input Scan e Outputs e Procedures Actions e SIO Boards e Triggers e Reader LED Buzzer specs e Time Zones Initializing Status As the panel initializes a status window indicates the status of sending the information If an error occurs the status window indicates which command caused the error Initializing H1000Fanell Steps Sending Panel Configuration Options Message Count BEE Statue Panel Initialization Ok Cmd Status ee Error Message E Figure 12 1 Showing the status of initialization Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 23 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Table 12 4 Describing fields in the Status dialog box Field name Description Steps Indicates what information is sent Message Count Indicates the progress of messages sent Status Indicates whether the proceeding initialization is successful or has failed Cmd Status Indicates if a command has timed out Error Message Indicates if any errors occurred while transmitting information to the panel WIN PAK User s Guide 12 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Command File In this chapter Command File Configuration 13 2 Adding a Command File 13 2 Editing a Command File 13 5 List of Commands 13 6 Run
439. l panels on startup to unbuffer all panel events when the communication server restarts 10 Select the standard Time Zone based on the loop location 11 Set the Panel Defaults for the remote communication loop a I O Poll Interval Select the interval at which the signal must be sent to the panel to verify the communication and check the panel s input and output states By default the frequency interval is 60 seconds b Panel CMD Retry Count Specify the number of times a command must be resent to the panel if the panel event is not responding to the command By default the command is resent 3 times c Panel CMD Time Out Specify the waiting time for receiving a response from the panel and for time out of the command By default the loop waits for 5 seconds 12 In Remote Phone Number type the phone number of the modem in the remote site Include the area code and dialing prefix if they are needed to dial in from the remote site like 3125551212 This field is mandatory 13 Select the Modem of the remote site 14 Click Next to display the Finish dialog box 15 Click Finish The C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK remote communication loop is added to the modem pool Editing a C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop To edit a non ACK NAK remote communication loop l 2 Je WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder Right cl
440. lan you want to delete from the list of floor plans 3 Click Delete Floor Plan Operations After defining floor plans you can use floor plan views for monitoring and controlling the devices in the Access Control System Monitoring and controlling of devices can be done by executing commands from floor plan views for each ADV in the floor plan For example a door can be locked by performing the Lock command on the door that is added as an ADV in the floor plan In addition you can view the statuses of the ADVs which is indicated by different colors Note Ensure that you have defined the color coding for the various ADV statuses while designing the floor plan Refer to the Adding an ADV to the Floor Plan section of this chapter for information on setting the status colors for ADVs Working with Floor Plan Views Opening a Floor Plan View 1 Choose Operations gt Floor Plan or click E in the tool bar The Open Floor Plan dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Open Floor Plan Ed Floor Plan fl FloorFlani EJ FloorPlan Cancel 2 Click to select the floor plan you want to view 3 Click OK The floor plan is displayed in a floor plan view window FEl Floor Plan FloorPlant l edl ent Room 2 l LL ETET H mi Eeten tam YEW Mi Ru Hal Adi Pa TAAA Fko Pian Link Mixing Men H Studio
441. lar guard station needs to monitor the loading dock An Alarm View can be defined to receive messages only from the loading dock doors To filter the alarms 1 Click Operations gt Alarms or click the Dynamic Alarm View BE icon on the tool bar The Alarm View window is displayed 2 Under On click Alarm Card Read or Both to view only the alarms card reads or both respectively Selection Hone 3 To filter the branches and devices click Control under Filter The Filter Devices window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Alarm View TE Refer to the Adding Alarm View and Event View links to the Floor Plan section in Filter Devices Iols aad A E N1000Pnelt Reader 2 A E N1000Pnelt Reader 3 MB N1000P nell Reader 4 H O G N1000Panelt Input BO G N1000P nel Output Cancel Expand the tree by clicking the plus symbol Select a branch or an individual device to be filtered for monitoring To filter an branch right click the branch and select Configure The Set Device Selection for a Control Area dialog box appears Set Device Selection for a Control Area xj Leave Selection for all devices in this area as it currently is Select Include all devices in this area Cancel Note You can also double click the branch to display the Set Device Selection for a Control Area dialog box Select one of the following
442. le 5 g5 amp Guard Tour EH MENUS j Floor Plan Definition Other Text The Edit List of Available Languages dialog box appears with a list of existing language files xl Deutsch Deutsch txt WINPAKS German chm English English twt English United States EnalighlS tet d E pa ol Espa a Spanish tet WINPAKS Spanish Spain chin E pa ol Latin America Spanish Latin America WINPAK2 Spanish Latin America Francais French tut WIN PAKS French chm PolskiPro Polish txt Poland chm Portuguese portuguese txt WINPARS Portuguese chin Portuguese Brazil Portuguese Brazil txt WINPARS Portuguese Brazil chm Add Edit Delete OF 2 Click Add The Configure Language dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Language Configuration 3 4 2 5 is 6 a Configure Language xX Language Name File o Help File Cancel Type the Language Name Type a name for the text file in File Note If the new language refers to a text file available in the WINPAKPRO Language Files folder type the respective text file name Type the name of the Help File for this language By default the American English help file is used Note The newly added text and help files are saved in the WINPAKPRO Language Files folder Click OK to save the language information and return to the Edit List of Available Languages
443. lect an ADV double click to enter a name and press ENTER or click Add under ADV and enter the ADV properties and click OK 10 Select or clear the Pan and Tilt check box to define a camera as a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera or as a stationary camera 11 Type the title for the camera in Camera Title 12 Click Finish to save the digital video Editing an Access DVPRO To edit an Access DVPRO digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the access DVPRO and click Configure The Access DVPRO dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Access D YPRO E xj Digital Video Configuration Access DYPRO Camera Configuration AD Add E dit Isolate Delete Show Name Digivideo Description Type Access DYVPRO E User Password Cancel Apply Help 4 Click the corresponding tab and make the required changes Refer to the Configuring an Access DVPRO Digital Video section in this chapter for configuring Access DVPRO digital video 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting an Access DVPRO You can delete an access DVPRO digital video only if you isolate an ADV of the access DVPRO digital video from floor plans and operator levels Isolating an access D
444. levels from an ADV of 485 PCI panel loop Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 47 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops a Click the Operator Levels tab The operator levels associated to the 485 PCI panel loop are listed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the 485 PCI panel loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the loop c To remove the panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of 485 PCI panel loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Deleting a 485 PCI panel loop After deleting the panel attached to it and isolating the assiocated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the 485 PCI panel loop To delete a 485 PCI panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the 485 PCI panel loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the panel loop 4 Click OK to delete The 485 PCI panel loop is deleted from the device map RS 232 Panel Loop The RS 232 loop is an interface between the computer or communication server and a panel using serial binary data interchange Adding an RS 232 Panel Loop To add an RS 232 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand t
445. lick OK to save the settings or click Set Defaults to retain the default settings 15 Click OK to configure the NS2 panel Interlocking The interlocking feature enables an input point or output point to take a specified action based on the change of state of another input point or output point In an interlock sequence an action on one point causes a reaction from a second point To enable Interlocking l WIN PAK User s Guide In the Panel Configuration dialog box select the interlocked point input point output point or group let it be considered as Component A under Name and then select the Interlocking check box Select I O or G option to indicate Input Point Output Point or Group Select the interlocking point in the Point list let it be considered as Component B Only input points output points or groups that have already been activated are listed out If the required point is not listed go to the appropriate dialog box and activate the point then return to this dialog box If the interlocked point is an input point Select Alarm Action to be taken by Component B when Component A goes to the Alert state Select Normal Action to be taken by Component B when Component A returns to the normal state 11 112 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 5 If the interlocked point is an output point or a group a Select the On Action that has to be taken by Component B when
446. ll cards assigned to the card holder e Print no of photos assigned e Print no of signatures assigned 6 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 7 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 8 Click Close to return to the Reports window WIN PAK User s Guide 17 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Card Holder Tab Layout Report To generate the card holder tab layout report 1 In the Reports window select the Card Holder Tab Layout report and click Report Options The Report Card Holder Tab Layout dialog box appears Report Card Holder Tab Layout x Account Filter Bun from Archive Database 7 Print Preview Account Print Export File Estim Pages Clear All REEL Close 2 To filter the card holder tab layout by an account select it in the Account list If you want to include card holder tab layouts of all the account select Available Accounts in the Account list Note The Card Holder Tab Layout report shows the Note Fields associated with each Tab on the Card Holder Layout i 3 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 4 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 5 Click Close to return to the Reports window Command File Report To generate a command file report 1 In the Reports window select the Command File report and click Report Options The Report C
447. llowing card formats e 12 digit card format WIN PAK User s Guide 11 84 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration e 16 digit card format e User defined card format and type the format value 3 If you select WIEGAND Honeywell recommends you to retain the default card format values Note Default formats for slots 1 2 and 3 are CR 1 Wiegand Card Swipe Reader NR 1 Magstripe Swipe Reader and PR 2 Hughes IDI Proximity Reader You can edit the default card format values and in addition you can enter the card formats for other WIEGAND card format T 4 Click Next to assign time zones and holiday group to this panel The Panel Configuration Time Zones dialog box appears Assigning time zones and holiday group to a panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Time Zones dialog box select the time zones from the Available Time Zone list and click The time zones are moved to the Selected Time Zone list For multiple selections use the SHIFT and CTRL keys Panel Configuration Time Zones E xj ADY La ay Always On This Timezone is always on 1 4 00pm 12 00am M F 4 00 pm 12 00am Monday Friday excl 1 Edit ay 12 00am 8 00arn M F 12 00am 8 00am Monday Friday exch 1 kode ay 6 O00arn 00pm x 7 days 6 O00arn 7 00pm days per week finch 1 Delete Show 2 1 amp 00am 5 00 pm M F 6 00arn 5 00pm Monday Friday ex 1 2 Regular 6 00 AM to 6 00 PM 2 3 Btob Sample by Sasi 2 4
448. llows movement on those areas without causing an alarm Note To define the perimeter area the zone type of the zones must be defined as Perimeter while configuring the Vista panel Disarm The panel disarms the selected burglary partition silences alarms and audible trouble indicators Vista Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Bypass Zone The panel bypasses alarms from the zone This allows movement on the bypassed area without causing an alarm Unbypass Zone The panel stops bypassing alarms from the selected zone WIN PAK User s Guide 12 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Table 12 2 ADV Control Functions from Floor Plan ADV Control Functions Vista Panel Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Arm Away The panel completely arms the selected perimeter and interior burglary partitions by sensing the intruder s movements This option enables you to select multiple partitions of the panel Arm Stay Arms only the perimeter burglary protection guarding protected doors windows and other perimeter protection points in the selected partitions This enables automatic bypassing of certain areas that allows movement on those areas without causing an alarm Note To define the perimeter area the zone type of the zones must be defined as Perimeter while configuring the Vista panel Disarm The panel disarms the selected burglary partitions silences alarms and audible t
449. log box appears Report Card X Card Filter Sort Advanced Card Holder Filter Run from Archive Database Card Number Print Preview From All feu es Print ue ue Export Fil xport File C Range By P Estim Pages Account Available Accounts Clear Al Card Holder Card Status All we Close Access Level Activation Date Range Door Reader Expiration Date Range 2 H No of columns to print Print fewer columns Print all columns 2 To filter the card details a Click the Card Filter tab b Select one of the following options for filtering the cards under Card Number Table 17 4 Describing the options for filtering the card number Generates a report for all cards Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Table 17 4 Describing the options for filtering the card number Generates a report for a single card When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the card number to generate the report You can use the ellipsis E button to find the card number Generates the report for a range of cards When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled Enter the first card number of the range in From and last card number of the range in To You can use the ellipsis button to find the card number c Select any of the following options to filter the cards further
450. loor Plan Change View Area dialog box appears Floor Plan Change View Area x View Area 25 2 of window Cancel 4 In View Area type the percentage or use the slider at the bottom of the window for enlarging the floor plan preview 5 Click OK to save the changes made Working with Floor Plan Controls The following functions can be performed with the floor plan controls e Copy an already existing control to create new controls in the floor plan e Remove a control from the floor plan e Resize and re arrange the controls in the floor plan Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 13 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Copying and Pasting a Control 1 In the floor plan design right click the object that you want to copy 2 Select Copy Selected Control from the pop up menu to copy the control 3 Right click the control and select Paste Control to paste the control in the floor plan design window Removing a Control from the Floor Plan 1 In the floor plan design right click the object you want to remove 2 Select Remove Selected Control from the pop up menu to delete the selected object from the floor plan Resizing Rotating and Re arranging Objects To resize an object 1 In the floor plan design select the object you want to resize 2 Drag the corners of the object until the object is of the required size To rotate an object 1 In the floor plan design select the object you want to r
451. loor plans and operator levels associated to a CCTV switcher before delete the CCTV switcher To delete a CCTV switcher 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server 3 Right click the CCTV switcher and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to delete The CCTV switcher is deleted from the device map RS 232 Connection RS 232 connection settings are used for the debugging purpose An RS 232 connection is defined by adding it to the Device Map The communication server must have a port available for each communication interface in your system Adding an RS 232 Connection To add an RS 232 connection 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder right click the communication server and click Add gt RS 232 Connection The RS 232 Connection Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 74 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map RS 232 Connection R 232 Connection Configuration Basic Information A Diy Add Edit lalate Delete Show Name Basement Description Basement Room Port Settings Pott COM 2 Bits per Second Data Bits Parity Stop Bits IP Address or Node name Encryption Password Cancel Help Type a Name for the RS 232 conn
452. lot and right click to display the Time Zone Range dialog box Click Delete Range 8 Follow the same procedure to set the time slot for Saturday and Sunday 9 Set the time slots for holidays in H1 and H2 Note When time zones and holiday group are assigned to a panel the time slots defined for the holidays H1 and H2 are applied to the holiday group i 10 Click the Accounts tab to associate accounts to the time zone Note You must assign an account to a time zone after setting the time slots i 11 Under Available Accounts select an account and then click Add For multiple selections use the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting the accounts 12 To remove an account from the selected account list select an account and click Delete The selected accounts are moved to the Available Accounts list 13 Click OK to save the Time Zone Editing a Time Zone To edit a Time Zone 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Time Zone The Time Zone window appears 2 Select a time zone and then click Edit The Time Zone Record dialog box appears 3 Make the required changes and then click OK to save the changes and to close the Time Zone Record dialog box as Note You cannot edit the Always On and Never On time zones as these are B generated by WIN PAK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Time Zone Isolating and Deleting a Time Zone Time Zones are used in many places th
453. ls tab The list of operator levels associated to the schedule server is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the schedule server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels c To remove the schedule server from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the schedule server in the control area clear the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration Deleting a schedule server After isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the schedule server To delete a schedule server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the schedule server and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the server 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion The schedule server is deleted from the device map Tracking and Muster Server Before using the Tracking and Muster functions you must configure a Tracking and Muster Server Normally the server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Adding a Tracking and Muster Server To add a tracking and muster server 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears
454. lse Time 10 sec In Follow Mo Action Status Input Shunt Device Inz2 Shunt Time 15 sec Back Cancel Help a Note The Direct Point the point that is pulsed on a valid card read Pulse B Time Status Input and Shunt Time and Free Egress Input are displayed 2 Select a reader from the Reader list 3 Select the Anti Passback check box to set the anti passback and implement it locally 4 Select one of the following options to set the reader as IN or OUT and set anti passback properties Table 11 2 Describing the anti passback options The reader is considered as IN Reader The anti passback violation occurs when the In Out In link is broken while accessing the readers The reader is considered as OUT Reader The anti passback violation occurs when the Out In Out link is broken while accessing the readers When an anti passback violation occurs the reader strictly restricts the access When an anti passback violation occurs the reader allows the access but sends a report on anti passback violation Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 109 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 5 In the Card PIN Time Zone select a time zone for the reader during which the access is allowed only when both card and PIN number are used 6 Inthe PIN Only Time Zone select a time zone for the reader during which the access is allowed only by using the PIN number In this duration the access is
455. lt settings The changes to the pulse time are automatically reflected in the appropriate input output or group 13 Select the Free Egress Input shunts Status Input Shunt Device check box to follow no action on the direct point when a Free Egress Input is activated 14 To trigger an action in another input or output as a series action of direct point a Click Status Input Shunt Device in the graphical form The Configure Status Input Shunt Device dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 111 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Configure Status Input 7 Shunt Device Fa ff Mo G Status Input Shunt Device fin r f Sec C MinC H Shunt Time js Debounce Time jo ma Sec Set Defaults Cancel Select I or O to indicate Input Point or Output Point The corresponding points are enabled in Status Input Shunt Device Select the Status Input Shunt Device from the list Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the duration allowed for the door to be kept unlocked If the door remains in the unlocked state even after the shunt time the alarm is raised Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the duration allowed for the door to remain in unlock status after the shunt time If the door remains in the unlocked state even after the debounce time the alarm is raised This duration is meant for the doors that swing often due to wind C
456. lts Cancel b Select the Egress Input from the list c Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after it has been unlocked If the time taken to close the door exceeds the shunt time an alarm is raised d Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after the shunt time is exceeded If the WIN PAK User s Guide 11 96 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration time taken to close the door exceeds the debounce time an alarm is raised This debounce time is meant for the doors that swing often due to wind See Table 11 1 for examples e Click OK to save the settings or click Set Defaults to retain the default settings 8 To change the output pulsed on a valid card read a Click Direct Point in the graphical form The Configure Direct Point dialog box appears Configure Direct Point x fo fG Direct Point Out f Sec f Min Hr Pulse Time 10 Set Defaults Cancel b Select I O or G to indicate Input Point Output Point or Group The corresponding points are enabled in Direct Point c Select the Direct Point from the list d Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Pulse Time e Click OK to save the settings or click Set Defaults to retain the default settings The changes to the pulse time are automatically reflected in the appropriate input output
457. ly if the board 1s installed 9 Select the Reverse I O poll sequence check box to reverse the sequence in which the inputs and outputs are polled 10 Create an ADV for the selected board type Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 Click the Input tab to configure the input point details of SIO Board Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 123 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration SIO Board Configuration x Basic Reader Inputs Outputs ADV Time Zone None Hold Time Mode fo Sec Normal T Debounce Cycles Entry Delay 2 1 60 sec fo jec Shunt Time Exit Delay Sec C Min Hr 0 ec 4 Interact ing cit 6 Activate inTime Zone z SIO Board z Point z Alarm Action Normal Action Input Circuit Type Transaction Mask INC No end of line Log all transactions Cancel 12 Select the check box to select an input point and create an ADV Here you can decide on the alarm or trouble condition of an input point Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration Note You cannot disable or deactivate the status input or the free egress input of the reader If you still want to disable these inputs
458. mands to the Command File cececccceeeees 13 3 Adding a Custom Command eeesseseessssessssessssssssesssssssssssss 13 4 Editing a Command in the Command File ee eeeeeeees 13 4 Fditine lt 4 Command Pile 5s oatvis cchses cacti neaceee a ete eas 13 5 Listo Commands espa cian er a a 13 6 R nninsa Command File ssacaiane e a 13 9 Chapter 14 Guard Tour DROP OA UCONN siine a aa Ee a 14 2 Configuring Guard TOuUrs sisccssscscesecsscessscsssvcssvetsasevetidesutecsasiaecsacacedsbsaveossaeets 14 2 Adding a Guard OUT 0b occas eet etn ah oi slaw OT 14 2 Adding Check POMS 24sec art hectare latin an a E wetlecen te pauhts 14 4 Adding Sequenced Check Points ccccccseeeesesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 4 Adding Unsequenced Check Points c cssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 6 setting Check Point Alarms ye s9 50c 5 uiscosonavsegaahesnsneus e OE Eaa 14 7 R nnine Guard TO rS ass iscan aanrecht eai ei ibaa o sAn Eon aaa 14 9 Starine a Guard TOUT esis pir aina E Ea ARS 14 9 Chapter 15 Monitoring Actions latrod ctoh sericsson ee E 15 2 Locate Card Holde recasih n a a 15 3 SVS EVEN S eanan a a E 15 4 Viewine Systema E VENS esie A E E EEN 15 4 Event Vie aori E A 15 5 Opening an Event View Window ccccccccccccccccceseeeeseeeseseeeeessnssssssseeens 15 5 Filtern Event VIEWS aconta N AN N 15 6 Alarmi V VOW cossin a E a 15 8 Opening an Alarm View WindOW ccccccccccccccccceseeececeeeeceeeeeeeee
459. me Main Building Cancel D Mustering 4 Type the new branch name in the Name box 5 Click OK to rename the branch Removing a Branch or an Entrance 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the branch or the entrance you want to remove 3 Click Remove A message asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to remove the selected branch or entrance Note You cannot remove the Exit Area branch T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Finding an Item in the tree l 4 T WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears Right click on a branch or entrance and click Find The Find Item dialog box appears Find tem X ltem in tree to Search for Esi Cancel Type the item you want to search in the tree in the Item in tree to Search for box Click OK The item if found is highlighted in the tree Notes e From a tracking area you cannot search for a branch or an entrance in the mustering area e Right click on a branch and click Refresh to refresh the items in the tree 11 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Configuring Mustering Areas Mustering areas are defined as branches of the Tracking and Mustering
460. mmand that B is selected See Table 13 1 for the parameters fields displayed for the ADV controls 5 Click OK to save the changes Editing a Command in the Command File 1 In the Command File Record dialog box click Edit The Command File Command dialog box appears 2 Edit the required details of the command and click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 13 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Editing a Command File Command File Command File Configuration 1 Choose Configuration gt Command File The Command File window appears Fa Command File Adelaide Rd Alarms 1 W Adelaide Rd Alarms 2 BJ Adelaide Rd Alarms 3 WS Adelaide Rd Alarms 5 W Ballyboden Shunt 98 Belcamp Shunt T Detail View Toggles Alarm reader on Panel 2 Toggles Alarm reader on Panel 3 Toggles Alarm readers on Panel 5 Pulses relay 6 for 1 Hour Pulses relay 6 for 1 Hour Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Search For Sort By Z Operations Delete Isolate Name x Print Repott 2 Click Edit The Command File Record dialog box appears 3 To edit the command file name type the name of the command file in the Name box 4 Type a Description for the command file 5 Click Apply to save the changes to the command file or click OK to save the changes and to close the Command File Record dialog box Refer to the Adding Commands to the Command File and Editing a C
461. move a reader or an input point from the list of check points select the reader or input point in Selected Check Points and click XI Adding Unsequenced Check Points 1 In the Guard Tour Record dialog box click the Unsequenced Check Point tab Guard Tour Record x Name Sequenced Check Point Unsequenced Check Point Select Inputs Readers Selected Check Points x Check Point Valid Only NS2 In1 NAA Alarms Visible Update Cancel 2 Under Select click Inputs to assign inputs points or click Readers to assign readers as checkpoints to the guard tour The Select dialog box appears A hh Find Key Mame T Find what HS2 Reader 1 N52 Reader 2 Ok Cancel 3 Type the first few letters of the reader or the input point name in Find What 4 Click Find A list of readers or input points with similar names are retrieved in the Name list WIN PAK User s Guide 14 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours Note Leave the Find What field blank to retrieve all input points or readers in the Name list T 5 In the Name list select the input point or reader to be added to the guard tour and click OK Note To select multiple input points or readers hold down the SHIFT key for contiguous selection or hold down the CTRL key for non contiguous selection T The selected input point or reader is displayed in Selected Check Points list
462. n Cancel The ADV Name by default is based on the name of device configured However you can change the name if required Enter the Description for ADV The description enables you in selecting the ADV when setting up other aspects of the access control system In the Default Floor Plan list select a floor plan in which the device is logically located This floor plan can be opened in an Alarm View window by right clicking an alarm message and selecting Floor Plan This helps you in locating the place from where the alarm is triggered Select an existing Action Group from the drop down list and set the action properties Each action group contains a group of actions Note If you want to define a unique action group for this ADV select Custom for the Action Group and define the priorities command files and other properties To add a new action group click Add The Name drop down list changes to a text box Type a name of the action group and press ENTER The Rename and Delete buttons helps you in renaming and deleting the action group Select an Action from the list This list varies depending on the type of device configured and the selected action group Refer to the ADV Action Groups section in this chapter for examples 11 164 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Abstract Device 8 Enter a Priority for the action By default the priority assigned is 20 Th
463. n e In the Receive list select the command file that must be executed when an alarm or an event for this action is received e Inthe Acknowledge list select the command file that must be executed when the alarm for the action is acknowledged e In the Clear list select the command file that must be executed when the alarm for the action is cleared 14 To play a sound file when an action takes place type the name of the Sound File or select a sound file by clicking the ellipsis Le button 15 To view a live video of the action select the camera in the Digital Video Camera list When the action has taken place the Digital Video Display window is displayed showing the live video from the selected camera 16 Type a detail message for the alarm in Alarm Detail View Message 17 Click OK to save the details Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 165 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Abstract Device Note The action properties set in one place are globally defined for the particular Action Group Therefore any changes made to this Action Group are applied to all the associated ADVs using this Action Group name Editing an Abstract Device To edit an abstract device WIN PAK User s Guide 1 Choose Configuration gt Abstract Device ADV The Abstract Device window appears with the list of ADVs added through device map FE abstract Device TET Access DVPRO Camera 1 RapidE ye Access DYPRO Camera 2 FRapide ye
464. n date also specified Invalid Card Status Ensure that you select only 1 2 or 4 for Active Inactive or Trace Value status Any other number will lead to such error WIN PAK User s Guide 8 40 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Visitor Management Table 8 5 Error types and Corrective Actions Error Type Corrective Action The Activation date The Expiration date must be later than Activation Date cannot be the same or after the Expiration date Mandatory data is Card Number is a mandatory field missing Invalid Access Level Enter the correct name of the access level and ensure that it belongs to the account to which the data must be imported Visitor Management Lobby Works a Visitor Management system that tracks the movement of visitors assets and deliveries can be intergrated with WIN PAK By doing this the access cards that are created for visitors in LobbyWorks can be used in WIN PAK as access cards After the access cards are copied from Lobby Works to WIN PAK they are provided with the necessary access levels for allowing or restricting visitors to the different areas in the premises Integrating LobbyWorks Before you begin e Ensure to install WIN PAK and LobbyWorks on the same network e Procure the license for integrating Lobby Works with WIN PAK Setting Key Values To integrate Lobby Works with WIN PAK 1 Choose Start gt Run and then type regedit The Registry Editor window appear
465. n you select this task type the Command File list is enabled in the Schedule dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 9 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule Schedule Name Tours and Activities Tope AEAEE Frequency Monthy Command File Mone Figure 9 3 Scheduling a task for the Run Command File task type In addition to the basic steps perform the following steps for scheduling a task 1 In the Schedule dialog box select a command file in the Command File list The command files available in WIN PAK are listed 2 Click OK to save the schedule Run Guard Tour Select Run Guard Tour as a task type if you want to run a guard tour at a defined interval Refer to the Adding a Guard Tour section in the chapter Guard Tour for more details on defining the guard tour When you select this task type the Guard Tour Configuration frame appears on the lower right corner of the Schedule dialog box Schedule Schedule Name Tours and Activities Nest Scheduled Date amp Time gees B E cerarrcenaecet 4 4 2006 el Frequency M thl Hour Minute OREN F E Mow Command File Dial Remote rea GuardT our Configuration Remote Area fewer Tew T Buffer Send Date and Time None F Unbuffer Card F Send Card DE Changes E Clear Cancel Apply Help Figure 9 4 Scheduling a task for the Run Guard Tour task typ
466. names e Template Searches for similar template names 3 If you have selected Name or Template in the Search Field select the Criteria e Begins With Searches for the name or template that begins with the text in the Search For text box e Equals Searches for the name or template that exactly matches with the text in the Search For text box e Greater Than Searches for the name or template that is alphabetically greater than the text in the Search For text box e Less Than Searches for the name or template that is alphabetically less than the text in the Search For text box 4 Type the text to be searched in the Search For text box 5 Select an item in the Sort By list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Additional Information e None No sorting required e Name Sorts the list in the ascending order of the names e Template Sorts the list in the ascending order of the templates 6 Click Update List to list the searched items in the sorted order Notes we e Ifyou want to sort the entire list you can perform any of the following steps a Double click the column title to be sorted out b Select All in the Search Field list select the Sort By item and then click Update List e Ifyou want to search without any sorting you can perform the following steps a Enter the details to search b Select None in the Sort By list and then click Update List
467. nate time zone from the drop down list 9 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Schedule c Click Reassign to reassign the selected devices or click Reassign All to reassign all the devices to the selected time zone 5 Click OK The time zone is isolated from the selected device and is assigned to the different time zone 5 Note A warning message is displayed if you attempt to delete a Time Zone that is ia referenced to other devices AY This Time Zone cannot be deleted For the Following reasonts 1 Operators reference this Time Zone 1 Panels reference this Time Zone ALL references to this Time Zone must be removed prior to deleting it Click OK to close the message box Deleting a Time Zone After you have isolated a time zone you can delete the time zone To delete a time zone 1 In the Time Zone window select the time zone from the list of time zones 2 Click Delete The time zone is deleted Schedule You can schedule tasks so that they run automatically at a defined time Scheduling a Task To schedule a task 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Schedule The Schedule window appears with the list of the following system generated schedules Update cards every day Updates the card details every day in the panel If this schedule is not generated the panel will allow the card access of the inactivated or expired card also Update Custom AL every day Updates the custom acc
468. nd To text boxes are enabled Daily Time Range IY Only list events between these hours each day Minutes Hours Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi z b In the From and To boxes select the time range in hours and minutes c Select the standard time zone in the Time Zone list 3 To set the card frequency limits for generating reports on card frequency click the Frequency Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Schedule We 4 ia 5 6 7 8 WIN PAK User s Guide Report Card Frequency Report Configuration l xX Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter Print Previews Frequency Lower Frequency Limit Upper Frequency Limit ld 500 Fritt Zero Frequency Export File Location Reader es Access Level O CR Fiter ADs Disposition None Estim Pages Clear All EME Save amp Close Deactivate and Report cards that are between the limits Deactivate Detach and Report cards that are between the Limits Reassign cards between limits to Access Level None Note Frequency Filter is used for finding the reader or the access area in which the cards are less frequently accessed This helps to take some action on the particular reader or the access area like unlocking the reader always Under Frequency type the Lower Frequency Limit and Higher Fr
469. nd trade secret laws It is licensed not sold for use on a single computer system and is licensed only on the condition that you agree to this User Non Disclosure and License Agreement Please Read This Agreement Carefully If you do not agree to the terms contained in this Agreement please return the sealed software unopened to your supplier along with any associated manuals and or other documentation If you agree to the terms contained in this Agreement proceed with the installation and registration of the software online at www honeywellaccess com or by calling 414 766 1700 between 8 00 a m and 5 00 p m CST In consideration of and upon receipt of payment of a license fee by you Honeywell Access Systems grants to you a non exclusive license to use this software and any associated manuals and or other documentation furnished herewith together referred to herein as SOFTWARE under the following terms and condi tions Should you elect not to assume the obligations of this agreement do not break the seal on the SOFTWARE Return the SOFT WARE and any associated manuals and or other documentation to the supplier for refund or credit If you are unsuccessful in obtaining a refund or credit please contact Honeywell Access Systems at 135 West Forest Hill Avenue Oak Creek WI 53154 No refund or credit will be given on any SOFTWARE pack age on which the SOFTWARE seal has been broken You shall not provide or disclose or othe
470. nding check boxes 4 Click OK to update the panel details Refer to the Initializing Status section in this chapter for details on status of the initialization Panel Initialization Options Table 12 3 Describing panel initialization options Panel Initialization Description Options Panel Configuration Sends all panel configuration information This resets your panel Options programming It is recommended that you use the Select All feature button when the Panel Configuration Options are to be sent Time amp Date Updates panel time and date with the network time and date You may notice a pause for up to 50 seconds when the time and date are sent because the time is sent at the top of the computer minute up to 10 seconds Closed circuit acts as a NC circuit Sends card information to the panel When sending cards it is recommended that you re initialize the panel by choosing Select All This ensures that old card information is removed when the new card information is added When cards with an Active or Trace status are added edited or deleted from the card or card holder database this information is automatically sent to the panels All other card information changes are sent using this command WIN PAK User s Guide 12 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Additionally new or updated information on the following features functions and panel elements are sent to the pane
471. nection 10 Click Next and in the next dialog box click Finish The RS 232 Connection is configured Editing an RS 232 Connection To edit an RS 232 connection 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server 3 Right click the RS 232 connection and click Configure The RS 232 Connection Configuration dialog box appears RS 232 Connection Configuration X Basic Information ADW Mame 17 Description Fort Settings Port No Fort Device Inactive r Bits per Second sen0 Data Bits solate Delete Show Parity Stop Bits IP Address or Node name Encryption Password Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the RS 232 connection using the Basic Information tab Refer to the Adding an RS 232 Connection section in this chapter for configuring the RS 232 connection 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting an RS 232 Connection You cannot delete an RS 232 until you isolate RS 232 connection from floor plans and operator levels Isolating an RS 232 connection To isolate an RS 232 connection 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the RS 232 connection and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of RS 232 connection
472. ng and Deleting a Vista Panel 0 0 0 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 10 161 ADstract Diyite in n raos a a a a a 10 163 Configuring an Abstract Device esesennenenneennessssesssssssssssssssssssrressenn 10 163 Adding an Abstract Device cccccccccccsssssssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 10 163 Editing an Abstract Device canenco ea 10 166 Dern ar ADV yesreira n E NAO NA 10 167 ACON Gr rOUD iis i tase etinaeue doar eavisevesi es aeueteases 10 167 Viewing Action Group Details 00 0 0 ccssessseeeeseseeeeeees 10 167 Editing an Action Group cccccccccccccccecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeees 10 169 Copying an Action Group ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeessssssseeeeeeeeeees 10 170 Deleting an Action Group wcities ERT 10 170 ADV ACHO O TOUS sds ieee ss aed alata T tiaseeh nen ce anna ch haus date aaa 10 170 Copying and Moving Loops and Panels ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 10 187 Moving Loops and Panel 2 ssi vsscsudaeticwaexleivaioed eselieeenes 10 187 Copying Loops and Pannels ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 10 190 iaai Pane beens eee Nien spe IO Arve ere 10 191 Chapter 11 Defining Areas Introductio scsi ce cisascscenascecesdacececdssecsssstesststs Jacessnedenstasdensvenousovansessssedecssiasessaces 11 2 DEMING ACCESS An Cas inaandaa raosi eai anona Naousa setandi 11 2 PAGINA Brane h eceonsern nnen an r RG 11 3 Addino an TE MANOS sposi a E er ees 11 4 Moyin ai ENTanCE cenai e ENO E E TAT na eneneeees
473. ng to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field Under Sort Order 3 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the third level If you select Not Sorted the report is sorted on the basis of the field selected in Sort Order 1 and or Sort Order 2 Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field 4 To filter cards based on card holder categories click the Advanced Card Holder Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report Report Card x Card Filter Sort Advanced Card Holder Filter Run from Archive Database 7 Card Halder Print Preview f Both Attached Unattached Badge Print Status Both Printed Not Printed Print Export File Fin 1 Both Assigned Unassigned Estim Pages Assigned Clear All Unassigned REEL Close Assigned Unassigned T Custom Access Level The Card Report is filtered according to the status of e Card Holder Attached to the card Unattached or Both e PIN 1 number Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both e Badge Front and or Badge Back Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both e Badge Print Status Printed Not Printed or Both 5 Select the Custom Access Level check box to include all cards that have custom access levels assigned to th
474. ngs Administrators Operator l loj x Description Operator Type Admin Admin T Detail view Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Search For o Delete Sort By secre Name Update List Print Report 2 Select the Admin operator and click Edit Operator Record l xX Operator Password Operator Information Operator Type Admin Operator Mame Admir Description Admir Cancel Apply Help 3 In the Operator tab change the Operator Type Operator Name and Description if required 4 Click the Password tab to set the new password for the Administrator a Type the New Password for the Administrator to log on This field is mandatory Password is case sensitive and you can enter maximum of 20 characters b Retype the password in Confirm New Password WIN PAK User s Guide 5 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Administrators 5 Click the Operator Information tab to set the operator details such as operator level time zone during which the operator is provided access to work on WIN PAK the relevant accounts and so on Operator Record X Operator Password Operator Information Operator Level Hone e Time Zone None Language English Available Account ee Add Selected Accounts Delete Card Holder Cancel Apply Help Note The Ope
475. ning a Command File 13 9 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 13 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Command File Configuration Command File Configuration A Command file contains a set of commands that can be executed manually or automatically when an event or alarm occurs on an ADV Commands to be performed on different ADVs can be included in the same command file When a command file is run all the commands in the file are carried out at the same time For example when fire is detected in a building the doors must be automatically unlocked A command file can be defined containing the commands to Unlock and Pulse the two ADVs Doors and Outputs Adding a Command File 1 Choose Configuration gt Command File The Command File window appears E Command File Adelaide Ad Alarms 1 W Adelaide Ad Alarms 2 Toggles Alarm reader on Panel 2 GB Adelaide Rd Alarms 3 Toggles Alarm reader on Panel 3 BS Adelaide Rd Alarms 5 Toggles Alarm readers on Panel 5 W Ballyboden Shunt Pulses relay 6 for 1 Hour Bj Belcamp Shunt Pulses relay 6 for 1 Hour l Detail View Search and Sort Operations Search Field FE All o a Criteria Edit Search For Delete Sort By fans Name Print Report 2 Click Add The Command File Record dialog box appears Command File Record X Command File List Name Description Abstract Device ADV Move Command
476. nish Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard P QUICK START WIZARD Loop F x QUICK START WIZARD Add a new panel by configuring the following Select the panel type panel name loop name panel address from the drop down list Note Each panel on a communication loop must have a unique address The address must correspond with the address which is set using DIP switches on the panel PANEL SIO BOARDS DONE lt Back Next gt Cancel 8 Select the Panel Type WIN PAK supports four types of panels such as N1000 PW2000 P Series and NS2 panels to communicate with WIN PAK 9 Type the Panel Name 10 Type the Panel Address Note Each panel on a communication loop must have a unique address 11 Click Next The Readers dialog box appears to configure Reader details Note The number of readers in the Readers dialog box depends on the panel type selected 12 Type the Name of the reader 13 Select the Time Zone during which the reader needs to be active 14 Set the Pulse time for the reader The WIN PAK system sends pulses to the reader at a defined interval for checking the reader status 15 Repeat steps 12 to 14 for each reader and click Next The Continue dialog box appears 16 Click Back if you want to change the settings or click Next to save and return to the Configure page 5 Note The configuration details are NOT saved permanently until you click Pm Done ia and perform the steps that f
477. nnot make it inactive if it is interlocked with an output point Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK to define an ADV for each input point Select the Time Zone during which the input point must be activated Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after it is unlocked If the time taken to close the door exceeds the shunt time an alarm is raised Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after the shunt time is exceeded If the time taken to close the door exceeds the debounce time an alarm is raised This debounce time is meant for the doors that swing often due to wind Note If the value is set to zero the debounce time is a minimum of 33 seconds on events going to normal but alarms are reported immediately The debounce time is 0 seconds on alarm See Table 11 1 for examples Select the Supervised check box to report the troubles when there is a change in state of input points Select Normally Closed or Normally Opened to specify the normal state of the door 11 106 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 8 Under Report Alarms select one of the following options e Never Never report an alarm on this input point e Always Report an alarm always e Trouble Report only the trouble conditions of the input point This is typically used for
478. normally changes from green to red on a valid card read changes from red to green Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 103 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 6 In the Command File list select a command file that is applicable to a panel 7 Select the following Host Grant options to grant the permission for the card WIN PAK User s Guide holders even if the card is not found in the panel e Disable Deny access to the card holders whose card details are not present in the panel e Open Door Enables the door to open even if the card is not found in the panel e Open Door and Update Panel Enables the door to open and also to download the card details to the panel Therefore the panel is updated Enter a Site Code to ensure that cards belong to the facility where access is attempted You can enter up to 8 site codes Tip To enter a site code double click any cell in the table type the site code and press ENTER You can press the ESC key to cancel the site code entry If no site code is defined the reader does not check for site codes to enable card access Note When the card formats for the panel is ABA card formats site codes cannot be entered To configure the Advanced options a Click Advanced The Panel Configuration Advanced Options dialog box appears Panel Configuration Advanced Options xj Advanced Options OOD Option Duress l Cancel OOL 16 bit card number
479. number and access level and attach it to the card holder To add a new card l 2 3 4 A O9 6 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Card Biometrics tab At the bottom click New next to Card Number Type a unique Card Number and press ENTER Select the Access Level of the new card The new card is added and attached to the card holder Tip To verify the card attachment click the Card tab and view the new card in the card list To print the badge design attached to the card click Print Badge Note After printing the badge the Status of printed is automatically changed to Printed However you are provided with an option to change Click OK to save and close the Card Holder dialog box Editing Card Holder Information To edit the card holder details l 2 Choose Card gt Card Holder The Card Holder window appears Select the card holder from the list and click Edit The Card Holder dialog box appears Refer to the Adding a Card Holder section in this chapter for information on editing card holder details Deleting a Card Holder To delete a card holder l 2 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Card gt Card Holder The Card Holder window appears Select the card holder to be deleted from the list and click Delete The Card Holder Dependency Conflict dialog box appears Card Holder Dependency Conflict X You have requested to delete a Card Holder This Card Holder has Card
480. o 0 625 to fill the entire badge outline 6 Adjust the Photo settings of the captured image Table 7 3 Live Screen Photo Settings Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the captured image Compress The captured image is saved as a jpg file If required use the slider to adjust the compression of the saved image The lower the number the greater the compression Note Images lose quality as they are compressed and thus it is recommended to avoid over compressing Example A setting of 100 applies the least amount of compression and provides the best image quality A setting of 30 applies the most compression but provides lower image quality 7 Click OK to save the image WIN PAK User s Guide 7 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Setting a background color You can set a background color for a badge or for an item on the badge for example a bitmap shape or signature The foreground color is not available unless an item is selected To select a color from the basic color palette 1 Right click on the badge outline and click Properties The Badge Element Layout dialog box appears 2 Click the Colors tab Badge Element Layout Ed Test Block Colors Positioning Foreground Color Background Color a Transparent Background OF Cancel Apply Help 3 Click the ellipsis provided near the Background Color box The Color dialog box is displayed
481. o Action OFF Action No Action Move To Available Select All De Select all Back Cancel Help Select the output points under Available Groups and click Move to Selected Alternatively click Select All to select all outputs points The output points are moved under the Selected Outputs list Select a Time Zone during which the output group must be turned on Select the required time unit for the pulse time and then set the Pulse Time for the output group to stay energized when it is triggered Set the interlocking for the output group Refer to the Interlocking section in this chapter for more details on interlocking 11 94 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 6 Define ADV for each group Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 7 Click Next to configure readers to the panel The Panel Configuration Readers dialog box appears Configuring a reader to the panel The number of readers available for the panel depends on the type of panel being configured The WIN PAK system automatically adds readers to the panel By default all available readers are active and are defined as doors If the anti passback option is not set the readers are set for a free egress configuration In addition you can associate galaxy
482. o filter the time zones to be included in the report a Click the Time Zone Filter tab b Under Time Zone select one of the following options Table 17 18 Describing the options for filtering time zones C Generates the report that includes all the time zones Generates the report for a single time zone When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the time zone to generate the report You can use the ellipsis button to find a time zone Generates the report for the range of time zones When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the first time zone name in From and the last time zone name in To You can use the ellipsis button to find a time zone 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 59 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 To perform advanced filter on time zones a Click the Advanced Time Zone Filter tab Report Time one X Time Zone Filter Sot Advanced Time Zone Filter Run from Archive Database 7 Time one Print Preview Used Unused f Both Export File Print Estim Pages Clear All
483. o isolate all the operator levels from the modem pool c To remove the modem pool from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the modem pool in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box Click OK Deleting a Modem Pool After isolating the panel loops attached to the modem and the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the modem pool To delete a modem pool l 2 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder Right click the modem pool and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click OK to confirm the deletion The modem pool is deleted from the device map 11 60 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop You can add C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK remote communication loops only to the modem pools defined as non ACK NAK hub i Adding a C 100 or 485 non ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop To add a C 100 loop or 485 non ACK NAK to a modem pool l 2 3 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder and the communication server Right click the non ACK NAK modem pool and click Add New C 100 Loop or Add New 485 Loop The Loop Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears for the selected loop type C 100 or 485 PCI 485
484. o readers panels such as PW 2000 II and PW 2000 III the reader 1 is used as in reader and reader 2 is used as out reader e In the four readers panels such as PW 2000 IV X the readers 1 and 3 are used as in readers and the readers 2 and 4 are used as out readers e Groups Output groups enable a card read to activate more than one output points for the applications such as elevator control For example when Reader 1 is associated to a group a valid card read on Reader 1 pulses all points in the group Groups must be selected to access the AEP 3 in Hardware Options e Forgiveness Anti passback violation can be forgiven by selecting the Forgiveness option When this option is selected all cards are reset during midnight Therefore the cardholders who have violated the anti passback option can now access their cards to enter the building Note If the anti passback option is not selected WIN PAK defaults to a free egress configuration In this case the door can be activated by a button motion detector or other devices For example with an PW 2000 II panel card reader 1 activates one door and card reader 2 activates a different door Inputs 3 and 4 are reserved for the exit devices for these two doors which release locks just like a valid card read Te WIN PAK User s Guide 11 86 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration e Keypads Indicates that the panel is using matrix style 11 wire keypads If
485. o view the report prior to printing it 6 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 7 Click Close to return to the Reports window History Report To generate a history report 1 In the Reports window select the History report and click Report Options The Report History dialog box appears x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Fun from Archive Database I Date Range Print Preview From Sunday Apri 03 2005 zs Print Ta Sunday April 03 2005 5 23 E J l Export File Daily Time Range zalm PET T Only list events between these hours each day From To ceal fo E 23 fs El Close Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi 2 To filter the records based on the specific date and time ranges a Click the Date and Time Filter tab b Under Date Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in the corresponding boxes WIN PAK User s Guide 17 46 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report d To generate reports for events occurring during a particular period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes f Select the standard time zone in
486. oceeding further Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Your PC is not protected turn on Windows Firewall Windows Firewall helps protect your computer by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to your computer through the Internet or a network Y On recommended This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab C Don t allow exceptions Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored x Off not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders Windows Firewall is using your non domain settings What else should know about Windows Firewall 3 Click the Exceptions tab and click Add Program to add the WIN PAK services as exceptions from Windows Firewall protection The Add Program dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is turned off Your computer is at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as the Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and
487. ocks dialog box Door Interlocks x R eader 1 Direct Point Free Egress Input Board 1 Port 3 Board 1 Fort 3 ont Inz2 Status Input Board 1 Fort 3 Ind Cancel 3 Use this dialog box to edit the default settings of the Direct Point Free Egress Input and Status Input as desired Note When you click Door Interlocks WIN PAK automatically determines the appropriate inputs for status and REX devices Direct point The Direct Point indicates the output that will be directly controlled by the reader 1 In the Door Interlocks dialog box click Direct Point to display the Direct Point Output dialog box PRO 2200 Direct Point Output Fa SIO Board Board 1 Port 3 S10 0 2 Reader once Output Strike Time E 0 e Unlock for Time Zone Hone r Control Mode Strike off when door close 2 Select an SIO Board with which you configure the direct point 3 Select an Output that has to be used as the door output or door lock Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 133 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration T Note The Output list contains only active output points that have not been added as ADVs The contents of the list depend on the SIO Board selected Specify the Strike Time This is the amount of time the direct point relay is pulsed or interlocked The default for this field is ten seconds but can be set up to 60 seconds In Unlock for
488. of an improper site code Invalid Time Zone A card was denied entry because it was used outside its time period Trace Card A card that is being traced was used and entry was granted Valid Card A valid card had been used and entry was granted Table 11 16 Describing Command File Server Actions Action Message Description Server OK The command file server is working properly Server Trouble The command file server is NOT working properly Verify that the WIN PAK Command File Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Table 11 17 Describing Communication Server Actions Action Message Description Server OK The communication server is working properly Server Trouble The communication server is NOT working properly Verify that WIN PAK Communication Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Table 11 18 Describing Door Entrance Actions Action Message Description Anti Passback A card was denied entry because it has already been used going Violation in out without properly going out in Card Not Found A card was denied entry because it was unknown to the reader Door Ajar The door has been left open longer than it must be based on a valid entry Door Normal The door is now closed Door Troubled The door status can not be accurately displayed due to tampering Expired Card
489. of the panel in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 156 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Deleting a Galaxy panel After isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the Galaxy panel To delete a Galaxy panel l 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the Galaxy panel and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click OK to confirm the deletion The Galaxy panel is deleted from the device map Adding a Vista Panel You can monitor and control intrusions using the Vista panel in WIN PAK In the Vista Panel Port you can add only one Vista panel To add multiple vista panels to the communication server you must add multiple Vista Panel Ports To add a Vista panel l 2 3 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the communication server Right click the Vista Panel Port and select Add New Vista Panel The Panel Configuration Basic dialog box appears Panel Configuration Basic xX ADY Hame Add t De Description Type PANEL ISTA_250FBP Tl Shae Firmware Revision ley 3 e 4 Back Cancel Help 4 Type the Name and Description of the Vista p
490. oft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows 2003 _ Windows 2003 Professional SP2 Professional SP2 Server SP 1 Database Engine MSDE 2000 MSDE 2000 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 OR Microsoft SQL Server 2005 later later System Prerequisites Stand alone Systems Before installing WIN PAK ensure that the following prerequisites are met e Service Pack 2 is installed for Windows XP Professional e Ifthe configuration is meant for Performance or Maximum Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is installed on the Database Server computer e A video capture card is installed on the badging workstation e Printer and printer drivers are installed e The energy management from the BIOS and the Operation system is disabled If not it may affect the installation and operation of WIN PAK WIN PAK User s Guide 2 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades e TCP IP protocol is installed for the proper functioning of MSDE e Microsoft Loopback or Dial up adapter is installed if network card does not exist Note WIN PAK may not function properly with the earlier versions of Internet Explorer 5 5 Therefore Honeywell recommends you to install IE 5 5 or later Before beginning the installation e Make a note of the CD Key which is provided inside the WIN PAK Quick Reference Guide cover This is required while installing WIN PAK e Read the release notes on the WIN PAK CD for additional installation information and u
491. olate O 5 NoADY se Time one Delete None gl Supervised Show Sec C Min C Hr C Normally Open Shunt Time jis f Homall Closed Debounce Time jo Sec T Interlocking w cay ae Paint z Alarm Action Normal Action Report Alarms Never Trouble f Always lt Back Cancel Help Notes T e WIN PAK sets some input points as active and may assign them an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel e The settings of these input points can be changed but you cannot make it inactive if it is interlocked with an output point 2 Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK to define an ADV for each input point 3 Select a Time Zone during which an input point must be deactivated 4 Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after it has been unlocked If the time taken to close the door exceeds the shunt time an alarm is raised 5 Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the maximum time allowed for the door to close after the shunt time is exceeded If the time taken to close the door exceeds the debounce time an alarm is raised This debounce time is meant for the doors that swing often due to wind Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 91 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration WE i For example consider the following scenarios
492. ollow Document 7 001009 Revision 01 6 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Quick Configuration Quick Start Wizard Adding a Panel A panel is a physical device in which the readers are connected through wires To create a new panel 1 In the Quick Start Wizard Configure dialog box click Add New Panel and WIN PAK User s Guide click Next The Panel dialog box appears Pf QUICK START WIZARD Panel QUICK START WIZARD Panel Panel Type Ns H Swords Pane3 Priory Park B o Add a new panel by configuring the following Panel Name Selectthe panel type panel name loop name panel address from the drop down list Loop Name Panel Address Note Each panel on a communication loop must hawe a unique address The address must correspond with the address which is set using DIP switches on the panel SIO BOARDS DONE lt Back Next gt Cancel Select the Panel Type Type a unique Panel Name If you select P Series TCP IP as the Panel Type a Type the Node Name IP Address of the panel b Select a unique Panel Address c In the Site Name select a site to which the panel must be associated d Click Next to add readers to a panel The Readers dialog box appears e Select the Reader Board Type as Reader Board or 2 Reader Board f Select the Reader Board Address If you select any other Panel Type a In the Loop Name select a loop to which the panel must be associated The loops are displayed
493. om WIN PAK to the C 100 loop Increasing the interval improves the bandwidth The default interval is set to 60 seconds as it is an optimal value Select Buffer all panels on exit to buffer the events on all the panels when the communication server 1s stopped Select Unbuffer all panels on startup to unbuffer all the panel events when the communication server 1s started 10 Select the standard Time Zone based on the loop location 11 Set the Panel Defaults for the panel loop 11 40 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops a I O Poll Interval Select the interval at which the signal must be sent to the panel to verify the communication and check the panel s input and output states By default the frequency interval is 60 seconds b Panel CMD Retry Count Specify the number of times a command must be resent to the panel if the event of the panel not responding to the command By default the command is resent 3 times c Panel CMD Time Out Specify the waiting time for receiving a response from the panel and for time out the command By default the loop waits for 5 seconds 12 Click Next to set the port for the loop Loop Configuration j x Basic Information Port Settings A DY Add Port COM 1 z Edit Bits per Second 3600 Isolate Data Bits Delete Parity None Stop Bits fi IP ddress or Node name Encryption Password M Show
494. om and To fields are enabled Enter the name of the accounts to generate the report You can use the ellipsis E button to find the access level c Under Print Data Fields click None to exclude the data fields or click All to include all the data fields of the account in the report WIN PAK User s Guide 17 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report 3 To sort the account list in the report a In the Report Account dialog box click the Sort tab Report Account g i X Arem ia E Bun from Archive Database 7 Print Preview Print i Ascending Descending Export File Estim Pages Clear All tHE Close b Under Sort Order select the field on which the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the accounts in the ascending or descending order 4 Click Print Preview to view the Account Report prior to printing 5 Click Print to send the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Attendance Report The Attendance Report helps to know the entry and exit details of the card holders who have presented their card in the reader of the tracking area The Administrator required this report for audit To generate the attendance report 1 In the Reports window select the Attendance report and click Report Options The Report Attendance dialog box appears Report Attendance X Attendanc
495. omain Environment and Workgroup Environment Configuration Type DOMAIN Environment WORKGROUP Environment Communication The Servers and Clients The server and client communicate using the secure communicate using an RPC connection anonymous communication protocol Services Requires Domain User and Does not require Domain User Configuration password for accessing Server and password for accessing Services Server Services Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started System Manager Table 4 1 Comparing the configuration between Domain Environment and Workgroup Environment Configuration Type DOMAIN Environment WORKGROUP Environment Client Configuration Requires Domain User Log On Does not require Domain User for running the UI client Log On for running the UI client Windows Firewall Requires unblocking all the Requires unblocking all the Configuration WIN PAK services and client WIN PAK services and client from Windows Firewall from Windows Firewall protection protection Note In Windows Server Note In Windows Server 2003 disable the Firewall 2003 disable the Firewall protection to allow DOMAIN protection to allow connectivity WORKGROUP connectivity System Manager The System Manager is a utility in WIN PAK to locate its various software components The machine name and protocol end point for each program component is displayed in the System Manager Honeywell recommends
496. ommand File dialog box appears Report Command File X Command File Filter Sort Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Command file G All Print One Range Export File Estim Pages Clear All Close EEE 2 To filter command files to be included in the report a Click the Command File Filter tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 33 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report b Under Command File select one of the following options Table 17 8 Describing the options for filtering card holders Description Generates the report that includes all the command files Generates the report for a single command file When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the command file to generate the report You can use the ellipsis E button to find the access level Generates the report for the range of command files When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the starting command file name in From and the ending command file name in To You can use the ellipsis button to find the command files 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab Report Command File X Run from amp rchive Database P Command File Filter Sort Sort Order Print Preview Print i Ascending Descending Exp
497. ommand in the Command File sections in this chapter to add or edit commands to the command file Document 7 001009 Revision 01 13 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Command File Configuration List of Commands The following list shows standard commands available when defining Command Files Table 13 1 Command and Parameter list for ADVs wom woe emt roe cme p wm o rte fom fomon C w po ee foe WIN PAK User s Guide 13 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Command File Command File Configuration Table 13 1 Command and Parameter list for ADVs Sec w o w sw o w rooms fumes Control re me C emm aa mom Document 7 001009 Revision 01 13 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Command File Command File Configuration a Table 13 1 Command and Parameter list for ADVs C fame peneman emen wow pee a Vista Panel ArmAway Partitions In the Partition list select the partitions to be armed ArmStay Partitions In the Partition list select the partitions to be armed DisArm Partitions In the Partition list select the partitions to be disarmed fai em Send Keypress Key entries 0 to 9 A to D wem p Note Consider the following if you are selecting the Buffer or Unbuffer command for panels e When you select a Buffer command all the events are stored in the panel The events are stored in the panel buffer and cannot be viewed in the Event view and Alarm view windows in t
498. ons in a buffer storage This number is decreased or increased to provide more or less memory for cards if necessary 1 transaction 16 bytes so 100 000 transactions takes up 1 6 MB of memory 1 card record within 20 to 80 bytes This depends upon the use of precision access levels versus multiple access levels and the number of card readers per Intelligent Controller Tip Adding an extended memory board to the Intelligent Controller provides more memory to work with Select the Host Grant option to provide fault tolerance even if the card is not found in the panel device e Host Grant options are used when for example a number of cards are entered in the database but not yet downloaded to the panel e The available options are Disable Does not allow the card holder if the card is not found in the panel Open Door Enables the door to open even if the card is not found in the panel Open Door and Update Panel Enables the door to open and also to download the card details to the panel Therefore the panel is updated 7 Click Next to set the card formats for the P Series panel 11 118 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Configuring card formats Device Map Panel Configuration The available card format types for P Series panels are Wiegand and ABA The first three formats are set by default however you can set the other card formats using the Custom option To configure the card format
499. oops amp 485PCiLoop a N1000Panel1 E F N1000P nett N1000Panel1 Entrance N1000P nel Input WE N1000Panel WE N1000Panell WE N1000Panell WE N1000Panell WE N1000Panel 9 N1000Panel Output ioj x 2 Expand the control area to view the details of its branches and devices The status of each device is indicated by the following icons to the left of the device name Normal status w Alarm condition gt Unknown status WIN PAK User s Guide 11 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps The icons for the Galaxy devices and Vista devices vary depending on the action that is set on them In addition the icon color changes for various device status The following table provides you various icons that are displayed for different status Device Action Icon Status Description Types Group Pa Set Arm Normal rtition Reset Disarm No alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Unbypassed Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Normal No alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Alarm Alarm Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Group Pa Normal rtition Zone Bypassed Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged o
500. operty of WIN PAK Servers 1 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and open Administrative Tools gt Services The Services window appears By default the Log On As property is Local System for all the WIN PAK servers WIN PAK User s Guide 4 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration ah Services File Acton VWiew Help e m en E i Mame Description Stat Startup T LogOnAs Services Local Sa windows Management Instrument Provides systems mana Manual Local Systern Sa Windows Time Maintains date and time Start Automatic Local System Sa WIN PAK Archive Database Server Automatic Local System Sia WIN PAK Command File Service Automatic Local System ity WIN PAK Communication Server Automatic Local System ae WIN PAK Database Server Automatic Local 5 ity WIN PAK Guard Tour Server Automatic Local System ity WIN PAK Muster Server Automatic Local System ity WIN PAK schedule Service Automatic Local System Siy Wireless Zer Configuration Provides automatic con Start Automatic Local System iy whl Performance Adapter Provides performance li Manual Local Systern fy Workstation Creates and maintains c Stark Automatic Local System g Extended A standard 7 2 Select and double click the required WIN PAK Server from the right pane of the Services window The WIN PAK Server Properties window appears WIN PAK Database Server
501. or Bee to move it to the corresponding recipients list OR Type the e mail Ids in the corresponding Message Recipients boxes Note To remove an Id from the recipients list select the Id and press DELETE 9 Click OK to save the e mail Ids and close the dialog box Send Date and Time Select Send Date and Time task type to update the panel date and time with the system timing However this task is scheduled by default If you select this type perform the following steps 1 In the Schedule dialog box select how often the task is to be performed in the Frequency list Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Schedule Schedule Schedule Hame Update Custom Access Level Type Update Custom Access Level Frequency Day 0 Command File nal Femote Area Remote Ara r T Butter Send Date and Time F Unbutfer Send Card DE Changes Next Scheduled Date amp Time iar 9 2006 a Hour Minute fiz foq Now Cancel Apply Help 2 Under Next Scheduled Date and Time select the date and enter the time in hours and minutes for the task to be performed Notes i e To select the date click the ellipsis El button and the calendar appears e To enter the time type the Hour and Minute The hour ranges from 0 to 23 and minute ranges from 0 to 59 e To enter the current date and time click Now 3 Click OK to save the schedule
502. or can log on to WIN PAK Import Utility Z 3 Click Connect The system retrieves the data from database and displays the WIN PAK ImportUtility dialog box Defining Order of Fields After you define the note fields and card holder tabs you must define the order of the card and card holder fields To define the order of the fields Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 35 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Importing Card and Card Holder Information 1 Log on to the WIN PAK Import Utility The WIN PAK ImportUtility dialog box appears Fal WIN PAK ImportUtility i x Account Account ki Columns Order Order Name First Hame Last Name Card Number Issue Number PIM Status CSV File Path E Images Folder E e 2 Select the Account to which the order is to be defined The card holder fields for the selected account are listed in Columns Order 3 To change the order of a row select the row in the list and click the up a button and or down 7 button Note Ensure that you enter card holder information in the excel sheet in the order specified under Column Order For example Row 0 in the Columns Order becomes Column 1 in the excel sheet and Row 1 in the Columns Order becomes Column 2 in the excel sheet T Entering Card and Card Holder Information in an Excel Sheet Before you create the excel sheet make a note of the column order in which the fields must be entered To enter the card and card
503. or plan view Includes sections on defining commands command files and for controlling devices by executing the command files Describes how to define and run guard tours Explains the different ways available for tracking and monitoring events in the access control system Describes how to translate the user interface using the language text file and on creating language files Assists you in generating the variety of reports that can be exported viewed or printed Includes a section on performing a cold restart of the access control panel in the event of the power surge l 2 Document 7 XXXXXX Revision B Symbol Definition Symbol Definition The following table lists the symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions Note Identifies information that requires special consideration Tip Identifies advice or hints for the user often in terms of performing a task Example Identifies an example that complies with the concept Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in serious injury or death Caution Indicates a situation which if not avoided may result in equipment or work data on the system being damaged or lost or may result in the inability to properly operate the process Contacts The contact details for Honeywell Access Systems are as follows Honeywell Access Systems 135 West Forest Hill Avenue Oak Creek WI 53154 U S A OF
504. ormed at the defined time periods In WIN PAK a task includes running a command file guard tour or generating a report and so on Refer to the Schedule section in this chapter for scheduling a task Holiday Group A holiday group is a set of holidays The access decision is based on the time zone that you associate to an entrance in the access level and the holiday group you associate while configuring panels Refer to the Holiday Group section in this chapter for configuring a holiday group Daylight Saving Group Daylight saving group is a set of daylight saving time slots Daylight Saving Time is the time during which clocks are set one hour ahead of local standard time Refer to the Daylight Saving Group section in this chapter for configuring a daylight saving group WIN PAK User s Guide 9 2 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Time Management Time Zone Time Zone Time Zones can be assigned to cards action groups ADVs operators panels and access levels Therefore ensure that you define the time zone first before defining these items Always On and Never On are the system generated time zones that are available in WIN PAK by default e Always On This time zone allows full time access to the card holder assigned to it e Never On This time zone restricts the access of the card holder assigned to it Adding a Time Zone To add a new time zone 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management g
505. orresponding loop icon is displayed for the panel loop in the Device tree structure For the communication port loop the s icon is displayed For the TCP IP port loop the fc icon is displayed Editing a C 100 Panel Loop To edit a C 100 panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the C 100 loop and click Configure The Loop Configuration dialog box appears Loop Configuration i X Basic Information Fort Settings ADY Panel Defaults ade 170 Pall Interval Description E0 Sec Edit Isolate Panel CMD Retry Count Loop Yerfication Interval Sec 3 Delete 60 Panel CMD Time Out 5 Show Buffer all panels on exit O Unbuffer all panels on startup Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi Z Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the loop using the Basic Information and Port Settings tabs Refer to the Adding a C 100 Panel Loop section in this chapter for configuring C 100 panel loop 5 Click OK to configure the loop Isolating and Deleting a C 100 Panel Loop You cannot delete a C 100 panel loop until you delete the panels attached to it and remove all references to the C 100 Panel Loop from floor plans and operator levels WIN PAK User s Guide 11 42 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Isolating a C 100 panel loop To isolate a C
506. ort File Estim Pages Clear All b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window WIN PAK User s Guide 17 34 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Control Area Report The Control Area report displays the branches or devices that are configured in Control Area To generate a control area report 1 In the Reports window select the Control Area report and click Report Options The Report Control Area dialog box appears Report Control Area p X Filter Run from Archive Database P Print Preview Print Export File Estim Pages Clear All rears je Bears jamais ps Sem pee S No filter or sort options are provided for the control area report 2 Click Print Preview to view the Access Area Report prior to printing 3 Click Print to send the report to your printer 4 Click Close to return to the Reports window Device Map Report To generate a device map report 1 In the Reports window select the Device Map report and click Report Options The Report Device Map dialog box appears Report Device Map x Device Filter Run from A
507. otate 2 Click amp in the Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box 3 Place the mouse pointer on one of the corners of the object you want to rotate 4 Click and drag the mouse pointer to rotate the object Note In addition you can rotate an object by setting the Rotation Angle in the object Control Properties We To re arrange the object 1 In the floor plan design select the object you want to re arrange 2 Drag the object and place it where you require in the floor plan Note Save the changes made to the floor plan controls by clicking Save in the Floor B Plan Toolbox dialog box Editing a Floor Plan To edit a floor plan 1 Choose Configuration gt Floor Plan Definition The Floor Plan Definition window appears 2 Highlight the floor plan you want to edit from the list of floor plans 3 Click Edit The Floor Plan Toolbox dialog box and the floor plan design appear WIN PAK User s Guide 12 14 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations 4 Change the name or description of the floor plan add or delete objects or edit the properties of existing objects 5 Click Save and Exit to save the changes made to the floor plan and return to the Floor Plan Definition window 6 Click Close X to close the Floor Plan Definition window Deleting a Floor Plan To delete a floor plan 1 Choose Configuration gt Floor Plan Definition The Floor Plan Definition window appears 2 Select the floor p
508. ote Phone Number Modem 235333 Modem 1 Cancel Help 4 Type a unique Name of the remote communication loop This field is mandatory 5 Type the Description for the 485 ACK NAK loop 6 Create an ADV for your communication loop Click Add under ADV set the ADV properties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration Note The ACK NAK check box is disabled You cannot clear this check box as you are adding the ACK NAK loop T 7 Increase or decrease the Loop Verification Interval Sec to verify whether the loop is responding to a signal that is sent from WIN PAK to the C 100 loop Note Increasing the interval improves the bandwidth The default interval is set to 60 seconds as it is an optimal value T 8 Select Buffer all panels on exit to buffer the events on all the panels when the communication server stops 9 Select Unbuffer all panels on startup to unbuffer all panel events when the communication server restarts 10 Select the standard Time Zone based on the loop location 11 Set the Panel Defaults for the remote communication loop a I O Poll Interval Select the interval at which the signal must be sent to the panel to verify the communication and check the panel s input and output states By default the frequency interval is 60 seconds b Panel CMD Retry Count Specify the number of times a command mus
509. ous WIN PAK operations Fie View Account Operations Card System Reports Configuration Window Help Table 3 2 Menu names and Shortcut Keys File ALT F Contains options to configure printers to log on and log off from the application to quit from WIN PAK to view the reports window and so on View ALT V Enables you to disable or enable the toolbar and the status bar ALT A Enables you to work with the accounts Operations ALT O Enables you to perform various operations such as viewing events alarms working with digital video and so on Card ALT C Contains options for working with access cards and access levels ALT S Contains options for setting system defaults ALT R Enables you to generate and view reports Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 5 WIN PAK User s Guide User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements Table 3 2 Menu names and Shortcut Keys Catamion ATN N Contains options E E E eee setting general hardware configuration before working with WIN PAK Window ALT W Enables you to toggle between the multiple open windows ALT H Contains Contains options to view the online help to view the online Contains options to view the online help To access the options in the menu bar Using the pointing device mouse 1 Click the menu you want to access 2 Click the required option The corresponding window appears Example To gain access to the Card Holder menu click Card and then cli
510. panel loop until you delete the P series panels attached to it and remove all the references of a P series panel loop from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a P series panel loop To isolate a P series panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the P series panel loop and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 55 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Communication Loops Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device P Senes Loop Mame Description Remove Remove All Eancel Help 3 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of P series panel loop a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the P series panel loop is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the P series panel loop and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the panel loop 4 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of P series panel loop a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the P series panel loop is displayed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the P series panel loop and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator level
511. pdates Networked Systems Before installing WIN PAK for the first time in the networked system ensure that the following prerequisites are met in addition to the stand alone systems prerequisites e Network cards are installed on a networked system A standard Windows compatible network card 1s adequate e Ensure that the client computer name is alphanumeric characters without spaces and the first character is always an alphabet standard UNC connections e Ensure that an unrestricted permanent path is established between the networked computers Any firewalls proxies or routers between workstations must not restrict the communication Installation and Upgrades Overview T The WIN PAK installation setup installs the required components and programs depending on the type of installation The WIN PAK software is distributed on an auto run CD with release notes and other technical documents Note e Quit all the Windows applications running in the computer before installing WIN PAK on your computer e During installation if you are prompted by the Do you want to keep this file message click Yes If not the existing dll files are overwritten Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades Installing WIN PAK To install WIN PAK 1 Insert the WIN PAK CD into the CD drive An installation browser opens If the browser does not open browse to the CD folder and
512. perties and click OK Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 80 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Vista Panel Port Home Automation Mode 6 Click Next to configure the Vista port The Vista Port Configuration Port Settings dialog box appears 7 Select the Port for communication You can select the TCP IP Connection if you use the Micro Cobox converter for converting RS 232 to TCP IP Fort TCPAIF Connection r Bits Second Data Bits hae This iz the Vista panel Fati Master User Code P Show Stop Bits Master User Code Installer Code P Address or Hode Mame Fort No lt Back Cancel Help Note When you click the text box the corresponding help is displayed on the right of the dialog box we 8 Type the Master User Code of the Vista panel This enables you to operate on the Vista panel in WIN PAK 9 Type the Installer Code of the Vista panel This enables you to change the Vista panel settings in WIN PAK 10 If you select the TCP IP Connection type the IP Address or Node Name of the Micro Cobox converter Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 Click Next to advance to the Finish dialog box 12 Click Next to configure the vista panel port The Vista Panel Port for vista panel is configured Refer to the Add
513. perties and to return to the Floor Plan Toolbox window Adding Links to other Floor Plans A floor plan link object enables you to open another floor plan within the current floor plan You can view the floor plan that you open and control the devices that are placed on it However you cannot add new or remove the existing objects from the floor plan To add a floor plan link 1 In the Floor Plan Toolbox window drag and place it into the floor plan background 2 Right click the object and select Control Properties The Floor Plan Link Properties dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Definition Floor Plan Link Properties x General Mame Floor Plan Floor Plan Link Rotation Angle lo W Show Name W Show Tooltip I Open in same window 3 Type aname for the floor plan link in Name By default the link appears with Floor Plan Link as its name 4 Select the name of the floor plan to be linked in the Floor Plan list 5 To rotate the ADV control enter the Rotation Angle or use the scroll bars to select an angle from the list 6 Select the Show Name check box to display the name of the floor plan link below the ADV in the floor plan 7 Select the Show Tooltip check box to display the ADV name as a tool tip 8 Select the Open in same window check box to replace the original floor plan with the target floor plan in th
514. phic files Windows Metafile and are stored in the WINPAK PRO Database FloorPlanImage folder ADVs representing devices in the Access System can be added to a floor plan These ADVs can be monitored and controlled from the floor plan Different objects for example a door a panel or a C 100 loop are available in the toolbox for the types of ADVs Links to other floor plans can be added to a floor plan These links enable you to view other floor plans from the currently open floor plan Links to Alarm View and Event View of devices can be added to a floor plan These links enable you to view the alarm and the event views of devices from the floor plan Text blocks can be added to the floor plan for adding additional information in the floor plan For example you can add a text block for creating a legend explaining the color codes of the ADVs or special instructions for the operator for viewing a particular floor plan After the floor plan is created with ADVs links and text blocks you can view it through a floor plan view to monitor the status of the ADVs and to control the ADVs by commands Floor Plan Definition Defining a floor plan involves 1 Adding a floor plan 2 Creating floor plan designs which involves placing ADVs on the floor plan providing links to other floor plans and links to alarm and event views 3 Adjusting the size of the floor plan and previewing it 4 Editing and deleting a floor plan WIN P
515. plus sitecode LOW 20 bit card number plus sitecode JOH 25 bit card number plus sitecode Initialization Command JBMZO Outputs for duress OD Option b Select the Multiple Interlock Protection MIP check box if you want all input points tied to a single output return to a normal state before the output is de energized Without MIP just one input returning to the normal state de energizes the output c Select the OD Duress Option check box to activate the pulse action for the output defined in the Outputs for Duress when the PIN is used one value low or high in case of emergencies like threatening This check box is enabled only when the PIN option is selected d Select the OL 16 bit card number plus site code check box to create WIEGAND card numbers by concatenating the site code and the card 11 104 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration numbers The result is transmitted as a 12 digit number Do not add site codes to the panel with this option e Select the OJ 20 bit card number plus site code to set the format for 20 bit card numbers The first 12 bits are interpreted as the site code and the last 8 as the card number The card number is sent to the head end software as a 12 digit number f Select the OH 25 bit card number plus site code check box to set the special card format applications Note The OJ OL or OH option cannot be used at the same time we ga In the
516. ply Help 3 Configure the modem pool using the Basic Information tab You can also add edit or delete the modems to the modem pool Refer to the Adding a Modem Pool section in this chapter for configuring modem pool 4 Click OK to configure a modem Isolating and Deleting a Modem Pool You cannot delete a modem pool until you delete the loops added to it and remove all the references of the modem pool ADV from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a Modem Pool To isolate a modem pool 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the modem pool and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 59 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools 4 To isolate floor plans from a modem pool ADV a Click the Floor Plans tab The floor plans associated to the modem pool are listed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the modem pool and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the modem pool 5 To isolate operator levels from a modem pool ADV 6 a Click the Operator Levels tab The operator levels associated to the modem pool are listed b Select the operator levels to be isolated from the modem pool and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated OR Click Remove all t
517. port Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder to view the Card Holder and History folders Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Report Templates E ReportTemplate gels es _ Report Templates H E Card Holder CETE Find F3 3 Right click the History folder and click Add The Report History dialog box appears Report History i i x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Date Range Print Preview From Friday hay 19 2006 eI jo Toe Friday May 19 2006 Ey 23 Daily Time Range Print Export File Estim Pages T Only list events between these hours each day From Ta Leenal f H EH EH Time Zone GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai New Delhi Cc iF ERE Close Save Template Save As i Name of the History Report template Refer to the History Report section in this chapter for more on defining the filter options for the generating history report 4 Type the name of the History Report template in the text box on the right 5 Click Save Template to save the template 6 To create a copy of the template click Save As The Save As Copy Report Template dialog box appears Save As Copy Report Template Report Template Name Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 17 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 8 Reports Report Templa
518. pose When you add or delete a card to an inactive panel the card details are simply saved e Not Present To define the panel before completing the panel installation If the panel is marked as Not Present no card transactions are saved 9 Enter the unique Address for the panel from 1 through 31 The address corresponds to the DIP Switches setting on the panel Consult the NS2 installation manual for further information 10 Click Add under ADV and set the ADV properties to create an ADV for the panel Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 11 Click Next to specify the Card Format The Panel Configuration Card Format dialog box appears Setting the card format for the panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Card Format dialog box select the card format type as ABA or WIEGEND The card formats are displayed based on the selected card format type Panel Configuration Card Format Fa e Fa Mi2s4se7eai0n 2 Bae Fal 1234567891011 121314 1516 41234567869 TEREE WIEGAND fe 234567991011 12 5 ole i Inverse Card Formats ADW Add Edit Jeolete Delete P Show fra i 26 fs fifo fi fer fez es fee Det _ fra 2 2f slo fofofer fez safes Det fra 3 34 sf fo fi fer fez es fes Det coe el ht a ao g ae Pao lt Back Cancel Help 2 Ifyou select ABA select one of the fo
519. ptions for handling alarms Acknowledge This is to acknowledge an alarm When an alarm is acknowledged it is moved to the lower pane of the Alarm View window The message remains in the lower pane until it is cleared Note If the Automatically Clear Acknowledged Alarms option is selected in System Defaults it is not moved to the lower pane of the Alarm View window when you acknowledge an alarm Open Default This enables you to open the default floor plan associated to the Floor Plan device from where the alarm is triggered Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in the chapter Device Map for defining the default floor plan for an ADV Add Note This enables you to provide comments on acknowledging the alarm When you click this option the Add Operator Note dialog box is opened Handling Alarms using the Command buttons A set of buttons on the Alarm View window enables you to easily handle basic routine alarm tasks Filter On Control Alarm Card Read f Both Command gt Buttons Selection None Table 15 3 Describing command buttons in the Alarm View window Acknowled To acknowledge an alarm select it from the list of incoming alarms and ge Ack click Ack When the alarm is acknowledged it moves to the list in the lower pane of the Alarm View window However if the Automatically Clear Acknowledged Alarms option is selected in System Defaults the alarm 1s cleared as soon as it
520. r s Guide Document Structure Chapter 6 Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Badging Chapter 8 Card Holders Chapter 9 Time Management Chapter 10 Device Map Chapter 11 Defining Areas Chapter 12 Floor Plan Chapter 13 Command File Chapter 14 Guard Tour Chapter 15 Monitoring Actions Chapter 16 Translation Chapter 17 Reports Appendix WIN PAK User s Guide Description Comprises sections for configuring servers panels and readers using Quick Start wizard Describes how to design a badge configure the badge DLLs and the badge printer Includes information on setting up the card holder template card holders cards and assigning card holders to cards and badges In addition this chapter describes how to use the WIN PAK Import Utility to import the card and card holder information to WIN PAK from an Excel sheet Explains how to set time zones schedule an event and define holiday groups and daylight saving groups Comprises sections for configuring servers panels readers and abstract devices and in addition includes instructions on how to monitor intrusions using the Galaxy and Vista Panels Describes how to define access areas control areas and tracking and muster areas control devices through the control map and monitor card holder movement in the tracking and muster areas through the tracking and muster view Explains how to create floor plans and control devices from the flo
521. r plans and operator levels you can delete the non ACK NAK remote communication loop To delete a non ACK NAK remote communication loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the non ACK NAK remote communication loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 3 Click OK to delete The non ACK NAK remote communication loop is deleted from the device map 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop You can add a 485 ACK NAK remote communication loop only to a modem pool with ACK NAK Hub Adding a 485 ACK NAK Remote Communication Loop To add 485 remote connection with ACK NAK to a modem pool 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and the communication server 3 Right click the ACK NAK modem pool and click Add New 485 ACK NAK Loop The 485 PCI Loop Configuration Basic Information dialog box for appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 64 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools 485 PCI Loop Configuration Basic Information Hame Panel Defaults Basea 1 0 Poll Interval Description Eo Sec SF Oakland O Panel CMD Retry Count ACK MAK p M Panel CMD Time Out 5 Sec M Buffer all panels on exit M Unbuffer all panels on startup Time one GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana Rem
522. r cleared Normal No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Alarm Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Alarm No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged or cleared Zone Tamper Alarm Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Device i Description Types No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Bypassed Activated Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Normal Normal No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Normal Normal Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Normal Normal No Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Normal Normal Alarm in the Alarm View window Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared All types Any action Unkno No Alarm in the Alarm View wn window Alarm is acknowledged and cleared Unkno Alarm in the Alarm View window wn Alarm waiting to be acknowledged or cleared Move the mouse over the icons to view a textual description of each device status 3 To control a device right click the device and select the command The commands available for each ADV control are lis
523. r door to per door be displayed in the Alarm View window By default the Alarm View window displays the 100 most recent events per door This value can range from 10 through 500 3 Click Apply to save the alarm handling settings Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 29 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Specifying default e mail Ds for reporting alarms You can configure the e mail IDs to whom the e mails for alarms would be sent To specify default e mail IDs for reporting alarms 1 In the System Config dialog box click the Email Configuration tab x Defaults Alam Handing EMail Configuration Login Logout Access Levels Sender Authentication Method Username Password Mail Server Host ame Fort Number Misc Encoding Westem European 150 Configure E mail ID s Cancel Apply Help 2 Under Sender select the Authentication Method for sending the mail e AUTH LOGIN The password is encrypted while sending to the server This ensures security e LOGIN PLAIN The password is sent to the server without encryption Type the Username and Password for the selected authentication method Under Mail Server type the HostName or IP address of the mail server Type the Port Number of the mail server Under Misc select the Encoding format a o a a E a Click Configure E mail IDs to configure the e mail IDs of the users to whom alarm reports must b
524. r more details on setting language for operators To select a language 1 Choose Configuration gt Select Language Configuration Window Hel Define d Device Time Management j i Quick Start Wizard Card Holder Badge i Select Language Translate wj Command File a Guard Tour iti Floor Plan Definition The Select Language dialog box appears x Al Fran ais v Cancel OF Select a language for translation from the list Click OK Note The sub menu options Dialogs Menus and Other Text are enabled in the Configuration gt Translate menu You can edit the entries for dialog boxes menus and the other text However you cannot edit the user interface entries if you have selected the language as English United States Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Language Configuration Adding or editing entries for translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text T On selecting a language the WIN PAK user interface is translated based on the entries in the language text file In case of a new language the text file would initially be empty In such a case you can translate the captions for all the dialogs menus and other text present in the user interface The translated captions are entered in the language text file In addition you can edit the translated captions for all dialogs menu and the other text in t
525. r p 9 Click OK to add a new card holder tab layout Rearranging the Card Holder Tab Layouts You can rearrange the card holder tab layouts in a sequence that has to be displayed in the Card Holder window To rearrange the card holder tab layouts 1 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Card Holder Tab Layout The Card Holder Tab Layout window appears 2 Select the card holder tab layout to be rearranged 3 Click a or to move the selected tab up or down The card holder tab layouts are rearranged accordingly Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Configuring Autocard Lookup When a card is accessed WIN PAK identifies the card holder and displays the basic information in AutoCard Lookup by default Refer to the Autocard Lookup section in the chapter Monitoring Actions for more details on activating autocard lookup window and viewing the card holder details If you want to view additional information of the card holder in the Autocard Lookup window you have to configure the settings using the Autocard Lookup option To include additional information note fields of the card holder 1 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Configure Autocard Lookup The Autocard Lookup Configuration dialog box appears Autocard Lookup Configuration x Show Note Fields i Car license plate card holder note C Name plates Cancel
526. r plan preview and select View Area The Floor Plan Change View Area dialog box appears Floor Plan Change View Area Ei View Area 25 of window Cancel In View Area type the percentage for reducing or enlarging the view area or use the slider at the bottom of the window Click OK A preview of the floor plan is displayed Controlling System Devices from the Floor Plan You can control system devices by executing commands from the floor plan view In addition you can view and control other floor plans by clicking the floor plan link and view the alarms and events for a specific device by clicking the alarm and the event view links To run commands for ADVs from a floor plan view l Right click an ADV on the floor plan view to open its control menu Commands for performing actions on the ADV are displayed in the menu Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations T 8 Note The commands vary based on the selected device 2 Select the required command from the menu Note To select more than one ADV of the same type press and hold down CTRL and click each ADV Right click any one of the ADVs in the selected group and then select the required control function See Table 12 2 in this section for information on ADVs and their control functions To open other floor plans e Right click in the floor plan view and click Open The floor
527. r the schedule server Tip To find the machine name a Right click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears b Click the Computer Name tab c Look for Full computer name field This is the machine name of your computer d Note down the machine name and click OK Type a Protocol end point number that is not used by any another device on the network Note Each server must have a unique Protocol end point that can range from 1024 to 9999 The default number of Protocol end point need not be changed However you can change the number if you have multiple servers in your device map Click Next to proceed to the final dialog box for the Schedule Server Configuration 10 Click Finish to add the server to the Device Map Editing a Schedule Server To edit a schedule server l 2 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map Right click the schedule server and click Configure The Schedule Server Configuration dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration 5 Click OK to configure the schedule server Isolating and Deleting a Schedule Server Schedule Server Configuration Schedule Server Configuration Description Jaded by Quick Start Wizard Machine
528. r the selected loop You are also provided with an option to display the details of all or a range of loops Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 37 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report x Device Filter Panel Filter Run from Archive Database Type Print Preview P Series Direct P Series Remote P Series Print i N 1000 PW 2000 C NS2 C Galaxy Export File Vista Estim Pages E Clear All Close Panels to Print EE f All One Range Print Advanced Options To select the type of loop a Click the Panel Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as Panels b Under Type select the type of panel P Series Direct P Series Remote P Series N 1000 PW 2000 NS2 or Galaxy c Enter the name of the Loop to include the panel of this loop You can use the ellipsis El button to select the communication server Note oe The Loop option is disabled if the Galaxy Vista or Direct P Series panel type is selected The Loop option changes to Modem Pool if the Remote P Series panel type is selected To select the range of panels a Under Panels to Print select one of the following options e All to include all the panels e One to include a single panel that you select in the From field e Range to include a range of panels that you select in the From and To fields e You can use ellipsis El button to select a loop
529. rator Level Time Zone and Account options are enabled in the Operator Information tab only when you change the role operator type of the user from Admin to Operator in the Operator tab T 6 Ifthe Administrator is a card holder select the card holder in the Card Holder list or use the ellipsis LI button to locate the Administrator in the card holders list 7 Select the Language of the Administrator 8 Click OK to save the changes Note If you select the operator type as Operator you must select the following e Operator Level to be assigned to the operator T e Time Zone during which the operator is given card access e Accounts that must be associated to the operator Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 7 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Operators Operators Operators are the individuals with a set of privileges to work with the WIN PAK system An operator can log on to WIN PAK using a user name and password Operators are assigned by operator levels where the access rights are configured for the WIN PAK system components Operator Levels The operator level defines the privileges of the operator to work with WIN PAK When an operator is assigned to an operator level the operator gains access for the system components that are configured in the operator level In an operator level the rights are configured for the following system components e Command Files To run the command files e Control Area To con
530. rchive Database P Device Print Previews Print T Print AD Name Export File Use Double Spacing Print one card per page Estim Pages Clear All Addi Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 35 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report 2 Under Device Filter select the Print ADV Name check box to include the abstract device names in the report 3 To filter the devices to be included in the report select a device in the Device list Device A corresponding tab with additional filter options is added to the dialog box Servers The Device Map Report can include communication servers or all other servers You are also provided with an option to display all or a range of servers x Device Filter Server Filter Run from Archive Database Print i Communication Servers Print All Other Servers Servers to Print cence To select the type of server a Click the Server Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as Servers b Under Print select the type of server Communication Servers or All Other Servers To select the range of servers a Under Servers to Print select one of the following options e All to include all the servers e One to include a single server that you select in the From field e Range to include a range of servers that you select in the From and To fields WIN PAK User s Guide 17 36 Document
531. rd To add an SIO board of 2 Reader IO board type 1 In the P Series Configuration SIO Boards dialog box click Add The Select Board Type dialog box appears for you to select the SIO board type xj Edit Isolate Delete Show x cas pe _an 16 Relay Output Cancel Allocated readers 0 C 2 Reader 1 0 C 1 Reader 1 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 2 In the Select Board Type dialog box select the 2 Reader I O board type 3 Click OK to configure the basic information of SIO Board The SIO Board Configuration dialog box appears 4 Click the Basic tab It is displayed by default WIN PAK User s Guide 11 122 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration SIO Board Configuration x Basic Reader Inputs Outputs ADV Address a Port 3 Yv No of errors before going off line 3 V Enable Communication with SIO V Reverse 1 0 poll sequence 5 Type a unique Address for the SIO Board 6 In the Port list select the port from which the board communicates with the Intelligent Controller 7 In the Number of Errors before Going Off Line field type a number of attempts the panel must make to communicate with the communication server before tripping the offline trigger This field defaults to 3 8 Select the Enable Communication with SIO check box for enabling connection with the SIO Board Select this check box on
532. rd frequency report click the Card Holder Filter tab x Date and Time Filter Frequency Filter Card Holder Filter First Name Last Name Erin Previews Pritt Card Number E Export File Tracking Area Estim Pages Not Used Clear All Card Codes Account Walid Card Accoun Ww Trace Card Save amp Close i Coor Unlocked 10 Type the First Name and Last Name of the card holder or select them by clicking the ellipsis El button 11 Type the Card Number of the card holder or select it by clicking the ellipsis button 12 To generate the card frequency reports of the card holders accessing a specific area select one of the options from the Tracking Area list e Exit Area Card reads not shown To generate the reports of the cards accessed in the Exit area e Tracking and Mustering Area To generate the reports of the cards accessed only in the Tracking and Mustering Area 13 Select one or more Card Codes which define the card transaction 14 Select the Note Fields to be displayed in the report You can also specify the range if you select the numerical note field 15 Click Save amp Close to save the configuration details and close the dialog box 16 Click OK to save the schedule Dial Remote Area Select Dial Remote Area as the task type if you want the WIN PAK system to send the commands to the panel connected through modem Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 13 WIN PAK User
533. re set with the list of properties for a response to an action Responses include executing a command file activating a sound file viewing a live video and so on Note Action groups are added to an ADV while configuring ADVs However you are provided with an option to view edit copy and delete action groups individually T Viewing Action Group Details To edit details of an action 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Action Group The Action Group window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 167 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group 10x Bd 405 ACK NAK Loop 3 485 Non ACK NAK Loop 2 c 100 Loop 3 Camera CCTV Camera 2 Camera P T CCTY Camera cl D Detail view Search and Sort Operations Search Field Add All Edit Copy Criteria H Search For Delete Sort By IAHE Name r Ene 2 Select the action group and select the Detail View check box The Action Group dialog box for the selected action group appears x Action Group AETACK NAK ee ran ce E Loop Alarrn Loop OF 10 Acknowledge 2 Loop Remote Dial Up Failed 10 by Loop Remote Dial Up Successful 10 Receive Clear Sound File Digital Video Camera Digivideo Camera 2 Write To History fe Print Message The N 485 ts NOT working properly Priority 10 Send Email I Time Zone Eto6 3 View the details of the action group The p
534. reas without causing an alarm Note To define the perimeter area the zone type of the zones must be defined as Perimeter while configuring the Vista Panel Disarm The panel disarms the selected burglary partition silences alarms and audible trouble indicators Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 29 WIN PAK User s Guide Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Table 11 1 Typical ADVs and Control Functions ADV Control Functions Vista Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Bypass Zone The panel bypasses alarms from the zone This allows movement on the bypassed area without causing an alarm Unbypass Zone The panel stops bypassing alarms from the selected zone Vista Output Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Activate Activates the output Deactivate Deactivates the output Refresh Refreshes the latest status of an output Initializing a Panel from Control Map When panels are added to the WIN PAK system they are initialized so that the information entered during panel configuration is sent to the panels Panels are initialized from the Floor Plan view or from the Control Map To initialize panels from the control map 1 Choose Operations gt Control Map The Control Map dialog box appears 9 Control Area H 8 Servers d 465Loops T 485PCiLoop Ack All learns Clear All Alarms BB 410007 2 EE a E yio00ra Eancelllmitialeatian ff N1000Pa Butter H
535. red unit from the menu Inches yt Milimeters zoom Factor w Snap Grid Settings Blackouts Delete Object Properties Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Setting the printable size of the badge You can set the printable size of the badge by altering the height and width of the badge outline oe 8 9 Note The default badge size is 50 mm high by 80 mm wide and these dimensions are best suited for most PVC printers l Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Badge Layout Utility The Badge Layouts dialog box appears Select a badge layout and click Edit The Badge Definition dialog box appears Right click anywhere inside the badge outline and click Properties The Badge Element Layout dialog box appears Click the Positioning tab Badge Element Layout Ei Badge Colore Positioning Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Vertical Position Orientation Middle g Top j Height 2 Lett j Width 22 Cancel Apply Help Select the Horizontal Position and the Vertical Position of the badge outline Select the degree of Orientation e 0 Places the object upright e 90 Rotates the object 90 clockwise e 180 Places the object upside down e 270 Rotates the object 90 counterclockwise Type the Top and Left of the badge in millimeters or inches 0 for PVC printers Type the Height and Width of the badge in
536. reen Access permitted to all the entrances in this area during the assigned time zone 3 In the Access Level window right click the access area to which you want to set the access levels and select Configure The Configure Area Access dialog box appears 4 For an entrance select one of the following Configure Entrance Access X Remove Access from this entrance i Set Access for this entrance Time one Always On This Timezone tt always or Group E Cancel WIN PAK User s Guide 8 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Additional Information e Remove Access from all entrances in this area to deny access through this entrance for this access level e Set Access for all entrances in this area to allow access through this entrance for a particular time zone Select the time zone in the Time Zone list to determine periods of access For group entrance select one of the following Configure Area Access X f Leave Access for all entrances in this area as it currently is Remove Access from all entrances in this area Set Access for all entrances in this area Time Zone Always On This Timezone i always on Cancel e Leave Access for all entrances in this area as it currently is to continue the same for each entrance in this group e Remove Access from all entrances in this area to deny access through these entrances for this access level e Set Access
537. rent action group before deleting the action group Otherwise the warning message appears showing that the action group is in use To delete an action group 1 Select the action group and click Delete The selected action group is deleted ADV Action Groups The following list of tables that describe you the types of actions defined for different ADVs used in WIN PAK Table 11 11 Describing 485 ACK NAK and 485 non ACK NAK loop Actions Action Message Description Loop OK The N 485 is working properly Loop Remote Dial up Failed The host computer was not able to connect through dialup to the panel Loop Remote Dial up Successful The host computer was able to connect through dialup to the control panel Loop Alarm The N 485 is NOT working properly Table 11 12 Describing C 100 loop Actions Action Message Description Loop OK The C 100 is working properly Loop Remote Dial up Failed The host computer was unable to connect through dial up to the control panel WIN PAK User s Guide 11 170 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 12 Describing C 100 loop Actions Action Message Description Loop Remote Dial up Successful The host computer was able to connect through dialup to the control panel Loop Alarm The C 100 is NOT working properly Table 11 13 Describing Camera CCTV camera
538. review to view the report prior to printing 6 Click Print to print the card history report 7 Click Close to return to the Reports window WIN PAK User s Guide 17 28 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report Card Holder Report The Card Holder report displays the list of card holder details To generate a card holder report 1 In the Reports window select the Card History report and click Report Options The Report Card Holder dialog box appears Report Card Holder E X Card Holder Filter Sort eread Eed Filter Run trom Archive Database F Print Preview Print Export File Estim Pages Clear All ield From None Close Select None p None None From Last Marne To Last Name Eo Access Level Account E Account E None 2 To filter the card holders based on card holder name access level a Click the Card Holder Filter tab b Under Card Holder select the following options to filter card holders based on last name Table 17 6 Describing the options for filtering card holders Cer Generates the report that includes all the card holders Generates the report for a single card holder detail When you select this option the First Last Name is enabled Enter the last name of the card holder in First Last Name to generate a report for this card holder Generates the report for a range of c
539. ries according to the Host Retry Count set in the panel The timeout defaults to 500 mSec but can be set from 200 to T WIN PAK User s Guide 11 116 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration 1500 mSec The reasonable setting for network connections is 400 to 600 mSec The setting is higher fora WAN b Poll Delay This enables the system to delay polling to avoid loading down the network if there is no activity The default for the Poll Delay is 2 seconds but can range from zero to 5 Note No delay is applied if there is something to be sent from the software or if the panel has more to report For example we e Outgoing commands posted by the application are not delayed e No delay is applied if the panel signals through a reply that it has unreported transactions Reply headers include a poll me flag c TCP IP Retry Connect Interval This is the time the system waits to reopen a socket after a connection to the network 1s lost and the socket is closed The system waits for this time and then tries to determine if there 1s a device at the other end of the socket If a device is found a new socket is opened The default for this interval is 15 seconds but it can be set from 5 to 30 seconds d IP Address or Node Name of the IC The IP address configured for the LAN card or the node name of the Intelligent Controller 4 Click Next to set the system configuration Configuring the system
540. riggers and procedures are created to correspond to the interlock One trigger and procedure set deals with the On action and the other deals with the Off action Note To view the system defined triggers and procedures click the Show System Definitions button After you this button it changes to Hide System Definitions which hides the system defined triggers and procedures when you click it T Adding a new procedure Procedures are assigned to triggers and therefore are defined first Use the Procedure Definition dialog boxes to build a script of actions that take place based on the event trigger to which the procedure is linked Procedures are limited by the type of device or point defined To add a new procedure 1 In the Triggers and Procedures dialog box click Add at the bottom of the Procedures section The Procedure Definition dialog box appears P Series Configuration x Basic Connection Settings System Card Formats Time Zones SIO Boards Triggers and Procedures ADV Triggers Source Type Input 10 Board 1 Port 3 SIO 31 16 Zone Input Output Source Point South Building PRO 2200_In 8 Procedure To Execute Procedure 1 Trigger Variable Condition None g Command Execution Execute All Actions TimeZone When Active Always On Event Type Change Of State rst Events Add Edit Delete Procedures ga Procedure Actions Open Door Ac
541. rimary Power System Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 89 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration we ga I T Alarm freeing up Input 8 on the AEP 5 to be used as a standard supervised input point This is available only with the PW 2000 II using AEP 5 Select the OL 16 bit card number plus site code check box to create WIEGAND card numbers by concatenating the site code and the card numbers The result is transmitted as a 12 digit number This is available with all PW 2000 series panels Do not add site codes to the panel with this option Select the OJ 20 bit card number plus site code check box to set the format for 20 bit card numbers This is only available with firmware 8 03 version or later The first 12 bits are interpreted as the site code and the last 8 as the card number The card number is sent to the head end software as a 12 digit number Select the OH 25 bit card number plus site code check box to enable special card format applications This is available for use with firmware later than 8 03 Note The OJ OL or OH option cannot be used at the same time Select the U Option check box to change the number of cards the panel can support This option is available only for PW 2000 panel series It enables the user to change the number of cards the panel supports Selecting more cards reduces the number of buffers available to store events when the panel is not on line with the computer or
542. rinter Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore M Enable System Sounds I Enable Card l Enable Ack Enable Clear Enable Operator Mote Cancel ppIp Help 2 Select the Enable System Sounds check box 3 Specify the instances during which sound files must be activated by selecting the following check boxes Table 5 2 Describing instances for activating a sound file Activates a sound file Enable Card During card reads Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 23 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Default Settings Table 5 2 Describing instances for activating a sound file Activates a sound file Enable Ack When alarms are acknowledged Enable Clear When alarms are cleared Enable Operator Note When notes are added to alarms 4 Click Apply to save the sound file settings Note The sound card must be available in the operating system to enable the sound option i Setting default paths for sound and language files To define default paths for the sound files and language files 1 In the Workstation Defaults dialog box click the Directories tab Workstation Defaults Fa Defaults Alarm Printer Sounds Directories Wallpaper Restore Path to Sound Files C Program Files WINPARPRO S ound Files Browse Fath to Language Files C Program Files IM PARPRO Language Files Browse Cancel Apply Help 2 In Path to Sound Files text box type the path
543. riority of the action time zone command files and other details are displayed 4 Select a different action from the list to view the related details 5 Clear the Detail View check box in the Action Group window to close the dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 11 168 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Editing an Action Group You can edit an Action Group from the Action Group window to make global changes to all ADVs associated with a particular Action Group To edit an action group 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Action Group The Action Group window appears iix Bd 405 ACK NAK Loop EF 495 Non ACK NAK Loop 2 c 100 Loop 3 Camera CCTV Camera 2 Camera P T CCTY Camera E Detail view Search and Sort Operations Search Field All Add Criteria Edit El Copy Search For Delete Sort Bp leolate Print Report Name 2 Select the action group and click Edit The Action Group dialog box for the selected action group appears 0 xi Action Group Entrance X TLEN Action Group Door Entrant 33 OUT Reader Command Files 485 ACK NAK Loo nee None O z 88 Anti Passback Violation Receive None Z 2 495 Non ACK NAK Loop 2 Card Not Found 30 Acknowledge None 2 Ballyboden Front Dr Entrar Fl Door Aj loor aja ool Clear None 7 I7 Detail View
544. rious access levels and set the permissions for the access to doors based on the time zones Selecting an Account Card holders are defined for a specific account To select an account perform the following steps 1 Choose Account gt Select The Select Account dialog box appears 2 Select an account in the list 3 Click OK The account is selected and displayed in the Title bar Note To enable the card holders menu options you must select an account T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Additional Information Configuring Note Field Template Note field template is a field that is defined for recording card holders additional information such as Gender Date of Birth College Studied Passing Year and so on WIN PAK enables you to define a maximum of 40 note fields Adding a Note Field Template To add a note field template 1 Choose Configuration gt Card Holder gt Note Field Template The Note Field Template window appears 2 Click Add to add a new note field template The Note Field dialog box appears Note Field x Mame p Template mo Cancel 3 Type the Name of the note field For example Passing Year 4 Type the format of the Template The template defines the character type and the number of characters in the note field Thus it creates a mask for the note field for consistent and unambiguous usage The following table des
545. rivers on the computer where the Database Server is installed CrypKey The CrypKey Licensing Drivers e Install the CrypKey Licensing Drivers on the computer where the Database Server is installed Foreign Language Installation The WIN PAK installation provides only the English version of these Microsoft modules This may cause a problem as the English version are not compatible with other language version of Windows operation system Note Contact the Honeywell Technical Support team for the list of languages that are supported by the WIN PAK system WIN PAK User s Guide 2 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Licensing and Registration Upgrading WIN PAK a WIN PAK supports upgrading from WIN PAK to WIN PAK SE and WIN PAK PRO to WIN PAK PE Before upgrading WIN PAK make a backup copy of your database files When prompted by the installation program do not overwrite your existing database In addition make backup copies of your Floor Plan backgrounds Card Holder photos and signatures Also before upgrading WIN PAK ensure to stop the WIN PAK services and to quit all the Windows applications Note When you reinstall WIN PAK it upgrades the existing WIN PAK to the latest version Licensing and Registration The WIN PAK installation setup installs only the demo version Though the demo version of WIN PAK has no expiry date it has the following limitations e Only a 10 card database can be maintaine
546. rmation is saved 8 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Adding and attaching a card to a card holder Using the Cards tab you can attach a new card or an existing card to a card holder In addition you can print a badge associated to it or you can print the card reports 1 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Cards tab Card Holder Jasmine Cynthia l xj Basic Info Personal Details Educational Info Employment Details Cards Attach User Codes Card Biometrics Card Number Access Level 4576 Master Add Edit Delete Print Badge Attach Print Cancel Help 2 Click Add to add a new card The Card Record dialog box appears Refer to the Adding a Card section in this chapter for details on adding cards The new card is automatically attached to the card holder after adding it here 3 Click Attach to attach an existing card to the card holder The Select dialog box appears Find Key Card Mumber Find what Find Card Number Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information i T 4 Select Card Number or Access Level in the Find Key list 5 Enter the keyword in the Find What list and click Find The cards that match the criteria are displayed 6 Select the card and click OK The selected card is attached to the card
547. rom Archive Database P Guard Tours to Print Print Previews C One Export File Range Estim Pages ae ia Types to Include aE npu o Ceat Reader f Both Clase 2 To filter guard tours that must be included in the report a Click the Guard Tour Filter tab b Under Guard Tours to Print select one of the following options Table 17 10 Describing the options for filtering guard tours All Generates the report that includes all the guard tours Generates the report for a single guard tour When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the guard tour to generate the report You can use the ellipsis H button to find a guard tour Generates the report for the range of guard tours When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the starting guard tour name in From and the ending guard tour in To You can use the ellipsis E button to find a guard tour Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 45 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report 3 To filter the check point types select one of the Check Point Type to Include options 4 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 5 Click Print Preview t
548. rouble indicators This option enables you to select multiple burglary partitions in the panel Panel Reset Resets the panel Refresh Refreshes the latest status of the vista panel Vista Output Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Activate Activates the output Deactivate Deactivates the output Refresh Refreshes the latest status of an output Initializing Panels from Floor Plan When panels are added to the WIN PAK system they are initialized so that the information entered during panel configuration is sent to the panels Panels are initialized from the Floor Plan view or from the Control Map To initialize a panel from floor plan 1 Choose Operations gt Floor Plan and open the Floor Plan view that contains the panel to be initialized 2 Right click the panel and select Initialize from the subsequent menu The Panel Initialization Options dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 12 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Floor Plan Floor Plan Operations Panel Initialization Options X Panel Configuration Options Time and Date Cards T Command File T Holidays l Time Zones T Input Points T Output Points Groups OF Cancel Refer to the Panel Initialization Options section in this chapter to know the description for initialization options 3 To update all information in the panel click Select All OR To update only the selected information select the correspo
549. roughout the access control system Therefore to delete a time zone you must isolate the time zone if it is assigned to any panel operator or access level Isolating a Time Zone To isolate a time zone 1 Choose Configuration gt Time Management gt Time Zone The Time Zone window appears 2 Select a time zone and then click Isolate The Isolate dialog box appears The Cards Action Groups ADVs Operators Panels and Access Levels associated to the time zone are displayed in the relevant tabs Isolate A x Cards Action Groups ADW Operators Panels Access Levels Operators Panels Access Levels Cards Acton Groups ADW Panels referencing Timezone HTSL 9am to 6pm Action Groupe referencing Timezone 6tob loop 485 panel 7 465 ACK AMA nse 2 lems i ltem Delete will cause the Timezone to be removed Timezone to which action messages in the selected from the selected panels Action Groups will be reassigned None Delete Delete All Reaszsign Reassign All Hp 3 Click each tab to view the list of associated items 4 To dissociate a panel from the time zone select the panel in the list and click WIN PAK User s Guide Delete or to dissociate all the panels from the time zone click Delete All However you cannot assign a panel to a different time zone OR To reassign a time zone for other devices a Select the device from the list of devices b Select the alter
550. rrent time being viewed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Digital Video Right Click Menu Options When you right click in the live video display few control options are provided to customize the video display and adjust the camera controls eee w Show Controls Auto Focus Auto ris Par Tilt speed Network speed Set Preset Goto Preset rr F F Close Table 15 6 Describing the Live Video Display control options Show Title The title bar displays the ADV name and the status icon By default it is selected Show Controls The camera controls are available in the live video display By default it is selected Auto Focus Camera automatically focuses on subject provided it is an auto focus camera By default it is cleared Auto Iris Camera automatically adjusts for brightness provided the camera has an automatic iris control By default it is cleared Pan Tilt speed Controls speed at which the camera pans and tilts Three speed options are available Slow Medium and Fast By default it is Medium Network speed Controls speed at which pan tilt command is sent to the camera Three speed options are available Dial up connection Slow LAN and Fast LAN By default it is Fast LAN Set Preset Enables the operator to set maximum of eight preset controls for a PTZ camera Go to Preset Enables the operator to select from eight previously defined preset PTZ camera controls
551. rtrait or Landscape The default orientation for the badge is Landscape 7 Under Page Size select the page size in inches or millimeters The default page size for the badge is 53 5 mm x 85 mm 8 Click OK to save the badge printer settings and close the Badge Printer Setup dialog box Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 31 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction WIN PAK User s Guide 7 32 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders In this chapter Overview 8 2 Configuring Additional Information 8 3 Configuring Card and Card Holder Information 8 14 Importing Card and Card Holder Information 8 35 Visitor Management 8 41 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 1 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Overview Overview The chapter Card Holders describes how to configure card and card holders details and to assign cards to a card holder In general cards are added to WIN PAK in large volume and later they are assigned to the card holders as per the need A card holder can hold more than one valid card at the same time These cards can be used by the card holder for access to multiple facilities Multiple cards can also be issued to the family members of the card holder for using company facilities such as gym recreational center and so on The card and card holder information are defined for a specific account Therefore you must select an account to enable the card and card holder menu options Card Car
552. rtup Time one GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana Remote Phone Number Moder 235333 Modern 1 Cancel Help 3 Type a unique Name for the 485 PCI panel loop This field is mandatory 4 Type a Description of the 485 PCI panel loop 5 Create an ADV for the 485 PCI panel loop Click Add under ADV to display the Abstract Device Record Server dialog box WIN PAK User s Guide 11 44 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 6 After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Communication Server Configuration dialog box Notes i e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Click the Show check box to view the ADV details 7 Select the ACK NAK check box if you are using a ACK NAK protocol ACK NAK protocol requires acknowledgement which can be positive ack or negative nak ACK indicates a successful message receipt while nak indicates an invalid message 8 Select Buffer all panels on exit to buffer the events in the respective panels when the communication server stops 9 Select Unbuffer all panels on startup to unbuffer all the panel events when the communication server restarts 10 Select the standard Time Zone based on the loop location 11 Set the Panel Defaults for the panel loop a
553. run the Launch exe file 2 Navigate to the initial installation screens and click Install Software to display i the next screen Click Install Upgrade WIN PAK PE The Welcome screen appears WIN PAK Install q x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for WIN PAK WIN PAK lt i strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then clase any programs you have running Click Nest to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Note If an earlier version of Internet Explorer is found earlier than IE 5 5 WIN PAK prompts you to upgrade IE Click Yes to upgrade IE Click Next to continue installation The WIN PAK Information screen appears WIN PAK INFORMATION x WI N PAK WIN FAK Installation At this point the installation will determine if you are currently running ary of the services You should verify all services have stopped before continuing The installation program needs the services to be stopped before it can continue This process could take a few minutes please be patient 5 Click Next to verify that all the services are stopped The WIN PAK WIN PAK User
554. rwise make available the SOFTWARE or any portion thereof in any form to any third party You shall be obligated to retain in confidence the SOFTWARE except for any published user manual s you may have received from Honeywell Access Systems and except for SOFTWARE information which is publicly known or lawfully received from a third party or known by you prior to the date you received the SOFTWARE You shall not have the right to print copy or reproduce in whole in part or in any form whatsoever the SOFTWARE except that User Non Disclosure Agreement two copies of the media may be made in machine readable form for use by you for backup and or archiving purposes on a single computer system You may not transfer the SOFTWARE elec tronically from one computer to another or over a network You agree not to decompile disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the SOFTWARE You may not modify the programs in any way without the prior written consent of Honeywell Access Systems The manuals and other documentation may not be copied for any purpose The SOFTWARE may be removed from one computer system and transferred to a backup system but shall not under any circumstances be used concurrently on more than one com puter system unless otherwise licensed to do so You agree to maintain full and complete records of the number and location of any such copies of the SOFTWARE which have been generated and to reproduce on any such copies
555. s 2 Click the Badge tab Document 7 001009 Revision 01 7 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Badge Layout Introduction Badge Element Layout X Badge Colors Positioning Track 1 Track 2 Track al Background Image I Stretch Width W Stretch Height IY Keep Aspect Ratio Tile Image Import Capture Cancel Apply Help 3 In the Background Image list select the image that must be applied to the badge background Note You can import an image from your computer to the Background Image list or capture an image i Refer to the Setting a Badge Background section in this chapter for more on importing and capturing images to the badge background 4 Select the Stretch Width check box to stretch the width of the image 5 Select the Stretch Height check box to stretch the height of the image 6 Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box to retain the existing aspect ratio of the image while stretching its height and width 7 Select the Tile Image check box to enable a tiled appearance for the image 8 Click OK to save the changes To import a background image 1 On the Badge tab of the Badge Element Layout dialog box click Import The Open dialog box appears 2 Locate for the image file or type the image File Name Note BMP JPG PCX or TGA images can be imported Click Open The selected image file is listed in Background Image 4 Click Apply to apply the image to the badge back
556. s 2 In the left pane expand HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software and then Northern Computers 3 Select WPLobbyWorks The relevant keys are displayed in the right pane Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 41 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Visitor Management g Registry Editor O x Registry Edit wiew Favorites Help InstallShield Type Data t INTEL REG_SZ value not JavaSoft REG SZ o ae i REG_SZ Admin HHEN LANDesk REG_DWORD 0x0000000 H Macromedia MAXSOFT OCRON Microsoft C Network Associates 5 Northern Computers WIN PAK Pro I WPLobbyworks D C Novell ODBC C ORACLE ORL Policies J Program Groups PST_Locater PTC C Rainbow Technologies C Secure SourceCodeControlProvider J swb J Symantec voice Windows 3 1 Migration Status ZipCentral SYSTEM v F My Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Northern Computers WPLobbyworks 4 Edit the values of the Pass and User keys a Right click the Pass key and click Modify The Edit String dialog box appears b Enter the password in the Value Data box c Right click the User key and click Modify The Edit String dialog box appears d Enter the user name in the Value Data box 5 Set the Value data of WinAuth as 0
557. s 20 Stat Camera 28 Status Bar 6 Status input 134 Sub type DS 35 DVIP 35 Sub menus 6 Summary Report 12 System Defaults 27 access levels for cards 32 alarm handling 28 automatic log on and log off 31 e mail Ds for reporting alarms 30 19 10 Document 7 001009 Revision B System Events 4 Viewing 4 System Manager 12 Setting RPC Endpoints 12 Setting User Interface Workstation 13 System Triggers and Procedures 136 T Time Zone 3 Adding 3 Always On 5 Editing 5 Never On 5 reassign a time zone 6 Snap Time 3 Time slots 3 time slots for holidays 5 time zone 4 Time Zone Report 59 Time zone report Advanced Time Zone Filter 60 ToolBar 4 Toolbar 4 Tracking and Muster Areas 6 Tracking and Muster Server 4 Adding 22 Editing 23 Hours of History to Prime on startup 23 Isolating and Deleting 24 Tracking and Muster View 16 Deleting Card Holder 18 Tracking and Mustering Area Report 61 Tracking and Mustering tree 6 Tracking Areas 2 6 Add Branch 9 Add Entrance 10 Configure 9 Find Item 12 Move Entrance 11 Rename Branch 11 Translation 1 dialog boxes 6 Dialogs Menus and Other Text 6 Document 7 001009 Revision B Introduction 2 menus 9 Other Text Options 11 Select language 5 text 11 Tree Window 12 Triggers and Procedures 135 Adding a new procedure 136 Adding a New Trigger 139 Delay 138 Do Output Action 137 Procedure Actions 139 TTS 17 18 Typical ADVs and Control Functions 26 Arm Away 29 Arm Sta
558. s 27 Guard Tour 1 Adding 2 Configure 2 Guard Tour Report 45 WIN PAK User s Guide 19 6 check point types 46 filter 45 Guard Tour Server 3 Adding 14 Editing 15 Isolating and Deleting 16 H Hardware Requirements 2 Help on Web 13 history of events 5 History Report 46 Sort on Sequence ID 48 Transaction Filter 47 History Report Templates Adding 5 Deleting 7 Editing 7 Searching 7 Holiday Group 19 Adding 20 Editing 21 Holiday 1 21 Holiday 2 21 Isolating and Deleting 21 Holiday Group Report 50 Holiday group report filter 50 Home Automation Mode 80 Hue 13 16 IATA 17 18 Import image 12 Import Utility 35 Columns Order 39 Correcting Errors 39 Default Values 37 Defining Order 35 errors 40 Excel Sheet 36 Document 7 001009 Revision B Importing 38 log on 35 Importing 14 Input Points 27 Install Automatically 10 Installation Components 18 Installing Communication Server 16 Installing Complete WIN PAK 9 Installing Database Server 12 Installing User Interface 14 Installing User Interface and Communication Server 15 Interlocking 112 Interlocking Points on SIO Board 132 Introduction 2 Daylight Saving Group 2 Holiday Group 2 Schedule 2 Time Zone 2 User Interface 2 Intrusion Panel 4 Intrusion Panels 4 Galaxy panel 4 Vista panel 4 L Language Add New 3 Deleting 4 Editing 4 Select for translation 5 Language Configuration 2 Licensing 19 Links 27 Live Monitor View 16 Capturing a Fr
559. s 3 Physical devices 2 Pop up menus 6 Precision 33 Prerequisites 4 Print Tracking and Muster details 18 Printing Tracking and Muster details 18 P Series Intelligent Controller 53 P Series Panel 114 Access Configuration 130 Adding 114 Adding P Series Panel in Modem Pool 141 Adding SIO boards 121 Anti Passback 130 Assigning time zones and holiday groups 121 Basic tab 122 Configuring ABA card format 120 Configuring card formats 119 Configuring the Connection Settings 116 Configuring the System settings 117 Configuring Triggers and Procedures 135 Control Flags 131 Daylight Savings 118 Door Interlocks 130 Enable Communication with SIO 123 Entry Delay 125 Exit Delay 125 Document7 001009 Revision B Format Type 120 Hold Time 124 Host Grant 118 IC Reply Timeout 116 Input tab 123 Interlocking 125 Keypad Mode 129 LED Drive Mode 129 Mode 125 Output Inverter 128 Output tab 126 Poll Delay 117 Reader tab 128 RTS Mode 116 Shunt Time 125 Toggle RTS Mode 116 Transaction Mask 126 P Series Panel in Modem Pool 141 Configuring remote details 141 Configuring System settings 142 Delay Before Connect 142 Enable card user levels for trigger control 143 Host Grant 143 New Password 142 Redial Delay 142 setting the password switch 142 P Series Panel Loop 53 Adding 53 Editing 55 IC Reply Timeout 54 Isolating and Deleting 55 RTS Mode 54 Toggle RTS Mode 54 Q Quick Start Wizard 2 Launching 2 Quitting
560. s Guide Device Map Vista Panel Port Home Automation Mode Vista Panel Port Home Automation Mode The Vista panel helps you to monitor and track intrusion happening at different zones in the access control system Zones are areas monitored by a device in the vista panel The Vista panel is configured separately and then it 1s added in WIN PAK with its configuration settings WIN PAK communicates with the Vista panel through the Vista Panel Port Therefore you must configure the Vista Panel Port in the communication server to add the Vista panel in WIN PAK 5 Note The virtual keypad is provided in WIN PAK that enables you to work in the B Vista panel You need to have a master code to operate on the virtual keypad Adding a Vista Panel Port To add a vista panel port l Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Right click the communication server and choose Add gt Vista Panel Port WIN PAK User s Guide Home Automation Mode The Vista Port Configuration Basic Information dialog box appears ista Port Configuration Basic Information p X Description Loop Yerfication Interval Sec e0 Cancel Help Type a Name and Description for the Vista panel port Set the Loop Verification Interval Sec in seconds to verify the connection between WIN PAK and the Vista panel Create an ADV for the Vista Port Click Add under ADV set the ADV pro
561. s Guide Time Management Schedule If you select this type the Dial Remote Area box is enabled on the lower right corner of the Schedule dialog box Schedule e xl Schedule Schedule Name Tours and Activities Next Scheduled Date amp Time 4 4 2006 E Tope ENEE j Hour Minute Frequency Monthly ud 3 E How Command File r Dial Remote Area Remote Area Mone Buffer l Send Date and Time l Unbuffer Send Card OB Changes Cancel Apply Help Figure 9 2 Scheduling a task for the Dial Remote Area task type In addition to the basic steps perform the following steps for scheduling a task 1 In the Schedule dialog box select a remote area in the Remote Area list 2 Select the following commands to be sent to the panel Table 9 1 Describing Dial Remote Area commands Buffer Select this option if you want the panel to store the task data in the panel buffer Unbuffer Select this option if you want the panel to send the stored data to the WIN PAK system Send Card DB Select this option if you want the WIN PAK system to send the Changes updated card details to the panel Send Date and Select this option if you want the WIN PAK system to send the Time system date and time to the panel 3 Click OK to save the changes Run Command File Select Run Command File as a task type if you want to run the command files in a defined frequency Whe
562. s Guide Welcome screen appears 2 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Installation Installation and Upgrades WIN PAK INFORMATION WIN PAK Honeywell Access Systems End User License Agreement 7 Read the license agreement details and click Accept to accept the agreement The WIN PAK Setup Type screen appears WIN PAK Setup Type Communication Server Onl Complete Installation Database Server Only User Interlace and Comm Server User Interface Only Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades 8 Select the Type of Setup The following table describes the available installation in WIN PAK setup Type of Setup Installs Suitable when If you are installing WIN PAK in a stand alone computer you can select the setup type as Complete Installation Complete All the WIN PAK Installation SO on components such as client server Support programs and Setting up ina stand alone computer Installing the Database Server for a networked system Installing Complete WIN PAK If you are installing WIN PAK on a network environment you can select any of the following setup types Database Server Only the Database Server and Installing WIN PAK ina Installing Database Only the related components networked computer Server User Interface Only Only the WIN PAK User Interface The User Interface and the Communication Server User
563. s and events To generate a card history report 1 In the Reports window select the Card History report and click Report Options The Report Card History dialog box appears x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Run from Archive Database Date Range Print Preview From eee E fo R ee Friday May 05 2006 B 23 E port File Daily Time Range Ostia Feats T Only list events between these hours each day From To Beale fo 3 fs Close Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Mew Delhi ii 2 To filter records based on the specific date and time ranges a Click the Date and Time Filter tab b Under Date Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis button c Enter the From and To time in hours and minutes in the corresponding boxes d To generate reports for events occurring during a particular period select the Only list events between these hours each day check box under Daily Time Range The From and To text boxes are enabled e In the From and To boxes enter the time range in hours and minutes f Select the standard time zone in the Time Zone list 3 To filter the report based on the type of card events a Click the Transaction Filter tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report x Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder F
564. s folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the communication server and click Isolate The Isolate Device or ADV dialog box appears Isolate Device or ADY X Floor Flans Operator Levels Floor Plans referencing device COMSERYER Remove Remove ll items Eancel Help 4 To isolate floor plans from an ADV of communication server a Click the Floor Plans tab The list of floor plans associated to the communication server is displayed b Select the floor plans to be isolated from the communication server and click Remove The selected floor plans are dissociated OR Click Remove all to isolate all the floor plans from the communication server 5 To isolate operator levels from an ADV of the communication server a Click the Operator Levels tab The list of operator levels associated to the communication server is displayed Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration b Select the operator levels that must be isolated from the communication server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated from the communication server OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the communication server c To remove the communication server from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the communication server in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area che
565. s for these readers and input points Refer to the Configuring Access Area section in the chapter Card Holders for configuring readers in the access level 4 Add privileged cards Refer to the Adding a Card section in the chapter Card Holder for adding privileged cards The Galaxy Groups are set or Vista partitions are armed when a privileged card is swiped and the input button is pressed within 15 seconds AN Note The Galaxy groups or Vista partitions are unset or disarmed N e Ifthe input button is not pressed after swiping the privileged card e A non privileged card is swiped Server Configuration Servers are configured in the Device Map for every WIN PAK service In addition the servers can be placed on the floor plans and the server access can be assigned in the control area Servers establish the communication between various WIN PAK devices and databases This section explains how to set up the Communication Server Command File Server Guard Tour Server Schedule Server Tracking and Muster Server and Digital Video WIN PAK User s Guide 11 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration Communication Server The Communication Server establishes the connection between WIN PAK and the panels that are physically located in the access control system The communication server must be available on the WIN PAK Device tree for the WIN PAK system to communicate with the system devices in
566. s from the panel loop c To remove the P series panel loop from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of P series panel loop in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 5 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 56 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools Deleting a P series panel loop After deleting the panels attached to the panel loop and isolating the assiocated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the P series panel loop To delete a P series panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the P series panel loop and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears for deleting the panel loop 3 Click OK to delete The P series panel loop is deleted from the device map Modem Pools Modem can be used for enabling the communication between panel loops at remote sites Modems are defined in the modem pool and then added to the communication loop Modems enable communication between WIN PAK User Interface and panels The C 100 485 with a HUB non ACK NAK 485 with a HUB ACK NAK and P Series panel loops can communicate to the modems The procedure for configuring these panel loops is similar to the procedure for configuring local panel loops Modem pools are defined by adding them to the Device Map You must have a communication server with an available com port for each mod
567. s or Node name and the Encryption Password of the computer where the CCTV switcher is connected The corresponding Port No is displayed 10 Click Next to configure cameras to the CCTV switcher The CCTV Switcher Configuration Cameras dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 70 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map CCTV Switcher CCTY Switcher Configuration Cameras ECTY Switcher Camera 1 woo m 2 on E Oo M Bee l t l l l Bum a 8 O O O O O O O O O O O O zi Hanarna Wnt Oo 11 Select the check box to select the camera to be controlled by this switcher 12 Type the Camera Title and create an ADV for the camera 13 Click Next to configure the monitors of the CCTV switcher The CCTV Switcher Configuration Monitors dialog box appears CCTY Switcher Configuration Monitors Ho ADV wo co o a a E d M g k o ok k p se E O O O O O i O O O O O O 0O 14 Select the check box to select the monitor to be controlled by this switcher 15 Create an ADV for the monitor Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 71 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map CCTV Switcher 16 Click Next and in the next dialog box click Finish The CCTV switcher is configured Editing a CCTV Switcher To edit a CCTV switcher 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the CCTV switcher and click Configure The
568. s or click Readers to assign readers as checkpoints to the guard tour The Select dialog box appears Find Key Hame T Find what Noe Reader 2 OF Cancel 3 Type the first few letters of the reader or the input point name in Find What 4 Click Find A list of readers or input points with similar names are retrieved in the Name list WIN PAK User s Guide 14 4 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours Note Leave the Find What field blank to retrieve all input points or readers in the Name list T 5 In the Name list select the input point or reader to be added to the guard tour and click OK Note To select multiple input points or readers press and hold down the SHIFT key for contiguous selection or press and hold down the CTRL key for non contiguous selection T The selected input point or reader is displayed in Selected Check Points list in the Guard Tour Record dialog box 6 Under the Valid Only column in the Selected Check Points list specify the validity requirement of cards that must be accessed at readers e Type Y if only a valid card must be accessed at a reader e Type N ifa valid and an invalid card can be accessed at a reader Invalid cards do not have access rights on a specific reader Note N A is displayed for input points 7 Type the Time hh mm at which the guard must present the card at the checkpoints in hours and minutes 8 In
569. select On Programs and Services Name Acrobat Reader 5 0 O File and Printer Sharing Remote Assistance C Remote Desktop O UPnP Framework Windows Explorer Add a Program select the program or click Browse to search for one that is not listed Add Program Programs To allow communications with a program by adding it to the Exceptions list Microsoft PowerPoint Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual C 6 0 I Microsoft Visual FoxPro 6 0 Microsoft Visual InterDev 6 0 bA Microsoft Visual Modeler Gal Microsoft Visual SourceS afe 6 0 BF Microsoft Word e Minesweeper YI MSN Explorer fd NCICore Display a notifica what are the risks of J Change scope Path C Program FilestwWINPAKPROSNCICore exe 4 Select the following WIN PAK services and click OK i WIN PAK User s Guide e WIN PAK User Interface e NCIArchive e NCICore e WP CmdFile Service e WP Communications Server e WP GuardTour Service e WP Muster Service e WP Schedule Service If you do not find the service in the Programs list click Browse to locate the service Note As multiple selections are not possible select the services one at a time and add to the Programs and Services list for exceptions Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration Windows Firewall Windo
570. select one of the following options Fusion All to include all the access DVPRO servers One to include a single access DVPRO server that you select in the From field Range to include a range of access DVPRO servers that you select in the From and To fields You can use the ellipsis amp button to select an access DVPRO server The Device Map Report can display the details all or a range of Fusion DVR devices Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 41 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report To select the range of Fusion DVR servers a Click the Fusion Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as Fusion b Under Devices to Print select one of the following options e All to include all the Fusion DVR servers e One to include a single Fusion DVR server that you select in the From field e Range to include a range of Fusion DVR servers that you select in the From and To fields e You can use the ellipsis button to select a loop 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Floor Plan Report To generate a floor plan report 1 In the Reports window select the Floor Plan report and click Report Options The Report Floor Plan dialog box appears Report Floor Plan i X Floor Eler Filter Gort Run from amp
571. select the type of transaction 11 In the Trigger Transactions list select the events to associate with the trigger 12 Click OK to save the definition and return to the Triggers and Procedures dialog box Note In the Triggers and Procedures dialog box you can view the list triggers and procedures Select the trigger to see its definition on the right side of the window Click the plus sign to expand the Events view P Series Configuration Basic Remate System Card Formats Time Zones SIO Boards Triggers p Source Type SIO Source Point Procedure To Execute Trigger Variable Condition None Execute All Actions Always On Change Of State Command Execution TimeZone When Active Event Type Events Add Edit Delete Procedures a Procedure Actions Unlock Door Wait El Lock Door ow Action SIO 2 Action Point Entry Delay Action SIO Edit Delete Hide System Definitions Add Cancel Board 1 Port 3 SIO 31 16 Zone Input Output Triggers and Procedures ADY Add Edit Isolate Delete Show Output PSeriesPanell Out 497 Rex Button Seconds to Delay 5 Energize Board 2 Port 3 SIO 30 16 Relay Output PSeriesPanell Out 482 Mask Forced Open Alarms Board 3 Port 3 SIO 0 2 Reader 1 0 gi Help 11 140 Document 7 001009 Revision 0
572. sensor such as a magnetic door contact to detect the status of the door open closed and so on WIN PAK User s Guide 11 134 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Note Input 1 with Inputs 2 3 and 4 is reserved by WIN PAK for use in controlling ive B doors 1 In the Door Interlocks dialog box click Status Input to display the Status Input dialog box SIO Board Board 1 Port 3 SIO 0 2 Aeader Mi EA Input Ind r Held Open Time Fre Alarm Time 16 Sec 0 Sec Mask Alarms for Time one Hone r 2 Select an SIO Board with which you want to configure the status point 3 Inthe Input list select an input used as the door status input Only active input points that have not been added as ADVs appear on this list The contents of the list depend on the SIO Board selected 4 Select the Held Open Time This is the time that elapses after the door is opened before the door is reported as ajar By default this field is set to 16 seconds 5 Specify the Pre Alarm Time if required Pre Alarm Time is the time that elapses after the door is opened before a warning typically a beeping sound indicates that the alarm is activated Note Consider a door with a Held Open Time set at 30 seconds and a Pre Alarm Time also set at 30 seconds As soon as the door opens on a valid card read a beeping sound is emitted the Pre Alarm indicating that an alarm is imminent At the
573. sion 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report b Under Holiday Group select one of the following options Table 17 13 Describing the options for filtering holiday groups Description Generates the report that includes all the holiday groups Generates the report for a single holiday group When you select this option the From field is enabled Enter the name of the holiday group to generate the report You can use the ellipsis button to find the holiday group Generates the report for the range of holiday groups When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the starting holiday group name in From and the ending holiday group in To You can use the ellipsis button to find the holiday group 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Note Field Template Report To generate an access area report 1 In the Reports window select the Access Area report and click Report Options The Report Note Field Template dialog box appears Report Note Field Template g i xX
574. so provided with an option to display the details of all or a range of loops Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 39 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report xi Device Filter Loop Filter Run from Archive Database Print Preview i 485 PCl P Series Print Communication Server Export File Estim Pages Clear All tHE Close To select the type of loop a Click the Loop Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as Modem Pools b Under Type select the type of loop C100 485 PCI or P Series c Enter the name of the Communication Server to include the loop of this server You can use the ellipsis El button to select the communication server To select the range of loops a Under Loops to Print select one of the following options RapidEye All to include all the loops One to include a single loop that you select in the From field Range to include a range of loops that you select in the From and To fields You can use the ellipsis button to select a loop The Device Map Report can display the details all or a range of access DVPROs WIN PAK User s Guide 17 40 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report To select the range of access DVPROs a Click the RapidEye Filter tab It is displayed by default when you select the device as RapidEye b Under Devices to Print
575. ss is always enabled Notify the monitoring station you are under duress Always one number higher than the PIN code Log all access If selected logs all card reads as door used without requests as used actually determining if the door is used If unchecked logs all card reads but waits until the door times out or the door is opened to report Cancel this option when using anti passback Do not pulse the door Door strike does not pulse upon free egress however door strike on rex contact still gets shunted Filter CosDoor Throughout the door cycle the IC generates about 4 to 5 transaction messages door strike relay on door strike relay off door opening and son If more message are needed this feature can be disabled Require two card Needs 2 valid cards within a 20 second window to grant control at this reader access Used in vaults high security areas 40 Select the following Online Door Mode that indicates the mode in which the Intelligent Controller is operating Table 11 8 Describing Online Door Mode options Online Door Mode Description Card Only The card is sufficient for door access PIN Only The PIN number is sufficient for door access Card and PIN Both card access and PIN are required for door access Card or PIN Either card or PIN is sufficient for door access 41 Select an Offline Door Mode that indicates the mode in which the SIO Reader board will run if the system goes offline The a
576. sseseeeeeens 15 8 Handling Alarms using the right click menu options 15 9 Handling Alarms using the Command buttons 15 10 Filtering Alarmi V 1S WS siya cieiceseleiys ties n E TA 15 11 Viewing Alarmi Details soracrienns a Siete ia eee ret 15 13 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 i X WIN PAK User s Guide Contents A t ocard LG OK Wy ssassn aaa aaa a aaiae 15 14 Activating Autocard LOOKUP icc sacaseusiasdaxesieads shevelichedieiwamveveceenee 15 14 Live Monitor VIEW wi saiscesicescetccckcatehaadssacescatccdesesdepassedudedvescessvesdsedcacdsensssencesss 15 16 Openings a Live Monitor View ocsedieuayic sess ts ssh ast chess ie 15 16 Capturing a Frame from the Live Monitor View 0 15 16 Controlling the C aimera ee m n e E S 15 17 petting Panand TULIN Sapia a anaes nconeiekutaees 15 17 er Tahal sag Wi ea kc cies a a N a a 15 18 Setting Home POSItiOn 20 ccccsssesseeseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 15 18 Digital V 1 CO naison aana ea aa erd aAa cies 15 19 Opening the Digital Video Display cc cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 15 19 Controlling live video display ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 20 Controlling the recorded video display ccccccccessseeeeeeeeeees 15 21 Rien lick Menu Options aesir O 15 22 Fitero Eyen Seserepan 15 23 Chapter 16 Translation lntroductioi soises eaaa 16 2 Language Configuration cocsssssecccccocsssssssceccoccoc
577. ssociated to the panel is displayed b Select the operator levels that must be isolated from the communication server and click Remove The selected operator levels are dissociated from the communication server OR Click Remove all to isolate all the operator levels from the communication server c To remove the communication server from the control area clear the presence of an ADV of the panel in the control area by clearing the Present in Control Area check box 6 Click OK WIN PAK User s Guide 11 162 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Abstract Device Deleting a Vista panel After isolating the associated floor plans and operator levels you can delete the Vista panel To delete a Vista panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the Vista panel and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion The Vista panel is deleted from the device map Abstract Device An Abstract Device ADV is a logical representation of a physical device An ADV is associated to an actual device in your access control system such as a panel or alarm Therefore ADVs must be configured for every device mapped to the Device tree structure ADVs provide an interface for monitoring the device status and controlling the actions of a physic
578. ssssessececocoosssseceeeceosssssssssee 16 2 Adding or Editing Language Information cccccccccccssceccecececeeeeeeeeees 16 3 Adding a New Lane id OC cecina a aicasteeseaveeniees 16 3 Editns a Lanud enmana a EEA 16 4 Deleting a Langat onenei E EEE 16 4 Selecting a language for translation cccccccceseeseeeesseesesssssssssseeeaeaaas 16 5 Adding or editing entries for translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text 16 6 Adding or Editing entries for dialog bDOXEeS cccccceceeeeeeeeees 16 6 Adding or editing entries for MENUS cccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 9 Adding or Entering Entries for other Text ccccceceeeeees 16 11 Chapter 17 Reports Inr OC UG COR eces aa aeaa t a aaa 17 2 Report Templates iscsicicststitccwscessecatsicacasycrecitecsacarsessesdeacseuenstecattacsascnessecacsasaass 17 3 Defining Card Holder Report Templates 2 0 0 0 cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeees 17 3 Adding a Card Holder Report Template ec cccceeeees 17 3 Editing a Card Holder Report Template ce eeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 4 Searching a Card Holder Report Template eee 17 4 Deleting a Card Holder Report Template eee 17 5 Defining History Report Templates 12 ccesendectensscsiras eee wee 17 5 Adding a History Report Template cccceessesseseeeeeeeeeees 17 5 Editing a History Report Template 0 0 0 ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 7 Searching a History Report Template eeeeeeeee
579. st Clicking Find repeatedly highlights the remaining instances of the text in the list Translate Text X Original text Translation Last nor E Notes 1 Last name 2 first name xl M Apply to all identical originals Cancel The current line of text is displayed under Original text 3 Type the translated text under Translation 4 Select the Apply to all identical originals check box to apply the translation to all instances of the Original text in the user interface Note The translation entry is applied only to the exact instances of the Original text matching the case 5 Click OK to save the entry and return to the Translate Other Text window The changes are updated in the language text file The values in Total Line of Text Translated and Out of Date columns in the Edit Dialog Text are updated with the number of field names that are translated WIN PAK User s Guide 16 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports In this chapter Introduction Report Templates Generating and Printing a Report Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 1 17 17 2 17 3 17 8 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Introduction Introduction You can generate a number of reports using WIN PAK These reports can be generated based on the filter criteria Reports can be sorted in an ascending or descending order and can be previewed and printed The following is the list of reports that can be generated in WIN PAK
580. st Grant card downloaded Access was granted to the user The P Series Intelligent Controller was updated with valid card information Host Grant door unlocked Access was granted to the user The P Series Intelligent Controller was NOT updated with valid card information Invalid Format The P Series Intelligent Controller detected an invalid card format Invalid Format reverse read The P Series Intelligent Controller detected a card swiped backwards Invalid card format Invalid PIN A card was denied entry because it was used with an invalid PIN Invalid Site Code A card was denied entry because it did not have a proper facility code Invalid Time Zone A card was denied entry because it was used outside its time report WIN PAK User s Guide 11 180 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Action Group Table 11 33 Describing P Series Reader Actions Action Message Description Issue Code An invalid issue code was presented to the reader Never allowed at This card is never allowed at this door even if Host Grant is enabled this door No second card This door is using the two man rule A second valid card was not presented presented to the reader Site Code Verified Door is in the facility or site code mode A valid facility or site code door not used was presented The door was not opened by card holder Site Code Verified Door is in the facility
581. stallation a branch Exit Area is created by default Card holders quitting the tracking areas present their cards to the readers in the exit area Nested Areas Nested areas are created when a tracking area is defined inside another tracking area and when a mustering area is defined under another mustering area However tracking areas cannot be nested inside mustering areas and vice versa When a area A is defined under area B it indicates that the area A is nested under B All the readers added under A belong to B Example e Ina hospital one branch can be defined as Hospital and another branch Laboratory can be added inside the Hospital branch The Laboratory branch is nested inside the Hospital branch When a card holder enters the laboratory the card holder is seen as present in both the hospital and in the branch e Ifthe Laboratory is not nested within the Hospital building the card holder is seen as present only in the laboratory and not in the hospital Consider the following figure oh M E e 1 9 are Tracking Readers e A B C D are Tracking Areas e M is the Muster Reader e Eis the Exit Reader The difference between nested and non nested areas 1s explained in the following scenarios for the areas B and C In case of Nested area e C is defined inside B If you are in area C then you are in area B Document 7 00100
582. stances of Original text in the User Interface Note The translation entry is applied only to the exact instances of Original text matching the case Click OK to save the entry and return to the Translate Menu Text window The changes are updated in the language text file The values in Total Line of Text Translated and Out of Date columns in the Edit Dialog Text are updated with the number of fields that are translated 16 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Translation Language Configuration Adding or Entering Entries for other Text Other text refers to the text other than the dialog box or menu captions such as examples warnings prompts messages and so on 1 Choose Configuration gt Translate gt Other Text The Translate Other Text window appears loxi Total Line of Text 5795 Translated 4345 Out of Date 0 Engish United States Francais Notes o lt 1 gt Guard Tour is configured in Run Guard Tour Sc A Vv D ag uD o ag 3 pei w a Z m a wo 0 g ad fa a EG 0 Q o m ai lt 1 gt ReportT emplate Name is already in use lt 1 gt ReportT emplate Name is already in use Sal ces lt 1 gt lt 2 gt already has an attached ADV Anso this is not po Cela est impossible car lt 1 gt lt 2 gt poss de d ja nun ADY as 1 Last name 2 first name lt lt Settings lt lt Settings lt lt Settings lt lt
583. stem Events Event View Alarm View Autocard Lookup Live Monitor View Digital Video Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 1 15 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 8 15 14 15 16 15 19 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Introduction Introduction In the WIN PAK system the actions of card holders guards devices can be monitored and controlled with various methods An action might be a card read change in the state of input server trouble or even an attempt made to open a door without using a card These actions are categorized into Events which are regular occurrences and Alarms that require special attention Actions to be performed on servers devices and digital video are specified while defining ADVs to represent them in WIN PAK Different ways of monitoring the actions Locate Card Holder e Displays the card holder details such as card number account time and location where the card is read by the card holder and so on System Events e Displays summary of the WIN PAK system activities such as successful and unsuccessful server connections log on details and server disconnections Event View e Displays list of currently occurring events Alarm View e Pops up on the User Interface with a beep sound as soon as an alarm occurs Continues beeping till the alarm is acknowledged Autocard Lookup e The Autocard Lookup window displays the card holder details of all the card transactions However the option is provid
584. ster View Tracking and Mustering Area Cards and Card Holders found in the Selected Areas 5 J Exit rea card reads not shownf0 car G Tracking and Mustering Area card QO Tracking and Mustering Areas 1 cardholc Card ID Status Card Holder Reader TimeandDae 30641 Valid Card N1000Panell Reader2 5 38 00 PM 4 1 2005 IV Refresh list periodically Refresh Print Delete 2 Expand the Tracking and Mustering Areas folder to list the branches and the entrances belonging to the selected branch Note The branches and entrances with amp W ia and muster readers on the left indicate muster areas 3 Select the branch for which you want to view the card holder information Select a muster area branch to view the details of card holders who have accessed the readers in the mustering area Select a tracking area branch to view the details of card holders who have accessed the readers in the tracking area Select Exit Area branch to view the details of card holders who have accessed the readers in the exit area The details of the card holders who have accessed the entrances in the selected branch are listed in the right pane of the Tracking and Muster View window Wal Tracking and Muster View Iof x Tracking and Mustering Area Cards and Card Holders found in the Selected Areas G Tracking and Mustering Areas 1 cardhole Card ID Status C
585. sting the Size of the Floor Plan ccc cccccccssssccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 12 Previewine the Floor Plans vicsicecsasessansieetaacicesanceaecoieeiedensian adieu 12 13 Working with Floor Plan Controls cccccccsscscccccccccccereneeeeeeees 12 13 Copying and Pasting a Control ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 14 Removing a Control from the Floor Plan eeeeeeeeeeees 12 14 Resizing Rotating and Re arranging Objects 000000000505 12 14 Edipe aT loor Planean renee E a a 12 14 Deleting a Floor Plans ingnawaiaecinureniteen een aiosd 12 15 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 1 1X WIN PAK User s Guide Contents Floor Plan Operations siscccvcssevssestiiieevbiesasbicdsasbes doahasecualocatualecesaisceniavesecedics 12 15 Working with Floor Plan VieWS cccceeeessssssssssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeees 12 15 Opening a Floor Plan View siginn 12 15 Resizing and Previewing Floor Plan ViewS ccceeeeeeeees 12 16 Controlling System Devices from the Floor Plan 00 0 eeeseeeeeeeeees 12 17 Initializing Panels from Floor Plan oo cccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeens 12 21 Panel Initialization Options cccccccessesseseeeecceeeceaeeeeeeeeees 12 22 Tinta 7AM S taS aeee e E EE E aTi 12 23 Chapter 13 Command File Command File Configuration sssssecceccoossssssseeccccccosssesceeccooossssseseeecesosssseee 13 2 Addinra Command Filessccsc inan a a a 13 2 Adding Com
586. store 10000 transactions in a buffer storage This number is decreased or increased to provide more or less memory for cards if necessary 1 transaction 16 bytes so 100 000 transactions takes up 1 6 MB of memory 1 card record within 20 to 80 bytes This depends upon the use of precision access levels versus multiple access levels and the number of card readers per Intelligent Controller Tip Adding an extended memory board to the Intelligent Controller provides more memory to work with 7 In the No of Transactions to accumulate before dialup text box specify the number of transactions to be accumulated in the memory before dialing up 8 Select the Host Grant option to provide fault tolerance even if the card is not found in the panel device e Host Grant options are used when for example a number of cards have been entered in the database but have not yet been downloaded to the panel e The available options are Disable Do not allow the card holder if the card is not found in the panel Open Door Enables the door to open even if the card is not found in the panel Open Door and Update Panel Enables the door to open and also to download the card details to the panel Therefore the panel is updated 9 Click Next to set the card formats for the P Series panel Refer to the Setting the card format for the panel section and the following section in this chapter for more details on config
587. t 2 Type the Name of the user and the Password Note By default the user name Admin and a blank password are created by WIN PAK for initial log on However to ensure the security you must add a password we 3 Click Connect A message about the WIN PAK demo version is displayed Note The CD Key becomes invalid when you uninstall the WIN PAK system and install it again 4 Click OK The system connects to the servers and the WIN PAK User Interface main window appears i Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started User Interface Logging Off To log off from WIN PAK 1 In the WIN PAK User Interface main window choose File gt Log Out or click 3 from the toolbar The confirmation dialog box appears WIN PAK Log Out xj Do rou really want to Log Out Cancel 2 Click Yes to confirm logging off from WIN PAK Note Logging Off from WIN PAK does not automatically stop the WIN PAK Al wee A A services Quitting WIN PAK To quit the WIN PAK application 1 Choose File gt Exit A message asking for confirmation appears 2 Click Yes to quit the application WIN PAK User s Guide 4 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings 5 In this chapter Overview 5 2 Accounts 5 2 Administrators 5 5 Operators 5 8 Default Settings 5 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 5 1 WIN PAK User s Guide System Settings Overview Overview
588. t Tracking and Muster Yiew X Tracking or Muster Area Filter Select Tracking or Muster Area PETE FUSS Tracking and Musterng Areas Sort Order NoteField Y i Ascending C Descending Print Select MoteField Mone Export File Estim Pages Clear All 2 In the Select Tracking or Muster Area list select the tracking or mustering area for which you want to print the card holder details 3 To print the card holder information in a sorted order select the option for sorting in the Sort Order list e Select Time and Date to sort the card holder details in a chronological order e Select Card Number to sort the card holder details based on the card number e Select Card Holder to sort the card holder details based on the card holder number e Select Note Fields to sort the card holder details based on the Note field value When you select this option the Select NoteField list is enabled WIN PAK User s Guide 11 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Notes Ifyou do not have a privilege to create a note field template the Note Fields option will not be listed in Sort Order Ifyou do not have the privilege for viewing or changing a note field the note field will not be listed in Select NoteField The Select NoteField list contains the note fields that are specific to the selected account If lt
589. t Time Zone The Time Zone window appears 2 Click Add The Time Zone Record dialog box appears to add a new time zone Time one Record x Time one Time Zone Description i st shift 4 00 AM to 12 00 PM Mon to Fri Copy Monday To Weekdays 12 AM 4 AM a AM 12 Fil 4 Ph a Pha M Pd T Pd Ww Pd Th Pid F Pod 5 Su Hi D Military Time cooo Pd Mouse Time P E Note Holiday type it applicable only to NS2 panels Cancel Apply Help 3 Type the name of the Time Zone and a brief Description 4 Select the corresponding Snap Time The Snap Time option enables you to set the time slot according to the selected snap time Example If you set a Snap Time of 60 minutes you can only define time slots with a minimum of 1 hour interval This time slot must start and end as a whole hour and would not include any minutes or seconds For example you can set time slots of 8 AM to 9 AM or 3 PM to 4 PM However you cannot set a time slot of 4 30 to 5 30 or 1 15 to 2 15 Time slots including minutes and seconds as interval can be set by selecting 30 and 15 snap time options Document 7 001009 Revision 01 9 3 WIN PAK User s Guide Time Management Time Zone Time slot with an interval of a minute can be set by selecting the snap time of 0 Time Range Area Ruler Time one Description 6 00 AM to 6 00 Phl Copy Monday To Weekdays Miltary Time No of Mouse Time ae 2 Time Slc T
590. t and delete records Operations Add Edit Delete i Table 3 4 Buttons and Descriptions Click this button to open a blank window for adding a new record Edit Click this button to edit a selected record An editable view of the selected record appears where you can modify the details Delete Click this button to delete a selected record A message asking for confirmation appears Click Yes to delete the record Isolating Records Before deleting a record it is essential to isolate it from all its associations Example To delete a time zone you must first remove its association from the panels access levels cards operators ADVs or action groups where it is used WIN PAK User s Guide 3 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK User Interface Elements 1 To isolate a record select the record in the list and then click Isolate The Isolate dialog box appears Isolate X Cards Action Groups ADVs geetecseressessvesarsassensscessassscssoeenss Operators Panels i Access Levels Revsonseveosscsssnsoeeveeseveserecsesvessons 3 Items Delete will cause the Timezone to be removed from the selected panels Delete Delete All Heo The tabs in the Isolate dialog box indicate the various associations of the record that is deleted Example Time zones can be applied to Cards Action Groups ADVs Operators and Panels and therefore appear as tabs in
591. t 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration SIO Board Configuration i x Basic Reader Inputs Outputs Reader Door Intelocks V 2 No ADY Reader Types m Anti Passback Std NCI 5 wire Direction Keypad Mode None x TA Processing Mode None LED Drive Mode Delay Generic 1 wire tri state bi color 0 Sec Card Format Flags Datal datal Wiegand Pulses Card Formats Trim zero bits v Format 1 Pa Format to nibble array x Format 3 Access Configuration Format 3 ha Single controlling the door Control Flags Pair Reader Deny duress request ered Log all access requests as used Do not pulse the door strike on rex Online Door Mode Reader Ee vj Card only Offline Door Mode Galaxy Groups Unlock unlimited access Galaxy Panel Group 3 Input to Set Galaxy Groups Galaxy Panel Group 4 fi y P Galaxy Panel Group 5 Jin 2 x Groups Delete Group Canoe Help 30 Select a reader and create an ADV for the reader Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration 31 In the Reader Types list select the type of reader Note The available reader types are Std NCI 5 Wire Std Motorola Std Mercury and Std HID If you select these types the Ke
592. t be disabled to access the services Therefore check the firewall status in the Windows Firewall dialog box T Note You can disable the firewall status of Windows 2003 server in a similar way as you unblocked the firewall status in Windows XP Enabling Ports in Windows XP Communication ports in a Windows XP operating system are disabled for security reasons by Windows Firewall These ports must be enabled for remote communication to the Galaxy panel To enable ports in the Windows Firewall l 2 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and open Windows Firewall The Windows Firewall dialog box appears Click the Exceptions tab and click Add Port The Add a Port dialog box appears Add a Port Use these settings to open a port through Windows Firewall To find the port number and protocol consult the documentation for the program or service you want bo use Name GALAXY 60 ALARM PORT Port number 1 ooga TCP UDP What are the risks of opening a port Type the Name of the port and the Port Number Click TCP or UDP to select the type of port 5 Click OK to open the port Notes i Repeat the above procedure for enabling three ports in the system where one port is used by Galaxy Gold and the remaining two ports are used by the Galaxy panel for reporting alarms and control commands In the same way the 3001 or 2101 ports must be enabled for the TCP IP communication of the access panels
593. t be resent to the panel if the panel event is not responding to the command By default the command is resent 3 times Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 65 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Modem Pools c Panel CMD Time Out Specify the waiting time for receiving a response from the panel and for time out of the command By default the loop waits for 5 seconds 12 In Remote Phone Number type the phone number of the modem in the remote site Include the area code and dialing prefix if they are needed to dial in from the remote site like 3125551212 This field 1s mandatory 13 Select the Modem of the remote site 14 Click Next to configure the hub settings The 485 PCI Loop Configuration Hub Settings dialog box appears 485 PCI Loop Configuration Hub Settings Delay For Connection E Number of Redial Attempts eo Wait Time tor Disconnect E Sec Delay before Next Attempt e Modern Initialization Command JATEOQOVISKOSCTEDOSO 18W Dial Prefix ATDOT Call In Option Never Set New Site ID and Password Edit solate finelete r ADM Add Shays lt Back Cancel Help 15 Set the following hub settings e Delay for Connection The duration in seconds to pause between the dialing prefix and dialing phone number Enter a number between 0 and 120 seconds e Number of Redial Attempts The number of redial attempts to make Enter a number between 0 and 50 times The defaul
594. t in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 6 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 7 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 8 Click Close to return to the Reports window Galaxy Panel Log Report Galaxy Panel Log report is used for tracking the events happening at the Galaxy panel This report can be generated if you procured license for the Galaxy feature in WIN PAK To generate a Galaxy Panel Log report 1 In the Reports window select the Galaxy Panel Log report and click Report Options The Report Galaxy Panel Log dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 43 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report x Date and Time Filter Log Filter Run from Archive Database Date Range Print Preview JF 4 I Tuesday June 13 2006 23 El l Export File Daily Time Range Ein Peace Only list events between these hours each day From To Bestel fo a fo El 22 a es E Close Time one GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai Hew Delhi 2 To filter date and time of the log events to be included in the report a Click the Date and Time Filter tab b Under Date Range select the From and To dates using the ellipsis
595. t is 3 times e Wait Time for Disconnect The wait time allowed before disconnect Enter a number between 1 and 999 seconds The default is 5 seconds e Delay before Next Attempt The wait time allowed between two dialings Enter a number between and 999 seconds The default is 60 sec e Modem Initialization String Enter the remote initialization string as ATEOQOVI amp KVO amp CI amp DOSO 1 amp W Refer to the modem documentation for further details e Dial Prefix The command prefix for dial In most cases it is ATDT which is set as the default e Call In Option Select the call in option as On Invalid Transaction or Never for the panel to dial up in case an alarm is raised WIN PAK User s Guide 11 66 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Modem Pools Note Honeywell recommends to retain the default settings 16 To set a new site ID and password click Set New Site ID and Password The Site Password dialog box appears The Site ID and password must be given while dialing up the modem 17 Type a New Password This field 1s mandatory and it can be up to 20 characters 18 Retype the password in Confirm Password 19 In the Site ID field enter the site ID in A unique 4 digit number for area S unique 4 digit number for site format For example A0002 S0003 is area 2 site 3 20 Click OK to return to the Hub Settings dialog box 21 Click Next and then click Finish in the next dialog box Editing a 485 ACK
596. tW IHFPAKPR OSL Language Files of F Hegt gt Cancel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 17 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Installation and Upgrades 6 Click Finish to complete the installation and restart the computer Additional Installation Components i we T The WIN PAK installation program installs several utilities during the normal installation process These are supplied as re distributable Microsoft packages and are deployed automatically based on the installed options Each of these components is installed by a separate installation program that runs directly from the WIN PAK CD Note If prompted by the program always keep the latest drivers While working with Windows XP operating systems WIN PAK installs the following external components External Components The following is the list of external components that are installed during the WIN PAK installation e Microsoft Data Access Components e Sentinel Lock Drivers e Crypkey Drivers Microsoft Data Access Components System Manager uses Microsoft Data Access Components MDAC for the DB server interface to the MDB file Therefore MDAC needs to be installed in your computer However MDAC is installed by default in all Operating Systems Note The MDAC components are part of the operating system and therefore it is not removed even after uninstalling WIN PAK Sentinel The Sentinel Hardware Lock Drivers e Install the Sentinel Hardware Lock D
597. tall WIN PAK Communication Server perform the instructions given in Installing WIN PAK and follow these steps 1 On the WIN PAK Setup Type screen select Communication Server and click Next The system checks for SQL Service status and displays the WIN PAK Destination Path screen WIN PAK Destination Path 4 i Ea WIN PAK Please indicate where you want to install your WIM FAF executables Destination Folder C Program Files WINPARPAO Browse lt Back Cancel Note In the following screens the default path settings for installation database archive file database file and language file are displayed i 2 Click Browse to change the destination folder and click Next in each screen The dialog box appears prompting you to create WIN PAK icons on the desktop 3 Click Yes to place the icons on your desktop The summary of the selected information is displayed 4 Click Back to change any installation settings or click Next 5 After the installation is complete the WIN PAK Setup Complete screen appears WIN PAK Install EY Dai Mia Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Install Type Communication Server Only Target Director C Program Files wtw IHFAKPRO Language Fath C Program Files
598. ted in the following table Table 11 1 Typical ADVs and Control Functions Alarm View Open Click Open to open the Alarm View window through the floor plan CCTV Switcher Send Time amp Date Send Camera Titles Camera to Monitor Switch Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms WIN PAK User s Guide 11 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Viewing Control Maps Table 11 1 Typical ADVs and Control Functions Command File Server Run Command File C 100 Local Connection Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms C 100 Remote Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Connection Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Doors Unlock Lock Shunt Unshunt Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Event View Open Click Open to open the Event View window through the floor plan Input Points Acknowledge all Alarms Clear all Alarms Shunt Unshunt Restore to Time Zone Links Open Click Open to open the floor plan to which this floor plan is linked This device is relevant only for the Floor Plan Modem Pool Hang Up Modem Reset Modem Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms CCTV Monitor Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms N 485 Remote Dialup Buffer All Panels Unbuffer
599. tems attached Cards Delete Attached Cards i Detach Attached Cards Images and Signatures f Delete Attached Images f Detach Attached Images Cancel 8 26 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information 3 Select Delete Attached Cards to delete the cards attached to the card holder OR Select Detach Attached Cards to detach the cards from the card holder 4 Click OK A confirmation for deletion or detachment appears 5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or detachment Note You can also delete or detach the images or signatures attached to the card holder 6 Select the appropriate option to delete or detach the attached images or signatures and click OK 7 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or detachment Adding a Card A card holder is uniquely identified by the card The access levels can be defined for the cards When a card is attached to a card holder the card holder has access only to those areas of the access level To add a card 1 Choose Card gt Card or click in the toolbar The Card window is displayed ecard lls _Card Number r Hee Master Masher Master Master T Detail view Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Edit fe Print Badge Search For Sort By lahi Card Number 2 Click Add to add a new card The Card Record dialog box appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 27 WIN PA
600. tering Areas Add Branch Add Entrances Configure Remove Refresh FS Find F3 Add Devices x Device Type Add Close Description gt m T template PAB Panel 1 Re TEMPLATE Panel 2 Read E E E E E E E E 4 4 Select the entrance to be added to the branch and click Add Note To select the multiple entrances press and hold down CTRL and click each of the required entrance i 5 Click Close or clear the Show Available Devices check box to close the window The entrances are in the Tracking Area window WIN PAK User s Guide 11 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Defining Areas Defining Tracking and Mustering Areas Moving an Entrance To move an entrance from one branch to another 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Select the entrance you want to move 3 Drag and place the entrance on the branch to which you want to move AN Notes e You cannot move an entrance from a tracking area branch to a mustering area branch and vice versa N e You cannot move an entrance from and to the Exit Area branch Renaming a Branch 1 Choose Configuration gt Define gt Tracking Areas The Tracking Area window appears 2 Right click the branch you want to rename 3 Click Configure The Tracking and Mustering Area Configuration dialog box appears Tracking and Mustering Area Configura X Ma
601. tes Type a new name for the template and click OK to create a copy of template and return to Report History dialog box Click Close to close the dialog box Editing a History Report Template To edit the History Report template l Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the History folder Right click the report template and click Edit The Report History dialog box appears Refer to the Adding a History Report Template section in this chapter for details on editing the template Searching a History Report Template To search a History Report template l Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the History folder Right click the report template and click Find The Find Item dialog box appears ltem in tree to Search for Cancel Type the name of the template to be searched and click OK The template starts with the specified name is highlighted Deleting a History Report Template To delete a History Report template L Choose Reports gt Report Templates The Report Template window appears Expand the Report Templates folder and the History folder Right click the report template and click Delete A message asking for confirmation appears Click Yes to confirm the deletion The selected report template is deleted Document 7 001009
602. the ADV b Enter a name and press ENTER OR a Click Add under ADV The ADV dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 11 36 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Server Configuration b Enter the ADV properties and click OK 12 Select or clear the Pan and Tilt check box to define a camera as a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera or as a stationary camera 13 Type the title for the camera in Camera Title 14 Click Finish to save the digital video Editing a Dedicated Micros To edit a Dedicated Micros digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder to display the servers and devices added to the device map 3 Right click the dedicated micros and click Configure The Dedicated Micros dialog box appears 4 Click the desired tab and make the required changes Refer to the Configuring an Access DVPRO Digital Video section in this chapter for configuring Access DVPRO digital video 5 Click OK to save the changes Isolating and Deleting an Access DVPRO You can delete a dedicated micros digital video only after you isolate its ADV from floor plans and operator levels Isolating a dedicated micros digital video To isolate a dedicated micros digital video 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder and right click the dedicated micros digital video and click Isolate The Isolate Devi
603. the Time Zone list 3 To filter the report based on the type of card events a Click the Transaction Filter tab Report History X Date and Time Filter Transaction Filter Card Holder Filter Alarm Filter Fun from Archive Database M Print Preview Transaction Types Print I Alam I Operator W Card M System Alarm M Database MV Guard Export File Alarm amp Card Estim Pages W Transactions IY Acknowledgements W Clears IY Operator Messages Clear All Filter ADs T Sorton Sequence ID Clase ERE b To filter the report based on the transaction types select the following options under Transaction Types Table 17 11 Describing the transaction types for filtering history details Alarm Reports transactions of type alarms System Alarm Reports system type alarms not wired points such as Poll Response alarms Operator Reports operator activities such as log on and log off Database Reports basic database activities such as update delete or add action to a particular database Card Reports all card events Guard Reports all guard tour events Document 7 001009 Revision 01 17 47 WIN PAK User s Guide Reports Generating and Printing a Report c To filter the options based on the alarm and card behaviors select the following options under Alarm amp Card Table 17 12 Describing the Alarm amp Card options for filtering history details Transactions Reports card events of all transactions su
604. the menu indicating that the window is activated Tree Window A Tree window enables you to view the details of devices ADVs areas and operator levels and their relationship in a graphical tree The tree organizes information into logical or geographical groups and is created as you program the access control system Six tree structures for Device Map Control Map Control Area Access Area Map Operator Level and Tracking Area Map are available in WIN PAK The tree structure for Device Map is defined as and when devices are defined The remaining tree structures define the hierarchy or relationship between the resources The status of the resources are indicated by Red and Green in the tree structure Example In an access area you can add entrances such as doors and readers to the tree structure e Choose Configuration gt Define gt Access Areas The Access Area window appears atl Access Area IOl x E J Access Area oa Honeywell E ns Reader 1 E ns Reader 2 Show Available Devices e To expand the tree click the plus sign to the left of the folder The branches corresponding to the selected folder are shown e To display only the top level information collapse an opened tree by clicking the minus sign to the left of a folder WIN PAK User s Guide 3 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface WIN PAK Help e The following colors indicate the access status of the entrances Entrances
605. the operators 5 To filter the devices on which the actions are performed a Click the Devices tab b Under Devices select or clear the devices to be included or excluded By default all the devices are selected Tip Click Select All to select all the devices or click Deselect All to clear all the devices 6 To sort the report based on report columns a Click the Sort Order tab b Under Sort Field in First Sort select the field in the list by which the report must be sorted c In the adjacent list select the sort order Ascending or Descending d Repeat steps b and c for defining Second Sort Third Sort and Fourth Sort Note To define the n 1 sort you must have defined n sort For example to define Third Sort you must have defined Second Sort 7 To set the default filter criteria click Default Filters 8 Click Run Report to generate the report The Operator Actions Report window is displayed in a separate window WIN PAK User s Guide 17 54 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report oix amp Pit D d 0O B a afo z ANA D gt Back Forward 26 2 W Operator Actions Report Date and Time erator Action Devices Mar13 2006 11 56 43 Admin Operator logged In Mar 13 2006 11 58 33 Admin Operator logged Out Mar 13 2006 12 24 23 Admin Operator logged In Mar13 2006 12 41 44 Admin Operator logged Out Mar13 2006 15 33 11 Admin Operator logged In Mar 13
606. the report for the range of operators When you select this option the From and To fields are enabled To specify the range enter the first operator name in From and the last operator name in To You can use the ellipsis button to find an operator 3 To sort the list in the report in the ascending or descending order a Click the Sort tab WIN PAK User s Guide 17 52 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report b Under Sort Order select the field by which the list in the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in chronological order or reverse order 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Operator Actions Report The Operator Actions report is an Audit Report for the Administrator to monitor the actions performed by the operator using WIN PAK User Interface This report can be generated based on the operator levels devices and operator actions To generate an operator actions report 1 In the Reports window select the Operator Actions report and click Report Options The Operator Actions Report dialog box appears 2 To filter the operator actions based on the date and time range a Click the Date and Time tab eal Operator Action s Repor E X Date and Time Operator Actions Operators Devices Sort
607. the spectrum and returning to red Saturation Strength of the color It indicates the amount of gray in the color Saturation values range from 0 gray with no trace of color through 240 fully saturated color with no gray Luminosity Luminosity is the relative brightness or darkness of the color Luminosity values range from 0 black through 240 white with the un tinted color at about 120 Red The RGB model is based on the representation of the visible Crean spectrum by mixing red green and blue light Computer Blue monitors are based on this model creating colors by emitting light through red green and blue phosphors The RGB model assigns a value for each pixel ranging from 0 black to 255 white for each color component The red on the Basic color palette has a Red value of 255 a Green value of 0 and a Blue value of 6 WIN PAK User s Guide 7 16 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Table 7 4 Color Settings Color Solid The color swatch shows the color as it appears on the monitor and also its approximate appearance when printed 6 Click OK The new custom color appears in the Background Color box of the Badge Element Layout dialog box 7 Click Apply to apply the custom color to the badge background or click OK to apply the background color to the badge and to exit from the Badge Element Layout dialog box Note Due to differences in monitors printers and the type of print media t
608. ting up Badge Printers WIN PAK User s Guide Overview WIN PAK PRO is compatible with many printers Any printer that is supported by the Windows operating system can be used for printing badges However for two sided PVC printing or magnetic stripe encoding a Datacard IC III series or the Ultra Magicard Turbo series printer is required In addition Windows compatible laser or other color printers can be used to print badges on paper 7 30 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Badge Layout Introduction Note Install your printer s using the Windows Control Panel Refer Microsoft B documentation for more information Configuring Badge Printers 1 Choose Configuration gt Badge gt Configure Badge Printer The Badge Printer Setup dialog box appears with the list of printers configured in your computer Badge Printer Setup Ea Printer Hame Printer Type E eneric Badge Printer T Magnetic Stripe Orientation i Portrait Landscape Encode klag Stine C in Print Both Sides gt Encode Only Page Size C 310 0 s 297 0 f eas OF i mm E men 2 Select the printer required for badge printing in the Printer Name list 3 Select the Printer Type 4 Under Magnetic Stripe select the Encode Mag Stripe check box if you want to encode magnetic stripe information 5 Select Encode Only if you want to only encode the magnetic stripe information and not print it 6 Under Orientation click Po
609. tion Energize SIO Board 1 Port 3 SIO 31 16 Zone Input Output Action Point South Building PRO 2200 0p 5 Add Edit Delete Show System Definitions mea WIN PAK User s Guide 11 136 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration P Senes Triggers Procedure Definition Procedure Name Fes Buttord Action List Add Edit Delete Caneel 2 Enter a Procedure Name This name is unique and descriptive for easy reference 3 To define a new action for the procedure click Add at the bottom of the Action List box The Action Definition dialog box appears P Senes Triggers Action Definition Action Name Acton Target Type Lock Door Do Output Action Select Output S10 Select Output Device Board 1 Port 3 S10 31 16 Zone Input South Building PRO 2200 Op 5 Select Output Action Energize Cancel 4 Type an Action Name 5 In the Action Target Type list select the target of the action Reader Output Input Delay The remaining fields in the dialog box are activated based on the selected action target type 6 Ifyou select Do Output Action as an Action Target Type perform the following steps a In the Select Output SIO list select the SIO board on which the output action must occur b In the Select Output Device list select a point on which the output action must occur c In the Select Output Action list select an action to be performe
610. tion date and click OK to return to the Card Record dialog box 3 Click Clear to clear the activation date 4 To define or change the expiration date the date on which the card access 1s expired click Change under Expiration Date The Select Expiration Date calender appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 31 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information 5 Select the expiry date and click OK to return to the Card Record dialog box 6 Click Apply to save the card properties Assigning a badge to a card 1 In the Card dialog box click the Badge tab 2 Select the badge design in the Front Side list for the front side design of the card The preview is displayed at the preview area 3 Select the badge design in the Back Side list for the back side design of the card The preview is displayed at the preview area Card Record X Card Properties Badge Front Side Back Side Standard Card r CardBack Please Retum to My Company Inc 5007 South Street Anytown AnyState 12345 Attn Julie Karlson Mail Station Print Status Printed z Cancel 4 After printing the card the Print Status automatically changes to Printed However you are provided with an option to change the print status 5 Click OK to save the card details Editing a Card To edit a card 1 Choose Card gt Card or click in the toolbar The Card window appears 2 S
611. tion when an AEP 5 board is used The Cnt Count column on the Alarm View window shows the number of state changes in a point After the message is acknowledged the new messages of Normal state are displayed in green The Details check box enables you to open the Alarm Details dialog box In the Alarm Details dialog box you can view the details of the state changes indicated by Cnt Count and write a note for an alarm in Operator Messages Wi g Note If you have procured the license for the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel the A alarms triggered on the Galaxy panel and or Vista panel devices are displayed in the Alarm View window Opening an Alarm View Window The Alarm View window automatically opens when an alarm is triggered at a reader door input point or output point You can also manually open the Alarm View window To open the Alarm View window 1 Choose Operations gt Alarms The Alarm View window appears WIN PAK User s Guide 15 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Monitoring Actions Alarm View fe Alarm View i j l Priorit Date Time Crt Status Reader Point Filter T Details Silence 0n Control Control C Alarm C Card Read Both Bi H EGK Clear Selection None ESA Close The details of an alarm is displayed in the Alarm View window such as date and time alarm status the reader or point from where the alarm is raised and so on The Cnt Count column on the Alarm View win
612. toring Actions Event View Filtering Event Views The WIN PAK system is provided with an option to filter the events that must be displayed in the Event View window These filter selections are cleared after you close the Event View window To filter the events 1 Click Operations gt Events or click the View Events A icon on the tool bar The Event View window is displayed 2 Select one of the following options under On Filter On Control Alam Card Read Both Selection None e Alarm To display only alarms in the Event View window e Card Read To display only card read events in the Event View window e Both To display all alarm and card read events in the Event View window 3 To filter the events that occur in the specific areas and devices click Control under Filter The Filter Devices window appears Filter Devices Iols O E N1000Panen H OG N1000Panel Entrance H O G N1000Panelt Input S O N1000Fanel Output OE N1000Panel Out 1 OE N1000Pnelt Out 2 OE N1000Panelt Out 3 OES N1000Panell Gut 4 4 Expand the tree by clicking the plus symbol 5 Select a branch or an individual device to be filtered for monitoring 6 To filter a branch right click the branch and select Configure The Set Device Selection for a Control Area dialog box appears Set Device Selection for a Control Area X Leave Selection for all devices in this area as it currently is Select
613. tput point to interlock the input point with an input point or output point of the SIO Board In the Activate a Time Zone list select a time zone during which the interlock must be active Select the SIO Board in which you want the input or output point to be interlocked In the Point list select the interlocking input point output point or reader of the selected SIO Board In the Alarm Action for an input point or On Action list select an action to be taken when the interlocked point raises an alarm Alert state or becomes active The actions include e No Action Take no action e Energize Turn the point on e De Energize Turn the point off e Pulse On Energize the point for a particular period e Pulse Off De energize the point for a particular period In the Normal Action for input point or Off Action list select an action to be taken when the interlocked point becomes Normal state or becomes inactive 11 132 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Door Interlocks Door Interlocks show input and output relationships available for the reader Two types of locking devices can be configured with WIN PAK PE e Magnetic Locks which require power for the door to be closed e Door Strikes which require power for the door to be opened To configure door interlock 1 In the SIO Board Configuration dialog box click the Reader tab 2 Click Door Interlocks to display the Door Interl
614. tput points to the panel using the extendable boards The available hardware options vary depending on the type of panel selected The AEP 5 supervised input board and ERB Expanded Relay Board are only used with PW 2000 II panels If the Groups option is selected in this dialog box you can select one or two AEP 3 Output Expansion Boards Each board adds eight output relays to a panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 87 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration To set the panel options 1 In the Panel Configuration Options dialog box select the Anti passback i WIN PAK User s Guide check box to ensure that the card holders present the cards while entering and exiting a building Panel Configuration Options l xj Site Codes Edit All readers use the zame group Groups Isolate Delete Keypads Time one for PIN z W Continuous Card Reads W Reverse Read LEDs M Split Time Zone Hardware Options L JAEP 5 Supervised Inputs JERE Additional Outputs Command File None E Advanced Initialization Command BM 0 Host Grant Open Door and Update Panel lt Back Cancel Help Select the Groups check box to create output relay groups Select the All readers use the same group check box to pulse the group when a valid card is presented on any reader to pulse the group Select the Keypads check box if matrix style 11 wire keypads
615. trol devices in the control area through Control Map e Databases To configure Card Holder Cards Floor Plan and so on e Floor Plans To open the floor plans e Reports To run the reports e User Interfaces To configure and operate on the WIN PAK User Interface Note Before you define the operator levels ensure that you have defined the control areas for defining privileges for the areas in the Operator Level window i Adding an Operator Level To add an operator level 1 Choose System gt Operator Level The Operator Level window appears x Operator Level De Bor i Sample B BC Operator Level Tree oe Command Files 568 Control 4rea l Ho Quick Start Control Area 0 gp CommandFile Ol COMSERVER e E COMSERVER 2 Guard Tour abii Track amp Muster 8 FA Databases 8 E Floor Plans Hoy Reports Ee a User Interfaces Add Edit Copy Delete Isolate 2 Click Add to add a new operator level The Operator Level dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 5 8 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Operators Operator Level x Mame Second Shift Guard Description a an Cancel 3 Type the Name for the operator level This field is mandatory 4 Type the Description for the operator level 5 Click OK to save and return to the Operator Level window Configuring Operator Levels You can configure the access rights to an operator level for the control area devi
616. troller is ready to send information The RTS Mode defaults to Always On The Toggle RTS Mode applies when there 1s an RS 485 to RS 232 converter that requires a handshake The RS 485 converter needs to know when it is sending and when it is receiving Toggle enables you to control the direction on an external converter The converter specified by Honeywell Access Systems has handshaking turned off and therefore do not set the RTS Mode to Toggle 8 Click Next to display the Loop P Series Configuration Finish dialog box 9 Click Finish to add a P Series panel loop WIN PAK User s Guide 11 54 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Communication Loops Editing a P Series Panel Loop To edit a P series panel loop 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the Devices folder 3 Right click the P series loop and click Configure The Loop P Series Configuration dialog box appears Loop P Series Configuration 7 X Basic Information Fort Settings A Add Edit eee Mame Description ma solate Delete Show Cancel Apply Help 4 Configure the loop using the Basic Information and Port Settings tabs Refer to the Adding a P Series Panel Loop section in this chapter for configuring P series panel loop 5 Click OK to configure the loop Isolating and Deleting a P Series Panel Loop You cannot delete a P Series
617. ts on it to meet your specific needs The badge holder s photo name card number and other pertinent information can be included on the badge A bar code can be added to the badge for system applications ranging from access control and payroll to resource checkout Bitmaps such as logos can be added and colors can be applied to the items The following are the types of items that can be placed on a badge outline and their corresponding toolbar icons A Text Bitmap El Photo MIN Bar code azl Shape PA Signature Placing a Text element To place a text element on a badge draw a text box and then type the text and or add card holder note fields When you assign the badge to a card holder the cardholder s data is automatically fill in the text e To add a text block on the badge outline a Click on the toolbar b Click and drag the mouse pointer on the badge outline to place the text The text box is now placed on the badge outline e To add fields to the text area a Right click on the text block and click Properties b Click the Text Block tab Badge Element Layout E Text Block Colors Positioning Texk Fields Card Humber lssue Name Last Name Font W Size font to box Cancel Apoly Help c Double click the field that must appear in the text box in the Fields list The field is now placed under Text d Type the field name within the parenthesis under Text WIN
618. turn to the AutoCard Lookup Waiting for Card Read window When a card from the filtered area and device is presented to the reader the card information is displayed ka Watson Shelly 3 00 PM 4 1 2005 Priority 30627 H1000FPanell Reader 2 485Loops account Valid Card A valid card has been used Control ert l Show Note Fields T Butter E 7 Select the Buffer check box to freeze the current card information on the lookup screen while saving any subsequent card reads in the panel memory 8 Click Next to display the next card read results while remaining in the buffer mode Note The Next button is enabled only when you have the sequence card reads in the panel memory T 9 Clear the Buffer check box to remove all stored information and continue with the next card presented 10 Click the Show Note Fields check box to display the additional information of the card holder defined in the note fields Refer to the Configuring Autocard Lookup section in the chapter Card Holders for enabling note fields to be displayed in the Autocard Lookup window Note Multiple lookup windows can be opened at the same time and each can have its own filter selections Document 7 001009 Revision 01 15 15 WIN PAK User s Guide Monitoring Actions Live Monitor View Live Monitor View Opening a The Live Monitor view displays information from a selected CCTV camera in real time You can adjust the vid
619. uage the The menu text in the translated language language selected for translation is displayed as the column name 2 Double click the menu item that must be translated from the list or right click the menu item and then click Edit The Translate Text dialog box appears Note To search for the menu item in a scrolling list Te a Type a part or the whole text in the Search box b Select the Match Case check box to match case while searching c Select the Show only untranslated items check box to search only for menu items that are not translated Document 7 001009 Revision 01 16 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Translation Language Configuration 3 2 4 2 5 WIN PAK User s Guide d Click Find The first instance of the menu item is highlighted in the list Clicking Find repeatedly highlights the remaining instances of the text in the list Translate Text i x Original text amp Timed Pulse Translation Notes V Apply to all identical originals Cancel The current menu caption is displayed under Original text Type the translated caption for the menu under Translation Note Use the amp symbol in the menu caption to indicate that the character immediately following the amp must appear with an underscore and can be used as a hot key accessed by pressing ALT Key entry Select the Apply to all identical originals check box to apply the translation for all in
620. ue for the note field You can use the ellipsis button to find the access level d To filter the report for a specific period under Date Range click the ellipsis El button next to the From or To fields and select the date in the calendar e To specify the time range enter the time in hours and minutes for the From and To fields 3 To sort the attendance report a Click the Sort tab b Under Sort Order 1 select the field by which the report must be sorted c Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field d Under Sort Order 2 select the field by which the report must be sorted in the second level WIN PAK User s Guide 17 18 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Reports Generating and Printing a Report e Click Ascending or Descending to sort the list in the ascending or descending order of the selected field 4 Click Print Preview to view the report prior to printing it 5 Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer 6 Click Close to return to the Reports window Card Report The Card Report is generated based on the selected account or on the all the accounts that are available for the operator This report enables you to obtain the details of card holders holding a card the card status and access level To generate the attendance report 1 In the Reports window select the Card report and click Report Options The Report Card dia
621. uide 16 6 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Translation Language Configuration Table 16 1 Edit Dialog Text Elements and Descriptions Dialog Caption The caption of the dialog box The total number of fields in the dialog box The number of fields that has been translated in the dialog box Out of Date The number of fields that were translated in this dialog box in the previous version of WIN PAK applies only to a WIN PAK upgrade ID The dialog ID used in the application resource file 2 Select a dialog caption from the Dialog Caption list and click Edit The dialog box of the selected dialog caption appears Configuration boucle 485 PCI Param trages HUB l X Retard de connexion E SEC Nombre de tentatives de rappel jo f Temps d attente pour d connexion jo ZEC Tempornzation avant nouvelle tentative jo ZEC Commande initialization modem Prefixe appel Option rappel Parametrer nouveau mat de passe 3 Click the field you want to edit The field name is highlighted Note To change the title of the dialog box click the title and edit the dialog B box Configuration boucle 485 PCI Param trages HUB Retard de connexion bpo o ZEC Nombre de tentatiwes de rappel bpo o Temps d attente pour d connexion jo 6C Temporigation avant nouvelle tentative jo ZEC Commande initialisation modem Prefixe appel Option rappel Faram
622. ulated time Alarms can be set for the following four states of a Sequenced checkpoint Early Arrival Late Arrival Missed and Out of Sequence Alarms can be set only for the Checked state of Unsequenced check points Check point alarms are defined in the following manner a An action group is associated to a sequenced or unsequenced check point b Priority for triggering off an event or an alarm is specified for each action in the action group Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 7 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Configuring Guard Tours c The Command files to be executed for each action are selected To set check point alarms 1 In the Guard Tour Record dialog box click the Sequenced Check Point or the Unsequenced Check Point tab 2 Click Update under Alarms The Abstract Device Record dialog box appears ADW Name Description Default Floor Plan Guard Tour Sequenced z Add Rename Delete Action Early Arrival hal Friority 20 Send Email L Time Zone Nowe s sis Write to History fy Print on alarm printer 7 Command File on Receive Acknowledge Clear Sound File Digital Video Camera None Alarm Detail View Message i Guard arrived early at the designated check point reader Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in the Device Map chapter for details on configuring action groups 3 Click OK to sav
623. unication server The Abstract Device Record Server dialog box appears Refer to the Configuring an Abstract Device section in this chapter for more details on ADV configuration Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 5 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Server Configuration oe After adding an ADV click OK to return to the Com Server Configuration dialog box Notes e Under ADV use the Edit Isolate and Delete buttons to edit isolate and delete the ADV e Select the Show check box to view the ADV details Enter the Machine Name for the communication server By default it is the name of the local computer Tip To find the machine name a Right click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears b Click the Computer Name tab The machine name is displayed in the Full computer name field c Note down the machine name and click OK Type a Protocol end point number that is not used by any other application or service on that computer Note Each server must have a unique Protocol end point that can range from 1024 to 9999 The default number of Protocol end point need not be changed However you can change the number if any other application uses the same port number Enter a value for the Alarm Priority for notification An action with lower priority than this value is displayed as an event in the Event view Note Ensure that this numb
624. ure Free Egress dialog box appears we Fo G na r i Sec C Min C H Shunt Time jo Debounce Time lo Sec Egress Input Set Defaults Cancel b Select the Egress Input from the list WIN PAK User s Guide 11 110 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration c Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Shunt Time Shunt time is the duration allowed for the door kept unlocked If the door remains in the unlocked state even after the shunt time the alarm is raised d Enter the Debounce Time in seconds Debounce time is the duration allowed after shunt time for the door to remain in the unlock status If the door remains in the unlocked state even after the debounce time the alarm is raised This duration is meant for the doors that swing often due to wind e Click OK to save the settings or click Set Defaults to retain the default settings 12 To change the output pulsed on a valid card read a Click Direct Point in the graphical form The Configure Direct Point dialog box appears Configure Direct Point x ee Oo oF Direct Point jours f Sec C Min C H Pulse Time jo Set Defaults Cancel b Select I or O to indicate Input Point or Output Point The corresponding points are enabled in Direct Point c Select the Direct Point from the list d Select Sec Min or Hr and change the Pulse Time e Click OK to save the settings or click Set Defaults to retain the defau
625. ure frame is highlighted 3 To import an existing signature file a Click Import The Open dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 8 24 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Open zjx Lookin Userimaes O H lee e File name Files of type Signature sig v Cancel b Select the signature file sig or emp file and click Open The signature is displayed in the preview area OR To capture the signature click Capture The Enter Signature dialog box is displayed Signature Width Seni C Bold Cancel _ Thick Clear Signature Note Ensure that a digital writing pad is connected to the system before capturing the signature oe a Select the Signature Width as Thin Bold Thick b Click OK to close the dialog box and display the signature on the Card Biometrics tab 4 To delete the signature click Delete To capture additional card holder signatures Follow the same procedure of capturing card holder signature e Change or increase the Index number Caution If you capture a different image with the same index number the new A N signature replaces the existing signature Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 25 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information Adding a new card and attaching it to a card holder The Card Biometrics tab enables you to add a new card with basic details like card
626. ure that the card belongs to the facility where the card is used for gaining access The site code is encoded with a card number on cards To configure the panel options for the NS2 panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Options dialog box select the following options xi Site Codes W Global Ant Passback Forgiveness 0 Edit Isolate Delete T Keypads I Continuous Card Reads W Reverse Read LEDs M Split Time Zone Command File None x Advanced Initialization Command BMAIZO Hast Grant Open Door and Update Panel Back Next gt Cancel Help 1 Select the Global Anti passback check box to ensure that the card holders present the cards while entering and exiting a building When you select this option the anti passback is globally implemented 2 Select the Forgiveness check box to allow the door to open but to report the anti passback violation This check box is enabled only if Global Anti passback is selected 3 Select the Keypads check box if matrix style 11 wire keypads are used in the panel If you are using Wiegand style 5 wire keypads the keypad is treated as a reader and this option must be cleared 4 Select the Continuous Card Reads check box to allow card readers to read cards continuously independent of output pulse time 5 Select the Reverse Read LEDs check box to reverse the standard LED operation of the reader If this check box is selected a reader that
627. uring the P Series panel Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 143 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration Adding a Galaxy Panel T WIN PAK User s Guide WIN PAK monitors and controls the Galaxy panel through the Galaxy panel you add to the Galaxy Ethernet module When you add a Galaxy panel to WIN PAK the Galaxy panel configuration details are downloaded to WIN PAK Note While downloading configuration details from the panel ensure that the connection between the panel and WIN PAK is established When you download Galaxy panel configuration details to WIN PAK the abstract devices for groups zones outputs RIO boards are automatically created However you can change the ADV configuration details in the WIN PAK system To add a Galaxy panel 1 Choose Configuration gt Device gt Device Map The Device window appears 2 Expand the communication server 3 Right click the Ethernet Module Galaxy Single Panel and select Add New Galaxy Panel The WIN PAK system starts communicating with the Galaxy panel to establish the connection and download configuration details to WIN PAK Communicating with Galaxy i X Checking Password TTT 4 After the panel configuration details are downloaded the Panel Configuration Basic dialog box appears Enter the basic details of the panel such as Name and Description Entering basic details 1 In the Panel Configuration Basic dialog box type a Name an
628. vailable options are Disable the reader Unlock Locked and Facility code only 42 To associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to this reader click Groups Partitions and select the groups from the list Note To dissociate the galaxy group or vista partition from the reader select the galaxy group or vista partition and click Delete Grps Partitions T Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 131 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 43 To associate galaxy groups or vista partitions to the input point select the input T point from the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list Note Only the input points that are configured in this panel and not interlocked are listed in the Input to Set Arm Galaxy Grps Partitions list 44 Click OK to configure the SIO Board 45 Click Next to configure triggers and procedures Refer to the Configuring triggers and procedures section in this chapter for details on triggers and procedures Interlocking Points on SIO Board Interlocking enables you to interlock an input or output point within the SIO Board points or across other SIO Board points To interlock an input or output point l 2 3 9 WIN PAK User s Guide In the SIO Board Configuration dialog box click the Inputs or Outputs tab Select an Input point or Output point Select the Interlocking check box to activate the interlocking for a particular input point Select I input point or O ou
629. vice Map for more details on triggers and controls Defining a custom access level 1 In the Card Properties tab next to Custom Access Level click Add if you are defining newly or Edit if you have defined already The Custom Access Level dialog box appears Note The Custom Access level is disabled if you select the Access Level as None we 2 Right click and select configure area access or double click the area where you want to provide access The Configure Entrance Access or Configure Area Access dialog box appears based on the selected area Entrance or Area 3 For one entrance select one of the following Configure Entrance Access x C Remove Access from this entrance Set Access for this entrance Time Zone 12 00am 8 00am M F 12 00am 8 00am Monday Friday excl he Customize aroup for this panel Group E Cancel e Remove Access from all entrances in this area to deny access through this entrance for this access level Document 7 001009 Revision 01 8 29 WIN PAK User s Guide Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information e Set Access for all entrances in this area to allow access through this entrance for a particular time zone Select the time zone in the Time Zone list to determine periods of access For group entrance select one of the following Configure Area Access i x Leave Access for all entrances in this area as it currently is Remov
630. vious and Next buttons to move to the rest of the badges associated to the card and click Print T Attaching a photo or badge to a card holder To attach a photo 1 In the Card Holder dialog box click the Card Biometrics tab 2 In the Frame Selected list select Photo to attach a photo or badge to the card holder The Photo frame is highlighted 3 Under Badge Layout click Photo to attach a photo 4 To import an image file for the photo a Click Import The Import Image dialog box appears Import Image OF Ed Oo Cancel Soe Open T Lock Aspect Aspect Ratio 1 2 Compression 30 M Whole Image b Click Open and browse through the required folder c Select the image file and click Open The selected photo appears in the display area WIN PAK User s Guide 8 20 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Card Holders Configuring Card and Card Holder Information d Select the Whole Image check box to import the photo without cropping e To crop the photo clear the Whole Image check box The cropping tool appears on the photo Import Image i xj g Jool OF ok Cancel se Open T Lock Aspect Aspect Ratio fi 0128205126 Compression 30 l Whole Image f To increase the grid size click the corners of the grid and drag it to the required size g To maintain the consistent height and width enter the Aspect Ratio value h To maintain the same ratio of height and w
631. w Grant view rights to all tems Change and Grant change rights to all Databases grant operate Operate rights to all Controls and User Interfaces Masinum Grant delete nights to all Databases grant operate rights to all Controls and User Interfaces Cancel 2 Select the appropriate rights configuration for the Operator Level and click OK Configuring rights for an individual device To configure access rights at a device level 1 In the Operator Level window expand the branch and select a device 2 Right click the device and select Configure The Configure Rights dialog box appears Configure Rights Fa None View Cancel Operate 3 Select the appropriate rights configuration and click OK Configuring rights for databases To configure rights for databases 1 In the Operator Level window expand the Databases branch and select a branch database or an individual database 2 Right click the database and select Configure The Configure Rights Database dialog box appears for a branch database and the Configure Rights to Database dialog box appears for an individual database WIN PAK User s Guide 5 10 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 System Settings Operators C Same Leave all rights as they are of Megs None Remove all rights from all fields r ia View Grant View rights to all fields amp Cheat Cancel Change Grant Change rights to all fields neee Delete Grant Delete rights for the Database
632. when heavy traffic prevents immediate transmission of all events Select the OD Duress Option check box to activate the pulse action for the output defined in the Outputs for Duress when the PIN is used one value low or high in case of emergencies like threatening When configured with firmware later than 8 03 two outputs can be selected This is only available with the PW 2000 with firmware 8 03 version In the Initialization Command box the command string that is sent to the panel at initialization is displayed In the Number of cards for U option box enter the number of cards for the panel This option is enabled only if the U option is selected In the Outputs for duress OD Option box enter the value for Outputs for duress This option is enabled only if the OD option is selected Click OK to configure the advanced options Note The Advanced Options are available depending on the PW 2000 series panel and the version of firmware that is used 14 Click Next to configure the Input points to the panel WIN PAK User s Guide 11 90 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Device Map Panel Configuration Configuring input points to the panel To configure input points to the panel 1 In the Panel Configuration Inputs dialog box select an input point check box under Name The other settings in the dialog box are available only for the selected input point Panel Configuration Inputs X ADY Add Edit Is
633. writes files to your hard drive as part of licensing Do NOT move or damage these license files as it invalidate the license Note Honeywell recommends you to obtain a WIN PAK hardware key WP2KEY for multi drive RAID configuration computers This avoids the licensing problems if one of the drives needs to be replaced De fragmenting Disk Drive Any sort of moving or damaging license files may invalidate your license De fragmentation is one of the actions that relocates the files Caution Do not use Microsoft Disk Defragmenter for de fragmenting Norton Speed Disk is used for de fragmenting a hard drive so that it may be used more efficiently In doing so certain disk files may be physically moved This may invalidate your license However if you de fragment using Speed Disk after enabling the following options the license file remains valid 1 Open Norton Speed Disk select Options Customize and select Unmovable Files from the File menu 2 Enter the ent key and rst files under Unmovable Files 3 Choose Files gt Options gt Optimization gt Save to save the new profile 4 Run the Speed Disk Document 7 001009 Revision 01 2 21 WIN PAK User s Guide Installation Licensing and Registration WIN PAK User s Guide 2 22 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 User Interface In this chapter Introduction 3 2 WIN PAK User Interface Elements 3 2 WIN PAK Help 3 13 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 3 1 WIN PAK
634. ws Firewall i turned off our computer is at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as the Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services Name Acrobat Reader 5 0 O File and Frinter Sharing HCICore Remote Assistance CI Remote Desktop O UPnP Framework Windows Explorer Add Program Add Fort Display a notification when Window Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions 5 Click the NCICore check box to unblock the WIN PAK Database Server Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall i turned off your computer is at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as the Internet Wie recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services Name HClArchive NCiCore Remote Assistance COI Remote Desktop O UPnP Framework O windows Explorer WP Communications Server WP GuardT our Service WP Muster Service WP Schedule Service Ld Add Program Add Fort Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions 6 Click OK to save the exceptions for Windows Firewall j Note Restart all the services AN A Document 7 001009 Revision 01 4 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Getting Started Remote Client Server Configuration Disabling Firewall in Windows 2003 Server The Windows Firewall mus
635. y 29 Bypass Zone 30 Disarm 29 Galaxy Group 28 Galaxy Keypad 29 Galaxy MAX 29 Galaxy Output 29 Galaxy Panel 28 Galaxy RIOs 29 Galaxy Zone 28 Panel Reset 29 Set All Groups 28 Unbypass Zone 30 Vista Output 30 Vista Panel 29 Vista Partition 29 Vista Zone 30 U Unbuffer Command 8 Unsequenced check point 2 Unsequenced check points 6 Upgrades 5 Upgrading WIN PAK 19 backup copies 19 User Interface 1 3 Elements 2 Introduction 2 19 11 WIN PAK User s Guide Menu Bar 5 Z Pop up menus 6 Status Bar 6 Sub menus 6 Zoom factor 9 ToolBar 4 y Variable Length 19 25 Video Capture Card 3 Visitor 41 Visitor Management 41 access cards 41 Integrating 41 Vista Panel Port 80 Zones 80 W Watchdog Timer 4 WIN PAK Architecture 2 WIN PAK Client 3 User Interface 3 WIN PAK Help 13 WIN PAK PRO Central Station Users 5 WIN PAK Servers 2 Communication Server 2 Database Server 2 WIN PAK Services 14 Logging Off 16 Logging On 15 WIN PAK User Information 13 WIN PAK Users 2 WIN PAK Windows 3 WorkGroup Environment 10 Workstation Defaults 20 alarm printers 22 Restore options 26 sound and language files 24 sound settings 23 wallpaper 25 WIN PAK User s Guide 19 12 Document 7 001009 Revision B Honeywell Access Systems 135 West Forest Hill Avenue Oak Creek WI 53154 414 766 1700 Ph 414 766 1798 Fax www honeywellaccess com NexWatch Europe Boblingerstrasse 17 71101 Schonaich Germany Tel 49 7031637784 Fax
636. you to retain the default settings Setting RPC Endpoints To set the database server and database archive server RPC endpoints 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt WIN PAK System Manager The System Manager window appears System Manager X Scheduler Server Guard Tour Server RFC Security Options Communication Server Muster Server Command File Server User Interace Database Server Database Archive Server Install LPC Name RPE Endpoint Database Server n555 Remove DSN Name LE WIN PAK Database Stop User Name Password dq Cancel Apply Help WIN PAK User s Guide 4 12 Document 7 001009 Revision 01 Getting Started System Manager 2 Click the Database Server tab 3 Type the RPC Endpoint value This is the same as TCP IP port address which is 5555 Note Do NOT change this number unless you have another service using TCP IP port address 5555 4 Click the Database Archive Server tab 5 Type the RPC Endpoint value This is the same as TCP IP port address which is 5556 i 5 Note Do NOT change this number unless you have another service using B TCP IP port address 5556 6 Click OK to save the changes Setting User Interface Workstation Ensure that you quit the WIN PAK User Interface before setting the User Interface workstation To set the user interface workstation 1 Choose Start gt Programs gt Honeywell Access Systems gt WIN PAK
637. ypad Mode LED Drive Mode and Card Format Flags default to pre defined settings However if you want to set the reader settings select Custom in the list T 32 If Custom is selected as the reader type select a Keypad Mode This keypad mode includes the following e MR 20 8 bit with or without tamper support which represents a Mercury Magstripe reader with keypad attached e Hughes ID 4 bit e Motorola Indala which sends an 8 bit key code 33 Select the LED Drive Mode for the reader The default is Generic 1 wire tri state bi color Alternatively you can select Separate red and green no buzzer dependent on the physical reader Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 129 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Panel Configuration 34 Select the Card Format Flags which represent how the reader must interpret the access card to be used 35 Select the Access Configuration option to define the reader access in a door e Single controlling the door The door is defined by only one reader e Paired primary reader The door is defined by two readers in which this reader becomes a primary reader e Paired secondary reader The door is defined by two readers in which this reader becomes a secondary reader Selecting this option disables the Door Interlocks button 36 Under Pair Reader select the SIO Board and the corresponding reader which pairs with this for defining a door Pair Reader is enabled only if you define a door by two read
638. zed The group of relays is not energized Energized The group of relays is energized Table 11 21 Describing Guard Tour Sequenced Group Actions Action Message Description Early Arrival The guard arrived early at the designated check point reader Late Arrival The guard arrived late at the designated check point reader Document 7 001009 Revision 01 11 173 WIN PAK User s Guide Device Map Action Group Table 11 21 Describing Guard Tour Sequenced Group Actions Action Message Description Missed The guard missed the designated check point reader Out of Sequence The guard is out of sequence Table 11 22 Describing Guard Tour Server Group Actions Action Message Description Server OK The Guard Tour server is working properly Server Trouble The Guard Tour server is NOT working properly Verify that WIN PAK Guard Tour Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Table 11 23 Describing Guard Tour Unsequenced Actions Action Message Description Checked The guard has checked the required input reader Table 11 24 Describing Input Alarm Point Input Supervised Actions Action Message Description Input Active The input is in the alarm state Input Normal The input is in the normal state Input Trouble The status can not be accurately displayed due to tampering Note This action is in
639. zeguenced AemoteN1000F 00 01 Time 3 Select the guard tour to be started and click OK The Select window appears Document 7 001009 Revision 01 14 9 WIN PAK User s Guide Guard Tour Running Guard Tours Select Fa Find Key Card Number Find what o Card Number 306045 30610 30611 30612 30614 30615 r 4 F OF Cancel 4 Select the card that is being used to validate the reader check points a In the Find Key list select Card Number to search for cards based on card numbers or select Description to search for cards based on the card description b In the Find What list enter all or a part of the card number or description c Click Find The cards matching the search criteria are retrieved in the list d Select a card number from the list and click OK to associate the card to the guard tour and to close the Select dialog box Note Cards need not be added to a guard tour having only input points as its checkpoints Te The details of the selected guard tour are displayed in the Guard Tour window iol Nest Check Point Last Check Point Time Left for Nest Check Total To GTI th w HS Reader 1 00 02 Record View Visible 5 Select a guard tour and select the Record View Visible check box to view the sequenced and unsequenced checkpoints for the guard tour The Guard Tour Check Points dialog box appears WIN PAK User s Guide 14 10

WIN-PAK SE/PE User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents